Home

Cod. vec671 r3

1. Lf Use screws M6 30 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Installation Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 5 Electrical I nstallation This chapter describes the electrical installation of the Agile series 5 1 Safety The electrical installation must be carried out by qualified electricians according to the general and regional safety and installation directives The documentation and device specification must be complied with during installation Before any assembly or connection work discharge the frequency inverter Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged A Do not touch the terminals because the capacitors may still be charged Only connect suitable voltage sources The nominal voltage of the frequency inverter must correspond to the supply voltage The frequency inverter must be connected to ground potential If voltage supply is switched on no covers of the frequency inverter may be removed The connecting cables must be protected externally considering the maximum voltage and current values of the fuses The mains fuses and cable cross sections are to be selected according to EN 60204 1 and DIN VDE 0298 Part 4 for the nominal operating point of the frequency inverter Ac cording to UL CSA th
2. Use screws M6 28 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Installation Mechanical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 4 2 2 Size 2 3 3 0 KW to 5 5 kW 1 1 5 kW to 2 2 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 152 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 19 2 5 5 amp Dimensions 196 138 220 3 Assembly 0 ae en Use screws M6 29 Installation 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfiglioli Mechanical Installation 4 2 3 Size 3 5 5 kW to 11 0 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 193 3 0 5 5 5 5 21 3 3 0 7 5 7 5 22 3 9 2 23 3 11 Dimensions 125 250 205 HABA ERBARaA 220 3
3. N 308 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants Options vw Bonfiglioli 12 9 1 Feed through assembly This assembly set is not included in delivery The feed through assembly facilitates the thermal separation The heat sink of the frequency inverter can be fed through the mounting plate The power dissipation can be passed on to an external cooling cycle 12 9 1 1 Cooling air flow rate required and energy dissipation The required cooling air flow rate and the device specific energy dissipation Pyof the heat sink are listed in the following table Additionally the thermal radiation energy dissipation interior of the frequency inverter is indicated Agile 202 402 Size Cooling air flow rate required mht e te if 30 30 Energy dissipation heat sink ea wf 12 19 29 42 53 70 89 122 2 kHz Energy dissipation interior 21 25 13 01 02 03 o5 07 09 11 1 Agile 402 15 18 19 19 21 22 23 Size 3 Energy dissipation heat sink 2 kHz Energy dissipation interior 470 Pamerin W 31 35 45 48 61 68 81 Separation of energy dissipation P er P Pa interior Energy dissipation interior p Pa Energy dissipation heat sink Mounting plate 2 Hea
4. No Description Unit Setting range Chapter 1510 Time until Keypad Standby Min o 60 8 3 1511 Standby Mode Selection 8 3 1520 Operation Mode Real Time Tuning Selection 7 9 6 1534 Operation Mode Service Interval i Selection 10 3 1 gt DC link 1535 Mode Service Interval i Selection 10 3 2 1539 Reset Service Intervals Selection 10 3 3 1540 Start device test manual Selection 7 2 3 4 1542 Start device test automatic Selection 7 2 3 5 Base Parameter Actual System _ 1543 Sealine 0 1600 7 10 9 Operation Mode Energy Saving _ f 1 50 02 Hon Selection 8 1 1551 Flux Reduction 0 100 8 1 1552 Energy Saving FunctionOn Selection 8 1 1 For maintenance work contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI The column chapter refers to the chapter number and or the corresponding document that contains a detailed parameter description CM Please refer to the manual of the used communication profile CM CAN Please refer to the CAN communication manual CM PDPV1 Please refer to the PROFIBUS communication manual CM 485 Please refer to the VABus communication manual CM Modbus Please refer to the Modbus communication manual Systembus Please refer to the Systembus communication manual Ethernet Please refer to the Ethernet communication manual i e Profinet VABus TCP Modbus TCP 353 Parameters Menu PARA 06 2013 Operati
5. SAVE Save parameter values in a file on the memory card e On the operator panel in menu Copy select item Save e Confirm by pressing ENT The number of the next available file is displayed e Confirm by pressing ENT The parameter values are copied to the file on the memory card A progress indicator indicates the parameter numbers the values of which are currently copied to the memory card Number of next Progress indicator available file X I rd I X i rEAdY Q COPY _ D ERd in SALE _ END EAd in 07185 PrEPAr P__370 7 N I N 7 I P_I J Vp aie Please note that always the highest existent number on the memory card is used to determine the next free data file number New Data file number Highest existent Data file number 1 If a file with number 9999 already exists the data set to be stored cannot be stored correctly Always take care that at least number 9999 is available before Saving LOAD Uploading parameter values from memory card to a frequency inverter e On the operator panel in menu Copy select item Load e Confirm by pressing ENT Using the arrow buttons select the file you want to upload to the frequency inverter e Confirm by pressing ENT The parameter values of the selected file are uploaded to the fre quency inverter A progress indicator indicates the parameter numbers the values of which are currently uploaded to th
6. f If a negative reference value is set the drive is accelerated by pressing the button V Limit The reference values are limited via parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519 Direction of rotation reversal If parameter Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is set to zero the direction of rotation of the drive can be reversed via the motorpoti function Note In order to be able to select menu Poti P on the operator panel Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 must be set to 5 Keypad Motorpot By default Reference Percentage Source 2 494 is set to 5 Keypad Motorpot Keypad motorpoti as reference value The function Keypad motorpoti can be selected via the following parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 See chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel If you leave menu Poti P the drive cannot be controlled via the operator panel and remains in the previous status For starting stopping and reversing the direction of rotation of the drive via the operator panel pa rameter Local Remote 412 must be set appropriately Selection 3 Control via Keypad or 4 Con trol via Keypad Cont The factory settings enable control via the operator panel and via digital in puts See chapter 7 3 1 Control Addition of reference values If the reference value of the motorpoti
7. 323 Assembly variants 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 4 DIN rail This assembly set is not included in delivery Size 1 can be assembled on a DIN rail 12 9 4 1 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 kW to 1 1 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 0 18 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 111 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 NY During the assembly a good contacting of the frequency inverter to the DIN rail must be assured A good PE connection of the frequency inverter to the assembly material and the DIN rail requires metallic conducting contact 324 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants Error protocol vw Bonfiglioli 13 Error protocol The various control methods and the hardware of the frequency inverter include functions which con tinuously monitor the application The operational and error diagnosis is facilitated by the information stored in the error protocol 13 1 Error list Last errors The last 16 fault messages are stored in chronological order and the No of errors 362 shows the number of errors which have occurred sin
8. For example analog desired set value at MFI 2A Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 2 Analog Value MFI2A Set terminal X12 4 as analog input Operation Mode MFI2 562 4 Digital PNP active 24 V Voltage input or current input See chapter 7 6 2 Multifunction input MFI2 1 MFI1A Multifunction input at terminal X12 3 2 MFI2A Multifunction input at terminal X12 4 220 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli For example The desired set value is a fixed percentage Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 3 Fixed Percentage Set and select fixed percentage Parameters 520 521 522 523 0 20 50 100 Enter a value fixed percentages See chapter 7 5 2 3 Fixed percent ages Fixed Percent Change Over 1 7 Off Select digital inputs or logic signals 75 and Fixed Percent Change See chapter 7 6 6 6 Fixed percent Over 2 76 age changeover Real value for PI D controller Actual Percentage Source 478 1 Analog Input MFI1A Select input where PID real val ue is applied For example analog PID real value at MFI 1A Set terminal X12 3 as analog input Operation Mode MFII 452 1 Voltage 0 10 V Voltage input or current input See chapter 7 6 1 Multifunction input MFI1 For the adjustment to the application setting the minimum and maximum frequency
9. y lt gt fores gt ne 22 E 7 0 255 ESC e ENT 12s SEE pm ta rELoAd 79 Commissioning of a communication interface 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 4 After first commissioning After execution of the Setup function the device can be adjusted to the relevant application via the following parameters Not all setting options are listed The parameters can be set in the menu Para Control level Parameter Factory setting P28 1 Easy Parameters for quick commissioning 2 Standard The most common parameters can be set 3 Professional Extended access to parameters Local Remote control via contacts or keypad P412 0 The commands start stop and direction of rotation parameters Start Clockwise 68 Start Anticlockwise 69 can be entered via digital inputs 3 The commands start stop and direction of rotation can be entered via the op erator panel 4 The commands start stop and direction of rotation can be entered via the op erator panel or via digital inputs Factory setting 5 Control of direction of rotation parameter Start Clockwise 68 Start Anticlock wise 69 and signal Start 3 Wire Ctrl 87 via digital inputs Further settings are applicable for cont
10. 4 165 220 10 1 62 vy Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm Assembly variants 313 5 we Wy Vip vw Bonfiglioli KA RNA i Q 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile y E Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 2 Cold Plate This assembly set is not included in delivery The Cold Plate variant enables installation of the frequency inverter on suitable surfaces which have sufficient thermal conductivity to dissipate the heat developing during the operation of the frequency inverter Cooling is realized by means of a sufficient cooling area of the mounting plate or via an additional cooler 12 9 2 1 Range of application The Cold Plate variant enables the use of the frequency inverter in the following applications Installation in a housing where a high type of protection is required but the volume of the housing limits thermal compensation Use in highly polluted cooling air affecting the function and service life of the fan Use of several frequency inverters in limited space conditions e g installation of frequency invert ers on a liquid cooled plate sum cooler Direct assembly on or in a machine case with parts of the machine constructions taking over the cooling function 12 9 2 2 Required ther
11. Activate in the Saving mask for the usage on a MMC card always the function Save to Multimedia Card To save a file for a MMC card only file names in the range from 0001 to 9999 are allowed to be used The file names must be entered in the format four digit file extension for the usage on a MMC card Please note that when storing via VPlus always the parameters of the selected control level are stored Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to read out the frequency inverter in control level 3 in VPlus before storing the file 7 10 12 Converter Profibus from to I nternal Notation 1370 I n F PDP word 1 1371 I n F PDP word 2 1372 I n F intern long 1 1373 I n F intern long 2 1374 I n F Convert Reference The Converter Profibus Internal notation can convert a 16 bit Word into an internal 32 Bit frequency value and vice versa This is useful in example when several devices are linked together via System bus and for commercial reasons only one device is equipped with a Profibus Option Through the rout ing of the Profibus Word via the Systembus Tunneling the necessary bandwidth can be reduced and the parameterization of the Gateway Systembus Master with Profibus Slave communication be simplified The converter is used in this case in a device without Profibus module to convert the Profi bus Notation into an internal reference value A similar procedure can be used to convert in example the Actual Frequency in
12. Description Min Max Fact sett lamp Percentage Motorpoti 0 00 s 600 00 s 10 00 s As a maximum the speed of the reference value change reaches the value of Gradient Percentage Ramp 477 even if Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 509 is set to a higher value 7 5 3 3 Motor potentiometer via digital inputs For the parameterization of the control of the motor potentiometer via digital inputs it has to be checked if the motor potentiometer is used as frequency reference value or percentage reference value 7 5 3 3 1 Control via reference frequency channel 62 Frequency Motorpoti Up 63 Frequency Motorpoti Down The reference frequency of the drive can be set via digital control signals Via digital control inputs the function Motorpoti up or Motorpoti down is triggered Logic signals or digital inputs must be assigned to the parameters Frequency Motorpoti Up 62 or Frequency Motor poti Down 63 Command Frequency motorpoti up The reference frequency increases at the set value of Ramp Frequency Motorpoti 473 Command Frequency motorpoti down The reference frequency decreases at the set value of Ramp Frequency Motorpoti 473 Frequency Motorpoti Frequency Motorpoti Up 62 Down 63 0 0 The reference frequency does not change 1 0 The reference frequency increases at the set ramp 0 1 The reference frequency decreases at the set ramp The reference frequency is reset to the value
13. Stator resistance asynchronous motor For sensorless control according to V f characteristic setting 110 for Configuration 30 The stator resistance of an asynchronous motor can be optimized while the machine is in no load operation At the stationary operating point the torque forming current sg 216 and or the estimated Active cur rent 214 should be zero Due to the temperature dependent of the stator resistance the adjustment should be done at a winding temperature which is also reached during normal operation A correct measurement will optimize the control functions For sensorless field orientated control according to V f characteristic setting 410 for Configuration 30 The stator resistance value determined during the guided commissioning procedure is suitable for most applications and does not have to be optimized Stator resistance synchronous motor The stator resistance value of a synchronous motor is entered during commissioning The stator re sistance is needed particular of operation at low speeds and should be available and entered as exact ly as possible for this reason The Stator resistance 1190 refers to the quantity between two motor phases and can typically be taken from the data sheet of the motor The stator resistance value determined during the guided commissioning procedure is suitable for most applications and does not have to be optimized 378 Leakage Coefficient asynchronous motor The leakage coef
14. 400 Switching Frequency Selection 7 10 1 401 Min Switching Frequency Selection 7 10 1 405 Warning Limit Short Term Ixt 6 100 7 4 1 406 Warning Limit Long Term Ixt 6 100 7 4 1 407 Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp deg C 25 0 7 4 2 408 Warning Limit Inside Temp deg C 25 0 7 4 2 409 Controller Status Message Selection 7 4 3 410 Control Word 0 OXFFFF 734 411 Status Word 0 OxFFFF CM 412 Local Remote Selection 413 VABus CM Watchdog Timer S 0 1000 CM 485 414 Data Set Selection Selection CM Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 344 Parameters Menu PARA Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli No Description Unit Setting range Chapter 417 Frequency Switch off Limit Hz 0 00 999 99 7 4 4 vV 418 Minimum Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 7 5 1 1 Vv 419 Maximum Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 7 5 1 1 420 Acceleration Clockwise Hz s 0 00 9999 99 7 5 1 4 421 Deceleration Clockwise Hz s_ 0 01 9999 99 7 5 1 4 422 Acceleration Anticlockwise Hz s 0 01 9999 99 7 5 1 4 423 Deceleration Anticlockwise Hz s 0 01 9999 99 7 5 1 4 424 Emergency Stop Clockwise Hz s 0 01 9999 99 7 5 1 4 425 Emergency Stop Anticlockwise Hz s 0 01 9999 99 7 5 1 4 426 Maximum Leading Hz 0 01 999 99 7 5 1 4 4
15. d5Et 4 TH a motor data wo Gia Fut i st 0 weer aa Motor oe and motor type cord copy or Oe Pies EDE 363 EERTE Memory card 0755 B5 parameter copy required Select file STOP Acknowledge E F 0403 53 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Commissioning GS Bonfiglioli 6 1 1 1 Selection of Data sets The 4 data sets can be set up differently if required By default all 4 data sets are set up identically By default the parameter number is shown If a dot and a digit is shown in extension to the Parameter number a data set was already selected or changed individually before For the Selection comply with the following steps e To change all data sets o Move in the parameter menu to the requested parameter Up Down o Check if the parameter number is shown without following dot and digit o Press 1x ENT e To change a single data set o Move in the parameter menu to the requested parameter Up Down o To select a data set press and hold ENT and select with Up Down the requested data set Release ENT o Press 1x ENT Not all parameters are data set changeable The parameter list in this manual contains all information concerning data sets Contains a parameter different values in the data set the selection of the parameter will automatically show data set 1 If the data sets differ they can only be be changed individually via Keypad f 54 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operator panel
16. 150 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 247 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by I t monitoring 571 Operation Mode I 7t monitoring To protect the motor against overload the I t monitoring provides a further possibility for the user This kind of motor protection is mainly used in servo technology When using servo motors the I t monitoring is a proven alternative to motor protection switch By integrating temperature dependent parameters measurable or known the heating of a mathemati cal model is simulated The kind of the I t monitoring mode can be selected by Operation Mode 571 This parameter is switchable via data set The I2t monitoring works by function Ia I 2 as shown in the figure The monitored value is evaluated via a PT1 element with the thermal time constant of the stator If the output of PT1 element is bigger than 120 then an error message is generated and the drive switches off The threshold of 120 prevents that an overshoot leads to an immediate shutdown In the application should be avoided exceeding 100 capacity of the stator winding permanently PT1 Element PT1 Element gt 120 stator Therm time const motor Therm time const stator Warning P 615 The output of the first PT1 element is linked to the input of the second PT1 element which includ
17. Error memory Simplified and extended control via PC commissioning parameterization data set backup diagnosis with Scope Energy saving function Automatic service messages Self learning controllers Communication System bus CANopen Modbus and VABus Profibus with optional communication module Freely programmable digital inputs and outputs PLC functions can be realized via table functions or a graphical PC user inter face Four separate data sets incl motor parameter Pre defined motor data BONFIGLIOLI motors 277 General technical data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Technical data GS Bonfiglioli 11 2 Device data This chapter contains the Technical data of the different sizes of the Agile series General are valid for AGL202 and AGL402 devices are the following characteristics Output voltage Maximum value of input voltage three phase Protection ei Short circuit proof and earth fault proof Rotary field frequenc 0 1000 depending on switching frequenc Integrated brake chopper Ea es Mains configuration fe TT TN IT Maine voltage range U V AGL202 230 20 240 10 ge rang AGL402 380 15 480 10 Mains frequenc 45 69 Overvoltage category EN 50178 III EN 61800 5 1 III l 0 40 EN 60721 3 3 Cooling agent temperature air 40 55 with power reduction derating Storage temperature 25 55
18. Door filter in electrical cabinet e Clean or replace Environment e Check if ambient conditions meet specifications See chapter 11 2 Device data Cooling e Check if frequency inverter or motor emits excessive heat or if compo nents change their color In this cases Check for overload Check heat sink and motor for soiling Check ambient temperature Electrical cables e Check cable connections for safe connection e Check cables for damage color changes and heat impact e Check cable insulation and shields for wear and tear e Replace damaged cables Brake resistor e Check for color changes and heat impact Check connection Test run after service Check the frequency inverter in a test run if possible Error list and error environment Display error via operator panel or PC software VPlus Eliminate cause of error and acknowledge error See chapter 13 1 Error list Power supply Measure mains voltage Note rated values on the rating plate of the fre quency inverter Measure voltage of external DC 24 V supply if installed Specification See chapter 5 7 6 External DC 24 V power supply Output current Measure output current Check the drive system and the load behavior if the output current is greater than the nominal value of the frequency in verter over extended periods Vibration or unusual noise of motor Check the coupled load Fix
19. 0 06 635 Integral Time Oms 1000 ms 7 3 7 Positioning 458 Operation Mode Positioning Positioning is effected in operation mode Reference positioning via specification of the position dis tance Reference positioning uses a digital reference signal on digital input IN1D terminal X11 4 for posi tioning the drive independent of the speed The function Reference positioning is available in configurations 110 410 and 610 and is activated by selecting operation mode 1 for parameter Operation Mode 458 0 Off Positioning switched off Reference positioning via definition of the positioning distance 1 Reference positioning revolutions The reference point is identified via digital input IN1D terminal X11 4 459 Signal source Reference positioning is started with the status change of the reference signal at digital input IN1D terminal X11 4 Logic evaluation can be selected via the parameter signal source The positioning starts with the change of the logic signal from 1 High to 0 Low at the reference point The positioning starts with the change of the logic signal from 1 Low to 0 High at the reference point Positioning is started with a signal change at the reference point 1 IN1D falling edge 11 IN1D rising edge 21 IN1D rising falling edge If the digital input IN1D is used for the reference signal it must be checked if this input is linke
20. 244 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 10 6 Motor Protection The protection of the motor against impermissible temperature rise requires monitoring mechanisms for recognizing a thermal overload to prevent a possible damage to the motor The thermal state of a motor can be evaluated by different ways 1 Direct monitoring by temperature sensors inside the motor winding Please check chapter 7 4 6 Motor temperature PTC KTY PT100 Thermal contact 2 Indirect monitoring of the motor temperature Monitoring of the motor current based on the K characteristic of an integrated motor circuit breaker Emulation of the motor heating by using a temperature relevant mathematical model I t The choice of thermal control is mainly determined by type and operating conditions of the motor For safe motor protection it is generally sufficient using one of the available possibilities A combination of the two groups and their simultaneous operation is possible 7 10 6 1 Motor protection by Motor Circuit Breaker 571 Operation Mode motor circuit breaker Motor circuit breakers are used for protecting a motor and its supply cable against over heating by overload Depending on the overload level they disconnect the motor from power supply immediately in the case of a short circuit or they disconnect the motor if an overload has occurred for some time Conventional
21. Bonfiglioli Vectron Agile Operating Instructions Frequency inverter 230 V 400 0 09 kW 11 kW GD Bonfiglioli ontrol and green solutio Content vw Bonfiglioli Content CONTEND sa vsistisstascennesiecanntenasdaseneatiaisuaniiae dan sntasiaunendecanenwstedunswseunnensendsnnedisseusienienadnnenns 3 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE DOCUMENTATION csscssessecseeeeseseeees 11 1 1 This COCUMENL ccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeneaseeseenaaeeeeeneaseeeseenaaseeseenaaeeseeuaaseeseneasensenoas 12 1 2 Warranty and liability ssssnsnnusnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 12 L 3 Obligation csceceeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeaseeseeneaeeeeeneaseeseeaaaeeeeseeneaseeeenaaseesennaeeseeoaaeeesenaasensenoas 13 LA Copyright eee ee ee eee 13 1 5 SUOrACGe ccsseeeeseeeneeeueneeeeuneeeenueueuaseeenaeueouseeenusuenaseeeeogseeonseeenasueuagseeauseengseeuausuenaeseaseneas 13 2 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION ON USE cssccsseee 14 2 1 Terminoloy a T E E 14 2 2 Designated USEC ccccseseeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeneaseusennaeeseenaaeeeeeeenauseeseooaseuseeoageeseenaaeeesanaasenees 15 2 3 MISUSE E E E a E E E E 15 2 3 1 Explosion protectio ainiin a aaa aid T 15 pA ReSiduall a E e E E EE 16 2 5 Safety and warning signs at frequency inverter ccsssseeeecseseeeeenesseeseeeeneeeeneensenens 16 2 6 Warning information and symbols used in the user manual s ssssss
22. Extermalerrorssscscecessccesnestevecihaeetvnsecods a e aa aaas 205 PO OG PLC a S E E 205 7 6 6 17 Multiplexer demultiplexer sssssssssserrsnssssnrssrsnnnssnnnennanrnonnnnrnnnnnesnnnnneennnernnnnnene 205 7 6 7 Input PWM repetition frequency pulse train sssssssssssssssrsrsnrrrrrnsrrnrenrnrnnnnrnrnnannnnennnn 207 7 6 7 1 PWM DDU nna a S eS 208 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency iNPUt ccceeeeee cece eeeeeeeee teens eeeeaeaae ee eeeeeeesaaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeaeaaea 209 7 6 7 3 Pulse traian seve ces devotee vadhecnes vsseese se eves se cueseenerss 209 7 6 7 4 Further setting Options ye cs cctnecessesesentvceteceanbacsabeectentecnas ties aa N aia aaa 211 7 7 VIf characteristic ciccsisccssssiccesstnesecnsascccasscndessucesscenasaesessscnddsenesseuesasduaussendersisascuesasasae 211 7 8 Linear V f Characteristic ccsscccsssscseseecseseeneseeeeeseeneeeeenesseneseenessenneeeeneeeenaseeneesenss 211 7 8 1 Dynamic voltage pre control 0 0 ceeececeeeeeeeee eee ee seen eens ane eee sna eee saan aa ANENE RANEE Nnnn Eann 213 7 9 Control FUNCTIONS cceeseceeeeceeeeceenseeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeoneeeneeseenesesneeuseeneeeeneeseneseeneasseneesenes 213 79 1 Intelligent current liMitS ss issistentieticsiii inser a 213 79 2 Noltage control efrin iae a a aa aka 215 7 9 3 PID controller technology controller cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 220 7 9 4 Functions of Sensorless control ssssssssssss
23. If errors or warning messages occur during operation proceed according to the instructions in chap ters 13 1 1 Error messages and 14 3 Warning status and warning status application 70 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 First commissioning Commissioning W Bonfiglioli Vectron 6 2 7 Check direction of rotation The unit may only be connected with the power supply switched off Make sure that the frequency inverter is discharged Dangerous voltage may be present at the motor terminals and the terminals of the brake resistor even after the frequency inverter has been disconnected from power sup ply Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to work at the unit To check if the reference value and the actual direction of rotation of the drive correspond to one another proceed as follows e Operate the drive at low speed i e specify a reference value of approx 10 e Switch on frequency inverter enable briefly signal at digital inputs STOA and STOB as well as IN1D Start clockwise or signal at digital inputs STOA and STOB as well as IN2D Start anticlockwise e Check if the motor shaft turns in the required direction In case the sense of rotation is wrong exchange two motor phases e g U and V at the terminals of the frequency inverter The mains side connection of the frequency inverter does not affect the sense of rotation of the drive In addition to checking the
24. NOTE Removing the jumper reduces interference immunity and increases the emitted interfer ence Interference immunity can be increased by means of external filters Additional work for EMC conformity may be possible Comply with the EMC information 37 Mains Connection 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile ey Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation 5 6 Motor Connection Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being ener gized unintentionally Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to work at the unit When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply the mains DC link voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time When using pluggable terminals Do not switch on the device while the plugs are dis connected the IP protection is only warranted with plugged terminals BONFIGLIOLI recommends connecting the motor to the frequency inverter using shielded cables e Connect the cable shield to PE potential properly i e with good conductivity on both sides e The motor cables must be kept physically separate from the control and network cables The user must comply with the applicable limits stipulated in the relevant national and international directives as regards the application the length of the motor cable and the switching frequency Connect in delta connecti
25. The control of the fans can additionally be set via parameter Standby Mode 1511 See chapter 8 3 Standby mode 263 Further energy saving options 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Energy saving Automatic switching frequency changeover The power losses of semiconductor components depend on the switching frequency and the level of the switched current In the case of a high current load e g during acceleration of high loads the switching frequency of the pulse width modulation may be reduced temporarily in order to reduce the losses of the frequency inverter If the current drops again after the acceleration phase a higher switching frequency will be set automatically See chapter 7 10 1 Pulse width modulation Circuitry measures integrated in Agi e The following energy saving measures were integrated in the frequency inverter and do not require any setup The integrated power supply units supplying the internal assembles are optimized to ensure mini mum power losses Low loss current measurement The own consumption of the measuring system is optimized to ensure minimum power losses Supply of optional communication modules If no communication module is connected energy supply to the module slot is switched off 264 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Further energy saving options Actual values vw Bonfiglioli 9 Actual values The various control functions and methods include electr
26. The relay output at terminal X10 is switched off if the communication between control and power circuitry of the frequency inverter is faulty This avoids dangerous conditions for example in the brake control of hoist applications Operation modes for digital outputs 0 Off Digital output is switched off _ Frequency inverter is initialized and on stand by or in 2 Run Signal Enable signals STOA and STOB and a start command g are present output frequency available 3 Error Signal a message is displayed via parameter Actual error 4 senaren The Stator frequency 210 is higher than the parameter 4 Setting Frequency ized Setting frequency 510 See chapter 7 6 5 2 Setting frec The Actual frequency 241 of the drive has reached the 5 Reference Frequency reached Internal reference frequency 228 See chapter 7 6 5 3 Reference value reached The Actual percentage 230 has reached the Reference 6 Reference Percentage reached percentage 229 See chapter 7 6 5 3 Reference value reached 187 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Ly B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions The Warning limit short term Ixt 405 or Warning Limit Long Term Ixt 406 is reached Max heat sink temperature T minus the Warning limit 8 Warning Heat Sink Temperature heat sink temp 407 reached Maximum inside temperature T minus the Warning a Warming Inside Temperatile limit inside temp 408 reached 7 Ixt warni
27. 2 remote contacts Switch on both enable inputs STOA and STOB Check motor cables Exchange two motor phases e g U and V at the frequency inverter terminals Connect terminals U V and W of the frequency in verter to the corresponding terminals U V and W of the motor Check if P493 or P495 is set to 3 Inverted The reference value will be inverted Check if for P68 Start clockwise and P69 Start anticlockwise the required digital inputs are select ed Check the characteristic parameters if the reference value is defined via MFI1 or MFI2 and 6 voltage characteristic or 7 current characteristic is select ed Check if P493 or P495 is set to 2 positive only In this case the reference value can only be positive Factory setting 1 reference value Check values for P420 acceleration clockwise and P422 acceleration anticlockwise The value 0 00 Hz s blocks the corresponding direction of rota tion 332 Troubleshooting Error protocol The motor is very hot Time until motor starts seems quite long Motor stops dur ing start up Motor does not accelerate or motor accelerates very slowly Speed vibrations Troubleshooting Load too high Motor temperature mon itoring connection Ambient temperature too high Setup not carried out Flying Start is used Load torque too high Reference value too low Ramps too smooth Setup not carried out Contro
28. 4 4 mA PX 15 2 mA pa 15 2 mA Maximum reference value Maximum Frequency 419 Maximum Perc 519 P562 1 OV 0 2V 10 v U V P562 2 0 mA 20 mA P562 5 20 mA 20 mA 176 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions wv Bonfiglioli 7 6 2 1 2 Voltage input characteristic and current input characteristic For parameter Operation Mode MFI 562 6 Voltage characteristic or 7 Current characteristic must be selected Voltage signal MFI2A 0 V 10 V The output signal is influ enced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 564 567 Current signal MFI2A 0 mA 20 mA The output signal is in fluenced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 564 567 6 Voltage characteristic 7 Current characteristic 564 Characteristic Curve Point X1 565 Characteristic Curve Point Y1 566 Characteristic Curve Point X2 567 Characteristic Curve Point Y2 The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage Parameterization can be done via two points of the linear characteristic of the reference value channel Point 1 with coordinates X1 and Y1 and point 2 with coordinates X2 and Y2 can be set in four data sets No Desciipton X Fact sett 564 2 00 565 Characteristic Curve Point Y1 0 00 566 Characteristic Curve Point X2 0 00 100 00 98 00 567 Characteri
29. 7 3 2 ates This protects the brake against damage Shutdown Via P630 select the stopping behavior of the drive 7 3 3 Operating Instructions Agile 96 06 2013 Typical functions Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli Energy saving Chapter Switch off Set a time in P1510 If no key is pressed on the operator panel during 8 display this time the display will be switched off Switch off Via P1511 select which functions are to be switched off Operator 8 functions panel digital inputs and outputs communication or fan The frequency inverter switches the functions off thus reducing power consumption if enable is switched off via digital inputs STOA and STOB Energy sav For P30 110 IM sensor less control SLC or 410 IM sensor less_ 8 1 ing function field oriented control must be selected Via P1550 select if the possible energy savings are to be determined automatically or specified via an entered value P1551 Via P1551 select which digital input or logic signal is to be used for starting the energy saving function Quadratic V f For load behavior with torque increasing quadratically to speed e g 8 2 characteristic fan For control according to V f characteristic For P30 110 IM sensor less control SLC must be selected Via P606 set the characteristic to 2 quadratic Set up the V f characteristic using parameters 600 604 Other E g temperat
30. 90 15 0 Long term overload current 60 s pt fal 90 so oe mae short time 1 1 A 12 0 24 0 18 0 30 0 overload current 1 s Switching frequency 2 4 8 16 LAL Bussmann FWP 20A14Fa 200 x 80 x 196 1 5 IP20 EN60529 Mains and motor 0 2 4 flexible with sleeve terminals 0 2 6 rigid Terminals Terminals relay out 4 45 Installation aE vertical Interior fan ves O Heat sink fan PF yes Power dissipation 2 kHz w 133 133 167 167 switching frequency 1 According to DIN EN 61800 5 1 2 Dimensions of the basic device Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4 2 Installation for the standard assembly and chapter 12 9 Assembly variants 281 Device data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile r EJ Bonfiglioli Technical data 11 2 4 AGL202 3 5 5 to 7 5 kW 1 3 0 kW 230 V Agile 202 Selected Mains supp iph 3h iph 3ph iee O eT sT T motor shaft power Output current TTA 120 f 210 120 260 Long term overload current 60 s al overload current 1 s Switching frequency 2 4 8 16 LAL Bussmann FWP 30A14Fa 200 x 125 x 205 3 IP20 EN60529 Mains and motor 0 2 4 flexible with sleeve Terminals terminals 0 2 6 rigid 0 1 1 5 Installation S vertical a s Heat sinkfan_ S ccm e eala a switching frequency 1 According to DIN EN 61800 5 1 2 Dim
31. Activate Warning Contr In Max motor temperature Tprc reached Operation Mode 573 tel Curr Lim Motor Temp __ for intelligent current limits active Activate Warning Controller Reference frequency reached the Maximum Frequency 419 43 meds Freq Limitation The frequency limitation is active 101 to 143 Deactivation of the operation mode within the warning mask The selected warning mask can be read out via parameter Actual Warning Mask 537 The above operation modes of parameter Create Warning Mask 536 are encoded in the Actual Warning Mask 537 The code is calculated by hexadecimal addition of the individual operation modes and the corre sponding abbreviation A 0000 0004 IxtLt__ 12 Warning long term xt A 0000 0020 Lim 15 Warning limit A 0000 0200 PMS 19 Warning motor circuit breaker A 0000 2000 _Sysbus 39 A 0800 0000 Telim A 1000 0000 MtempLim A 2000 0000 Fim 194 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs A 0200 0000 IxtLtlim 9 Contr intel curr lim LT Ixt Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Output signals The output of a warning is signaled j 1 7 5 le 2 Output of warning activated in Create Warning Mask 536 D For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs il Parameter Warning 269 and Warnin
32. Commissioning Bonfiglioli Vectron 6 1 1 2 Menu for communication setup Bus configuration SETUP communication Cii nod aa M Optional modile A Om CEE wpm E Sea o Kaa Interface Service baud rate Baud interface X21 A e VABus at X21 I VABus at module CM F sE 0 amp D Interface setting VABus at X21 and at module CM OJO 230400 seng 51600 19200 9600 CEE oan rar Can EDS rok J GD 1 GD cm en Hom en Oa em eo on node ID baud rate Baud Mode Modbus at module CM Odd oad m Modbus at x21 PAr EY ENT EuEn EDS 1 F SEE CENT a END Parity Even Interface setting No Modbus VABus at X21 and module CM C3 1 185 Co Frequency inverter System bus at module CM CAN Y as master __ 500 more CANopen at X12 5 and X12 6 SYSbUS ENT OE J ED 1 ED mu e mg F see xD ___ ED Node ID Deactivated Baud rate kBaud O interface setting System bus at X12 5 and X12 6 CANopen at module CM CAN ol ProF b 3 9 node J GD __ 1 GD Node ID Deactivated 10 eo 50 C 250 CANopen at X12 5 and X12 6 Node 1D 1 n s509 System bus at module CM CAN m node d ENT JEDS bAUd C nm 1000 mE 5Et ENT 1 END Node ID Deactivated Baud rate kBaud Interface setting CANopen at module CM CAN System bus at X12 5 and X12 6 55 Operator p
33. IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 70 Data set Change Over 1 7 Off 71 Data set Change Over 2 7 Off 75 Fixed percent Change Over 1 7 Off 76 Fixed percent Change Over 2 7 Off Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal 1 The setting 0 01 Hz effects the usage of the same ramp like stated in Parameters Acceleration Clockwise 420 1 Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to set Minimum frequency 418 gt Frequency limit 624 Comply with the notes in chapter 7 9 5 2 Torque controller 107 Applications 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning 1 2 Active LS P 09 at r7 danset 00 Reference frequency 0 amp Ret t gt O e n T 0 0 1 Rit u A lt Reference percentage Es S o E Aa 164 1 0 2 o source 475 o source Reference torque Pr H k A p 2 Active fixed value Hz pis EA Active fixed value m P66 P67 24 VDC XILI Data set Change Over 1 70 0 0 Fixed frequency 1 480 10 O O Fixed percentage 520 0 Start clockwise IN1D Data set Change Over2 71 1 O FixedFrequency2 481 25 p 1 O Fixed percentage2 521 20 a E rani cI ee a Oa T epeen S F ek aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaasasasssaIiIiIiIi i ixed Frequency ixed percentage clockwise STOA x13 Fixed frequency Change Over 1 66 gt Fixed percent Change Over 1 Enable STOR X13 3 Fixed f
34. Options vw Bonfiglioli The following tables list the maximum permissible thermal resistance Ry of the external heat sink and the device specific energy dissipation Py of the external heat sink The thermal resistance Ri is given in the unit Kelvin per Watt K W The value of Ri can typically be taken from the data sheet of the external heat sink Additionally the thermal radiation energy dissipation interior of the frequency inverter is indicated in the table Agile 402 Agile 202 01 02 03 05 07 09 11 13 Size 1 S aici heat sink p w l 12l19 29 42 53 70 89 122 Energy dissipation interior Pa interior W 10 10 11 12 15 18 21 25 Thermal resistance Cooling surface of Cold Plate HxB mm 190 x 83 Weight approx m kg 1 1 Agile 402 Agile 202 t5 t8 19 19 21 22 O 2 k 3 Energy dissipation heat sink 2 kHz Py w 133 167 235 321 393 470 Energy dissipation interior Pamer W 31 35 48 61 68 81 aT K Pau i oso fox ar er an ano a Cooling surface of Cold Plate HxB mm 190 x 103 Weight approx m kg 1 35 Thermal resistance 190 x 148 2 6 The thermal resistance values and the technical data apply in the following conditions No airflow Clearance of approx 300 mm above and below as well as 100 mm on both the left and right side of the frequen
35. Parameter setting Reference value too low No enable Error in control cables Motor does not produce enough torque Parameter setting No enable Incorrect connection of motor phases Parameter setting Parameter setting Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error protocol Select correct source for reference value For example for speed setting via a multifunction input set at least one of parameters P475 or P492 to 1 analog input 1 terminal X12 3 or 2 analog input 2 terminal X12 4 For P452 terminal X12 3 and P562 terminal X12 4 select the correct signal to set the reference value 1 voltage or 2 current For P68 Start clockwise or P69 Start anticlock wise select the required digital input Check P418 Minimum frequency Set digital input for the start command to the re quired evaluation 0 NPN or 1 PNP Check actual value P228 internal reference frequen cy Check voltage or current value at reference val ue input Switch on both enable inputs STOA and STOB Check control cable connections Carry out setup again Long cables will reduce the torque V f characteristic Check start up behavior P620 flux formation P780 and P781 and starting current P623 Field orientated control Check start up behavior flux formation P780 and P781 and torque limit P730 reset to factory settings if necessary Via P412 set the controller to 1 state machine or
36. Reference percentage channel is shown simplified See chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage chan nel Application examples The pressure in a process is kept at a constant level by means of a pres Pressure control sure sensor The flow rate in a process is kept at a constant level by means of a flow Flow rate control Enor Temperature control The temperature is kept at a constant level by controlling a fan by means p of a thermostat Via dataset changeover via control contacts the PID controller can be adjusted to different operating points 476 494 Reference percentage source PI D desired set value input The desired set value source of the control can be selected via parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 The values of both parameters are added See chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel 222 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 478 Actual Percentage Source PID real value input The analog input or the repetition frequency input to which the PID real value is applied can be se lected via parameter Actual Percentage Source 478 The actual value can also be transmitted via a bus system Analog signal at multifunction input 1 terminal X12 3 Factory setting Via parameter Operation mode MFI 452 the input must be set up as an analog input voltage or current See chapter 7 6 1 Multifunction input MFI1 Ana
37. Selection 7 10 12 1373 In F intern long2 Selection 7 10 12 1374 Convert Reference Hz 0 01 Hz 999 99 Hz 7 10 12 1375 Modbus Parity Selection 6 2 10 2 1376 Modbus Address 1 247 CM Modbus 1414 CANopen 0x3008 Perc Actual i Selection Value Source 1415 CANopen 0x3011 Act ValueWord 1 Selection 1416 CANopen 0x3012 Act ValueWord 2 Selection 1417 CANopen 0x3021 Act ValueLong 1 E Selection 1418 CANopen 0x3022 Act ValueLong 2 Selection s EEPROM 0 16 1420 CANopen Mux Input Index write RAM 17 33 EEPROM 0 16 1421 CANopen Mux Input Index read RAM 1733 1422 CANopen Mux Inputs Selection CM CAN 1423 CANopen Obj 0x3007 Actual Per i Selection centage Value Source 1451 OS Synctime 700 900 1432 IP Address nnn nnn nnn nnn 1433 Netmask nnn nnn nnn nnn 1434 Gateway gt nnn nnn nnn nnn 1435 DNS Server nnn nnn nnn nnn 1436 DHCP Option Selection 1437 IP Command Selection Ethernet 1438 Reload IP Settings 0 1 1440 Email function Selection 1441 Email Text Body Text 1500 VABus X21 Baud rate Selection 6 2 10 2 1501 VABus X21 Node ID 1 30 CM 485 1502 VABus X21 Watchdog Timer s 0 1000 CM 485 1503 Modbus Mode Selection 6 2 10 2 1504 Modbus Baud rate Baud Selection CM Modbus 1505 Modbus Watchdog Timer s 0 1000 CM Modbus 352 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Parameters Menu PARA Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli
38. cnn Digital output 163 Reference Frequency reached 7 6 5 4 Flux forming finished If operation mode 30 flux forming finished is selected for a digital output the corresponding out put becomes active when the flux formation is finished The time for the flux formation results from the operating state of the machine and the set parameters for magnetizing the machine The magnet izing can be defined via the starting behavior and is influenced by the amount of the set starting cur rent See chapter 7 3 2 Starting behavior 191 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Xoo Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 7 6 5 5 Release brake The Open brake function in operation mode 41 enables the activation of a corre sponding unit via the digital control output The function uses both the control commands via the contact inputs and the set starting and stopping behavior for controlling the digital output According to the configured starting behavior the output is switched on when the magnetizing of the motor is finished When the Brake release time 625 has elapsed the drive is accelerated See chapter 7 3 2 Starting behavior The stopping behavior of the drive depends on the configuration of the parameters Operation mode 630 See chapter 7 3 3 Stopping behavior If stopping behavior 2 or 5 with stop function is selected the drive is controlled to zero speed and the digital output is not s
39. essary DC link voltage higher than motor chopper trigger threshold P507 Check value Increase value if nec essary Check mains connection Check motor data Check motor connection The parameterizable motor circuit breaker P571 has been triggered Short circuit at motor connection or overload Check load for earth fault Overload Reduce load and ensure sufficient cooling Comply with permissible ambient conditions Reduce output power or switching frequency Check EMC Switch off limit P417 exceeded Increase value if necessary Maximum frequency increase P681 of DC link volt age limitation exceeded Increase value if necessary Most parameters cannot be written during operation Switch off enable and select Para menu on opera tor panel Select higher control level P28 Wait until setup is finished and the message ready is displayed Entry must correspond to password P27 For P412 select 3 Control via keypad or 4 Con trol via keypad or contacts factory setting Check P418 Minimum frequency and P419 Maxi mum frequency Switch on both enable inputs STOA and STOB Check control cable connections 331 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Motor does not turn after a start command at digi tal input Motor does not turn after a start command via a communication interface Motor turning in wrong direction Motor turning in one direction only
40. motor generator op tion the same limit is used The same applies in the case of regener ative operation with the lower limit Factory setting The assignment of the limit is done by the sign of the value to be Limits limited Independent of the motor or generator operating points of pos neg torque the drive the positive limitation is done by the upper limit The lower limit is regarded as a negative limitation Operation mode 1 Operation mode 2 anticlockwise M clockwise anticlockwise clockwise PEE a O P e CERES ASE CA PEE a generator motor generator motor 7 ee lh motor generator motor generator EA ca a E Current limit 728 Current limit generator op 729 M Torque n Speed 721 Amplification 1 f lt P738 722 Integral Time 1 f lt P738 723 Amplification 2 f gt P738 724 Integral Time 2 f gt P738 738 Speed Control Switch Over Limit 748 Backlash Damping The properties of the speed controller can be adapted for adjustment and optimization of the control ler The amplification and integral time of the speed controller can be set via parameters Amplification 1 IA lt P738 721 and Integral Time 1 fl lt P738 722 For the second speed range parameters Ampli fication 2 fl gt P738 723 Integral Time 2 fl gt P738 724 can be set The distinction between the speed ranges is done by the value set with parameter Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 Parame ters Amplification 1 f
41. 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Commissioning Communication Factory setting Instruc tions CAN System Interface at terminals X12 5 and X12 6 System bus bus CANopen Protocol via terminals X12 5 and X12 6 or an ee open Interface at optional communication module CM CAN pe For parameter CAN Interface CM CAN X12 276 select the protocol for terminals X12 5 X12 6 or for the communication module You can choose either CAN system bus or CANopen Modbus Interface at connection X21 RJ45 socket or Maak RTUPASCID optional communication module CM 232 or CM 485 saa VABus Interface at connection X21 RJ45 socket or one f age us optional communication module CM 232 or CM 485 Via parameter Protocol CM X21 395 select the protocol for terminal X21 or for the communication module You can choose either Modbus or VABus If Modbus is selected choose either RTU or ASCII via pa rameter Modbus Mode 1503 Profibus DP Optional communication module CM PDPV1 PDP V1 TCP IP Optional communication module with Ethernet communication TCP IP Ethernet module 6 6 Error Acknowledgment via keypad If a fault occurs a device reset can be executed via the STOP key A reset via the STOP key can only be executed if Parameter Local Remote 412 allows the control via keypad see chapter 7 3 1 Control Further possibilities to execute a fault reset are described in chap
42. 600 0 7 10 7 347 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Parameters Menu PARA 6 yey Bonfiglioli Parameter list No Description Unit Setting range Chapter vi amp 600 Starting Voltage v 0 0 100 0 7 7 vV 8 601 Voltage Rise 100 200 7 7 v 8 602 Rise Frequency 0 100 7 7 Vi 603 Cut Off Voltage V AGL402 60 0 560 0 7 7 v B 604 Cut Off Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 7 7 605 Dyn Voltage Pre Control 0 200 7 8 1 606 Type V f characteristic Selection 7 7 608 Thermal Time Constant Motor min 1 240 7 10 6 2 609 Thermal Time Constant Rotor S 1 600 7 10 6 2 vV E 610 Operation Mode Selection 7 9 4 2 611 Amplification 0 01 30 00 7 9 4 2 612 Integral Time ms 1 10000 7 9 4 2 613 Current Limit A 0 0 Oc len 7 9 4 2 v 8 614 Frequency Limit Hz 0 00 999 99 7 9 4 2 615 Warning Limit Motor I t 6 100 7 10 6 2 616 Backlash Motor Power of Selection 7 9 3 617 Max Temp Motor Winding C 0 200 7 4 6 618 Backlash 0 00
43. 620 x 621 x 622 x 623 X X x 624 X X x 625 xX xX x 779 x x 780 x x x 781 x X x 620 Operation mode starting behavior The parameter Operation mode 620 for the starting behavior is available if Configuration 30 110 IM sensorless control V f control of asynchronous motor is selected Depending on the op eration mode selected the motor is magnetized first or a starting current is impressed The voltage drop across the stator resistance which reduces the torque in the lower frequency range can be com pensated by the IxR compensation To ensure the correct function of the IxR compensation the stator resistance is determined during the guided commissioning Setup The IxR compensation is only activated when the stator resistance was determined correctly During startup at an output frequency of 0 Hz the voltage is set via parameter Starting voltage 600 After this the output voltage and the output frequency are changed according to the control method The break away torque and the current at the start are determined by the adjusted starting voltage It may be necessary to optimize the start ing behavior via the parameter Starting voltage 600 123 Operational Behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions In this operation mode the Current during flux formation 781 for mag netization is impressed into the motor after enable The output frequen 1 Magnetisation
44. Abs current value of measured output currents 0 0 A Nominal 50 Abs I fi requency inverter current 51 DC Link Voltage DC link voltage Ug DC 0 0 V 1000 0 V Output voltage 3xAC 0 0 V 1000 0 V 183 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Output value 2521 PLC Output Percentage 1 of a PLC function is output via the multifunction output Refer to applica tion manual PLC i _ Output value 2522 PLC Output Percentage 2 of a PLC eae Ourpuer function is output via the multifunction output Refer to applica g tion manual PLC 101 to 162 Operation modes in analog operation with signs By default the multifunction output is configured for the output of a pulse width modulated output signal with a reference voltage value of DC 10 V _ Abs Val PLC Output Per centage 1 61 62 554 Digital Source MFO1D If the multifunction output is to be used as a digital output parameter Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 550 must be set to 1 Digital MFO1D For parameter Digital Source MFOID 554 the signal to be output at the multifunction output can be selected Operation mode MFO1 10 Analog PWM MFO1A 1 Digital MFO1D X13 6 550 Digital Source MFOID 554 4 Setting frequency Select a digital signal source Refer to 7 6 5 2 Setting Refer to 7 6 5 Digital outputs frequency table Operation modes f
45. Communication error according to parameter CM VABus Watchdog Timer 413 327 Error list 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 6 2o Bonfiglioli Error protocol Code Meaning F20 CAN Bus OFF SYNC error SYNC timing Number of received bytes differs from mapping RxPDO3 Timeout 24 RxPDO was not received in expected time Ensure that the RxPDO can be received in the set up Event time Subindex 5 2C F20 5x DeviceNet Fault Please check DeviceNet manual F20 6x Profibus Fault Please check Profibus manual F20 7 Internal Error Please contact your Bonfiglioli office Fault message on system bus master when a fault at system bus slave occurs nn node ID of slave hex Communication fault system bus timeout sync telegram nn Communication fault system bus timeout RxPDO2 Communication fault system bus timeout RxPDO3 10 Communication fault system bus bus off d i 1 i F Communication fault system bus timeout RxPDO1 A j ti f 3 ti F23 nn Heartbeat error nn triggering node F24 00 Unknown CM module Check compatibility firmware and CM module F27 nn_ Industrial Ethernet Fault Please check manual of used Ethernet module F28 nn EtherCAT fault F30 3n User triggered Error of Internal PLC Please check the application manual VPLC Disconnect mains supply After 6
46. Compressor Blocking frequen Acceleration Frequency limits P449 P449 Frequency O 4 Reference frequency R hysteresis 449 3 i source 475 a Ist Blocking min D frequency 447 Acceleration P447 fref internal clockwise 420 Min frequency 418 Max frequency 419 Start clockwise Start anti clockwise Enable Voltage controller Ud limitation Mains support Limit A Mains i Ud voltage rt Reference Len speed o fni o t Operation mode 670 Ud DC link voltage Error signal Run signal 105 Applications 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 7 7 Travel applications 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 50 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 15 Hz s 421 Deceleration clockwise 15 Hz s 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 Analog Value MFI1A 480 Fixed frequency 1 10 Hz 481 Fixed frequency 2 25 Hz 482 Fixed frequency 3 40 Hz 483 Fixed frequency 4 50 Hz 492 Reference frequency source 2 3 Fixed frequency 493 Operation mode reference frequency 1 reference source 558 Operation mode terminal X11 6 digi 0 Input IN3D tal input output 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 11 Stop Off Stop Off P68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 68 Start Clockwise 71 INiD 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 66 Fixed frequency Change
47. Contact P204 Warning only Therm Contact P204 2 Error Switch Off Therm Contact P204 3 Err Switch Off 1 min delayed MPTC MFI2 Warning 11 only MPTC MFI2 Error 12 witch Off MPTC MFI2 Err Switch 13 offi min delayed 21 KTY MFI2 Warning only Operating Instructions Agile Parameter descriptions Monitoring for temperature limit A thermal overload is displayed via the operator panel and parameter Warnings 269 For parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 the digital input to which the ther mal contact is connected must be selected In the factory setup multifunction input 2 can be used for connection of a thermal con tact Thermal contact for P570 204 is set to MFI2D The input signal must be digital The evaluation NPN PNP of the input signal can be set via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562 Monitoring for temperature limit The frequency inverter is switched off immediately if the motor is thermally overloaded The error switch off is displayed by message F0400 For parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 the digital input to which the thermal contact is connected must be selected In the factory setup multifunction input 2 can be used for connection of a thermal contact Thermal contact for P570 204 is set to MFI2D The input signal must be digital The evaluation NPN PNP of the input signal can be set via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562 Monitoring for temperature limit The freque
48. Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 5 7 Control terminals Standard connection The unit may only be connected with the power supply switched off Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged Switch off power supply before connecting or disconnecting the control inputs and out puts Verify that the keyed control inputs and outputs are deenergized before connect ing or disconnecting them Otherwise components may be damaged Factory settings External power supply optional I 1A Relay output Input 240 VAC or 24 VDC 24 VDC 10 103 Inv Error Signal OUT2D Error Signal 1 PNP igital i Unax 30 VDC Digital inputs ras active 24 V Digital output 15 30 VDC Ina 100 mA P531 2 Run X13 5 OUTID Run Signal Start Anticlockwise 72 IN2D signal Fixed Frequency Start Clockwise 71 IN1D Change Over 1 a me Multi function output Error Acknowledgment 75 IN5D eee aio at oe MFO1 P550 10 Analog MFO1A ty proportional to 4 P553 7 Absolute value actual frequency Enable Actual frequency GND CANopen or a CAN system bus Digital Input Output Ura 30 VDC P276 k i CAN H Bus termination 0 Input IN3D Terminals i E System bus He Data Set Change Over 1 1 PNP CANL active 24 V ni die r CAN GND Cable shielding 73 IN3D t Multi function inputs
49. Higher voltages may destroy the unit Use suitable external power supply units with a maximum output current of DC 30 V or use appropriate fuses to protect the unit Operation of the frequency inverter is not affected if the mains voltage is switched on and the exter nal power supply is switched off Exceptions Mains voltage must be switched on for the following functions The function is not enabled if only an external power supply is applied The relay output X10 is controlled only if mains voltage is switched on The heat sink fan and the internal fan are controlled only if mains voltage is switched on 49 Control terminals Standard connection 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation 5 7 7 Installation notes according to UL508c For an installation according to UL508c the motor must be supervised regarding the thermal behavior The connection and the parameter settings for the temperature motor supervision is described in chapter 5 7 Control terminals Standard connection For an installation according to UL508c only allowed fuses can be used for mains protection The al lowed fuses are described in chapter 11 2 Device data For an installation according to UL508c the in chapter 11 2 Device data described maximum temper atures must not be exceeded For an installation according to UL508c only 60 75 C copper conductors are allowed to be used For an installati
50. Multifunction inputs 3 digital NPN active 0 V Low switching with negative signal X12 3 MFI1 o f Ter 4 digital PNP active 24 V High switching with positive signal Po Low switching with negative sig 12 4 MED 3 digital NPN active 0 V nal Factory setting 4 digital PNP active 24 V High switching with positive signal PNP NPN Voltage output 24 VDC Multi function inputs Multi function inputs 48 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control terminals Standard connection Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 5 7 5 Overview of voltage inputs and outputs X12 1142344546 3 8 1 24 VDC IN A10 VDC OUT x lt N Ww 5 7 6 External DC 24 V power supply An external power supply DC 24 V can be connected to control terminals X13 1 X13 2 The external power supply enables parameter configuration maintenance of input output functions and communi cation even while the mains voltage is switched off Input voltage range DC 24 V 10 Rated input current Max 1 0 A typically 0 45 A Peak inrush current Typically lt 15 A max 100 ps External fuse Via standard fuse elements for rated current characteristic slow Safety Safety extra low voltage SELV according to EN 61800 5 1 NOTE The digital inputs and the DC 24 V terminal of the electronic control equipment can withstand external voltage up to DC 30 V
51. Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 This document General information about the documentation vw Bonfiglioli 1 3 Obligation This user manual must be read before commissioning and complied with Anybody entrusted with tasks in connection with the e transport e assembly e _ installation of the frequency inverter and e operation of the frequency inverter must have read and understood the user manual and in particular the safety instructions in order to prevent personal and material losses 1 4 Copyright In accordance with applicable law against unfair competition this user manual is a certificate Any copyrights relating to it shall remain with BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH Europark Fichtenhain B6 47807 Krefeld Germany These user manual is intended for the operator of the frequency inverter Any disclosure or copying of this document exploitation and communication of its contents as hardcopy or electronically shall be forbidden unless permitted expressly Any non compliance will constitute an offense against the copyright law dated 09 September 1965 the law against unfair competition and the Civil Code and may result in claims for damages All rights relating to patent utility model or design registration reserved 1 5 Storage The documentation form an integral part of the frequency inverter It must be stored such that it is accessible to operating staff at all times In case the frequency inverter is sold to other use
52. Options 12 4 Line choke Line chokes reduce mains harmonics and reactive power The line choke must be installed between mains connection and input filter In chapter 11 2 Device data the devices that require a line choke are marked L1 L2 L3 N 1 Line choke 2 Input filter 12 4 1 1x230 V connection Frequency inverter Recommend Rated cur Power dissipa lphase operation ed line choke rent tion Type Type Agile 202 kW A W 01 0 09 02 0 12 03 0 18 05 0 25 LCVS006 6 8 07 0 37 09 0 55 11 0 75 LCVS008 8 8 13 1 1 15 15 LCVS015 15 12 18 2 2 LCVS018 18 15 19 3 0 On request 21 3 0 On request Usage allowed using the maximum continous line current of 18 A Line choke 297 vw Bonfiglioli 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli 12 4 2 230 V connection Frequency inverter Recommend Rated cur Inductance Power dissipa 3phase operation ed line choke rent tion Typ Typ Agile 202 kW A mH W 01 1 0 18 02 1 0 25 03 1 0 37 LCVT004 4 7 32 20 05 1 0 55 07 1 0 75 09 1 1 1 LCVT006 6 4 88 25 111 1 5 LCVT008 8 3 66 30 13 1 2 2 LCVT010 10 2 93 30 152 3 0 LCVT015 15 1 95 45 18 2 4 0 LCVT018 18 1 63 70 193 5 5 LCVT025 25 1 17 70 213 7 5 LCVT034 34 0 86 85 12 4 3 3x400 V con
53. Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli The Positioning distance 460 with parameter value 0 000U default defines a direct stop of the drive with the deceleration behavior selected in parameter Operation mode 630 and the selected Deceleration clockwise 421 If a Positioning distance 460 is set the positioning is effected at the set deceleration The Signal correction 461 of the signal run time from the measurement point to the frequency inverter is not used if it is set to 0 ms The Load correction 462 can compensate a faulty positioning by the load behavior By default this function is deactivated i e set to 0 The Activity after positioning 463 is defined by operation mode 0 End positioning The Waiting Time 464 is not considered because operation mode 0 is selected for the parameter Action after positioning 463 Parameter Revolutions 470 shows the actual positioning distance and enables direct comparison to the required Positioning distance 460 In the case of deviations a Signal correction 461 or Load correction 462 can be performed 7 4 Error and warning behavior Operation of the frequency inverter with the connected load is monitored continuously The monitor ing functions can be parameterized with the corresponding limit values specifically for the relevant application If the limits were set below the switch off limit of the frequency inverter an error switch off can be prevented by suitable mea
54. Reference frequency decreases by 0 1 Hz A At Y The reference frequency is reset to its initial value If a negative reference value is set the drive is accelerated by pressing the button V The reference value is increased in negative direction Limit The reference values are limited via parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequen cy 419 Direction of rotation reversal If parameter Minimum Frequency 418 is set to zero the direction of rotation of the drive can be re versed via the motorpoti function NOTE In order to be able to select menu Poti F on the operator panel Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 must be set to 5 Keypad Motorpot By default Reference Frequency Source 2 492 is set to 5 Keypad Motorpot 160 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Keypad motorpoti as reference value The function Keypad motorpoti can be selected via the following parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 Reference Frequency Source 2 492 See chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel If you leave menu Poti F the drive cannot be controlled via the operator panel and remains in the previous status For starting stopping and reversing the direction of rotation of the drive via the operator panel pa rameter Local Remote 412 must be set appropriately Selection 3 Control
55. Setting frequency can be linked to the functions of the frequency inverter Description Min Max Fact sett Setting Frequency 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 3 00 Hz 517 Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 2 00 Hz Setting Frequency 510 Stator Frequency 210 Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta 517 Digital output l 164 Setting Frequency l If Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta 517 gt Setting Frequency 510 the output is never reset after the first switching on Set up fitting values during commissioning Operation mode OUTID X13 5 531 digital output or Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 532 or Operation mode OUT3D X11 6 533 digital input output or 4 Setting frequency Digital Source MFO1D 554 multifunction output Setting frequency 510 For linking to functions Set the value Hz 164 Setting frequency 7 6 5 3 Reference value reached 549 Reference Value Reached Tolerance Band In operation mode 5 Reference frequency reached for a digital output a message is generated via the corresponding output when the actual frequency has reached the reference value In operation mode 6 Reference percentage reached for a digital output a message is generated via the corresponding output when the actual percentage has reached the reference value Signal source 163 Reference frequency reached or 178 Reference percentage reached can be linked to the functions of
56. The operation modes to switch off the I O s settings 12 21 or 23 have the following effects e The digital inputs are no longer evaluated the last known values remain inter nally i e Digital inputs 250 e The digital outputs are set to zero potential internally the values are set to zero i e Digital outputs 254 e The output X13 4 DC 10Vout is switched to zero potential e The analogue inputs are further evaluated i e Analog Input 251 e The analogue outputs are set to zero potential internally the values are set to zero i e Analog Output 257 For the the digital inputs settings 12 21 or 23 of the energy saving function Pull up PNP Logic or Pull down NPN Logic resistances are switched on to minimize the internal losses When the energy saving function is activated the digital inputs carry up to DC 24 V PNP logic or DC 0 V NPN logic Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends not to use the settings 12 21 and 23 for the engery saving function if e The digital input signals are used for Agile devices and third party products at the same time e The digital input signals on the wire are connected with Pull down PNP logic or Pull up PNP logic resistances to Ground or DC 24 V in example due to interference resistance The Standby mode of the frequency inverter is switched off Factory setting The Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable
57. _ UC US yo_ _400 0V 5 0V_ cay FC 0 50 00 Hz 0 00 Hz The Rise Frequency 602 FK is entered as a percentage of the Cut Off Frequency 604 FC the default value is f 10 Hz The output voltage for the default Voltage Rise 601 is calculated as U 92 4 V UC US 400V 5V u C J ecro sus a u KOEN 2 5012 5v 1 1 924v 212 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Linear V f characteristic Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 8 1 Dynamic voltage pre control 605 Dyn Voltage Pre Control The Dyn Voltage Pre Control 605 accelerates the control behavior of the current limit controller parameter Operation Mode 610 and of the voltage controller parameter Operation Mode 670 The output voltage value resulting from the V F characteristic is changed by addition of the calculated voltage pre control No Description Min Max Fact sett 605 Dyn Voltage Pre Control 0 200 100 7 9 Control functions With the control function the control reactions can be set up fitting to the application 7 9 1 Intelligent current limits 573 Operation Mode intelligent current limits The current limits to be set according to the application avoid inadmissible loading of the connected load and prevent a fault switch off of the frequency inverter The function extends the current control ler available in the control system The overload reserve of the frequency inverter can be used opti mally by means of the i
58. change of the reference value or after a stop or brake command Minimum Frequency in Hz Minimum motor speed Hz The frequency will not drop below this value even if a lower reference frequency is selected Maximum Frequency in Hz Maximum motor speed Hz The frequency will not rise above this value even if a higher reference frequency is selected Commissioning Setup complete and ready for operation Finish the guided commissioning The device executes a reset 2 sec onds after the message done is visible the reset is done automati cally Drive enabled For further setting options select Para menu or start the drive Via the operator panel or via signals at control terminals Start motor via operator panel Select local menu for manual operation Select Poti F motor potentiometer menu Switch on STOA X11 3 and STOB X13 3 Press RUN button The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 minimum frequency Factory setting 3 50 Hz Using the arrow keys set the speed Start the drive via signals at control terminals Switch on Start clockwise at IN1D X11 4 or Start anticlockwise at IN2D X11 5 The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 minimum frequency Factory setting 3 50 Hz By means of a voltage 0 10 V on MFI1 X12 3 set the speed For potentiometer connection refer to chapter 5 7 1 Circuit for control via control terminals Optional optimization o
59. in ex ample 10 than the values of the master drive These increased values are to ensure that the slave drive can follow the master drive in dynamic operation cases e For a synchronous start of the master drive and the slave drive set the Minimum Frequency 418 of the slave drive to 0 in order to prevent an early start of the slave drive if the controller enable signal is present e Select an Operation Mode 689 Via parameters Gear Factor Numerator 685 and Gear Factor Denominator 686 set the required transmission ratio In order to avoid time delays during the processing of the repetition frequency the slave frequency inverter should be enabled before the master frequency inverter the direction of rotation must be defined via the digital inputs IN1D and IN2D at the slave drive f The reference frequency is transmitted but not the direction of rotation In this case 7 6 Control inputs and outputs The control inputs and outputs can be parameterized freely All hardware inputs and outputs are pre set to frequently used functions by default for simple commissioning 7 6 1 Multifunction input MFI 1 452 Operation Mode MFI 1 Multifunction input 1 Multifunction input MFI1 can be configured as a voltage current or a digital input In the configuration as a digital input the evaluation can be selected as PNP high switching or NPN low switching Depending on the selected Operation Mode MFI 452 various function
60. points Data set for Select Setup menu Press ENT setup The data set selection is displayed Select the data set where the entered and measured motor data and parameter values are to be saved Select data set 0 if all data sets are to contain the same parameter values Select one of the data sets 1 4 for commissioning of several mo tors or for different operating points Example For auto set up auto tuning and motor data select data set 1 d5Eb 4 d5Ek SEELUP dSEt OG Data set Change pa Set parameter values in a certain data set rameter val In menu Para select the parameter to be set ue Keeping ENT pressed press arrow key The last digit shows the data set Release ENT and press again Now you can set the parameter value using the arrow buttons Example Set nominal motor voltage P370 in data set 2 P 3102 4005 U apt Value of P370 in data set 2 Keep pressed Data set Switch over Select digital inputs for P70 73 IN3D and P71 74 IN4D 7 6 6 11 data set Select a data set value via these digital inputs PID controller technology controller Factory setting Chapter Process control e g pressure flow rate temperature Switch on Set P475 or P492 to 30 Technology controller 7 5 1 Reference For P476 or P494 select the source specifying the reference value 7 5 2 Value Actual value For P478 select the input where the actual value is applied The actual 7 9 3 value can also be recei
61. the warning status is displayed as the sum of the individual warning codes Via the actual value parameters Warning 269 Application Warnings 273 Warning status 356 in error environment and Application warning status 367 in error environment all warnings present at the time of the error are displayed AXXXX ABCDE Warning code Abbreviation for the warning The warning masks created through parameters Create warning mask 536 and Create warning mask application 626 have no influence on the warnings displayed 356 Warning Status The parameter displays the warning at failure switch off Meaning of code displayed by parameter Warning Status 356 A 00 00 No warning message present A 00 01 Ixt Frequency inverter overloaded A0002 or A0004 A 00 02 IxtSt Overload for 60 s relative to the nominal output of the frequen cy inverter A 00 04 Ixtlt P overload for 1 s relative to the nominal output of the frequency 336 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Warning status and warning status application Operational and error diagnosis w Bonfiglioli Maximum heat sink temperature T minus the Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp 407 reached f Maximum inside temperature T minus the Warning Limit Inside Temp 408 A 00 10 Ti re ched A 00 20 Lim The controller stated in Controller Status 275 limits the reference value A 00 40 INIT Frequency inverter is being initialized A 00 08 Tc A 01 00 Mains Phase Supervision 576 reports a phase
62. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 48 278 321 Assembly variants 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli 12 9 3 2 Size 2 3 3 0 kW to 5 5 kW 1 5 kW to 2 2 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 152 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 192 5 5 196 ey 58 i eer 228 278 10 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 322 Options Assembly variants Options vw Bonfiglioli 12 9 3 3 Size 3 3 5 5 kW to 11 0 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 193 3 5 5 5 5 21 3 3 7 5 7 5 22 3 9 2 23 3 11 125 aaas 139 67 lt gt J aT 278 228 10 dme eenen eo li lt I
63. 1 1 1 Selection of Data SOUS rasiiininisdnaan saaana aa aAa a T a ERASE 54 6 1 1 2 Menu for communication SCCUP ecceee eee ceeeeeeee eee eeee ee eeaeaaaaaeeeeeeeseesaaaaaaaaeeeeeeesaeed 55 6 1 2 Motor control with operator Panel eceececeseeeeeee eset eee ee ea ee eater eeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeseasaaaaes 56 6 1 3 Seta parameter to the factory Setting c ceeeeeeee eee eeee eee eeee teens ee eaeeaaaaeeeeeeeeseeeaeanaaes 60 6 1 4 Restrict the Scope Of operation eee ere eran nee eee saan nen eaaa nett 60 4 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 This document Content vw Bonfiglioli 6 2 First COMMISSIONING ceceeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeneaeeseennaseesenoueaseeseanageeseeneaseesenonsenees 60 6 21 OVERVIGW sasceavebesetavenvec aia aa ane cob vans badcae awe st aaa Ear aa 61 6 2 2 Start first commissioning of an asynchronous MOLOS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeenes 61 6 2 3 Start first commissioning of a SyNCHrONOUS MOOT ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeees 65 6 2 4 Status messages during commissioning SS ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeseeeaaananes 68 6 2 5 Warnings during commissioning SA cccseeeeeeeee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeesaaeaaaaeeeeeeeeseeeaeaaaaes 68 6 2 6 Error messages during commissioning SF ceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeseeeaaanaaes 70 6 2 7 Check direction of rotation c ceeeeeeee cec
64. 18 kW to 5 5 kW 1 0 09 kW to 2 2 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 s 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 11 1 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 15 2 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 19 2 7 5 5 Shield sheets 293 Assemble the shield sheet 1 together with the fixing bracket 2 onto the mounting plate 3 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Go Bonfiglioli Options s He gt I l mnt S 40 71 5 13 10 l 3 S TO 13 12 2 2 2 Size 3 3 5 5 kW to 11 0 kW 1 3kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply iph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 193 3 5 5 5 5 21 3 3 7 5 7 5 22 3 9 2 23 3 11 e Assemble the shield sheet 1 togeth er with the fixing bracket 2 onto the mounting plate 3 A A 2 294 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Shield sheets Options 21 4 90 67 12 3 Brake resistor The brake resistors convert the regenerative energy into heat when the drive is braking The resistor must be selected according to the duty cycle and
65. 2 Analog Value MFI2A 3 Fixed Frequency 4 Motorpot via Digital Inputs 10 Repetition Frequency 20 Fieldbus Reference Value Parameter descriptions GS Bonfiglioli 2502 PLC Output Frequency 2 The reference frequency channel can be used in all configurations parameter Configuration 30 Frequency output 2 of a PLC function block is the refer ence value source See application manual PLC Block diagram The block diagram shows the reference frequency specification options Zero o Analog Value MFI1A i Analog Value MFI2A Fixed Frequency Motorpot via 4 Digital Inputs ii Reference Frequency Source 1 475 eke Keypad Motorpot gt o Repetition Frequency 10 Fieldbus Reference Value Technology Controller Electronic Gear 2501 2502 PLC Output Frequency 1 PLC Output Frequency 2 Blocking frequencies Ist Blocking Frequency 447 f1 2nd Blocking Frequency 448 f2 Frequency Hysteresis 449 A Jw IN SN Reference Frequency Source 2 492 0 I Zero Analog Value MFI1A 1 I I l I 2 l Analog Value MFI2A I I l l l I Fixed Frequency 3 Motorpot via a Digital Inputs Q f Keypad Motorpot 2 5 O Repetition Frequency F Fieldbus Reference Value 20 30 Technology Controller Electronic Gear 40 PLC Output Frequency 1 201 2502 PLC Output Frequency 2 Reference frequency channel Operation Mode 493 0 Reference
66. 2 Reference Percentage Source 2 Selection 752 Operation Mode Selection 7 5 2 2 amp Operation mode IN2D Selection 767 Rep Freq Divider 1 8192 7 6 7 2 Trigger Threshold Apea ee 7 10 4 Trigger Threshold o a 7 10 5 Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 0 00 600 00 7 5 3 3 2 Setting Frequency 0 00 999 99 7 6 5 2 ais Frequency Switch Off Del 0 00 999 99 76 5 2 Minimum Reference Percentage 0 00 300 00 7 5 2 1 Maximum Reference Percentage 0 00 300 00 7 5 2 1 520 Fixed Percentage1 521 Fixed Percentage 2 522 Fixed Percentage 3 523 Fixed Percentage4 346 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Parameters Menu PARA Parameter list v Bonfiglioli Description Setting range Actual Percentage RAM aed 300 00 300 00 Op Mode OUT1D X13 5 Selection 765 Op Mode OUT2D X10 Relay Selection 76 5 Op Mode OUT3D X11 6 Selection 765 Op Mode ext Error Selection 745 536 Create Warning Mask Selection 7 6 5 8 Reference Value Reached Toler o 549 ante Band Yo 0 01 20 00 7 6 5 3 550 Operation Mod
67. 2 7 Increase of switching frequency Increasing the switching frequency is permissible if the output current is reduced Comply with the applicable standards and regulations for this operating point The specified output currents are the maximum values for continuous operation 230 V devices Switching frequency Switching frequency Frequency inverter 1phase Operation 3phase Operation Nominal Power kW lphase 3phase Type 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16 kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16 kHz 01 1 0 09 0 18 0 8A 0 8A 0 8A 0 5A 1 3 1 3 1 3 0 9A 02 1 0 12 0 25 10A 1 0A i 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 0 A 03 1 0 18 0 37 1 3A 1 3A 2 0 2 0 2 0 1 3 A 05 1 0 25 0 55 1 5A 15A 3 0 3 0 3 0 2 0A 07 1 0 37 0 75 20A 2 0A 3 5 3 5 3 5 2 3A 09 1 0 55 1 1 3 0A 3 0A 5 0 5 0 5 0 3 3 A 111 0 75 1 5 i 3 5A 3 5A 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0A 13 1 1 1 2 2 A 50A 50A i 9 0 9 0 9 0 6 0 A 152 1 5 3 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 8 0A 18 2 2 2 4 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 10 0A 193 3 0 5 5 12 0 A 12 0 A 12 0A 8 0A 21 0 21 0 21 0 14 0A 213 3 0 7 5 12 0A 12 0A 12 0A 8 0A 26 0 26 0 26 0 17 3A 400 V devices Frequency inverter Switching frequency Type 02 1 03 1 05 1 07 1 09 1 111 izi 2a 55A 55A 55A 37A 152 3 0 75A 75A 75A 50A 18 2 192 55 120A 120A 120A 80A 193 55 130A 130A 130A 87A 213 223 s2 20a 20A 200A
68. 2013 After first commissioning Commissioning 6 5 vw Bonfiglioli Typical functions The tables show a selection of setting options Control type and motor type Control type and motor type can also be selected during commissioning via operator panel Setup If the control type is changed a device reset is executed immediately Factory setting Chapter V f characteris Set P30 to 110 IM sensor less control SLC 7 1 2 tic asynchro For P606 select 1 linear or 2 quadratic 7 7 8 2 nous motor P600 P605 Set V f characteristic 7 7 P620 Set start behavior 7 3 2 P630 Set stop behavior 7 3 3 Field orientated Set P30 to 410 IM sensor less field oriented control 7 1 2 control P780 P781 Set start behavior 7 3 2 asynchronous P630 Set stop behavior 7 3 3 motor Set functions of field orientated control 7 9 5 Field orientated Set P30 to 610 PMSM sensor less field oriented control 2 7 1 2 control P780 P781 Set start behavior 7 3 2 synchronous P630 Set stop behavior 7 3 2 motar Set functions of field oriented control 7 9 5 Set motor speed reference frequency Factory setting Chapter Operator panel Set P492 to 5 Keypad motorpoti 7 5 1 In Local menu select function Poti F Using the arrow keys set the output frequency motor speed Analog input Set P475 to 1 analog value MFI1A 7 5 1 Voltage input at MFI1 terminal X12 3 The motor speed
69. 2013 Operating Instructions Agile mn N JIN N OY 107 U mn GS Bonfiglioli Parameter list No Description Unit Setting range Chapter 237 Reset Memory Selection 9 4 f 6 2 10 2 276 CAN Interface CM CAN X12 Selection CM CAN 370 Rated Voltage V 0 17 Ufn inc 2 Urn 7 2 1 371 Rated Current A 0 01 Iey 10 O Irn 7 2 1 372 Rated Speed U min 30 60000 7 2 1 v 8 373 No of Pole Pairs 1 24 7 2 1 374 Rated Cosine Phi 0 01 1 00 7 2 1 375 Rated Frequency Hz 10 00 1000 00 7 2 1 376 Rated Mech Power kW 0 1 Prin 10 Prin 7 2 1 v 8 377 Stator Resistance mOhm 0 65535 7 2 2 v E 378 Leakage Coeff 1 0 20 0 7 2 2 383 Voltage Constant mVmin 0 0 6500 0 7 2 2 384 Stator Inductance mH 0 1 500 0 7 2 2 f 6 2 10 2 385 CAN Baud Rate Selection CM CAN 6 2 10 2 387 CAN Node Number 1 127 CM CAN 388 Error Behaviour Selection CM CAN 389 Factor Actual System Value _ 100 000 100 000 7 10 9 f 6 2 10 2 391 Profibus Node ID 0 126 CM PDPV1 392 State transition 5 Selection CM 394 VABus CM Node ID 1 30 6 2 10 2 395 Protocol CM X21 Selection CM 485
70. 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 5 1 6 JOG frequency 81 J OG Start 489 J OG Frequency The drive rotates at a preset frequency when the JOG function is started The rotary frequency can be set via the parameter JOG Frequency 489 The JOG function can be started Via the button RUN on the operator panel The JOG menu must be selected Via parameter JOG Start 81 The parameter must be assigned a logic signal or a digital input Preconditions for start of JOG function Enable via digital inputs STOA and STOB must be set Signals for parameters Start Clockwise 68 and Start Anticlockwise 69 must not be set No Description Min Max Fact sett JOG Frequency 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz 5 00 Hz Positive values of JOG Frequency 489 effect clockwise rotation negative values effect anticlockwise rotation cel di nof cianal source The selected signal source starts the JOG function The drive is g accelerated to the value of JOG Frequency 489 Acceleration and deceleration If enable is set and the JOG function is started the drive is accelerated at the set frequency ramps to the value of JOG Frequency 489 If the signal JOG Start 81 is reset or the button RUN is released the drive is decelerated at the set frequency ramps until it comes to a standstill Limit The output frequency is limited to the value of Maximum Frequency 419 There is no limitation to the value of Minim
71. 21 09 1 0 55 1 1 BR 160 100 29 15 11 1 0 75 1 5 BR 432 37 57 29 131 1 1 BR 432 37 39 2 2 BR 432 37 20 15 2 1 5 3 0 BR 432 37 29 14 18 2 2 2 4 0 BR 432 37 20 11 193 3 0 5 5 BR 667 24 22 12 213 3 0 BR 667 24 22 7 5 2x BR 432 37 11 1 2x BR432 37 parallel For the connection of a brake resistor refer to chapter 5 6 5 Brake resistor 12 3 2 400 V devices The following table shows the cross reference of brake resistors that can be used for a majority of applications The column Percentage duty cycle shows how long inside a duty cycle the brake resistor can be operated with nominal power Frequency inverter Recommended Power at percentage duty cycle brake resistor cycle time 120 s Type Type Percentage duty cycle Agile 402 kW BR 213 300 02 2 0 25 BR 213 300 85 03 2 0 37 BR 213 300 58 05 2 0 55 BR 213 300 39 07 2 0 75 BR 213 300 28 09 2 1 1 BR 213 300 19 11 2 1 5 BR 213 300 14 13 2 2 2 BR 213 300 10 15 2 3 0 BR 471 136 16 18 2 4 0 BR 471 136 12 19 2 5 5 BR 471 136 9 19 2 5 5 BR 1330 48 24 21 2 7 5 BR 1330 48 18 22 2 9 2 BR 1330 48 14 23 2 11 BR 1330 48 12 1 the maximum breaking power of this combination is limited to 4 4kW For the connection of a brake resistor refer to chapter 5 6 5 Brake resistor Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 296 Brake resistor
72. 30 13200 VABus on X21 m _ 3500 4 4 2 N A 4800 B 4 VABus on CM Module oE id ENT S bAuUd END 2400 ENT F See END o END Node Number Baud Rate Baud Interface Setting VABus on X21 P394 CM P1501 X21 P10 CM P395 P1500 X21 78 and on CM Module Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Commissioning of a communication interface Commissioning TCP IP Parameter WwW Bonfiglioli Vectron Display 1432 Set up the IP address This is done in 4 steps The dots mark the current position Addr ES 1433 Set up the Subnet mask This is done in 4 steps The dots mark the current position SUbnEE 1434 Set up the Gateway address This is done in 4 steps The dots mark the current position SAEE 1435 Set up the DNS server address This is done in 4 steps The dots mark the current position dnS 1436 If a DHCP Server should and can be used this setting is used 0 Off Disabled 1 On Enabled When the DHCP is enabled the above settings are not re quired dhiP APPLY Must be used after the configuration of the above settings Only if the settings are applied they are taken over If this was not successful an error or timeout mes sage might occur APPLY RELOAD Reload can be used to reload the default values If this was not successful an error or timeout message might occur rELoAd QO A P wv
73. 30 00 7 9 3 v 8 620 Operation Mode Selection 7 3 2 621 Amplification 0 01 10 00 7 3 2 622 Integral Time ms 1 30000 7 3 2 vV E 623 Starting Current A 0 0 Oc len 7 3 2 v 8 624 Frequency Limit Hz 0 00 100 00 7 3 2 625 Brake Release Time ms 5000 5000 7 3 2 626 Create Appl Warning Mask i Selection 7 6 5 9 630 Operation Mode Selection 7 3 3 vl A 631 Braking Current A 0 00 V2 Ten 7 3 6 632 Braking Time S 0 0 200 0 7 3 6 vV E 633 Demagnetizing Time 5 0 1 30 0 7 3 6 634 Amplification 0 00 10 00 7 3 6 635 Integral Time ms 0 1000 7 3 6 Switch Off Threshold Stop Func 637 m Off Threshold Stop Func 0 0 100 0 733 638 Holding Time Stop Function S 0 0 200 0 7 3 3 645 Operation Mode Flying Start Selection 7 3 5 651 Operation Mode Selection 7 3 4 652 PWM Offset 100 00 100 00 7 6 7 1 348 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Parameters Menu PARA Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli Description Setting range 653
74. 6 6 4 Motor potentiometer 62 Frequency Motorpoti Up 63 Frequency Motorpoti Down The reference frequency of the drive can be set via digital control signals See chapter 7 5 3 3 1 Control via reference frequency channel Frequency Motorpoti Up 62 7 Off Frequency Motorpoti Down 63 7 Off 72 Percent Motorpoti Up 73 Percent Motorpoti Down The reference percentage can be set via digital control signals See chapter 7 5 3 3 2 Control via reference percentage channel Percent Motorpoti Up 62 7 Off Percent Motorpoti Down 63 7 Off 7 6 6 5 Fixed frequency changeover 66 Fixed Frequency Change Over 1 67 Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 131 Fixed Frequency Change Over 3 By combining the logic states of the fixed frequency changeover modes 1 2 and 3 the fixed frequen cies 1 to 8 parameters 480 to 488 can be selected See chapter 7 5 1 3 Fixed frequencies Fixed Frequency Change Over 166 74 IN4D Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 67 7 Off Fixed Frequency Change Over 3131 7 Off 7 6 6 6 Fixed percentage changeover 75 Fixed Percent Change Over 1 76 Fixed Percent Change Over 2 By combining the logic states of Fixed Percent Change Over 1 75and Fixed Percent Change Over 2 76 the fixed percentages 1 to 4 Parameters 520 to 523 can be selected See chapter 7 5 2 3 Fixed percentages Fixed Percent Change Over 1 75 7 Off Fixed Percent Change Over 2 76 7 Off 201 Control
75. 60 s the output current is reduced to the rated current which also de pends on the switching frequency If the output current has already been reduced due to the fact that the long term overload has used up the short term overload is no longer available even if it has not been used up beforehand The defined overload reserve Ixt of the frequency inverter is available again after a power reduction lasting 10 minutes 213 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions 574 Power Limit 575 Limitation Time The threshold selected via parameter Operation Mode 573 is monitored If parameter Operation Mode 573 is selected to motor or heat sink temperature monitoring the power is reduced to the val ue of Power Limit 574 once the limit value is reached The power is reduced until the temperature has dropped sufficiently You can set an additional time Limitation Time 575 for which the limitation after falling below the limit value should be maintained In motor operation the output current and the speed will be reduced The load behavior of the motor must depend on the speed The power limit should be selected as small as possible in order to give the drive sufficient time to cool down The reference value is the rated output of the frequency inverter or the set rated power of the motor _ Desenipaon Min Max Fact sett 40 00 95 00 80 00 575 Limitation Time 5 min 300 min 15 min Outpu
76. 74 IN4D to a function P71 7 6 6 IN5D X12 2 Assign signal 75 IN5D to a function P103 7 6 6 Evaluation logic P559 Select PNP active 24 V or NPN active 0 V for IN1D 7 6 6 IN5D IN3D OUT3D P558 Set as input or output 7 6 4 X11 6 Input Assign signal 73 IN3D to a function P70 7 6 6 Output Select a function via P533 7 6 5 Evaluation logic P559 PNP active 24 V or NPN active 0 V Operating Instructions Agile 92 06 2013 Typical functions Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli Factory setting Chapter MFI1 X12 3 P452 Select analog voltage current or digital PNP NPN 7 6 1 Analog For setting of reference frequency Set P475 or P492 to 1 Analog Value MFI1A 7 5 1 Setting range P418 P419 7 5 1 1 For setting of reference percentage Set P476 or P494 to 1 Analog Value MFI1A 7 5 2 Setting range P518 P519 7 5 2 1 Adjustable characteristic if P452 6 or 7 7 6 1 1 2 Digital Assign signal 76 MFI1D to a function 7 6 6 MFI2 X12 4 P562 Select analog voltage current or digital PNP NPN 7 6 2 Analog For setting of reference frequency Set P475 or P492 to 2 analog value MFI2A 7 5 1 Setting range P418 P419 7 5 1 1 For setting of reference percentage Set P476 or P494 to 2 analog value MFI2A 7 5 2 Setting range P518 P519 7 5 2 1 Adjustable characteristic if P462
77. 9 2 228 Internal Reference Frequency Hz 0 00 fmax 9 1 229 Reference Percentage Value 300 00 9 1 230 Actual Percentage Value 300 00 9 1 231 Peak Value Long Term Ixt 0 00 100 00 9 4 232 Peak Value Short Term Ixt 0 00 100 00 9 4 235 Flux Forming Voltage V 0 0 Urn 9 2 236 Torque Forming Voltage V 0 0 Urn 9 2 238 Absolute Flux Value 0 0 100 0 9 2 239 Reactive Current A 0 0 Imax 9 2 240 Actual Speed 1 min O 60000 9 2 241 Actual Frequency Hz 0 0 999 99 9 2 242 Actual System Value 0 0 999 99 9 3 1 243 _ Digital Inputs Hardware a 00 255 339 Actual values Menu Actual 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x E Bonfiglioli Parameter list No Description Unit Display range Chapter Working Hours Counter Operation Hours Counter Capacitor Temperature Active DataSet o o o Mea ooo Digital Inputs 00 255 252 Repetition Frequency Input Hz 0 0 999 99 9 1 253 Analog Input MFI2A 254 Digital Outputs 00 255 91 255 Heat Sink Temperature 256 Inside Temperature 257 Analog Output MFO1IA 258 PWM Input 259 Actualerror o Px OS 260 Actual error O OXFRFE 269 Warmingss TAK 270 Warnings S O OxFFFF bit coded CM 273 Application Warning 274 Application Warnings p fAxxx 0 OxFFFF bit coded CM 275 Controll
78. Analog factor at 0 With parameters Analog factor at 100 687 and Analog factor at 0 688 the range of the gear factor is scaled For parameter Operation Mode 689 setting 2 Analog Numerator P 686 Denomi nator or 3 P 685 Numerator Analog Denominator must be selected The scaling is done via the Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 via which the signal sources for determining the reference value are selected With the signal source selected e g an analog signal at a multifunction input the gear factor can be changed during operation No Description Min Max Fact sett 687 _ Analog factor at 100 0 00 100 00 688 Analog factor at 0 0 00 100 00 For a block diagram of the electronic gear refer to chapter 7 5 4 2 Operation modes of electronic gear Example In an application a slave drive is to follow a master drive with the speed of the slave having to be increased continuously without changing the speed specified by the master The gear factor control is to be done using an analog voltage signal 0 10 V 165 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions Configuration example e Via parameter Operation Mode 689 set operation mode 2 Analog Numerator P 686 Denomi nator for the electronic gear for a change of the gear factor by the numerator e Set the minimum and maximum limit for the numerator
79. Curve Point X1 454 In the settings 6 Voltage characteristic or 7 Current characteristic of parameter Operation Mode MFII 452 the following characteristic is effective Y X2 98 Y2 100 ONET AA BE E oy i Point 1 X1 2 00 10 V 0 20 V Y1 0 00 50 00 Hz 0 00 Hz Point 2 X2 98 00 10 V 9 80 V Y2 100 00 50 00 Hz 50 00 Hz ov Ja X 10 V 0 mA 0 2 V 20 mA Neg maximum value The characteristic can be adjusted via parameters 454 457 of the application The freely configurable characteristic enables setting a tolerance at the ends as well as a reversal of the direction of rotation The following example shows the inverse reference value specification with additional reversal of the direction of rotation This is often used in pressure control systems eal value Point 1 nee etnies X1 2 00 10 V 0 20 V Y1 100 00 50 00 Hz 50 00 Hz 50 Hz 0y Point 2 20 mA X2 98 00 7 10 V 9 80 V oy li Y2 80 00 50 00 Hz 40 00 Hz 0 mA The change of direction of rotation is done in this exam ple at an analog input signal of 5 5 V pos neg maxi mum figure TAA E E aren anteretuses a X2 98 Y2 80 The definition of the analog input characteristic can be calculated via the two point form of the line equation The speed Y of the drive is controlled according to the analog control signal X _Y2 Y1 K X1 Y1 X2 X1 171 Control
80. Deceleration anticlock wise 423 is applied Status Keep pressed for 1 second The drive status is displayed Change RUN ENT The direction of rotation changes direction of rotation Change sign NT Sign reversal of the reference value The direction of rotation is reversed at the next start 1 Factory setting of parameter Reference frequency source 2 492 In the factory setting the reference frequency value can be set via operator panel keypad 2 In the factory setting the reference frequency value can be positive clockwise rotation or negative anticlock wise rotation 3 Value 0 cannot be set if parameter Minimum Frequency 418 factory setting 3 50 Hz limits the setting range 56 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operator panel Commissioning Bonfiglioli Vectron The key RUN starts the drive if the enable signals at digital inputs STOA terminal X11 3 and STOB terminal X13 3 are switched on The start or stop of the drive is A possible even if menu Poti F is currently not selected For example the start of the drive is possible if menu PARA for parameter settings or menu ACTUAL for actual value dis play is selected Display of drive status The drive rotates at the reference frequency value The reference frequency value is the sum of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference frequency source 2 492 Lu un co x The drive is stopped The alternatin
81. First the amplification is increased until the actual value overshoots distinctly during the control process This is indicated by a strong os cillation of the speed and by the running noises In the next step reduce the amplification slightly 1 2 3 4 etc Then reduce the integral time larger I component until the actual value overshoots only slightly in the control process If necessary check the speed control settings in the case of dynamic operations acceleration decel eration The frequency at which the switch over of the controller parameters is effected can be set via parameter Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 7 9 5 3 1 Limitation of speed controller The output signal of the speed controller is the torque forming current component Isq The output and the I portion of the speed controller can be limited via parameters Current Limit 728 Current Limit Generator Op 729 Torque Limit 730 Torque Limit Generator Operation 731 or Power Limit 739 Power Limit Generator Operation 740 The limits of the proportional portion are set via param eters P Comp Torque Upper Limit 732 and P Comp Torque Lower Limit 733 728 Current Limit 729 Current Limit Generator Op The output value of the speed controller is limited by an upper and a lower current limit From the set values for Current limit 728 and Current limit generator operation 729 the limits are calculated considering the set magnetizing current The parameter values are ent
82. Instructions Agile 6 2o Bonfiglioli Technical data 11 2 2 AGL202 3 0 75 to 2 2 kW 1 0 37 to 1 1 kW 230 V Agile 202 Selected Mains supp 3ph E motor shaft power Output current I A 20 f 3 5 3 0 5 0 3 5 6 0 5 0 9 0 Long term over curet 605 e AE Rds EA E 3s a p af ae re feo se fro aol no overload current 1 s Switching frequency f kHz 2 4 8 16 R Q 100 100 100 100 37 37 37 Pe af ao fo fo fof se fo 7 9 5 tT Al 55 51 69 67 114 10 8 15 5 14 37 41 Minimum brake resistor Recommended brake resistor I A 6 6 6 6 10 10 16 Bussmann FWP 10A14Fa 200 x 60 x 170 1 1 IP20 EN60529 Mains and motor 0 2 4 flexible with sleeve Terminals terminals 0 2 6 rigid 0 1 1 5 Installation S vertical ee t d Heat sinkfan meea elsloo elez switching frequency 1 According to DIN EN 61800 5 1 2 Dimensions of the basic device Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4 2 Installation for the standard assembly and chapter 12 9 Assembly variants 280 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Device data Technical data vw Bonfiglioli 11 2 3 AGL202 3 3 0 to 4 0 kW 1 1 5 to 2 2 kW 230 V Agile 202 Selected Mains suppl 1ph 3ph 3ph Becomes kw 1 5 3 0 2 2 4 0 motor shaft power Output current I A 60 120
83. Lower Limit 768 in example when switching on a stopped machine or when the Flying start synchronizes the al A lowed frequency is driven to without ramps The torque is only limited by the limitations of the speed controller current and torque Therefore an unexpected dynamic behavior can occur 7 9 5 2 3 Limit Value Sources 769 Frequency upper limit source 770 Frequency lower limit source The frequency can be limited by setting fixed values or linking an analog input The assignment is done for the torque controller via Frequency Upper Limit source 769 and Frequency Upper Limit source 770 The frequency limits of the analog value relate to 0 Hz and Maximum Frequency 419 Setting a torque limit is done for Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The source is the multifunctional input 1 in analog operation mode parameter Operation Mode MFII 452 The scaling re fers to 100 Maximum frequency 419 for the upper limit and 0 0 Hz for the lower limit The source is the multifunctional input 2 in analog operation mode parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562 The scaling re fers to 100 Maximum frequency 419 for the upper limit and 0 0 Hz for the lower limit 1 Analog input MFI1A 2 Analog input MFI2A 10 Fixed limit The selected parameter values are taken into account to limit the speed controller Factory setting 708 RxPDO1 Longi Process data of system bus Refer to instruction
84. Mask eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Warning mask application s s s 195 Warning message Memory card COPYING s s s 255 Warning MESSAGES eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 340 Of auto SCL UP eeeeeeeee cece teteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 68 Warning Status ccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaenees 340 Warranty and liability 12 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CW Bonfiglioli Bonfiglioli worldwide network Bonfiglioli Australia 2 Cox Place Glendenning NSW 2761 Locked Bag 1000 Plumpton NSW 2761 Tel 61 2 8811 8000 Fax 61 2 9675 6605 www bonfiglioli com au sales bonfiglioli com au Bonfiglioli Brazil Travessa Cl udio Armando 171 Bloco 3 CEP 09861 730 Bairro Assun o S o Bernardo do Campo S o Paulo Tel 55 11 4344 1900 Fax 55 11 4344 1906 www bonfigliolidobrasil com br bonfigliolidobrasil bonfiglioli com Bonfiglioli Canada 2 7941 Jane Street Concord Ontario L4K 4L6 Tel 1 905 7384466 Fax 1 905 7389833 www bonfigliolicanada com sales bonfigliolicanada com Bonfiglioli China 19D No 360 Pu Dong Nan Road New Shanghai International Tower 200120 Shanghai Tel 86 21 5054 3357 Fax 86 21 5970 2957 www bonfiglioli cn bdssales bonfiglioli com cn Bonfiglioli Deutschland Sperberweg 12 41468 Neuss Tel 49 02131 2988 0 Fax 49 02131 2988 100 www bonfiglioli de info bonfiglioli de Bonfiglioli Espa a TECNOTRANS BONFIGLIOLI S A Pol Ind Z
85. Over 1 73 IN3D 67 Fixed frequency Change Over 2 74 IN4D 531 Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digi 2 Run signal tal output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal Travelling I application Reference value 2 3 Fixed frequency OL Refirenee Reference frequency o o source 2 49 IN3D IN4D Active fixed value Hz P66 P67 0 Fixed frequency 1 480 10 Fixed frequency 2 481 25 Fixed frequency 3 482 40 Fixed frequency 4 483 50 Fixed frequency Change Over 66 Start _ 1 clockwise 1 Start anti 0 clockwise Enable Fixed frequency Change Over 2 67 Change Over 1 Fixed frequency Change Over 1 Analog value MFI1A o e Ve 4 Reference frequency source 1 475 Error signal Run signal Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Stopping behavior P68 H H l Operation mode P69 iom P68 amp P69 1 Hz P68 amp P69 0 Output 630 frequency T T Frequency limits fmax fmin Min frequency 418 Max frequency 419 clockwise 421 Acceleration clockwise 106 Applications Commissioning 6 7 8 Torque control vw Bonfiglioli The Torque control can be used in applications where a torque should be used as reference value instead of a frequency Via parameter n T Control Change Over 164 a jerk less switch over from Speed Control to Torque Control is possible 100 Torque refer to the calculated Torqu
86. P Manual for Ethernet Module CM EtherNet I P _ i P Application manual PLC Logic linking of digital signals Functions for analog signals such as comparisons and mathematical functions Graphic functional block programming The products for CANopen communication comply with the specifications of the user organization CiA CAN in Automation The products for EtherCAT communication comply with the specifications of the user organization ETG EtherCAT Technology Group 11 This document 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Cw Bonfiglioli General information about the documentation 1 1 This document The present user manual complements the Quick Start Guide for the frequency inverters of the AGL 202 and ACU 402 device series The user manual contains important information on the installation and use in its specified application range Compliance with this user manual contributes to avoiding risks minimizing repair cost and downtimes and increasing the reliability and service live of the frequency inverter For this reason make sure you read the user manual carefully cy inverter BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH shall not be held liable for any damage f Compliance with the documentation is required to ensure safe operation of the frequen caused by any non compliance with the documentation In case any problems occur which are not covered by the documentation sufficiently please contact the manufacturer 1 2 Wa
87. Parameter descriptions 7 5 3 4 Keypad motorpoti Control via operator panel For the parameterization of the control of the motor potentiometer via operator panel it has to be checked if the motor potentiometer is used as frequency reference value or percentage reference value Depending on the parameter settings and how the function is used it can happen that the first actuation of the key doesn t cause a visible reaction In this case the first actuation activates the function 7 5 3 4 1 Control via reference frequency channel The reference frequency of the drive can be set via the operator panel in menu Local Poti F The reference frequency is increased or decreased via the arrow buttons Button A The reference frequency increases at the set value of Ramp Frequency Motorpoti 473 Button Y The reference frequency decreases at the set value of Ramp Frequency Motorpoti 473 Button A pressed briefly The reference frequency is increased by 0 1 Hz each time the button is pressed Button V pressed briefly The reference frequency is reduced by 0 1 Hz each time the button is pressed Press the buttons briefly to fine tune the reference frequency Keypad motor potentiometer Function The reference frequency does not change The reference frequency increases at the set ramp Pressed briefly Reference frequency increases by 0 1 Hz The reference frequency decreases at the set ramp Pressed briefly
88. Short circuits which don t trigger a hardware overcurrent circuit break but cause a current which is 10 greater than the rated current peak value are signaled as earth faults If an error is signaled during a test with connected load the test should be repeated without connect ed load in order to find out if the device or the load is defective If an error is only signaled while the load is connected it is an earth fault in the load or if the DC link terminals are assigned possibly a short circuit between a load branch and a DC link potential If an error is also signaled while the load terminals are not assigned there is a short circuit in the device or an IGBT is defective In the case of a defective IGBT or a short circuit in the device the error will be signaled in several branches while the load is connected as the current can also flow via the load In this case only the messages generated while the load is not connected may be consid ered Non switching IGBTs or non functioning current measurements will not be detected by this test but by Test 2 In this case existing errors which would normally be identified by this test might not be detected T0001 Stop Test stopped by user T0002 Permanent error Non acknowledgeable error present No further test possible T0003 Signals on digitals inputs STOA and STOB for enable missing No enable T0010 At the beginning of the test an ina
89. T rkiye Atat rk Organ ze Sanayi B lgesi 10015 Sk No 17 igli Izmir Tel 90 0 232 328 22 77 pbx Fax 90 0 232 328 04 14 www bonfiglioli com tr info bonfiglioli com tr Bonfiglioli United Kingdom Industrial Solutions Unit 7 Colemeadow Road North Moons Moat Redditch Worcestershire B98 9PB Tel 44 1527 65022 Fax 44 1527 61995 www bonfiglioli com uksales bonfiglioli com Mobile Solutions 3 7 Grosvenor Grange Woolston Warrington Cheshire WA1 4SF Tel 44 1925 852667 Fax 44 1925 852668 www bonfiglioli co uk mobilesales bonfiglioli co uk Bonfiglioli USA 3541 Hargrave Drive Hebron Kentucky 41048 Tel 1 859 334 3333 Fax 1 859 334 8888 www bonfiglioliusa com Bonfiglioli Vietnam Lot C 9D CN My Phuoc Industrial Park 3 Ben Cat Binh Duong Province Tel 84 650 3577411 Fax 84 650 3577422 www bonfiglioli vn salesvn bonfiglioli com GS Bonfiglioli power control and green solutions Bonfiglioli has been designing and developing innovative and reliable power transmission and control solutions for industry mobile machinery and renewable energy applicacations since 1956 Bonfiglioli Riduttori S p A tel 39 051 647 3111 COD VEC 671 R3 Via Giovanni XXIII 7 A fax 39 051 647 3126 40012 Lippo di Calderara di Reno bonfiglioli bonfiglioli com Bologna Italy www bonfiglioli com
90. The maximum possible switching frequency depends on the drive output and the ambient conditions For the required technical data refer to the correspond ing table and the device type diagrams Description Selection Min Fact sett 2kW z 400 Switching Frequency ANT 7 z 16 kHz The factory setting of parameter Switching Frequency 400 depends on the setting of parameter Con figuration 30 401 Min Switching Frequency The heat losses increase proportionally to the load point of the frequency inverter and the switching frequency The automatic reduction adjusts the switching frequency to the current operating state of the frequency inverter in order to provide the output performance required for the drive task at the greatest possible dynamics and a low noise level The switching frequency is adapted between the limits which can be set with the parameters Switch ing Frequency 400 and Min Switching Frequency 401 If the Min Switching Frequency 401 is larg er than or equal to the Switching Frequency 400 the automatic reduction is deactivated Min Max Fact sett Min Switching Frequency 2 kHz 16 kHz 240 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 580 Reduction Limit Ti Tc The change of the switching frequency depends on the heat sink temperature switch off limit and the output current The temperature limit to be exceeded so that the switching frequency i
91. Train PT MFO1F 30 MFO1F PT Scaling Frequency 557 Relay output Terminal Function X10 OUT2D Operation Mode OUT2D X10 Relay 532 103 Inv error signal Digital input output Terminal X11 6 IN3D Operation modes Function Digital 0 NPN ac Operation 0 Input inputs tive 0 V Data Set Change Mode Ter IN3D PNP NPN PNP ac Over 1 70 minal 559 tive 24 V X11 6 558 1 Output Op Mode OUT3D X11 6 103 Inv error OUT3D 533 signal OUT3D IN input OUT output MFI Multi function input MFO Multi function output D digital A analog F frequency PT pulse train RF Repetition frequency Op Mode Operation Mode Control terminals Standard connection 45 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile G amp D Bonfiglioli 5 7 1 Electrical Installation Circuit for control via control terminals The motor is started via start signals on the control terminals The circuit shows the input signals re quired as a minimum and the control terminals in factory settings Start cw Start ccw VDC out n E 5 7 2 tart anticlockwise Mau Si Hi 24 VDC output Lo ai 1 5 mm max 2 5 mm Start clockwise operation Start anticlockwise operation Voltage output Circuit for control via operator panel The motor is started via the operator panel The circuit shows the input signals required as a mini mum and the control termina
92. Transport temperature 25 70 oP Operation maximum 85 A 0 Relative air humidity Yo Storage 5 95 non condensing AGL202 devices in the sizes 1 to 3 can be operated either with single phase or three phase connection In single pase operation a lower power compared to three phase operation is available The type codes correlate to the three phase power 278 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Device data Technical data vw Bonfiglioli 11 2 1 AGL202 3 0 18 to 0 55 kW 1 0 09 to 0 25 kW 230 V Agile 202 Selected Mains supp 3ph ete e om 00 oas 012 of p381 037 025 os motor shaft power Output current tT A 08 13 10 15 13 20 f 15 3 0 Long term overload current 60 s mE B a wero peee as oo fae z overload current 1 s Switching frequency 2 4 8 16 Bussmann FWP 10A14Fa 200 x 60 x 170 1 1 IP20 EN60529 han and motor 0 2 4 flexible with sleeve ma terminals 0 2 6 rigid M Terminals relay out 01 15 put Terminals Installation f vertical Interior fan PP o O Heat sink fan maces eje e e e ee ele switching frequency 1 According to DIN EN 61800 5 1 2 Dimensions of the basic device Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4 2 Installation for the standard assembly and chapter 12 9 Assembly variants 279 Device data 06 2013 Operating
93. User Warning 1 1363 and User Warning 2 1364 can be used Check chapter 7 6 5 9 Warning mask application for further details 7 6 6 16 PLC Logic functions and analog functions with functional block programming With the PLC functions table of functions and graphic functional block programming external analog or digital signals and internal logic signals of the frequency inverter can be linked to one another Apart from standard AND OR and XOR combinations various complex logic functions and analog functions are available The corresponding output value can be used for other logic instructions and digital outputs Logic instructions can be combined to one another so that complex links can be real ized Analog values can be processed and output via analog outputs The instructions enable flexible adjustment for linking different input signals Analog functions include for example comparisons of analog input values mathematical functions PID control functions filters limitations switches and counters Example A drive is to start if enable is given AND IN4D is set OR enable is given AND IN5D and MFII1D are set Refer to application manual PLC 7 6 6 17 Multiplexer demultiplexer The multiplexer demultiplexer enables the transfer of various digital signals between an overriding controller and frequency inverters via field bus or between frequency inverters via the system bus Multiplexer 1252 Mux Inputs
94. a aada 296 12 3 2 400 V devices wisiesieets crticeiedieitisieeivisserivianievdd a a a a EEEE A NA 296 12 4 Line CHOKC ccsnescnnseeennsseneeeeeeeseenneeeeneseeneesenneseeneesenneesseonaeeneaseeneesenenseeneseeneaeseseenes 297 TAAL 1X230 V CONNEC Oi ene T EN A N E A T N 297 1242 3KO V connection AAEE ANAE 298 12 4 3 3x400 V COMMECUON Dc icccecececicepeeiseneiessecdesee sees bdevsbeeeesedesseedesseaeedbedesaueeeseeeessueeesbdennies 298 1244 DIMENSIONS 45 eee ces snc es EA AEE Sead Coane Suvhe wes aauwises Govasdeus ct setesie tant eventos 299 12 5 Input filter 2 0 1 ccseseeeeeseseeeeeneeseeeeenneeeeeenaaseeseonaseeseoeaseeeeseeoaaeeseeoaaseeseooasensenoasenseanas 300 12 5 1 Footprint filter vssieesisessieeti hi atividi naa a ea ois 300 12 5 2 Booktype filter ccccssssssceeesssseeeeceeseeeecseneeeeeseaaaeeeseasaseeseesaseesesaaaessessaaeesesaeaensesanas 302 12 5 3 Interference suppression CIASS 2 2 2 ceceeeeeeee cette ee ee eee ee teeter ee eee ease nanan eres eeeeesaaaaaeeeeeeees 303 12 5 3 1 AC 3x400 V arssinat a a aa eaten 303 12 5 3 2 AC 3X230 Vrsca Snaar Enana Adan ANa a Eana A EESAN KEGAN 305 12 5 3 3 AC 1X230 Vierssen aa E i 306 12 6 Communication module sssssssssssununnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 307 12 7 USB adapt ccssscececseseeeeenneseeeeenaeeeeeneaseeeeenaseeseenaseeseseaaaasesenoauseseennasensenoasensasoas 307 12 8 RESOUPCE PaCK csescececseseeeeeneeseeeeneeeeeeeeneuseu
95. acaron 155 Ramp rise TIME ncrcaniarano a 149 Rated motor parameters s s s 113 Reference frequenCy s sssssrssrsererrsrrrrrreres 81 INVEITE ecdseves ceutevsavec seeders iedudeweneddeneens 145 Reference frequency channel 20 142 Reference percentage inverted 0 seeeeeesssseeeesseaeeeesseaeeeenseaaenenes 154 Reference percentage channel 151 Reference torque ccessssseeeeessseeeeessaaeeeeseaaes 92 Reference value ccsesssseeeesseseeeeeaaaeeeesaaes 142 Fixed freQUeNncCy eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 Fixed percentage eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 154 JOG FreQUENCY sssssssssserrresrrrrsserrnenssns 150 Motor potentiometer seeeeseeeeeeeees 156 Reached vssitivinsnvitienriinvnieieot 190 Release Drake ccscssseesesssseeeseseeeeessaeaes 191 Repetition frequency RF INPUT ianea 208 OUUU isene 184 Repetition frequency iNPUt ccceeeessseeees 87 Resource PACK ecceeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeaaeeeeneaaes 308 S SA Warning messages auto set up 68 Safety Electrical Installation ccccsssseeeeenseees 31 GeNErAL piinasi nss rinia 14 mechanical installation 27 S GUIVE E E E E N 149 SEVICE coraa a A 22 272 Setting FreQUeNCy cccccssseeeeessaeeeeeseaaeees 189 Setups sieiinitheeeio hii tiie 60 Asynchronous motor via operator panel 61 COMMUNICATION ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 74 Synchronous motor via operator panel 65 SF Error messages auto Setup e
96. amp P69 0 stopping behavior 645 Operation mode Flying Start 2 On according to reference 651 Operation mode auto start O Off 1550 Operation mode energy saving function 2 Automatic 1552 Energy saving function on 163 Reference Frequency reached 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 531 Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal Fan control Boys Start clockwise Start anti clockwise Enable Reference speed 0 Error signal Run signal Operating Instructions Agile p447 f Stopping behavior P68 ol P69 jM j K KK pene Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 P68 amp P69 0 630 06 2013 a Pao pane Ref internal Acceleration V f characteristic hysteresis 449 Ist Blocking frequency 447 tfmin Min frequency 418 Max frequency 419 Acceleration clockwise 420 Operation mode energy saving T function E Energy saving function on 1552 with signal 163 Reference frequency hed 100 Applications Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli 6 7 3 Fan or pump with closed control loop 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 480 Fixed frequency 1 0 Hz 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 53 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 5 Hz s 421 Deceleration clockwise 0 01 H
97. are possible SF001 Rated current The value entered for parameter Rated Current 371 is too low Correct the too low value SF002 Rated current The value for parameter Rated Current 371 is too high referred to param too high eters Rated Power 376 and Rated Voltage 370 Correct the values i The value entered for parameter Rated Cosine Phi 374 is wrong greater SPUD Roles than 1 or smaller than 0 3 Correct the value Negative sli The calculated slip frequency is negative Check and if necessary correct SF004 g P the values entered for parameters Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency frequency 375 Slib frequen The calculated slip frequency is too high Check and if necessary correct SF005 p tregi the values entered for parameters Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency cy too high 375 The calculated total output of the drive is lower than the rated power Cor SF006 Power bal rect and check if necessary the value entered for parameter Rated Power ance 376 cnt The main inductance measurement has failed because the motor has a high inductanc slip Correct the rated motor values in parameters 370 371 372 374 F011 measurement 375 and 376 Carry out the set up routine again In case an error message failed is displayed again enter the value 110 for parameter Configuration 30 sensorless control according to V f characteristic if value 410 was set so far Carry out the set up routine again 374 375 and 376 Carry out the se
98. at least as long as the time required for releasing the holding brake By using negative values for the parameter release of the brake is delayed This can be done in order to prevent loads from falling down for example Descri ption Min Max Fact sett 5000 ms 5000 ms 125 Operational Behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions 779 Minimum flux formation time The time required for flux formation changes depending on the rotor time constant of the motor By setting the parameters Maximum flux formation time 780 and Minimum flux formation time 779 a constant flux formation time can be reached With the parameter Minimum flux formation time 779 the minimum time for current impression is set In this way the time between a start signal and the start of the drive can be defined For an appropriate setting of the parameters the rotor time con stant the required starting torque and the parameter Current during flux formation 781 must be considered No Description Min Max Fact sett 779 Minimum flux formation time 10000 ms Configuration 30 410 Configuration 30 610 Minimum flux formation time 779 0 Flux formation is stopped as soon as the reference flux value or the maximum flux formation time were reached Minimum flux formation time 779 gt 0 Current is impressed for flux formation at least for this time even if the reference flux value was rea
99. both positive and negative The 1 reference value values of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference fre quency source 2 492 are added up Factory setting The reference frequency can only be positive The reference fre quency is limited to the range from 0 Hz to the Maximum frequen 2 Positive only cy 419 The values of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Ref erence frequency source 2 492 are added up then the result is limited to positive values The reference frequency is inverted compared to the sign of the selected reference value source The values of Reference frequen cy source I 475 and Reference frequency source 2 492 are added up then the result is inverted 3 Inverted 145 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile X Xoo Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 7 5 1 3 Fixed frequencies 480 Fixed frequency 1 481 Fixed frequency 2 482 Fixed frequency 3 483 Fixed frequency 4 485 Fixed frequency 5 486 Fixed frequency 6 487 Fixed frequency 7 488 Fixed frequency 8 Via digital logic signals or digital inputs fixed preset reference values can be selected The fixed frequencies are reference values for the rotary frequency of the motor Eight fixed frequen cies can be set The fixed frequencies can be selected via Fixed Frequency Change Over 1 66 Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 67 and Fixed Frequency Change Over 3 131 Logic signals or digital in puts must be assigned to the parameters Fixed F
100. ceeeeeeee eee eeee easter eee ee ee eeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeseaeaaaaes 40 5 6 4 GrOUP Olive scsseteeeiisesserrnsnseesivhetieeiiardieh ee a ene nares ents 40 5 6 5 Brake resistor ispiganda aaa ana a aaa ENEA 41 5 7 Control terminals Standard connection ssss sssssss21112 2155 1155 1 5 5 43 5 7 1 Circuit for control via control terminals ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeanaaes 46 5 7 2 Circuit for control via Operator panel cccecceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeesasaaeeeeasaaeeeensnaaeeeeed 46 5 7 3 Further setting options for control terminals eccccsesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaenes 47 5 7 4 Evaluation logic of digital inputs cecceceseeeeeeeee tree eee ee eee eee eee eeee ease aaaaeeeeeeeeeeseaeaaaaes 48 5 7 5 Overview of voltage inputs and OUtDULS cceceeee eee eeeeeeeeeee teens ee eeaeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaes 49 5 7 6 External DC 24 V power SUpply e ceee cece eee eeeeeeeeeee eee ea ae eee ee eeeeeeaeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeseaeaaaaes 49 5 7 7 Installation notes according to UL5O8C c eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeseeeaeaaaaes 50 6 COMMISSIONING aiscsssccscsccscssscsscssccsssnscssenssscaesscensscasecsssssenssensscssctesdsacsesnassssnses 51 6 1 Operator panel cccseseeeeeeeeseeeeeneaeeeeennaseuseeneuseseeoaaeeseenaaeaseeseooaseeseeoaaeesennageeeeenoasenees 52 OLL MNU e E vets iaditiieeniaeeiasaeetieeennied 52 6
101. collect all materials for reuse E Grounding symbol O 3 oy Meaning Ground connection 9 2 6 7 ESD symbol Symbol Meaning ESD Electrostatic Discharge can damage components and assemblies 2 6 8 Information signs Meaning D lt 1e J gt 2 Tips and information making using the frequency inverter easier 18 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Warning information and symbols used in the user manual General safety instructions and information on use vw Bonfiglioli 2 7 Directives and guidelines to be adhered to by the operator The operator must follow the following directives and regulations e Ensure that the applicable workplace related accident prevention regulations as well as other ap plicable national regulation are accessible to the staff e An authorized person must ensure before using the frequency inverter that the device is used in compliance with its designated use and that all safety requirements are met e Additionally comply with the applicable laws regulations and directives of the country in which the frequency inverter is used e Any additional guidelines and directives that may be required additionally shall be defined by the operator of the machine plant considering the operating environment 2 8 Operator s general plant documentation e In addition to the user manual the operator should issue separat
102. coming from positive input signals is kept on the positive minimum value until the input signal becomes lower than the value for the tolerance band in the negative direc tion Then the output variable follows the set characteristic 179 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 6 2 1 3 Monitoring of analog input signal 561 Filter time constant The time constant of the filter for the analog reference value can be set via the parameter Filter time constant 561 The time constant indicates the time during which the input signal is averaged by means of a low pass filter e g in order to eliminate fault effects The setting range is between 0 ms and 5000 ms in 15 steps f Filter deactivated The analog reference value is forwarded 0 Time constant 0 ms unfiltered 2 Time constant 2 ms Filter activated averaging of the input signal via the set value of the filter time constants 563 Error Warning Behaviour For monitoring the analog input signal an operation mode can be selected via parameter Er ror Warning Behaviour 563 If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA a warning and fault Shutdown lt 1V 2 mA message is issued The drive is decelerated according to stop ing behavior 2 If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA a warning and fault 3 EA Swilnott message is issued and the drive coasts to a standstill stopping lt 1V 2 m
103. command The maximum admissible ramp gradient can be selected ac cording to the application and the current consumption of the motor 147 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO B onfi glioli Parameter descriptions For setting identical frequency ramps for both directions of rotation the parameterization via the pa rameters Acceleration Clockwise 420 and Deceleration Clockwise 421 is sufficient The values of the frequency ramps are taken over for Acceleration Anticlockwise 422 and Deceleration Anticlock wise 423 if these have been parameterized to the factory setting of 0 01 Hz s The parameter value of 0 00 Hz s for the acceleration blocks the corresponding direction of rotation A set Ramp Rise Time 430 affects the ramps No Description Min Max Fact sett 420 Acceleration Clockwise 0 00 Hz s 5 00 Hz s 421 Deceleration Clockwise 0 01 Hz s 9999 99 Hz s 5 00 Hz s 422 Acceleration Anticlockwise 0 01 Hz s 0 01 Hz s 2 423 Deceleration Anticlockwise 0 01 Hz s 0 01 Hz s 1 Value 0 01 Hz s means Acceleration Clockwise 420 is applied 2 Value 0 01 Hz s means The ramps of clockwise operation are applied The setting 0 00 Hz s won t accelerate or decelerate the drive due to the limitation of the ramp 424 Emergency Stop Clockwise 425 Emergency Stop Anticlockwise The ramps for the Emergency Stop Clockwise 424 and Emergency Stop Anticlockwise 425 of the drive
104. contacts IN1D INSD MFI1 MFI2 are only evaluated if an oper ation mode Local Remote 412 with Control via Contact or Control 3 Wire 0 4 or 5 is selected In all other operation modes Local Remote 412 1 2 3 physical contacts are only evaluated if the corresponding signals in the digital inputs with the suffix Hardware are selected Signals not referring to a physical input are evaluated independent of the operation mode Local Remote 412 7 6 6 2 Start command 68 Start Clockwise 69 Start Anticlockwise The parameters Start Clockwise 68 and Start Anticlockwise 69 can be linked to the available digital control inputs or the internal logic signals The drive is only accelerated according to the control method after a start command The logic functions are used for the specification of the direction of rotation but also for using the parameterized Operation Mode 620 for the starting behavior and Operation Mode 630 for the stop ping behavior Start Clockwise 68 71 IN1D Start Anticlockwise 69 72 IN2D 7 6 6 3 3 Wire Control 87 Start 3 Wire Ctrl In the case of 3 wire control the drive is controlled using digital pulses The drive is prepared for starting via the logic state of the signal Start 3 Wire Ctrl 87 and started by a Start clockwise pulse Parameter Start Clockwise 68 or a start anticlockwise pulse parameter Start Anticlockwise 69 By switching off the signal Start 3 Wire Ctrl 87 the driv
105. cross coupling compensation In this way it is possible to impress the torque forming current in the machine more quickly and the speed control circuit has a lower tenden cy toward vibration The cross coupling exists between the flux forming current Isd and the torque forming current Isq and is caused by the voltage drop at the stator inductivity and the stator leakage inductivity For this reason the cross coupling increases with the stator frequency The cross coupling becomes particular ly apparent in the case of high stator frequencies at relatively small switching frequencies e g 300 Hz stator frequency at 4 kHz switching frequency as with small switching frequencies the current con troller slows down No Description Min Max Fact sett 100 00 7 F o 0 746 Cross Coupling Factor 0 00 300 00 75 00 Configuration 30 410 Configuration 30 610 Cross coupling compensation can be optimized as follows e First set the speed controller To that end define reference speed jumps at small rotary frequen cies See chapter 7 9 5 3 Speed controller e Set a speed of approx 2 3 of the rated speed e Define reference speed jumps again During the accelerations currents Isq of approx 50 of the rated current should occur e Starting from 0 increase the value of Cross Coupling Factor 746 in steps of 25 for exam ple e The influence by Isq on Isd during the reference speed jumps should decrease with incre
106. drive the corresponding actual values and operat ing messages can be read out by means of the operator panel NOTE When using a synchronous motor in example BCR BTD motor from BONFIGLIOLI the correct phase sequence must be complied with A mix up of the phases leads to the loss of the correct motor control and typically a fault message 6 2 8 Selection of actual value display During drive operation the display of the operator panel indicates the actual frequency factory set ting This is the value of parameter Actual Frequency 241 The actual value for permanent display during operation can be selected e Select menu Actual Confirm by pressing ENT e By means of the arrow keys select the number of the parameter the value of which is to be dis played Confirm by pressing ENT The value is displayed e Press ENT for at least 1 second The display flashes The selected value is displayed permanently during drive operation Example Select the working hours operating hours in which the output stage of the inverter is ac tive for permanent display Status display Drive runs ee A kni Motor stopped Working hours counter Flashes drive enabled A ActuR rP 2il Motor stopped 2EUP Actual values rP readable Parameter drive not enabled actual value 71 First commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x E Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 2 9 Commissioning without Setup After electrical connection the m
107. e Select Test 1 or Test 2 It is recommended that you start with Test 1 e Press ENT button to start Test 1 If Test 1 is finished and no error was detected t1 good will be displayed e Confirm by pressing the ENT button Menu item Test 2 will be displayed e Press ENT button to start Test 2 If Test 2 is finished and no error was detected t2 good will be displayed EESE J Test 3 Refer to chapter Test 3 7 2 3 6 Fan test EESE 2 kegJood O A Test 2 t2 good rEAdY Loch JED EESE EESE Test 1 t1 good If an error was detected and a message was displayed the relevant error must be repaired following the instructions in chapters 7 2 3 1 Earth fault and short circuit test Test 1 or 7 2 3 2 Load test Test 2 Parameter Status device test 1541 indicates the status of the device test and messages generated during the test After a message the test can be continued by pressing ENT Press ESC to stop the test In this case message tESt is displayed If STO is displayed if the device test is to be started enable must be switched on at inputs STOA and STOB 7 2 3 4 Start device test via control software or bus system 1540 Start device test manual The device test can be started via the control software VPlus or a connected bus system 0 Clear status Deletes the messages generated during the test Factory setting 1 Continue Continues the current test after a message 2 Cancel Stops
108. e g X1 10 1 V Y GO Pa E es X1 2 Y1 0 02V iV 98v X 7 6 2 2 Multifunction input set as digital input MFI 2D Multifunction input MFI2 terminal X12 4 can be configured as a digital input Via parameter Opera tion Mode MFI2 562 the evaluation can be selected as PNP high switching or NPN low switching The multifunction input set as digital input can be linked to the functions of the frequency inverter Signal 77 MFI2D must be assigned a function In the factory settings signal 532 MFI2D Hardware is assigned to parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 MFI2D Assign to a function e g select signal source for parameter Factory setting Hardware Thermal contact for P570 204 532 MFI2D Hardware 77 MFI2D Assign to a function e g select signal source for parameter 532 181 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 6 3 Multifunction output MFO1 2 x13 p 6 550 Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 multifunction output Multifunction output MFO1 terminal X13 6 can either be configured as a digital analog repetition frequency or pulse train output Depending on the selected Operation Mode MFO X13 6 550 a connection with various functions of the software is possible The operation modes not used are deac tivated internally 0 off Multifunction output has logic signal LOW 1 Digital MFO1D Multifunction outpu
109. factor The relation is shown as an example in the following table for the Agile 402 23 frequency inverter Rin K W Vair m s a Rth enforcea LK W 1 00o o d i y og E oo i o5 ona oo 232 oos ood 0o 4 og oR k og 6 o 085 _ 12 9 2 4 Application notes Comply with the operation diagrams for power reductions derating Comply with the thermal limiting values of the frequency inverter Refer to chapter 11 Technical data and 12 9 2 4 1 Temperature monitoring Additional power losses P4 interior are dissipated as heat into the interior of a control cabinet These losses may amount to 30 of the total energy dissipation and must be considered in the calcula tion of the volume of the control cabinet The values are listed in the tables in chapter 12 9 2 2 Required thermal properties of the external heat sink If several frequency inverters or other heat producing devices are mounted on a common heat sink sum cooler the losses of all devices must be added up Calculate the maximum permissible thermal resistance Ri using the formula chapter 12 9 2 2 Required thermal properties of the ex ternal heat sink The contact surface of the external heat sink must have a sufficient thermal conductivity 12 9 2 4 1 Temperature monitoring The heat sink temperature and the interior temperature can be monitored The temperatures can be displayed
110. failure A 02 00 PMS Motor circuit breaker parameterized in Operation Mode 571 tripped A 04 00 Flim ii Maximum Frequency 419 was exceeded The frequency limitation is ac A 08 00 Al The input signal MFI1A is lower than 1 V 2 mA according to the operation mode for the Error Warning Behaviour 453 A 10 00 A2 The input signal MFI2A is lower than 1 V 2 mA according to the operation mode for the Error Warning Behaviour 563 A 20 00 SYS A slave on the system bus signals an error A 40 00 UDC The DC link voltage has reached the type dependent minimum value Warning behavior according to parameterized Operation Mode Motor Temp A 00 80 PTC f 570 at maximum motor temperature Tmotor A 80 00 WARN2 In Application Warning State 367 a warning is present Example The following warning status is displayed A008D Ixt IxtLt Tc PTC The warning status results from the hexadecimal sum of the warning codes 0001 0004 0008 0080 008D The short term overload 1 s warning limit heat sink temperature and warning limit motor tempera ture warnings are present Output signals Warnings are signaled via digital signals 1 169 general warning 2 Signal if a message is output via Warnings 269 11 General warning D For linking to frequency inverter functions For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs 337 Warning stat
111. frequency with the value of the scaling factor is applied No Description Min Max Fact sett Pulse Train Scaling Frequenc 0 32000 25000 If parameter Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 is set to zero the frequency value at the digital input will not be scaled Parameter Repetition Frequency Pulse Train 252 shows the actual value of pulse train input Pulse train signal on I N2D as reference value Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 BU RepetitloniLrequeney Operation mode IN2D 496 30 Pulse Train Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 The scaled pulse train signal is the reference frequency value IN2D X11 5 P496 30 Pulse Train gt freterence P654 _JHz Reference frequency value Maximum Frequency 419 Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 Hz freference fin2D x Factory setting Treis Hz Maximum Frequency 419 50 P654 25000 10 5000 25000 fas Hz s v Example Pulse train scaling frequency 654 Example Input frequency at IN2D finzp 5000 Hz Reference frequency value Pulse Train 0 freference finan 5000 Hz limited to 50 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 Scaling Fre 25000 freference 10 Hz quency 654 Output as percentage In the case of a parameterization as a pulse train the read frequency value is also available as a per centage for the reference percentage channel 0 100 correspond to the sig
112. in the actual value menu Refer to chapter 9 1 Actual values of frequency inverter When the maximum permitted temperatures are reached error switch off is effected and an error message is triggered Before the maximum permitted temperatures are reached a warning message is triggered An er ror switch off can be avoided The temperature values for the warnings can be set via parameter Refer to chapter 7 4 2 Temperature 316 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants Options W Bonfiglioli Vectron Error switch off is effected at Maximum heat sink temperature Maximum interior temperature In the factory setting a warning message is triggered when the maximum heat sink temperature is reached minus 5 C the maximum interior temperature is reached minus 5 C The warning messages can be output via digital outputs 12 9 2 5 Assembly 12 9 2 5 1 Safety To avoid serious physical injury or considerable damage to property only qualified staff may work on the devices A During operation the heat sink can reach a temperature of up to 75 C Do not touch the heat sink during operation The heat sink may be hot even some time after the frequency inverter was switched off Comply with the following requirements The installation surface of the external heat sink must at least be as large as the cold plate surface The contact surfaces of the external heat sink and col
113. input 2 terminal X12 4 is designed for connection of a KTY84 measuring resistor with the following specifications Resistance 1 KQ at 100 C ambient temperature Measuring range 40 300 C Temperature coefficient 0 61 K 140 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error and warning behavior Parameter descriptions w Bonfiglioli KTY resistance R depending on ambient temperature Tamb Measuring resistor PT1000 Multifunction input 2 is designed for connection of a PT 1000 measuring resistor with the following specifications Resistance 1 KQ at 0 C ambient temperature Measuring range 40 550 C Connection Thermal contact PTC KTY PT1000 g g 4 Operation mode motor temp 570 1 2 0r3 11 12 or 13 21 22 or 23 31 32 or 33 a 4 j La LS L HEERE Thermal contact for P570 204 532 MFI2D Hardware 7 4 7 Phase failure 576 Phase Supervision If a failure of one of the three motor or mains phases is not noticed the frequency inverter the motor and the mechanical drive components may be damaged In order to prevent these components from being damaged the phases are monitored for failure Via parameter Phase Supervision 576 the be havior in case of a phase failure can be set 141 Error and warning behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 60 B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions In the case of a phase failure the error switch off takes place af
114. input or the logic signal can be selected for parameter Energy Saving Function On 1552 Energy is saved by reducing the flux The value of the flux reduction can 1 manual be set via parameter Flux Reduction 1551 Energy saving function can be switched on via a digital input or a logic signal The digital input or the logic signal can be selected for parameter Energy Saving Function On 1552 Energy is saved by reducing the flux The value of the flux reduction is determined automatically 2 automatic 1551 Flux reduction energy saving function In order to save energy the magnetic flux is reduced by the value of Flux Reduction 1551 One of the following control methods must be selected Configuration 30 110 IM sensor less control V f characteristic Configuration 30 410 IM sensor less field orientated control DMC For parameter Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550 1 manual must be selected Description X Fact sett EET R High values impair the dynamic behaviour of the drive 258 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Energy saving function Energy saving w Bonfiglioli 1552 Energy Saving Function On The signal at a digital input or a logic signal switches on the energy saving function The digital input or the logic signal must be selected for parameter Energy Saving Function On 1552 For parameter Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550 1 manual or 2 automatic
115. j f 4S 205 222 10 f t Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm 311 Assembly variants 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfig lioli 12 9 1 4 Size 3 5 5 kW to 11 0 kW 12 9 1 4 1 Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter With heat sink fan Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 19 3 3 5 5 5 5 21 3 3 7 5 7 5 22 3 9 2 23 3 11 155 90 pi Id aaa E Lo ONPE erty 128 y i 90 l t 4 h IL 205 220 10 tI we l Options 62 Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 312 Assembly variants Options 12 9 1 4 2 Valid for the following devices Without heat sink fan Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 193 3 5 5 5 5 21 3 3 7 5 7 5 22 3 9 2 23 3 11 155 100000000000 jl
116. loose components 272 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Regular service work Service vw Bonfiglioli 10 3 Monitoring of service interval During operation of electric drives mechanical and electrical components are exposed to wear and tear The service interval remaining until the next service percentage of maintenance interval of the fol lowing components can be monitored DC link of frequency inverter Fan of frequency inverter 1533 Maintenance Note When the service interval until service has expired value 0 the frequency inverter can indicate via parameter Maintenance Note 1533 that maintenance is required or output a warning message The behavior can be set up The service interval remaining until service can be displayed via parameters Service is required as soon as the remaining service interval until maintenance has expired value 0 It must also be checked if the component must be replaced 10 3 1 DC link Signalling when service is required The DC link of the frequency inverter is equipped with electrolyte capacitors The service interval for electrolyte capacitors is mainly defined by the temperature In high temperatures the electrolytic liquid will evaporate which reduces the capacitance of the capacitor The temperature inside the electrolyte capacitor depends on two factors the ambient temperature and the internal heating caused by cur rent ripple The temperature of t
117. lt P738 10 1 Switched on P722 Integral Time 1 f lt P738 104 ms Limits P728 Current limit P730 Torque limit P739 Power limit The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency P418 and Maximum Frequency P419 P30 must be set to 410 asynchronous motor or 610 synchronous motor 82 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 After first commissioning Commissioning Digital inputs vw Bonfiglioli P559 P452 P562 PE Evaluation logic Factory setting Terminal 0 NPN active 0 V X11 4 1 PNP active 24 V X11 5 X12 1 X12 2 X11 6 Multi function MFI1 3 digital NPN active 0 V X12 3 4 digital PNP active 24 V Multi function MFI2 3 digital NPN active 0 V X12 4 4 digital PNP active 24 V High lt DC 5 V High gt DC 10 V Function 7 off 71 INID P68 Start clockwise 72 IN2D P69 Start anticlockwise 73 IN3D P70 Data Set Change Over 1 P558 0 Input IN3D 74 IN4D P66 Fixed Frequency Change Over 1 75 IN5D P103 Error Acknowledgement 76 MFIID 77 MFI2D 532 MFI2D P204 Thermo contact for P570 Hardware Other possible functions P62 Frequency Motorpoti Up P63 Frequency Motorpoti Down P67 Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 P71 Data Set Change Over 2 P72 Percent Motorpoti Up P73 Percent Motorpoti Down P75 Fixed Percent Change Over 1 P76 Fixed Percent Change Over 2 Assign a function to a digital input IN1D IN5D MFI1D MFI2D Select the p
118. may be required Minimum Frequency 418 3 50 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 50 00 Hz The values of the set ramps parameters 420 to 426 and 430 are considered if the PID controller is used The technology controller can be started via the signals of parameters Start Clockwise 68 or Start Anticlockwise 69 The control deviation difference between reference percentage and actual percentage is signaled to the PID controller The PID controller adjusts the output frequency of the frequency inverter such that the control deviation is minimized P controller The output of the P controller is the product of the control deviation and the amplification and follows the control deviation linearly and without delay A control deviation will be maintained I controller The output of the I controller is the integral of the control deviation The task of the I controller is to eliminate the control deviation The integral time defines how fast the control deviation is compensated If the I controller is set too dynamically fast compensation of deviations the system may become unstable and vibrate If the I controller is set too passively slow compensation of devia tions the stationary error is not compensated sufficiently For this reason the integral portion must be adjusted plant specifically D controller The D controller assesses the change of the control deviation and calculates it change rate This value is multiplied by the derivative time T
119. message Para Pro Access to all parameters Std Most commonly used parameters EASY Quick commissioning parameters Percentage values Pot P For example Reference value for torque control Desired set point of PID control Control method 5Yn H Field oriented control of synchronous motor Fol Field oriented control of asynchronous motor UF V f control of asynchronous motor Error message Operator panel Bonfiglioli Vectron cm eee displays actual value Actual values rP 240 cP readable Parameter actual value P211 is displayed first Professional Standard Acceleration cw 5 00 Hz s Parameter settings Easy P28 is displayed first aoa Press or for 1 s to increment or decrement each digit separately Speed Increase Decrease Manual control Motorpoti 3 50 Hz Start drive Reference set frequency Default value frequency Stop drive Switch on Enable of P418 ENT Reversal of on X11 3 and rotation X13 3 a Switch off start commands on X11 4 and X11 5 Percentage value aaa Se Motorpoti 0 00 Start drive Reference set reference Default value percentage Stop drive percentage of P518 value Invert value reference value Set Jog frequency via J od P489 Default 5 Hz ee Start drive with D JOG speed Stop drive Test 2 t2 good Test 1 t1 good bUSCUnA gt Commissioning of a communication interface
120. off 1 minute delayed PT1000 Set P570 to 31 warning 32 immediate error switch off 7 4 6 or 33 error switch off 1 minute delayed P226 shows the measured motor temperature 9 2 PTC resistor motor PTC does not enable temperature measurement P617 is inoperable for this evaluation The evaluation is dependent on the used resistor Motor circuit The motor ratings are monitored If the motor is overloaded an error 7 10 6 breaker switch off or a warning message will be effected Set P571 for single motor operation or multiple motor operation and 7 10 6 choose if an error switch off or a warning message is to be effected Mains failure Short mains failures are bridged 7 9 2 Via P670 select mains support Set P671 and P672 If the voltage drops below the value set in P671 the DC link voltage is controlled to the value set in P672 DC Link Via P670 set Ug limitation Set P680 The DC link voltage is limited to 7 9 2 Voltage the value of P680 if it increases in generator operation mode or during braking operations Phase failure The frequency inverter is shut down if a mains or motor phase fails 7 4 7 Via P576 select error switch off or shutdown Control mechanical brake Chapter Activation For addressing a brake via a digital output Select 41 Brake release 7 6 5 5 for one of the parameters 531 OUT1D 532 OUT2D relay 533 OUT3D or 554 MFO1 Delayed start Set P625 When the brake release time has elapsed the drive acceler
121. or disabled See chapter 7 6 6 13 Brake chopper release Threshold 506 are set up with different values Check that the two thresholds are set Please note that by default the Motor chopper Trigger Threshold 507 and the Trigger up fittingly for your application Please check chapter 7 10 5 Motor chopper 242 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions w Bonfiglioli Vectron 7 10 4 1 Dimensioning of brake resistor Connect a brake resistor following the instructions and safety information provided in chapter 5 6 5 Brake resistor The following values must be known for dimensioning Peak braking power Py peak in W Resistance R in Q Relative operation time OT in e Calculation of peak braking power Pp peak Pppeak Peak braking power in W Moment of inertia of drive system in kgm J ne 7 n ni Speed of drive system before the braking operation in Po peak i821 min b n2 Speed of drive system after the braking operation in min tp Braking time in s e Calculation of resistance Rp Ua Rb Resistance in Q R EN Uasc Switch on threshold in V os Py peak Peak braking power in W The switch on threshold Ug gc is the DC link voltage at which the brake resistor is switched on The switch on threshold can be set via parameter Trigger Threshold 506 The resistance of the brake resistor must not be less than the minimum value Rp min 10 The valu
122. output frequency calculated from the voltage 224 Torque i the current and the con trol variables 225 Rotor Flux Current magnetic flux relative to the rated motor parameters 226 Winding Temperature Measured motor temperature value Parameter Operation mode mo tor temp 570 must be set up for temperature evaluation 227 rehia Ume Lon Calculated value of rotor time constant Flux Forming Voltage Me E of the field orientated control forming the mag 267 Actual values of machine 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile N N o gt m EJ Bonfiglioli Actual values Description Function Torque Faning Welage hee component of the field orientated control forming the Magnetic flux calculated according to the rated values and the oper 238 Absolute Flux Value ating point of the motor 239 Reactive Current Reactive current calculated from the rated motor parameters the control variables and the current 240 Actual Speed Measured or calculated speed of drive 241 Actual Frequency Measured or calculated frequency of drive The actual values can be read out and monitored in the Actual menu of the operator panel 9 3 Actual values of the system The calculation of the actual figures of the system is based on the parameterized system data Specif ic to the application the parameters are calculated from the fac tors electrical variables and the con trols The correct display of the actual figures is a funct
123. parameter Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 P68 amp P69 0 630 The signal states of the digital inputs or logic signals for parameters Start clock wise 68 and Start anticlockwise 69 activate the stopping procedure Digital inputs or logic signals can be assigned to these parameters In the factory settings Start clockwise 68 is assigned 71 IN1D terminal X11 4 and Start anticlockwise 69 is assigned 72 IN2D terminal X11 5 By combination of the digital input states or logic signals the stopping behaviors can be selected from the following table Start clockwise 0 and Start anticlockwise 0 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 Stopping behaviour refer to table Stopping behavior P68 amp P69 0 630 Stopping behavior 0 Coast to Stop Stopping behavior 1 Stop and switch off 0 Stopping behavior 2 Stop and hold 70 1 1 and 1 2 4 5 7 71 72 74 75 77 ll 9 g z Stopping behavior 4 5 Emergency stop and switch o 6 E Stopping behavior 5 U Emergency stop and hold 5 k Stopping behavior 7 a w DC brake Operation mode 630 of the stopping behavior is to be parameterized according to the matrix The selection of the operation modes can vary according to the control method and the available control inputs Example The motor is to stop according to stopping behavior 1 if the digital logic signals Start Clockwise 68 1 and Start Anticlockwise 69 1 Additionally the motor is to stop according to st
124. parameters of the PI controller the Amplification 700 is increased first until the actual value overshoots distinctly during the control process Now the amplification is reduced to about fifty percent again and then the Integral Time 701 is synchronized until actual value overshoots slightly during the control process 229 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions The settings of the current controllers should not be too dynamic in order to ensure a sufficient re serve range The control tends to increased oscillations if the reverse range is reduced The dimensioning of the current controller parameters by calculation of the time constant is to be done for a switching frequency of 2 kHz For other switching frequencies the values are adapted in ternally so that the setting can remain un changed for all switching frequencies The dynamic proper ties of the current controller improve if the switching and scanning frequency increases The fixed time interval for the modulation results in the following scanning frequencies of the current controller via parameter Switching Frequency 400 Switching frequency Scanning frequency 16 kHz 746 Cross Coupling Factor For an asynchronous motor Configuration 30 410 and synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 the coupling between the flux forming current Isd and the torque forming current Isq can be undone largely by the activated
125. reduces the power consumption of the frequency inverter The consumption is reduced and energy is saved 1510 Time until Keypad Standby The display of the operator panel is switched off if no button is pressed within the time set in parame ter Time until Keypad Standby 1510 Standby mode of the operator panel is indicated by a spot light ing up on the operator panel Standby mode is cancelled automatically is a warning or an error is signaled Standby mode of the operator panel is switched off if Time until Keypad Standby 1510 is set to zero In this case the display is switched on permanently No Description Min M Fact sett ax 1510 Time until Keypad Standby 60 Min If the display of the operator panel is to be switched off as soon as enable of the fre quency inverter is switched off and not after a certain time parameter Standby Mode 1511 can be set 1511 Standby Mode frequency inverter The frequency inverter reduces power consumption if the standby mode of the frequency inverter is switched on via parameter Standby Mode 1511 and enable of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA and STOB is switched off 260 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Standby mode Energy saving Bonfiglioli Vectron Attention Do not select the operation modes 11 21 or 22 if the DC link connection and at terminal X11 of the frequency inverter is connected to other devices
126. set such that anyone who wants to change parameters must enter this password before A change of parameter is only possible if the password is entered correctly If the Set password 27 parameter is set to zero no password is required for access to the parameters The previous password is deleted No Identification Min Max Fact sett 0 eee If a password is set the password entry is necessary for modification of parameter values start of Setup upload of parameter values from memory card to frequency inverter The correct entered password unlocks all functions for 10 minutes After 10 minutes the password protection is switched on again automatically The modification of a password is possible in control level 3 parameter Control level 28 112 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Inverter Data Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli The control facilities of the operator panel are not locked For the restriction of control facilities refer to chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel and 7 3 1 Control 7 1 4 Programming 34 Program ming The parameter Program ming 34 enables acknowledgment of a fault message and resetting to the factory settings 123 Reset A hardware reset is done Behavior like Mains Off Mains On The parameters of the selected configuration except for a few excep 4444 Default tions are reset to the default settings Th
127. sig Control sig Control sig Control sig Control sig e NU ANAON A decimal value is displayed indicating the status of the digital signals in bits after conversion into a binary figure Example Decimal figure 33 is displayed Converted into the binary system the number reads 00100001 Thus the following contact inputs or outputs are active Digital input or output 1 Digital input or output 6 14 2 Controller status The controller status can be used to establish which of the control functions are active If a several controllers are active at the time a controller code com posed of the sum total of the individual codes is displayed Display of the controller status via the operator panel can be parameterized via parame ter Controller status message 409 CXXXX ABCDE Controller code Controller abbreviation C 00 00 C 00 01 UDdyn Voltage controller is in the rise phase according to Operation Mode 670 The output frequency in the case of a power failure is below the Shutdown G00 U2 SPS greshoid 675 C 00 04 UDctr Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active according to Opera tion Mode 670 of the voltage controller C 00 08 UDlim The DC link voltage has exceeded the Reference DC Link Limitation 680 335 Status of digital signals 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfiglioli Operational and error diagnosis C 00 10 Boost The Dyn Voltage Pre Control 605 accelerates the control characteri
128. the current test 11 Start Test 1 Starts Test 1 earth fault and short circuit test 12 Start Test 2 Starts Test 2 load test 13 Start Test 1 and Test 2 oe Test 1 earth fault and short circuit test and Test 2 load Enable at inputs STOA and STOB must be switched on in order to be able to carry out the test Parameter Status device test 1541 indicates the status of the device test and messag es generated during the test 120 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Machine data Parameter descriptions w Bonfiglioli 7 2 3 5 Automatic device test after error switch off 1542 Start device test automatic The device test can be started automatically after each error switch off of the frequency inverter The device test will start once the frequency inverter is restarted after an error switch off No automatic device test after error switch off Factory set ting Test 1 earth fault and short circuit test will start automati 1 Start Test 1 cally after an error switch off of the frequency inverter fol lowed by a start command Test 2 load test will start automatically after an error switch off of the frequency inverter followed by a start command Test 1 earth fault and short circuit test and Test 2 load 3 Start Test 1 and Test 2 test will start automatically after an error switch off of the frequency inverter followed by a start command NOTE The automatic device test may result in a delayed start of the
129. the display of the operator panel Comm the internal fans the power unit an optional communication module Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off the display of the operator panel Step1 I O Communica the internal fans tion Stepi I O the digital and analog inputs and outputs the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13 4 an optional communication module Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off the display of the operator panel the internal fans the digital and analog inputs and outputs the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13 4 an optional communication module the power unit 1 The enable inputs STOA an STOB remain functional The operation modes for communication module switch off can be selected only if a communication module is installed 262 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Standby mode Energy saving W Bonfiglioli If a fault is triggered a deactivated keypad and a deactivated CM Module if existent are switched on again Deactivated digital inputs are not switched on again When the digital signals are in Standby one of the following procedures can reset a fault e Reset the fault via Keypad with the STOP key e Reset the fault via PLC via Field bus communication e Set STOA and STOB to switch the device again operational and reset the fault in sequence via digital input set up
130. the terminals X12 5 and X12 6 to system bus Or Set an optional communication module CM CAN to sys tem bus 2 C O br nere as master CP ErS para EOS G9 EDS fast g GO ar Bus confi iguration ode ID Deactivated SETUP communication Ca 2 System bus at module CM CAN 509 CANopen at X12 5 and X12 6 bRUd 1000 I F_5Et ENT 1 ED Baud rate kBaud O ne setting System bus at X12 5 and X12 6 P903 CANopen at module CM CAN 76 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Commissioning of a communication interface Commissioning Bonfiglioli Vectron Modbus Parameter Display 1376 Modbus Address Node ID node id 1504 Modbus Baudrate bAud 1503 Modbus Mode RTU or ASCII mode 1375 Modbus Parity PAr EY 395 Interface setting Protocol CM X21 IF SEE Set the service interface X21 to Modbus Or Set an optional communication module CM 232 or CM g 485 to Modbus ev Le2_ GEEUP GEEUP GDS Sica GOS or OS rock J GD i S Node ID Modbus Adress P1376 Bus configuration SETUP communication 3040 ASC S n Cc A ay c o uol l n mu o l ol Ou C3 c c c SSSR ASCII A odd bAud 240 5 Lies GO ed GE Pre tJ GD Een EDS Baud rate Mode parity Even 2 P1504 P1503 P1375 Modbus at Module CM Modbus at X21 IF SEE Interface setting Modbus not active P395 VABus active at X21 and
131. value Positive only inverted JOG Frequency 489 Start stop direction of rotation limi OEM Internal Reference Frequency limits ernai Kejerence req H Frequency 228 tfmax gy O0 Reference tfmin l frequency Min Frequency 418 I source Max Frequency 419 t Start Clockwise 68 e TET Start Anticklockwise 69 ony eee Jog Start 81 i t fmax y Max Frequency 419 qe 39 Lock the reference value facilities of the control panel If the setting possibility of the reference frequency at the operator panel must be locked e For parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 the setting 5 Keypad Motorpot must not be selected and e for parameter Reference Frequency Source 2 492 the setting 5 Keypad Motorpot must not be selected e Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of parameters Refer to chapter 7 1 3 Set password Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 144 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli NOTE The setting of Parameter Set Password 27 only does not lock the control facilities of the keypad Start Stop Change direction of rotation Poti F and Poti P are still available 7 5 1 1 Limits 418 Minimum Frequency 419 Maximum Frequency The area of the output frequency of the frequency inverter and thus the speed setting range are de fined by the parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 The corresponding con
132. value se 1 Latching lected before the switch off The reference value is also stored when the device is switched off Use this operation mode for dataset changeover of the reference Taking Over value channel The current reference value is used when the motorpoti function is activated 3 Taking Over and Latching This operation mode combines the operation modes 1 and 2 7 5 3 2 Ramp of motor potentiometer 473 Ramp Frequency Motorpoti The speed of the modification of the reference value ramp can be set via parameter Ramp Frequen cy Motorpoti 473 The ramp is used in the following controls with the reference frequency channel Motorpoti via digital inputs Keypad motorpoti control via operator panel Description Min Max Fact sett aa Frequency Motorpoti 0 00 Hz s 999 99 Hz s 2 00 Hz s 156 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli As a maximum the acceleration and deceleration of the motorpoti function can only reach the values of the frequency ramps Parameters 420 to 423 even if Ramp Frequency Motorpoti 473 is set to a higher value 509 Ramp Percentage Motorpoti The speed of the modification of the reference value ramp can be set via parameter Ramp Percent age Motorpoti 509 The ramp is used in the following controls with the reference percentage chan nel Motorpoti via digital inputs Keypad motorpoti control via operator panel
133. via Keypad or 4 Con trol via Keypad Cont The factory settings enable control via the operator panel and via digital in puts See chapter 7 3 1 Control Frequency setting using the motorpoti function can be used in speed actuated or speed controlled control methods In the case of a torque control this function is switched off and a percentage setting option via the motorpoti function is available Addition of reference values If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value via Reference Frequency Source 1 475 plus Reference Frequency Source 2 492 If the value of Maximum Frequency 419 is reached and the other reference value is increased the output value of the motorpoti function is reduced It is reduced so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the maximum frequency If the value of Minimum Frequency 418 is reached and the other reference value is reduced the output value of the motorpoti function is increased It is increased so that the sum of both refer ence values is equal to the minimum frequency Inthe settings for Operation Mode 493 1 reference or 3 inverted the point of re versal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function The drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign Lock the control possibilities of the control panel If drive start and sto
134. vibrations of the control circuit are possible In order to avoid vibration parameter Max I Component 441 can limit the output signal of the I controller Description Min Max Fact sett Max I Component 0 00Hz 999 99Hz 50 00 Hz 225 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 7 cay Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 446 Derivative time D If the control behavior of the PI controller or P controller is too slow a faster control can be achieved by activating and adjusting the differential part Derivative time 446 However if the dif ferential part is activated the control circuit has a higher tendency toward vibration For this reason the differential part should be activated and changed carefully By default the differential part is set to Derivative time 446 0 ms i e it is deactivated High values for Derivative time 446 cause fast control but amplify interferences The amplification P is included in the calculation of the derivative time D see figure PID controller Description Min Max Fact sett 1000 ms 442 Maximum Frequency 443 Minimum Frequency Parameters Maximum Frequency 442 and Minimum Frequency 443 define the working range of the controller In this way you can also define if the PID controller is to operate the drive in one direction only or if both directions of rotations are to be possible No Description Min Max Fact sett Maximum Frequency 999 9
135. warm starts in less than 3 minutes this fault is triggered due to the expectation that a faulty programming of the PLC or the function table is at hand Additionally the PLC Function table is stopped P 1399 0 only in RAM 328 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error list Error protocol v Bonfiglioli Output signals in the case of error messages Errors are signaled via digital signals 162 3 d For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs A monitoring function signals an error with indication via parameter Actual Error Signal 3 error 259 In addition to fault messages mentioned there are further fault messages However these messages are only used for internal purposes and are not listed here If you receive fault mes sages which are not listed here please contact the BONFILGLIOLI customer service 13 2 Error environment Actual values at the event of a failure The parameters of the error environment help troubleshooting both in the settings of the frequency inverter and also in the complete application The error environment documents the operational be havior of the frequency inverter at the time of the last four faults No Description Function 330 DC link voltage Direct voltage in DC link 331 Calculated output voltage motor voltage of
136. without any error messages For Test 2 a three phase choke or a three phase motor must be connected as the load The load may be star or delta connected The star point must not be connected if applicable Test 2 impresses a positive and a negative direct current in each branch one after the other If no current can be impressed in any direction an error will be signaled IGBTs the load and the current measurement are checked 118 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Machine data Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli If an error is signaled in a branch both for positive and negative current the relevant load branch circuit is open e g broken wire or the relevant current measurement is defective If an error is sig naled in a branch for one polarity only an IGBT or driver is defective or a connection in the device is interrupted The impressed direct current is 25 of the peak value of the rated current The rated current must be set with parameter Rated Current 371 in data set 1 In order to prevent damage of the device and the load the output voltage is limited If the set current see above cannot be reached with this voltage due to a high ohmic resistance of the load an open circuit error is identified in each branch In this case the current to be impressed must be reduced by changing parameter Rated Current 371 T0001 Stop Tes
137. 0 722 719 Slip Frequency 0 10000 7544 720 Operation Mode Selection 7 9 5 3 vV B 721 Amplification 1 f lt P738 0 00 200 00 7 9 5 3 E 722 Integral Time 1 f lt P738 ms 0 60000 7 9 5 3 v 8 723 Amplification 2 f gt P738 0 00 200 00 7 9 5 3 724 Integral Time 2 f gt P738 ms 0 60000 7 9 5 3 725 Operation Mode Selection 7 9 5 4 726 Minimum Acceleration Hz s 0 1 6500 0 7 9 5 4 27 Mech Time Constant ms 1 60000 7 9 5 4 728 Current Limit A 0 0 Oc len 7 9 5 3 1 729 Current Limit Generator Op A 0 01 Oc len 7 9 5 3 1 349 Parameters Menu PARA 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile EJ Bonfiglioli Parameter list Description Setting range 730 Torque Limit 0 00 650 00 7 9 5 3 1 731 Torque Limit Generator Operation 0 00 650 00 7 9 5 3 1 732 P Comp Torque Upper Limit 0 00 650 00 7 9 5 3 1 733 P Comp Torque Lower Limit 0 00 650 00 7 9 5 3 1 734 Isq Limit Source Motor Op Selection 7 9 5 3 2 735 Isq Limit Source Generator Op Selection 7 9 5 3 2 736 Torque Limit Source
138. 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 11 1 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 83 71 L 75 190 75 4 vo oF a oF 77 oF sT sT It 318 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants Options 12 9 2 5 3 Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Bonfiglioli Vectron Size 2 3 0 kW to 5 5 kW Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply iph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 15 2 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 19 2 E 5 5 Assembly variants 4 319 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 2 5 4 Size 3 5 5 kW to 11 0 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply iph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 193 3 5 5 5 5 21 3 3 7 5 7 5 22 3 a 9 2 23 3 11 190 320 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants Options vw Bonfiglioli 12 9 3 Vibration proof This assembly set is not included in delivery 12 9 3 1 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 kW to 1 1 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply iph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 0 18 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 11 1 0 75 1 5 1 5 13
139. 0 Hz 302 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Input filter Options Dimensions yA T vw Bonfiglioli A B C D E F G H P J K P FTV007A 190 40 70 160 180 20 45 1 10 6 22 M5 20 31 29 5 FTV016A 250 45 70 220 235 25 54 1 10 6 22 M5 22 5 31 295 FTV030A 270 50 85 240 255 30 54 1 126 25 M5 25 40 39 5 Filter input output connector cross sections 33 44 Solid wire 16mm2 10mm Flex wire 10mm 6mm AWG8 1 5 1 8Nm 1 5 1 8 Nm AWG type wire AWG 6 Recommended torque 12 5 3 Interference suppression class The emitted interference of the Agile devices was measured with typical setups With the complied limit values the Agile devices can be used with shielded motor cables in industrial and residential environments Using main chokes or filters reduce the emitted interference of the devices 12 5 3 1 AC 3x400 V Interference suppression class Ag e size 1 Installation measure Agile 1 Without EMC input filter without line choke Class C3 Without EMC input filter with line choke Class C3 With footprint filter FS28364 8 07 Class C1 With footprint filter FS28364 8 07 and line choke upstream on mains Class C1 input side With booktype filter FTV007A Class C1 With booktype filter FTV007A and line choke upstream on mains input Class C1 side Interference suppression class Agi e si
140. 000 H m 1000 2000 Reduction of output current I depending on installa Reduction of cooling agent temperature T tion altitude H depending on installation altitude H 1 NN sea level 288 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operation diagrams Technical data vw Bonfiglioli Temperature The nominal values of the frequency inverter apply to a cooling agent temperature between 0 and 40 C ambient temperature Reduction of output current Power reduction derating Above 40 C Reduction by 2 5 K Tmax 55 C I 100 80 63 40 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 T C Reduction of output current I depending on cooling agent temperature T Mains voltage Reduction of output current Derating at constant output power Above 400 V 0 22 V Umax 480 V I 100 82 bevevexs ee EET 0 400 420 440 460 480 U V Reduction of output current I depending on output voltage U mains voltage 289 Operation diagrams 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile G Bonfiglioli ene 12 Options BONFIGLIOLI provides optional components for mechanical and electrical installation commissioning and communication 12 1 Safety To avoid serious physical injury or considerable damage to property only qualified staff may work on the device The electrical installation must be carried out by qualified electricians according to the general and regional safety and installation directives 12 2 Shield sheets With an op
141. 1 1 KW cc eeeeeeeee sees eee teeeeeeeeees 321 12 9 3 2 Size 2 3 3 0 kW to 5 5 KW 1 5 KW to 2 2 KW sssssssssssssrssrsssssrrnnnnnnerenrsrnnrrnenes 322 12 9 3 3 Size 3 36 5 5 KW to 110 KW ccriccciesedceneccaep tied ee savantceatecneradesavecrenedeadeccneceneese 323 12 9 4 DIN rail This assembly set is not included in delivery eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 324 12 9 4 1 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW i 0 09 KW to 1 1 KW cee eeeeeee sees eee eeeeeeeeeees 324 13 ERROR PROT OCD wceiseccsuscateacnascatesesasasssstiassnasscansaassnusassaciiansseseenaesiscaseusdencss 325 D320 aae l a r E E T E 325 9 This document 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x EJ Bonfiglioli Content 13 1 1 Erro M SSAQE S o rH In I In A I EEE iaa ana nnn ananin r aaa 326 13 2 Error CNVirOnMent sceeceneeseeeeeeeseeeeennaseuseenasenseenaeuseenauseeeeennuuseuseonaseesenoasenseaoas 329 13 3 TroubleShooting csssceeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeennaeeueennaseuseonaseuseeoausnseueeonaseusennasensenoauensasoas 331 14 OPERATIONAL AND ERROR DIAGNOSIS csccceecseceseeneeeeseeeeeeseneeeneeaeseeeenes 335 14 1 Status of digital signals cccsssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseenaseuseeneaeeseeneaeeseesenoasenseooaneenesoas 335 14 2 Controller Status ccccsceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeneaseeeeeeaseeseneaaeeseeeeoaaseeeenoaseesennasenneaoas 335 14 3 Warning status and warning status application ccsssseeeesseseeeeeseneeeeenase
142. 12111 1 5 17 26 14 Hazard classes sinari N a adaa 17 26 2 Hazard SYMONS nenssas i aAa ada ea aa iA 17 26 3 Prohibition SIGNS siemano a a a aaa 17 2 6 4 Personal Safety CQUIPMENL cee ee Ene ener e eens ae een enna neta 18 2 6 5 REGCYCIING Sicnassssaci canes cece Basics en aa EAA naaa a aE RANO ANNEN a EASE 18 26 6 Grounding SymBOlss isaisa a a a aaa aaas 18 26 7 ESD SYMDON sinana aa a aE Eaa AEAEE aa Saa 18 26 89 Information SIgNS erorien E A EE A a aN 18 2 7 Directives and guidelines to be adhered to by the operator csssseeesseseeeeeseneeeees 19 2 8 Operator s general plant documentation s sssssss s1111 1155 155 5 19 2 9 Operator s operating staff s responsibilities ccccsesseeeeeseseeeeenenseeseneeeeeeeeneneennes 19 2 9 1 Selection and qualification Of Staff ee cceeseseeeeeeeeeee eee ea ee eater rere eee eaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeseaeanaaes 19 2 9 2 General Wonk Safety siiccossveciscisssnases thas caveavereses farsa iaa iA aaa AE Naia isaka 19 2 10 Organizational Measures ssssssssnss1nnnnu1nnnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn na 20 210E G nerale a E E aa eetan ee 20 2 10 2 Use in combination with third party productS ssssssssssssrssssssrrrssrsrrnrnrrnnnnsrinrennrnnnenena 20 210 3 Transport and Storages iits ives vite Giese a it 20 2 10 4 Handling and installation 2 0 2 ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee te teeter eee eeaee aaa eee ee esse sane aa
143. 134 A 233 1 Reduction of switching frequency in thermal limit range 285 Device data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Technical data 11 3 Control electronics Terminals Maximum output current Terminal Maximum output current Minimum output current Input voltage range Rated input current Input peak current External fuse Safe Terminals Signal level Maximum input voltage Input resistance Response time Other properties Terminals Signal level Maximum input voltage Input resistance Response time Terminal Output voltage Maximum output current Other properties X11 1 DC 24 V X11 2 DC 0 V DC 100 mA X13 4 DC 8 2 mA DC 2 3 mA Terminal X13 1 DC 24 V X13 2 DC 0 V Input for external power supply 2 DC 24 V 10 Max DC 1 0 A typically DC 0 45 A Typically lt DC 15 A max 100 us Standard fuse elements for rated current characteristic slow Safety extra low voltage SELV according to EN 61800 5 1 X11 4 X11 5 X12 1 X12 2 PNP High DC 15 24 30 V Low DC 0 5 V INPN High DC 0 5 V_ Low DC 15 24 30 V DC 30 V DC 6 mA at DC 24 V 3 9 kQ 2 ms PLC compatible X11 3 X13 3 Low DCO0 3 V High DC 15 30 V DC 30 V DC 10 mA at DC 24 V 1 8 kQ Enable is activated 10 ms after triggering X13 5 DC 22 V DC 15 28 V DC 100 mA Overload and short circuit proof overvoltage protected 1 Depending on value at 24 VD
144. 1D terminal X11 4 In P460 enter the travel distance in motor revolutions PLC Logic functions and functions with analog quantities Chapter instruc tion Via graphic functional block programming or via entries in a table 7 6 6 16 analog quantities can be influences and logic links to digital signals can PLC be created 1 Application manual PLC 95 Typical functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Commissioning GS Bonfiglioli Monitoring and protective functions Factory setting Chapter Motor Tem Temperature monitoring with thermo contact at MFI2 perature Set P204 to 532 MFI2D Hardware 7 6 6 9 Set P562 to 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PNP active 7 6 2 24 V Set P570 0 off to 1 warning only 2 immediate error switch off 7 4 6 or 3 error switch off 1 minute delayed Temperature measurement at MFI2 temperature monitoring and dis 7 4 6 play with KTY measuring resistor or resistor PT1000 Set P617 to a temperature value If the value is reached a warning 7 4 6 message will be effected or the frequency inverter will be switched off depending on setting of P570 Set P562 to voltage input or current input 7 6 2 PTC Set P570 to 11 warning 12 immediate error switch off 7 4 6 or 13 error switch off 1 minute delayed KTY Set P570 to 21 warning 22 immediate error switch off 7 4 6 or 23 error switch
145. 2 18 2 F A MPSV CMCAN RP BO 6 00866 06 Basic Type designation 1 Series AGL 202 inverter Agile 1xAC 200 15 240 V 10 3xAC 200 15 240 V 10 AGL 402 inverter Agile 3xAC 360 480 V 10 Size Power Coding see previous chapter Size mechanical size 1 Size 1 2 Size 2 3 Size 3 F integrated default EMC Filter Design Version A standard cooling default C Cold Plate optional Optional Type designation A Mounting blank panel fixing default MPSV feed through no fan MDIN DIN rail size 1 only MNVIB vibration proof mounting B Communication module blank no module default CM CAN CANopen interface CM PDPV1 Profibus DP V1 interface CM 232 RS232 interface CM 485 2nd RS485 interface VABus amp Modbus CM VABus TCP Ethernet Protocol VABus TCP CM Modbus TCP Ethernet Protocol Modbus TCP CM EtherCAT EtherCAT Protocol CM ProfiNet ProfiNet Protocol CM EtherNet I P EtherNet I P Protocol C Memory Extension blank no memory card default RP Resource Pack MMC memory card D Software Version blank Standard default The name plate shows the options at delivery 24 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Device overview Most of the options with the exception of the Software Version can be refitted by the user Also the later modification in example removing a CM module i
146. 2 322 Error 13 h m F 00000 00 FXXXX 13 1 323 Error 14 h m F 00000 00 FXXXX 13 1 324 Error 15 h m F 00000 00 FXXXX 13 1 325 Error 16 h m F 00000 00 FXXXX 13 1 330 DC Link Voltage V 0 0 Udmax 13 2 331 Output Voltage V 0 0 Urn 13 2 332 Stator Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 13 2 335 Phase current Ia A 0 0 Imax 13 2 336 Phase current Ib A 0 0 Imax 13 2 337 Phase current Ic A 0 0 Imax 13 2 338 rms Current A 0 0 Imax 13 2 339 Isd Reactive Current A 0 0 Imax 13 2 340 Isq Active Current A 0 0 Imax 13 2 341 Rotor Magnetizing Current A 0 0 Imax 13 2 342 Torque Nm 9999 9 13 2 343 Analog Input MFI1A 100 00 13 2 344 Analog Input MFI2A 100 00 13 2 346 Analog Output MFO1A V 0 0 24 0 13 2 DC link Cap Temperature 0 Temax 13 2 Repetition Frequency Output 0 00 999 99 13 2 Status of Digital Inputs 00 255 14 1 Status of Digital Outputs 00 255 14 1 352 Time since Release h m s ms_ 00000 00 00 000 13 2 353 Heat Sink Temperature deg C 0 Tkmax 13 2 354 Inside Temperature deg C 0 Timax 13 2 E 355 Controller Status C0000 CFFFF 13 2 356 Warning Status A0000 AFFFF 14 3 357 Int Value 1 32768 13 2 358 Int Value 2 32768 13 2 359 Long Value 1 2147483647 13 2 360 Long Value 2 2147483647 13 2 361 Checksum OK NOK 13 2 362 No of Errors 0 32767 13 1 363 No of self acknowledged Errors 0 327
147. 2 Reference percentage Channel ceeeceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaaaeeeeseseaeaaea 151 7 5 2 1 PAINS iesscceeeesguaccasteceetscsgiaccseuvesecceuta teetstaatuttcs fscvecscvestermasavaccievsaaeete T 154 7 5 2 2 Positive and negative reference PercentageS cccecceccecssseeseeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaaeeeeeeeseeees 154 7 5 2 3 Fixed percentages sinana an neta canes a S tei TAANS ETSA 154 7 5 2 4 RANMPS weaxeeciteccctvcedaauliapevdiexebsaarseaasavasaad aa aa A A a N AA AE Ea EIAN 155 735 5 Motor potentiometers csi scvvesvisisedsesenisecdiavertvdedensesevese thes vers AAN E NE EAEE 156 7 5 3 1 Operation modes of motor potentiometer eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeenees 156 7 5 3 2 Ramp of motor potentiometer ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaae ee eeeeeeeeaaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeaeaaaa 156 7 5 3 3 Motor potentiometer via digital iNDUtS eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens eeeeaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaa 157 7 5 3 4 Keypad motorpoti Control via Operator panel cccccsseeeeeesseeeeesssaeeeeeeaaeseeseaaaaes 160 pisye eammee e 9 ene rol ereteerreet irene rer rererrerer aA EE errr reper terre 163 7 5 4 1 Scope OF FUNCTION isisisi anaa a a E N ANAE nda 163 7 5 4 2 Operation modes of electronic GCar cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeseesaaaaaaeees 163 7 5 4 3 Gan factor cise saegesisseasieecaiea caaav en aabav canekibad denen SAES E EESE S ERa 165 7 5 4 4 OPSEU sdscccdie genet a E E T E 1
148. 2 Selection 958 TxPDO2 Boolean3 Selection 959 TxPDO2 Boolean4 Selection 960 TxPDO2 Word1i Selection 961 TxPDO2 Word2 Selection 962 TxPDO2 Word3 Selection 963 TxPDO2 Word4 Selection 964 TxPDO2 Long1 Selection 965 TxPDO2 Long2 Selection 966 TxPDO3 Boolean1 Selection 967 TxPDO3 Boolean2 Selection 968 TxPDO3 Boolean3 Selection 969 TxPDO3 Boolean4 Selection 972 TxPDO3 Word Selection SyStStab 973 TxPDO3 Word2 Selection 974 TxPDO3 Word3 Selection 975 TxPDO3 Word4 Selection 976 TxPDO3 Long1 Selection 977 TxPDO3 Long2 Selection 989 Emergency Reaction Selection 1180 Operation Mode Selection 1190 Stator Resistance Ohm 0 001 100 000 722 Parameters Menu PARA 351 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Parameter list Description Setting range 0 01 Irn 1192 Peak Current A 100000 0 Inn 7 2 2 EEPROM 0 16 1250 Mux Input Index write RAM 17 33 7 6 6 17 EEPROM 0 16 1251 Mux Input Index read RAM 17 33 7 6 6 17 1252 Mux Inputs Selection 7 6 6 17 1253 DeMux Input Selection 7 6 6 17 1363 User warning 1 Selection 7 6 6 14 1364 User warning 2 Selection 7 6 6 14 1370 In F PDP word1 Selection 7 10 12 1371 In F PDP word2 Selection 7 10 12 1372 In F intern long1
149. 204 532 real value 2 Analog value MFI2A _ P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 11 13 MPTC P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 T 21 23 KTY c P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 Electronic gear gear factor scaling 31 33 PT1000 O P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 P475 40 Electronic gear or P492 40 Electronic gear P689 2 Numerator analog O 3 Denominator analog Scaling P476 1 Analog value NEAL P452 1 2 5 6 or 7 2 Analog value MFI2A C P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 or P494 1 Analog value MFI1A L P452 1 2 5 6 or 7 2 Analog value MFI2A O P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 The block diagram only shows a selection of possible uses of the inputs and outputs 47 Control terminals Standard connection 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Electrical Installation GS Bonfiglioli 5 7 4 Evaluation logic of digital inputs The evaluation logic of the digital inputs and multifunction inputs in digital operation mode can be changed over via parameter settings e Select O NPN active 0 V or 1 PNP active 24 V for parameter Digital inputs PNP NPN 559 Digital inputs X11 4 IN1D 0 NPN active 0 V Low switching with negative signal High switching with positive signal Facto X11 5 IN2D 1 PNP active 24 V ne avi gnal Factory X11 6 IN3D X12 1 IN4D X12 2 IN5D PNP NPN Voltage output 24 VDC Digital inputs Digital inputs Digital Input Output Digital input output
150. 25 kW 03 0 37 kW 05 0 55 kW 07 0 75 kW 1 5 mm2 2x1 5 mm2 or 1x10 mm2 1 5 mm2 09 1 1 kW 11 1 5 kW 13 2 2 kW 15 3 0 kW 18 4 kw 2 5 mm2 2x2 5 mm2 or 1x10 mm2 1 5 mm2 19 5 5 kW 4 mm2 2x4 mm or 1x10 mm2 4 mm2 21 7 5 kW 6 mm2 2x6 mm or 1x10 mm2 4 mm2 1 Connection on protective earth on mounting plate Three phase connection L1 L2 L3 400 V 03 0 25 kW 02 0 37 kW 05 0 55 kW 07 0 75 kW 09 1 1 kW 1 5 mm2 2x1 5 mm2 or 1x10 mm2 1 5 mm2 11 1 5 kW 13 2 2 kW 15 3 0 kW 18 4 0 kw 19 5 5 kW 21 7 5 kW 2 5 mm2 2x2 5 mm or 1x10 mm2 2 5 mm2 22 9 2 kW 23 11 0 kW 4 mm2 2x4 mm2 or 1x10 mm2 4 mm2 D Connection on protective earth on mounting plate Please note that the mentioned typical cross sections do not consider other factors like fuses Comply with applying local standards and applying branch standards 35 Dimensioning of conductor cross section 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation 5 5 Mains Connection Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being ener gized unintentionally Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to work at the unit When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply the mains DC link voltage and motor terminals may still be liv
151. 30 Ramp Rise Time ms 0 10000 7 5 1 4 435 Operation Mode Selection 7 10 8 436 Ramp up Time S 0 01 320 00 7 10 8 437 Ramp down Time S 0 01 320 00 7 10 8 438 Traverse Amplitude 0 01 50 00 7 10 8 439 Proportional Step 0 01 50 00 7 10 8 440 Mode Actual Value Fail i Selection 7 9 3 441 Max I component Hz 0 00 999 99 7 9 3 442 Maximum Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 7 9 3 443 Minimum Frequency Hz 999 99 0 00 7 9 3 444 Amplification 15 00 15 00 7 9 3 445 Integral Time ms 0 32767 7 9 3 446 Derivative Time ms 0 1000 7 9 3 447 1st Blocking Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 7 5 1 5 448 2nd Blocking Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 7 5 1 5 449 Frequency Hysteresis Hz 0 00 100 00 7 5 1 5 450 Tolerance Band 0 00 25 00 7 6 1 1 2 451 Filter Time Constant ms Selection 7 6 1 1 3 452 Operation Mode MFI1 Selection 7 6 1 453 Error Warning Behaviour Selection 7 6 1 1 3 454 Characteristic Curve Point X1 0 00 100 00 7 6 1 1 2 455 Characteristic Curve Point Y1 100 00 100 00 7 6 1 1 2 456 Characteristic Curve Point X2 0 00 100 00 7 6 1 1 2 A 457 Characteristic Curve Point Y2 100 00 100 00 7 6 1 1 2 4
152. 492 is set to 5 Keypad Motorpot Parameter Reference Frequency Source 2 492 offers further options to define the frequency for the offset See chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel 7 5 4 5 Actual values Via parameter Repetition Frequency Input 252 the reference frequency can be displayed at the repe tition frequency input Via parameter Reference Ramp Frequency 283 the actual value of the frequency after multiplication by the gear factor and addition of the optionally selectable repetition frequencies can be displayed 7 5 4 6 Adjustment Options The following instructions describe options for setting the electronic gear The settings must be ad justed to the application 166 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli of the drives It should be checked if these additional control functions are switched on The control functions listed in the following table may affect the synchronous operation A and if they are required Operation mode Intelligent current limits 610 Operation mode Current limit value controller Operation mode Slip compensation Operation mode Voltage controller n T Control change over Switch over Torque control Bererence bre uency onur ad Added reference frequency value Reference Frequency Source 2 quency Via parameter Controller Status 275 you can display if a controller is active The function of the electronic gear is realiz
153. 5 TA Overload I sisimas EEEa aA TTEA 135 Tk Tempera E oaa E E A ANN 136 74 3 Controller status vicceseccenuessatecexscecntncedssencsdeectes aa Naana kaa 136 7 4 4 Frequency switch off limit sssssssssesssununnnnnenenerennnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnenenennnnnnnnnennnnnennnn nna 137 FAS External GFO ssccececsetccesntsstetscsnccessntecay ebesvenctenndbadudisienccsendeaneddevavecesneseannastadecaveceanede 137 TAO Motor temperature aanren a EEAS 137 7 4 6 1 Technical demands on measuring reS Stors ssssssssrsssssrssrrnrnrnrerennnnrnnnnenenennnnnna 140 ZTA Phase TAU simsimi nms iaae TT E AEEA 141 7 4 8 Automatic Error ACKNOWIEAQMENC ceeee eee eeeeeeee eee e eee ee seas a aaae eee eeee eee ea aa aaaaeeeeeeeseaeaaea 142 7 5 Reference Value ccssseeeecseseeeeeneaseeseeneseeeeeneuseeeenoaseesenoauseueusanouseesauoaseeseoogseenenoaaees 142 7 5 1 Reference frequency Channel ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teres ee eeaeaeaaaeeeeeeseesasaaaaaeeeeeeeseeeaaea 142 7 5 1 1 MEARNS esns cous vere bec ee cectuaverececudeeecs est caecktce suave cacdusteantsastaciesgaieenesadasneetsusacmere 145 7 5 1 2 Positive and negative reference freqQUeNnCi s ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeees 145 7 5 1 3 Fixed EQUENCIOS sissioni innia ne wter ed AA d enenda 146 7 5 1 4 RaM pS aisinn aaa a a a aaa a aa EAE AEAN 147 7 5 1 5 Blocking frequencies iidse aa aS 150 ASLO JOG TEQUCNCY sissi nannan aiaa ra En ASETA OA AARAA AENA aaRS 151 7 5
154. 50 Flux Reduction 1551 Energy Saving Function On 1552 The energy saving function is suitable for partial load operation of a drive drives without high or frequent load variations The energy saving function is not suitable for operation of a synchronous motor The energy saving parameters cannot be set if 610 PMSM sensor less field orientated control DMC is selected for parameter Configuration 30 110 I M sensor less control V f characteristic In the case of the sensor less control of an asynchronous motor according to the V f characteristic the optimum operating point of the motor is adjusted in order to keep power consumption to a mini mum 410 IM sensor less field orientated control DMC In the case of the field orientated control of an asynchronous motor the optimum operating point of the motor is adjusted in order to keep power consumption to a minimum 257 Energy saving function 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile cay Bonfiglioli Energy saving 1550 Operation Mode Energy Saving Function Parameter Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550 defines if the power consumption mag netic flux is reduced by an adjustable value or by an automatically determined value Evaluation must be switched on via parameter Energy Saving Function On 1552 Energy saving function is switched off Factory setting Energy saving function can be switched on via a digital input or a logic signal The digital
155. 58 Operation Mode Selection 7 3 7 459 Signal Source Selection 7 3 7 460 Positioning Distance 0 000 1 10 7 3 7 461 Signal Correction 327 68 327 67 7 3 7 462 Load Correction 32768 32767 7 3 7 463 Activity after Positioning Selection 7 3 7 464 Waiting Time ms 0 3 6 10 7 3 7 345 Parameters Menu PARA 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 6 yey Bonfiglioli Parameter list No Description Unit Setting range Chapter 473 Ramp Frequency Motorpoti Hz s 0 01 999 99 7 5 3 3 1 474 Operation Mode Selection 7 5 3 475 Reference Frequency Source 1 Selection 7 5 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 1 Selection 7 5 2 Gradient Percentage Ramp 0 60000 7 5 2 4 Actual Percentage Source Selection 793 Fixed Frequency 1 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Fixed Frequency 2 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Fixed Frequency 3 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Fixed Frequency 4 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Reference Frequency RAM 999 99 999 99 485 Fixed Frequency 5 Hz 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Fixed Frequency 6 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Fixed Frequency 7 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 Fixed Frequency 8 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 3 JOG Frequency 999 99 999 99 7 5 1 6 Reference Frequency Source2 Selection 751 Operation Mode Selection 7 5 1
156. 581 of V belt monitoring f Message of the configurable parameter Create warning Zo Warning MaSK mask 536 See chapter 7 6 5 8 Warning mask A warning application is signaled Display of the actual 26 Warning Application value is effected via parameter Application Warnings 273 See chapter 7 6 5 9 Warning mask application _ oor Message of the configurable parameter Create warning 27 Warning Mask Application mask application 626 28 Warning gen Warning Application A warning or warning application is signaled 29 Warn Mask gen Warn Mask Message of configurable parameters Create warning Appl mask 536 and Create Warning Mask Application 626 ree Magnetic field has been impressed See chapter 7 6 5 4 30 Flux Forming finished Elux forming finished Signal of the traverse function See chapter 7 10 8 Activation of a brake unit depending on the Operation Mode 620 for the starting behavior Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior or the configured brake control system See chapter 7 6 5 5 Release brake The Switch on temperature 39 has been reached An 43 External fan external fan can be switched on by the signal See chapter 7 6 5 7 External fan The time remaining until service has expired See chap 50 Warning service fan ter 10 3 2 Fan 16 Conroller Current Limit Long Term Ixt Conroller Current Limit Short Term 6 ae a 41 Brake release 188 Operating Instructions A
157. 6 9 Thermal contact 204 Thermal contact for P570 The monitoring of the motor temperature is a part of the error and warning behavior which can be configured as required Parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 links the digital input signal to the Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 See chapter 7 4 6 Motor temperature By default multifunction input 2 is used for connection of a thermal contact Thermal contact for P570 204 532 MFI2D Hardware multifunction input 2 terminal X12 4 Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 0 Off e For parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 the digital input to which the thermal contact is connected must be selected e For parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 select an evaluation warning or error switch off If a multifunction input is selected for parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 the multifunction input must be configured as a digital input Multifunction input 1 Operation Mode MFI 452 3 Digital NPN active 0 V 4 Digital PNP active 24 V 3 Digital NPN active 0 V Factory setting 4 Digital PNP active 24 V Multifunction input 2 Operation Mode MFI 562 202 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Select NPN or PNP according to the required evaluation of the thermal contact If a thermal contact is connected to multifunction input 2 no change of Thermal contact for P570 204 and Opera
158. 6 or 7 7 6 2 1 2 Digital Assign signal 77 MFI2D to a function 7 6 6 Temperature monitoring with thermo contact Set P204 to 532 MFI2D Hardware 7 6 6 9 Set P570 to 1 2 or 3 motor temperature warning or 7 4 6 error switch off MFO1 X13 6 P550 Select analog digital repetition frequency or pulse train out 7 6 3 put Digital Select a function via P554 7 6 3 Analog Via P553 select a signal for the output 7 Abs Actu 7 6 3 al Frequency Repetition Via P555 select a frequency value for the output 7 6 3 frequency Set P556 for representation of incremental encoder Pulse Scale delivered frequency value via P557 7 6 3 train l The value is referred to P419 maximum frequency 7 5 1 1 OUT1D X13 5 Select a function via P531 2 Run Signal 7 6 5 OUT2D X10 Select a function via P532 103 Inv Error Signal 7 6 5 Relay 1 Multifunction input 1 2 e g for PID controller P475 P492 30 technology controller or for the torque controller P164 3 Multifunction input 2 e g for PID controller P475 P492 30 technology controller or for the torque controller P164 gt Multifunction output Typical functions 93 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Data set for parameter values and motor data Commissioning Factory setting Chapter For motor data of different motors or adjustment to different operating
159. 651 Operation mode Auto start The auto start function is suitable for applications which permit a start at mains voltage by their func tion By activation of the auto start function via parameter Operation mode 651 the frequency in verter accelerates the drive after application of the mains voltage Control signals STOA and STOB for enable and the start command are required as per the regulations When the motor is switched on it is accelerated according to the parameterization and the reference value signal No auto start The drive is accelerated after application of the mains voltage as soon as the enable and the start command are present 1 Switched on The drive is accelerated by the frequency inverter as soon as the mains voltage is applied level triggered 7 3 5 Flying Start 645 Operation Mode Flying Start The synchronization to a rotating drive is necessary in applications which drive the motor by their behavior or in which the drive is still rotating after an error switch off Via Operation Mode Flying Start 645 the motor speed is synchronized to the current motor speed without an Overcurrent fault message After this the motor is accelerated to the reference speed at the set acceleration This syn chronization function determines the current rotary frequency of the drive via a search run The synchronization in operation modes 1 to 4 is accelerated by short test impulses Rotary frequen cies of up to 175 Hz are deter
160. 66 7 5 4 5 Actual Value Srsinasn ingina NA AEE aa T 166 7 5 4 6 Adjustment Options a ciicnirisivendiiveisieeaeendetide a pies 166 7 6 Control inputs and Output ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeseeeeaseeeeneaseeseeeaseseesenoeseeeennaaees 168 7 6 1 Multifunction input MFI1 eee eee nen e esas nase ees nnn nnnn nananana 168 7 6 1 1 Multifunction input set as analog input MFIIA ee eee eeeeeee cree eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 7 6 1 2 Multifunction input set as digital input MFI1D cece ceeeeeeeeee eee eaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 7 6 2 Multifunction input MFI2 2 0 02 ee eeeeeee cece eee e eee eee eee rere eee sees aaa cate ener ee eeasa naan eeeeeeseeeaaea 175 7 6 2 1 Multifunction input set as analog input MFI2A cccccsseeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeseaaeeeeseaaaaes 175 7 6 2 2 Multifunction input set as digital input MFI2D cccccseeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeenaaaes 181 7 6 3 Multifunction OUtpUt MFO1 eect e eee ee eee reese eens aaa a a 182 7 6 4 Digital input output IN3D OUT3D ceeeeeeseeeeee esses eeeeeea eae eeeesaaeeeesasaaeeesaeaaaeeessaaaeees 186 7 6 5 Digital OUTPUTS aisis ra EAE AE ANNARA AANA 187 7 6 5 1 Digital message inniinn a aea aaa a a aa aeiia 189 7 6 5 2 Setting THEQUENCY csi sevvesdcecebansastavesaeeines ats Vateassnns tsa iaaa Aaa LASTAS 190 7 6 5 3 Reference value reached stints Ati renesndiniee steven vente eiaie ives 190 7 6 5 4 FlUX TOrMING FINISHED arira a S sa 191 7 6 5 5 Release D
161. 67 13 1 367 Application Warning State A0000 AFFFF 14 3 Actual values Menu Actual 341 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Parameter list No Description Unit Display range Chapter 7 3 1 411 Status Word 0 OXFFFF 9 7 CM 470 Revolutions u 0 000 1 10 91 537 Actual Warning Mask AXXXXXXXX 7 6 5 8 627 Actual Appl Warning Mask AXXXX 7 6 5 9 797 SETUP Status _ OK NOK 68 9 5 978 Node State 1 3 Systemb 9 5 979 CAN State 1 3 Systemb 1290 Node State gt l a 127 20 B CM CAN 9 6 1291 CAN State 0 4 CM CAN 9 8 1431 Module Info Ethernet 1530 Service Interval DC link 0 100 10 3 1 1531 Service Interval Fan 0 100 10 3 2 1533 Maintenance Note M 10 3 3 1541 Device test status T a The column chapter refers to the chapter number and or the corresponding document that contains a detailed parameter description CM Please refer to the manual of the used communication profile CM CAN Please refer to the CAN communication manual CM PDPV1 Please refer to the PROFIBUS communication manual CM 485 Please refer to the VABus communication manual CM Modbus Please refer to the Modbus communication manual Systembus Please refer to the Systembus communication manual Ethernet Please refer to the Et
162. 80 65 95 55 37 4 0 8 0 75 2 5 1 0 1 2 4mm LCvVT006 100 65 115 60 39 4 1 0 0 75 2 5 1 0 1 2 4 mm LCVT008 100 75 115 60 48 4 1 5 0 75 2 5 1 0 1 2 4mm LCVTO10 100 75 115 60 48 4 1 5 0 75 2 5 1 0 1 2 4mm LCVT015 125 85 135 100 55 5 3 0 0 75 4 0 1 5 1 8 4 mm LCVT018 155 90 135 130 57 8 4 0 0 75 4 0 1 5 1 8 4mm LCVT025 155 100 160 130 57 8 4 0 0 75 10 4 0 4 5 4mm LCVT034 155 100 190 130 57 8 4 5 2 5 16 2 0 4 0 M5 299 Line choke 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli 12 5 Input filter Options Input filters damp the conducted radio frequency interference voltage The filter must be installed upstream on mains input side of the frequency inverter L1 1 Line choke L2 F L3 2 Input filter N Circuit diagram of input filter schematic L10 ha Eo 11 O O L20 i H oL O O 12 5 1 Footprint filter The filter can be installed below the frequency inverter or next to the frequency inverter onto the mounting plate Frequency inverter Recommended Filter Agile 402 kW Size Type Order code Product Code Type Plate 0 25 2 2 1 FTVO0O1B AGL FS28364 8 07 3 0 40 2 FTV002B AGL FS28364 10 07 5 5 11 0 3 FTV003B AGL FS28364 26 07 300 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Input filter Options vw Bonfiglioli Fil
163. 9 P780 P781 Factory setting if P30 410 IM sensor less field oriented control P30 610 PMSM sensor less field oriented control Starting Current value Tew For sufficient torque if a high start torque is re quired The start current is impressed until the output frequency reaches the value of P624 Frequency Limit 2 60 Hz The starting current is impressed up to this output frequency Min Flux Formation Time The current during flux formation P781 is impressed at least for this time Max Flux Formation Time P30 410 1000 ms P30 610 50 ms The current during flux formation P781 is impressed not longer than this time Current during flux formation value Irn Upon startup this current value is impressed The time for current impression is limited by P780 Stopping behaviour P630 Factory setting 0 P68 and P69 1 Coast to Stop P68 and P69 0 Coast to Stop 1 P68 and P69 1 Coast to Stop P68 and P69 0 Stop and Switch Off 11 P68 and P69 1 Stop and Switch Off P68 and P69 0 Stop and Switch Off 43 P68 and P69 1 Emergency Stop and Switch Off P68 and P69 0 Stop and DC brake DC brake only if P30 110 As from standstill the direct current P631 brak ing current is impressed for the time of P632 braking time Via P68 Start Clockwise and P69 Start Anticlockwise the motor stopping behavior is controlled For state P68 and P69 logic 1 a stopping behav
164. 9 Hz 50 00 Hz Minimum Frequency 999 99 Hz 50 00 Hz If the PID controller is to operate the drive in both directions Minimum Frequen cy 443 lt 0 Hz Parameter Minimum Frequency 418 should be set to 0 Hz If Maximum Frequency 442 and Minimum Frequency 443 are set asymmetric in example Maximum Frequency 442 30 00 Hz and Minimum Frequency 443 20 00 Hz with positive Amplification 444 setting the Start Right Control will result in using Maximum Frequency 442 for Clockwise rotation positive control deviation and Minimum Frequency 443 for Anticlockwise rotation negative control deviation Setting the Start Left Control will result in using Minimum Frequency 443 for Clock wise rotation positive control deviation and Maximum Frequency 442 for Anticlock wise rotation negative control deviation p 618 Backlash With parameter Backlash 618 you can set a range in which a control deviation is not processed In this way frequent post controlling and jerking of the drive can be avoided Requirement Stator Frequency 210 lt Switch Off Threshold Stop Function 637 No Description Fact sett 618 Backlash 50 00 616 Backlash Motor Power off In different applications it could be requested to switch off the power stage with a small control devia tion and low output frequency With parameter Backlash Motor Power off 616 this behavior can be set up 226 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functio
165. 9X11 5 H o IN4D P496 6X12 1 20 f Hao IN5D 21 f Ho X12 2 E mn E m IN3D P497 1nnonn 9X11 6 X12 5 9 P276 X12 6 9 Systembus CANopen RS485 1X21 P395 RJ45 VABus Modbus z J cM X310 Le 10VDC P452 R 1 6 CND Lg Y9X12 3 2 5 7 9 PID desired set value i P476 or P494 E p P562 i 1 MEIA X12 3 Bi 1 6 1 2 MFI2A X12 4 i o SAD o x12 4 SS SS SSS SST SS ST TS PSS SSS TE aE o PID real value 2 5 7 P478 1 MFI1A X12 3 2 MFI2A X12 4 Not all possible reference frequency sources are shown 81 After first commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning Ramp rise time Factory setting P430 Accelerated and uniform acceleration and deceleration via S curve Thereby the jerk during acceleration and deceleration is reduced The value is used both for clockwise and anticlockwise operation 0 ms Torque control Factory setting Reference torque P164 6 On P476 1 Analog Value MFI1A 7 Off 2 Analog Value MFI2A 71 Changeover via 3 Fixed Percentage digital inputs 4 Motorpot via Digital Inputs 5 Keypad Motorpot Speed control is switched off when torque control is switched on P30 must be set to 410 asynchronous motor or 610 synchronous motor amp Speed control Factory setting Optimize speed controller P720 0 Speed controller off P721 Amplification 1 f
166. A behavior 0 Monitoring of the analog input signal is active regardless of the enable of the frequency inverter Operation mode 2 defines the shut down and stopping of the drive regardless of the setting of pa rameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior The drive is stopped according to stopping behavior 2 If the set holding time has expired an error message is issued The drive can be started again by switching the start signal on and off Operation mode 3 defines the free coasting of the drive as described in stopping behavior 0 regard less of the setting of parameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior The input signal is not monitored Factory setting 0 m 1 Warning lt 1V 2 mA If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA a warning message is issued 2 180 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions w Bonfiglioli Vectron The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error Warning Behaviour 563 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 564 Example Error warning behavior 563 2 Shutdown lt 1V 2mA or 3 Error Switch Off lt 1V 2mA In the factory settings of the parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 564 shutting down or error switch off are effected at an output frequency 0 Hz If shutting down or error switch off are to be effected at an output frequency of 0 Hz the Point X1 must be adjusted
167. A8000 g is displayed The unloaded drive is switched off and fault message F0402 is displayed The error and warning messages can be output via the digital outputs Signal 22 Warning V Belt and transmitted to an overriding controller for example The Trigger Limit Iactive 582 is to be pa rameterized as a percentage of the Rated Current 371 for the application and the possible operating points Description X Fact sett Trigger Limit Iactive D 0 10 0 583 Delay Time 600 0 s 7 10 8 Traverse function With the traverse function a triangle shaped frequency signal with the start up and shut down times to be set is superimposed on the output frequency The resulting chronological order of the reference frequency of master drive and slave drive are shown in the following diagrams The function can be used for example for drives which wind up thread on coils in textile machines To avoid winding er rors at the turning point of the thread guide a proportional step is performed which causes a quick speed change 435 Operation Mode Traverse function Via parameter Operation Mode 435 the drive is configured as a master drive or slave drive The traverse function is deactivated Factory setting 1 Master drive Operation as master drive 2 Slave drive Operation as slave drive 250 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 436 Ramp up Time 437 Ramp d
168. C voltage input 2 Connect ground GND of external power supply to terminal X13 2 GND 3 The value is reduced if additional control outputs are used Operating Instructions Agile 286 06 2013 Control electronics Technical data vw Bonfiglioli Terminal X11 6 Digital Input PNP High DC 15 24 30 V Low DC 0 5 V Signal level NPN High DC 0 5 V Low DC 15 24 30 V Maximum input voltage DC 30 V DC 6 mA at 24 V Input resistance 3 9 kQ Response time 2 ms Other properties PLC compatible Digital output DC 24 V DC 15 30 V DC 100 mA Overload and short circuit proof overvoltage protected Output voltage Maximum output current Other properties Low DC 0 5 digital High DC 15 24 30 digital High DC 0 5 V Signal level digital Maximum input voltage DC 30 V DC 6 mA at DC 24 V Input resistance 3 9 kQ Response time 2 ms Other properties PLC compatible Voltage input analo Input voltage DCO 10 V Input resistance 78 kQ Resolution 10 Bit Current input analog Input current DC 0 20 mA Input resistance 250 Q Resolution 9 Bit Terminal X13 6 Digital output Output voltage DC 24 V DC 15 30 V Maximum output current DC 100 mA Other properties Overload and short circuit proof overvoltage protected Analog output PWM Output voltage DC 24 V DC 15 30 V Maximum output current DC 100 mA Other properties
169. Char K characteristic of the motor circuit breaker Operating Instructions Agile 246 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Parameter Operation Mode 571 1 or 11 101 or 111 In multiple motor operation it is assumed that each data set is assigned to a corresponding motor For this one motor and one motor circuit breaker are assigned to each data set In this operation mode the rated values of the active data set are monitored The current output current of the fre quency inverter is only taken into account in the motor circuit breaker activated by the data set In the motor circuit breakers of the other data sets zero current is expected with the result that the thermal decay functions are taken into account In combination with the data set changeover the function of the motor circuit breakers is similar to that of motors connected alternately to the mains with their own circuit breakers Parameter Operation Mode 571 2 or 22 102 or 122 The internal state of the motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable These settings are to be used for short time time mains shut downs This way the motor protection is considered correctly also in appli cations where a short mains power off or a shutdown orccurs Parameter Operation Mode 571 101 102 111 or 122 The internal state of the motor protection switch is latched reset stable These be used when regularly short mains interruptions occur This wa
170. D Relay Signal selected via Op Mode OUT2D X10 Relay 532 177 Digital Signal OUT3D Signal selected via Op Mode OUT3D X11 6 533 178 Reference Percentage Signal when the Actual Percentage Value 230 has reached the reached Reference Percentage Value 229 179 Mains Failure Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active accord ing to Operation Mode 670 for the voltage controller 180 Warning Motor Protection Parameterized Operation Mode 571 of the motor circuit breaker Switch triggered 181 Digital Signal MFO1D Signal selected via Digital Source MFOID 554 i er The defined warning mask of parameter Create Appl Warning Zia Waning Mask Applicaton Mask 626 signals a critical operating point _ ore All Application Warnings are deactivated Display is effected via Serpe ane Varning parameter Application Warnings 273 219 Technology Controller The control deviation lies within the range defined by Back within Backlash lash 618 Signal if the time remaining until service has expired Parameter Operation Mode Service Interval DC link 1534 must be set to 2 Alarm Message Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 dis plays a message Signal if the time remaining until service has expired Parameter Operation Mode Service Interval Fan 1535 must be set to 2 Alarm Message Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays a 270 to 277 o modes 70 to 77 of the digital inputs inverted LOW 284 STOA inverted Inverted sig
171. Data Set Change Over 2 71 you can preset up to 16 fixed percentages as reference values The fixed percentage changeover can also be controlled via digital signals instead of digital inputs by functions of the frequency inverter Via parameter Operation Mode 495 you can change the direction of rotation of the motor See chap ter 7 5 2 2 Positive and negative reference percentages The direction of rotation can also be preset with the digital signal sources assigned to the parameters Start clockwise 68 and Start anti clockwise 69 Via the reference percentage channel see chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel the fixed reference values can be selected and linked to other reference value sources 7 5 2 4 Ramps 477 Gradient Percentage Ramp The percentage value ramps scale the change of the reference value in percent for the correspond ing input function The acceleration and deceleration of the drive are parameterized via the frequency ramps The behavior Gradient Percentage Ramp 477 corresponds to a function which takes the time behav ior of the drive system into account If the parameter is set to 0 s this function is deactivated and a direct reference value modification for the following function is obtained No Description Min Max Fact sett Gradient Percentage Ramp 0 s 60000 s 10 s 155 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 5 3 Motor poten
172. E P372 Rated speed in rpm SPEEd P374 Rated Cos Phi caSPh Enter if 110 UF or 410 FOC was selected for P30 ENT P375 Rated frequency in Hz Pret If STO is displayed enable must be switched on via STOA X11 3 Std and STOB X13 3 Auto tuning auto set up Confirm to start the measurement of fur FunE ther motor parameters Consider the following note for another set ENT ting option Note CALC If a BONFIGLIOLI motor is connected and the rated values have been confirmed Calc instead of tune is displayed In this case further motor parameters are not measured The data is loaded and stored If instead an auto tuning should be done use the arrow keys to switch from Calc to tune Auto tuning auto set up Further motor parameters are measured kun mn automatically if tune was selected Wait until the auto tuning operation is complete and the next param eter prompt is displayed If Motor measurement of motor data only was selected at the beginning of the setup procedure ready is displayed P420 Acceleration clockwise in Hz s Alec Ramp gradient Change rate Hz s of output frequency after a change of the reference value or after a start command ENT P421 Deceleration clockwise in Hz s JEL 63 First commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GD Bonfiglioli Parameter P418 P419 Ramp gradient Change rate Hz s of output frequency after a
173. FI1D 0 V 24 V Low switching with negative 3 Digital NPN active 0 V signal Digital signal MFI1D 0 V 24 V High switching with positive signal 4 Digital PNP active 24 V 174 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions v Bonfiglioli 76 MFI1D Assign to a function e g select signal source for parameter 7 6 2 Multifunction input MFI 2 X12 _ A MFI2 562 Operation Mode MFI 2 Multifunction input 2 Multifunction input MFI2 can be configured as a voltage current or a digital input In the configuration as a digital input the evaluation can be selected as PNP high switching or NPN low switching Depending on the selected Operation Mode MFI2 562 various functions of the frequency inverter can be controlled 1 Voltage 0 10 V Voltage signal MFI2A 0 V 10 V Fixed characteristic 2 Current 0 20 mA Current signal MFI2A 0 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic 3 Digital NPN active 0 V 4 Digital PNP active 24 V Voltage signal MFI2A 0 V 10 V The output signal is influ 6 Voltage characteristic enced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 564 567 Current signal MFI2A 0 mA 20 mA The output signal is in 7 Current characteristic fluenced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 564 567 By default multifunction input MFI2 is set as a dig
174. For parameter Operation Mode IN2D 496 select 20 RF Single Evaluation or 21 RF Double Evaluation RF Repetition Frequency Digital input IN2D is the repetition frequency input See chapter 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency input e Since the rated speed decreases when the number of pole pairs is higher n 1 p different speeds may result if the master drive and slave drive have the same reference frequencies Adjust the values for parameters Divider 497 of the repetition frequency input of the slave drive and RF Division marks 556 of the repetition frequency output of the master according to the num ber of pole pairs of the motors in order to obtain the same speeds for the master drive and the slave drive Different speeds can be realized by setting the gear factor Different values for parameters Rep Freq Divider 497 of the repetition frequency input of the slave drive and RF Division Marks 556 of the repetition frequency output of the master result in different speeds of the master drive and the slave drive if the number of pole pairs of the motors is the same 167 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile PRET Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions e Set parameters Acceleration Clockwise 420 and Deceleration Clockwise 421 or Acceleration Anticlockwise 422 and Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 to the required values For synchronous acceleration and deceleration of the drives set the values of the slave drive slightly higher
175. IN2D at terminal X11 5 100 100 of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 or 100 100 of Maximum Frequency 419 See 7 6 7 1 PWM input Repetition frequency input at digital input IN2D at terminal X11 5 One edge of the frequency signal is evaluated The signal can also be evaluated as a percentage See 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency input 11 PWM 100 100 20 RF Single Evaluation 207 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Repetition frequency input at digital input IN2D at terminal X11 5 Both edges of the frequency signal are evaluated The signal can also be evaluated as a percentage See 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency input Pulse train pulse sequence signal at digital input IN2D at ter minal X11 5 as reference frequency Via parameter Pulse Train 21 RF Double Evaluation Scaling Frequency 654 you can set which input frequency cor responds to the value of Maximum Frequency 419 See 7 6 7 3 30 Pulse Train Pulse train Percentage Via parameter Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 you can set which percentage corresponds to the value of Maxi mum Reference Percentage 519 The signal can also be evaluat ed as a percentage Digital input IN2D is intended for use as PWM input repetition frequency input or pulse train input Digital input IN2D cannot be used for other functions if the function PWM inpu
176. IOLI motor is connected check and confirm the values If a motor of another manufacturer was connected please enter the values manually Rated voltage in V The real AC rated voltage of the motor has to be set up marked bold in the following This results in entering AC 330 V Motor DC 560 V Motor AC 400 V FI System voltage AC 200 V Motor DC 320 V Motor AC 230 V FI System voltage Rated mechanical power in kW For the BCR and BTD motors the rated mechanical power is listed in the motor catalogue Rated speed in rpm No of pole pairs Rated frequency in Hz If STO is displayed enable must be switched on via STOA X11 3 and STOB X13 3 Auto tuning auto set up Confirm to start the measurement of fur ther motor parameters Consider the following note for another set Commissioning Display ber oder bed oder ob her ENT D 9 D co OO fg SO AnPEre ENT Cc D F r ENT m a 2 3 D C rr 7 a m 4 Oo mn a un wn rr B olg m C J m 1 Control of a synchronous motor for higher demands on speed or torque accuracy In the case of control via operator panel Select Synch PMSM Permanently magnetized synchronous motor Operating Instructions Agile 66 06 2013 First commissioning Commissioning Parameter P383 P420 P421 P418 P419 First commissioning vw Bonfiglioli Display ting option Note CALE If a BONFIGLIOLI m
177. Modbus or VABus P395 X21 VABus X21 RS485 Reference speed I a 1 Voltage 0 10 V 0 10 VDC l 1 Analog value MFI1A Ac r 4 P562 3 Digital NPN active 0 V Motor thermal contact M P204 532 MFI2D HW N GND P570 0 Off 1 Thermal contact P204 Warning only 2 Thermal contact P204 Error switch off 3 Thermal contact P204 Error switch off 1 min delayed Comply with the technical data of control terminals See chapter 11 3 Control electronics For evaluation of the motor thermo contact parameter Operation Mode Motor PTC 570 must be set See Chapter 7 4 6 Motor temperature Via parameters Digital inputs PNP NPN 559 the logic evaluation at IN1D IN2D IN4D and IN5D is changed 43 Control terminals Standard connection 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile FHT Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation z 5 o D onou gt 10 81E a615 240E X13 172137141516 Eai S Hh z235 X12 111213141516 Q mM 2 8 eae Q tle plzlel2 X11 F144 2 3 4 5 6 X10 24 VDC _ En OUT2D Om Potential free 44 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control terminals Standard connection Electrical Installation Digital inputs w Bonfiglioli Factory settings Terminal Signal for functions Function X11 4 INID 71 IN1D Star
178. Module CM 77 Commissioning of a communication interface 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli VABus Parameter Commissioning Display Select the interface for settings of VABus parameters Ser vice interface X21 or communication module Select service interface X21 for VABus communication Or Select an optional communication module CM 232 or CM 485 for VABus communication The menu item is only displayed if a communication module is installed I nkErF SEru c Ci nad 394 CM VABus Node ID An optional communication module CM 232 or CM 485 was selected node id 1501 X21 VABus Node ID The service interface X21 was selected node id 10 Baudrate An optional communication module CM 232 or CM 485 was selected bAud 1500 Baudrate The service interface X21 was selected bAud 395 Interface setting Protocol CM X21 Set the service interface X21 to VABus Or Set an optional communication module CM 232 or CM 485 to VABus Or Set the service interface X21 and an optional communi cation module CM 232 or CM 485 to VABus iF SEE g co SEEUP eu XD E mi Eerad 4 Optional CM Module N I ntErF eD SEru ic ENT V Bus Configuration V Interface X21 Service SETUP Communication Interface 230400 15200 5160 Ca
179. Motor Op Selection 7 9 5 3 2 737 Torque Limit Source Gen Op Selection 7 9 5 3 2 v 738 Speed Control Switch Over Limit Hz 0 00 999 99 7 9 5 3 739 Power Limit kW 0 00 2 Oc Pem 7 9 5 3 1 740 Power Limit Generator Operation kW 0 00 2 Oc Pem 7 9 5 3 1 741 Amplification 0 0 100 0 7 9 5 5 v E 742 Integral Time ms 0 0 1000 0 7 9 5 5 v B 743 Ref Isd Upper Limit A 0 0 Oc Ten 7 9 5 5 1 v 8 744 Ref Isd Lower Limit A If Tet 7 9 5 5 1 746 Cross Coupling Factor 0 00 300 00 7 9 5 1 748 Backlash Damping 0 300 7 9 5 3 750 Reference Modulation 3 00 105 00 7 9 5 6 752 Integral Time ms 0 0 1000 00 7 9 5 6 753 Operation Mode Selection 7 9 5 6 755 Reference Imr Lower Limit A 0 01 Ikn Oc Irn 7 9 5 6 1 756 Control Deviation Limitation 0 00 100 00 7 9 5 6 1 T 999 99 767 Frequency Upper Limit Hz 9990hne 99 7 9 5 2 768 Frequency Lower Limit Hz 999 99 999 99 7 9 5 2 769 Frequency upper limit source Selection 7 9 5 2 3 770 Frequency lower limit source Selection 7 9 5 2 3 779 Min Flux Formation Time ms 1 10000 7 3 2 vV E 780 Max Flux Formation Time ms 1 10000 7 3 2 v 8 781 Current during Flux Formation A 0 1 Ipy Oc Len 7 3 2 796 SETUP Selection Selection 6 8 6 2 10 2 900 Node ID 1 63 Systemb 903 Baud Rate Selection one Systemb 904 Boot Up Delay ms 3500 50000 918 SYNC Identifier 0 2047 919 SYNC
180. OUTID X13 5 531 digital output Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 532 Operation mode OUT3D X11 6 533 digital input output Digital Source MFO1D 554 multifunction output Signal at digital output OUT1D 175 aaa Signal selected via Operation Mode OUTID X13 5 531 Signal at digital output OUT2D relay output 176 a Signal selected via Operation Mode OUT2D X10 relay 532 Signal at digital input output terminal X11 6 177 Digital message Signal selected via Operation Mode OUT3D X11 6 533 Set Operation OUT3D Mode Terminal X11 6 558 1 Output OUT3D Signal at multifunction output 181 Digital message Signal selected via Digital Source MFOID 554 Set Operation Mode MFO1D MFO X13 6 550 1 Digital MFO1D 1 Refer to application manual PLC 2 Comply with instructions on CANopen 189 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Parameter descriptions GS Bonfiglioli 7 6 5 2 Setting frequency 510 Setting Frequency 517 Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta If operation mode 4 Setting frequency is selected for a digital output the corresponding output will be active if the actual value Stator frequency 210 is greater than the value of Setting Frequency 510 The relevant output is switched over again once the Stator frequency 210 drops below the value Set ting frequency 510 minus Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta 517 Signal source 164
181. P Operation modes 525 to 532 of the digital inputs inverted LOW active tion module CM PDP V1 with Profibus interface is required Process data for Profibus communication Optional communica 700 RxPDO1 Boolean 703 RxPDO1 Boolean _ Process data object for system bus communication 710 to 713 Operation modes 700 to 703 for RxPDO2 720 to 723 Operation modes 700 to 703 for RxPDO3 730 Sysbus emergency Signal of system bus communication 810 Obj 0x3003 DigOut 1 to to Obj 0x3003 DigOut 5 814 Obj 0x3005 Demux Out 1 to Obj 0x3005 Sources of CAN objects for CANopen communication Sources at output of demultiplexer for CANopen communica tion Demux Out 16 910 Output DeMux bit 0 to to 925 Output DeMux bit 15 2401 PLC Output Buffer 1 to to 2416 PLC Output buffer 16 Bit 0 to Bit 15 on output of de multiplexer de multiplexed pro cess data signal via system bus or Profibus on input of multi plexers parameter DeMux Input 1253 Output signals of PLC functions 1 The digital signal is independent from the configuration of the parameter Local Remote 412 2 Refer to instructions on Profibus 3 Refer to instructions on system bus Refer to instructions on CANopen gt Refer to instructions on system bus or Profibus 6 Refer to application manual PLC 199 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions Signals via physical
182. P456 P457 MFI2 P466 P467 P419 Sverre SLeee ee ee eee Se ee eT Cee SSCS SE Tee aT MFI1 MFI2 P452 P562 6 P452 P562 7 moe MFI1 P454 P455 MFI2 P464 P465 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 Factory setting P419 Maximum frequency Reference percentages Limitation to P519 Set a multifunction input MFI as analog input MFI2 P562 1 2o0or5 P562 6or 7and Set the characteristic points Frequency P475 or P492 Percentage P476 or P494 31 Abs T torque Set MFO1 as analog output Select the value to be output Define reference value via MFI1 1 Analog Value MFI1A via MFI2 2 Analog Value MFI2A Analog outputs Factory setting Multi function output MFO1 Terminal U V P550 10 Analog PWM MFO1A X13 6 24 P551 10 PTE EAEAN P551 Analog Voltage 100 10 V P552 Analog Voltage 0 0 V P552 0 0 100 P553 7 Abs Actual Frequency 0 Hz P419 P553 7 0Hz P419 Fray Other possible output values 0 off 32 Abs Inside Temperature 10 Abs Reference Percentage 33 Abs Heat Sink Temperature P476 P494 20 Abs Iactive active current 51 DC Link Voltage 30 Abs Pactive active power 52 V output voltage Not all functions are listed Via multifunction output MFO1 output analog value Set the voltage range 0 22 V for output Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 84 After first commissioning Commissioning Motor potent
183. PWM Amplification 5 0 1000 0 7 6 7 1 654 Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 0 32000 7 6 7 3 v B Operation Mode Selection 7 9 4 1 Amplification 0 0 300 0 7 9 4 1 Max Slip Ramp 0 01 650 00 7 9 4 1 Frequency Lower Limit 0 01 999 99 7 9 4 1 670 Operation Mode Selection 7 9 2 671 Mains Failure Threshold V 200 0 50 0 7 9 2 672 Reference Mains Support Value V 200 0 10 0 7 9 2 673 Mains Support Deceleration Hz s 0 01 9999 99 7 9 2 674 Acceleration on Mains Resumption Hz s 0 00 9999 99 7 9 2 675 Shutdown Threshold Hz 0 00 999 99 7 9 2 676 Reference Shutdown Value V oo a i 7 9 2 677 Amplification 0 00 30 00 7 9 2 678 Integral Time ms 0 10000 7 9 2 680 Reference DC Link Limitation V a A 7 sls 7 9 2 681 Max Frequency Rise Hz 0 00 999 99 7 9 2 683 Gen Ref Current Limit A 0 0 Oc len 7 9 2 685 Gear Factor Numerator 300 00 300 00 7 5 4 3 1 686 Gear Factor Denominator 0 01 300 00 7 5 4 3 1 687 Analog factor at 100 0 00 100 00 7 5 4 3 2 688 Analog factor at 0 0 00 100 00 7 5 4 3 2 689 Operation Mode Selection 7 5 4 2 v E 700 Amplification 0 00 8 00 7 9 5 1 vV B 701 Integral Time ms 0 00 10 00 7 9 5 1 v B 716 Rated magnetising current A 0 01 Ipy Oc If 7 2 2 Z amp Z147 Elux Reference Value 0 01 300 00 7 9 5 5 Z amp 7148 Rated Slip Correction Factor 0 01 300 0
184. Pulse width modulated signal fowm 126 Hz Frequency output Output voltage DC 24 V 15 30 V Maximum output current DC 100 mA Maximum output frequency 150 kHz Other properties Pulse train output Output voltage DC 24 V Maximum output current DC 100 mA Maximum output frequency 150 kHz The maximum output current of an output of 100 mA is reduced if additional control out puts are used Dependent on the voltage supply of the control unit and the connected load on the differ ent outputs Maximum guaranteed value 15 VDC 287 Control electronics 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Technical data GS Bonfiglioli Terminal X10 make AC 240 V 5 A DC 24 V 5 A ohmic contact Contact load capacity break AC 240 V 3 A DC 24 V 1 A ohmic contact Response time 40 ms 11 4 Operation diagrams Installation height The nominal values of the frequency inverter apply to installation altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea levelt If the installation altitude exceeds 1000 meters the output power and cooling agent tem perature ambient temperature must be reduced Reduction of output current Reduction of cooling agent temperature Power reduction derating Above 1000 m Reduction by 3 3 C 1000 m Above 1000 m Reduction by 5 1000 m Maximum cooling agent temperature 55 C Maximum altitude 3000 m I T C 100 39 BD CETE hogdaaen 95 AQ heeri dette eee es eae 90 3000 H m 1000 2000 3
185. Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Frequency Source 2 492 the reference value is not doubled In this case the reference value is the single value of the selected reference value source Selection of source for reference value Multifunction input 1 is the reference value source Via parameter Operation Mode MFI 452 the input must be set up as an analog input voltage or current By setting 1 Analog Value MFI1A the voltage or current value at multifunction input 1 you can set the output frequency Factory setting for Refer ence Frequency Source 1 475 See chapter 7 6 1 Multifunction input MFI1 Multifunction input 2 is the reference value source Via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562 the input must be set up as an analog input voltage or current By setting the voltage or current value at multifunction input 2 you can set the output frequency See chapter 7 6 2 Multifunction input MFI2 The selected fixed frequency is the reference value source The fixed frequency of the current data set is selected via Fixed frequency changeover 1 66 Fixed frequency changeover 2 67 and Fixed frequency changeover 3 131 The fixed frequency values can be set in parameters 480 488 See chapter 7 5 1 3 Fixed frequencies Reference value source is the function Frequency motor poti up 62 and Frequency motorpoti down 63 The output frequency can be set by digital signals See chapter 7 5 3 Motor potentiometer The operator pa
186. TY or PT1000 An error message can be acknowledged if the motor temperature has dropped below the switch off threshold by 5 C Possibilities of error acknowledgement via operator panel or via parameter Error Acknowledgement 103 which is assigned a logic signal or a digital input Evaluation of the motor temperature is independent of the controller enable If motor temperature monitoring with MPTC KTY or PT1000 is selected via parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 multifunction input 2 cannot be used for other functions In this case parameters 560 567 of multifunction input 2 don t have any function 139 Error and warning behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions If motor temperature monitoring with thermal contact is selected via parameter Oper ation Mode Motor Temp 570 multifunction input 2 can only be set via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562 to 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PNP ac tive 24 V In this case multifunction input 2 cannot be used for controlling other functions If another digital input is used for connection of the thermal contact this input must be selected for parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 Multifunction input 2 can be used for other functions if the factory setting is changed for parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 i e if a digital input is selected not multifunction input 2 617 Max Temp Motor Windin
187. The multiplexer features 16 inputs for logic signals or digital input signals 205 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions On the output the logic signal 927 Output MUX for the inputs of the TxPDO process data of the system bus or for PZDx IN process data of the Profibus can be used 1252 Mux Inputs me 1250 Mux I nput I ndex write 1251 Mux Input index read The parameters Mux Input Index write 1250 and Mux Input Index read 1251 for the input signals of the multiplexer enable parameterization via the operator panel or the application VTable in VPlus No Description X Fact sett 1250 Mux Input Index write MS a E 1251 Mux Input Index read Oa J a y i D non volatile fixed parameterization Volatile 0 All indices in EEPROM 17 All indices in RAM 1 16 One index in EEPROM 18 33 One index 1 16 in RAM NOTE Setting 0 for Mux Input Index write 1250 changes all data in EEPROM and RAM In the case of non volatile storage 0 16 the changed values are still available when power supply is switched on again In the case of volatile storage 17 33 the data is only stored in RAM If the unit is switched off this data is lost and the data required are loaded from EEPROM Demultiplexer 1253 DeMux I nput The demultiplexer features an input DeMux Input 1253 whose signal can be for the process data R
188. Time ms 0 50000 921 RxSDO1 Identifier 0 2047 922 TxSDO1 Identifier 0 2047 Seen 923 SDO2 Set Active Selection 924 RxPDO1 Identifier 0 2047 925 TxPDO1 Identifier 0 2047 350 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Parameters Menu PARA Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli Description Setting range 926 RxPDO2 Identifier 0 2047 927 TxPDO2 Identifier 0 2047 928 RxPDO3 Identifier 0 2047 929 TxPDO3 Identifier 0 2047 930 TxPDO1 Function Selection 931 TxPDO1 Time ms 0 50000 932 TxPDO2 Function Selection 933 TxPDO2 Time ms 0 50000 934 TxPDO3 Function Selection 935 TxPDO3 Time ms 0 50000 936 RxPDO1 Function Selection 937 RxPDO2 Function Selection 938 RxPDO3 Function Selection 939 SYNC Timeout ms 0 60000 941 RxPDO1 Timeout ms 0 60000 942 RxPDO2 Timeout ms 0 60000 945 RxPDO3 Timeout ms 0 60000 946 TxPDO1 Boolean1i Selection 947 TxPDO1 Boolean2 Selection 948 TxPDO1 Boolean3 Selection 949 TxPDO1 Boolean4 Selection 950 TxPDO1 Word1i Selection 951 TxPDO1 Word2 Selection 952 TxPDO1 Word3 Selection 953 TxPDO1 Word4 Selection 954 TxPDO1 Longi Selection 955 TxPDO1 Long2 Selection 956 TxPDO2 Boolean1 Selection 957 TxPDO2 Boolean
189. Trigger Threshold 507 of the DC link voltage defines the switch on threshold of the motor chopper function Description Min Fact sett 400 0 V 800 0 V 1000 0 V 1000 0 V 507 Trigger Threshold Set parameter Trigger Threshold 507 such that it is between the maximum DC link voltage which the mains can generate and the maximum admissible DC link voltage of the frequency inverter Umains 1 1 y2 lt Uamc lt Ud max If the parameter Trigger Threshold 507 is set larger than the maximum admissible DC link voltage the motor chopper cannot become active the motor chopper is switched off If the set Trigger Threshold 507 is smaller than the maximum DC link voltage the mains can gener ate error message F0706 chapter 13 1 1 Error messages is displayed when the frequency inverter is switched on The motor chopper function only works if activated via voltage Controller Operation Mode 670 See chapter 7 9 2 Voltage controller For synchronous motors Configuration 30 610 the motor chopper function is deactivated to prevent damages to the motor The other functions of the voltage con troller are not affected by this Please note that by default the Motor chopper Trigger Threshold 507 and the Trigger Threshold 506 are set up with different values Check that the two thresholds are set up fittingly for your application Soc Please check chapter 7 10 4 Brake chopper and brake resist
190. V Reference Shutdown Value 676 becomes effective below the frequency value Shut down Threshold 675 673 Mains Support Deceleration 674 Acceleration on Mains Resumption 683 Gen Ref Current Limit The voltage controller uses the limit values of the DC link voltage If the default value is changed the Acceleration on Mains Resumption 674 replaces the set ramp parameter values Acceleration Clockwise 420 or Acceleration Anticlockwise 422 The voltage control in a mains failure changes from the frequency limit Shutdown Threshold 675 from Reference Mains Support Value 672 to the Reference Shutdown Value 676 The value of Gen Ref Current Limit 683 or the ramp Mains Sup port Deceleration 673 defines the maximum deceleration of the drive required in order to reach the voltage value Reference Shutdown Value 676 Mains Support Deceleration 673 is only active if the Actual frequency is smaller than Shutdown Threshold 675 No Description Min Max Fact sett Gen Ref Current Limit Mains Support Deceleration 0 01 Hz s 9999 99 Hz s 50 00 Hz s Acceleration on Mains Resumption 0 00 Hz s_ 9999 99 Hz s 0 00 Hz s Inn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter Mains Support Deceleration 673 is active in configuration 110 V f Gen Ref Current Limit 683 is active in configurations 410 and 610 FOC and SERVO 219 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfiglioli Par
191. V016A Class C1 With booktype filter FTV016A und Netzdrossel vor dem Filter Class C1 Interference suppression class Agi e size 3 AGL 402 23 11 kW Installation measure Agile 3 AGL402 23 11 kW Without EMC input filter without line choke Without EMC input filter with line choke 15 A or 25 A Class C3 With footprint filter FTV003B AGL Class C1 With footprint filter FTVOO3B AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on Class C1 mains input side With booktype filter FTVO030A Class C1 With booktype filter FTVO30A and line choke 25 A upstream on mains Class C1 input side 304 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Input filter Options 12 5 3 2 AC 3x230 V Interference suppression class Agi e size 1 vw Bonfiglioli Installation measure Agile 1 Without EMC input filter without line choke Class C3 Without EMC input filter with line choke Class C3 With footprint filter FS28364 8 07 Class C1 With footprint filter FS28364 8 07 and line choke upstream on mains Class C1 input side With booktype filter FTV007A Class C1 With booktype filter FTV007A and line choke upstream on mains input Class C1 side Interference suppression class Agi e size 2 Installation measure Agile 2 Without EMC input filter without line choke Class C3 Without EMC input filter with line choke 10 A With footprint filter FS28364 10 44 With footprint filter FS28364 10 44 and line choke 10 A upstream on ma
192. Waiting Time 464 after the waiting 4 Start by time control ae Se ie A time it is accelerated in the previous direction of rotation The drive is stopped for the Waiting Time 464 after the waiting time it is accelerated in the opposite direction of rotation 3 Positioning off 5 Reversal by time control 464 Waiting Time The position reached can be maintained for the Waiting Time 464 then the drive is accelerated ac cording to operation mode 4 or 5 No Description Min Max Fact sett 3600000 ms The diagram shows how the positioning to the set positioning distance is effected The positioning distance remains constant at different frequency values At the reference point the position signal Sposi is generated Starting from frequency fmax the positioning is effected at the set Deceleration clockwise 421 At a lower frequency value f the frequency remains constant for some time before the drive is stopped at the set deceleration If during acceleration or deceleration of the machine positioning is started by the signal Sposi the frequency at the time of the positioning signal is maintained Deceleration clockwise 421 U min U Sposi Digital input IN1D t Examples of reference positioning as a function of the parameter settings selected The reference point is identified by a signal at digital input IN1D terminal X11 4 134 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior
193. a parameters 454 457 Current signal MFI1A 0 mA 20 mA The output signal is in 7 Current characteristic fluenced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 454 457 454 Characteristic Curve Point X1 455 Characteristic Curve Point Y1 456 Characteristic Curve Point X2 457 Characteristic Curve Point Y2 The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage Parameterization can be done via two points of the linear characteristic of the reference value channel Point 1 with coordinates X1 and Y1 and point 2 with coordinates X2 and Y2 can be set in four data sets No Description X Fact sett 454 Characteristic Curve Point X1 o won a 2 00 455 Characteristic Curve Point Y1 100 00 100 00 0 00 456 Characteristic Curve Point X2 0 00 100 00 98 00 457 Characteristic Curve Point Y2 100 00 100 00 100 00 170 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Vectron The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 10 V or 20 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The direc tion of rotation can be changed via the digital inputs and or by selection of the points Attention A The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error Warning Behaviour 453 demands the check of parameter Characteristic
194. a communication inter face Signal at multifunction input MFI2 X12 in Operation Mode MFI 562 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PNP 77 MFI2D i j ieee active 24 V Or signal in remote mode via communication interface The defined warning mask of parameter Create Warning Mask 536 signals a critical operating point 160 Ready Signal Enable signals STOA and STOB and a start command Start Clockwise 68 or Start Anticlockwise 69 are applied output frequency present reached ence frequenc The actual Stator Frequency 210 is higher than the value of Warning Inside Tempera Maximum inside temperature T minus the Warning Limit Inside 167 ture Temp 408 reached 168 Warning Motor Tempera Warning behavior according to parameterized Operation Mode ture Motor Temp 570 at maximum motor temperature Tprc 169 General Warning eae Warnings 269 are displayed with a critical operat 166 Warning Heat Sink Tem Maximum heat sink temperature T minus the Warning Limit perature Heat Sink Temp 407 reached 197 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions The value Maximum heat sink temperature Tx minus Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp 407 or Maximum inside temperature T minus Warning Limit In side Temp 408 was reached 175 Digital Signal OUT1D Signal selected via Op Mode OUTID X13 5 531 176 Digital Signal OUT2
195. a parameter Operation Mode 435 See chapter 7 10 8 Traverse function Handshake Traverse Function 49 7 Off 7 6 6 13 Brake chopper release 95 Brake Chopper Release Via the signal assigned to parameter Brake Chopper Release 95 the brake chopper can be released or disabled In the factory settings the brake chopper is released if the frequency inverter release is switched on Brake Chopper Release 95 70 Inverter Release X11 3 and X13 3 Example Brake Chopper Release 95 6 On The brake chopper is released Brake Chopper Release 95 7 Off The brake chopper is disabled For information on how to set up the brake chopper refer to chapter 7 10 4 Brake chopper and brake resist NOTE A connected brake resistor is only used if the brake chopper release is present At brake operations or other generator states an overvoltage switch off can happen if the electri cal energy is not dissipated 7 6 6 14 User warning 1363 User Warming 1 1364 User Warming 2 Parameterization of an user warning enables triggering a warning in the device via a digital signal if a critical state in the plant occurs The warning is displayed in Warnings Application 273 and can be transmitted to a higher level control like a PLC Please check parameter Create warning mask applica tion 626 and chapter 7 6 5 9 Warning mask application for further explanations 204 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and o
196. aaeeeeeeesaeeaaaaes 20 210 5 Electrical connections diciaria ia iaa aaa TANE AEn ANa 20 2 10 5 1 The five safety rule si iccvsccnesvestvadecenndcctecdensvoesuneetanatcas daseaneeniane ANNEKE aaa 21 2 10 65 Safe OPCravlon sass ce cas ca gaseeisaicansacetivees AINAN A EE EAEAN AAAA KAANAAN EANNAN naan ess 21 2 10 7 Maintenance and service troubleshooting sssssssssssrrrrssrssrsrnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnee 22 2 10 8 Final CECOMMISSIONING ceeeeceteeeeee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee etree ee eee eaea aaa eee esse sana 22 This document 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x ay Bonfiglioli Content 3 DEVICE OVERVIEW avccsicsscpestinanscasicasvenedadteewasascieasnciadeemadsnusawadsdiudeaenedaness ensbemnds 23 3 1 Inverter type and warning signs on the device 1 sscesesseeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeseeneseeeeneeaeenees 23 3 2 Type designation csssceccesseseeeeceseeeeeneaseuseenaseeseeneaeeseeneaseeessenoaseeseenaeeseeoageeesenaasenees 24 3 3 Software Version dentification ccs sceeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeneueeeeeneaseesennaeeeennageneeessneaseenes 25 3 4 Overview of components and connection terminals ccsesseeeesesseeseeeeseeeeeeeneenees 26 3 5 Number of control terminalls cccccsesseeeeceeseeeeceseeeeeneeeeseneuseeseeoeeseuensenegseessneaseenes 26 4 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION cccccsccesceseeeeeeeeenseenseeeeuseaeeeaseneseaseaeeeeseeeseassaeens 27 o T E i a e E A E 27 4 2 e Eeo a a E E 27 4 2 1 Si
197. acturer do not modify the frequency inverter in any way including addition of attachments or retrofits e Only use the frequency inverter if the rated connection and setup values specified by the manu facturer are met e Provide appropriate tools as may be required for performing all work on the frequency inverter properly 19 Directives and guidelines to be adhered to by the 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile operator we Bonfiglioli General safety instructions and information on use 2 10 Organizational measures 2 10 1 General Train your staff in the handling and use of the frequency inverter and the machine plant as well as the risks involved Use of any individual parts or components of the frequency inverter in other parts of the opera tor s machine plant is prohibited Optional components for the frequency inverter must be used in accordance with their designated use and in compliance with the relevant documentation 2 10 2 Use in combination with third party products Please note that BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH will not accept any responsibility for compatibility with third party products e g motors cables or filters In order to enable optimum system compatibility BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH office compo nents facilitating commissioning and providing optimum synchronization of the machine plant parts in operation If you use the frequency inverter in combination with third party products you do this at your own ris
198. ailable signal sources for parameters Frequency Motorpoti Up 62 and Frequency Motorpoti Down 63 Addition of reference values If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value via Reference Frequency Source 1 475 plus Reference Frequency Source 2 492 If the value of Maximum Frequency 419 is reached and the other reference value is increased the output value of the motorpoti function is reduced It is reduced so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the maximum frequency If the value of Minimum Frequency 418 is reached and the other reference value is reduced the output value of the motorpoti function is increased It is increased so that the sum of both refer ence values is equal to the minimum frequency Inthe settings for Operation Mode 493 1 reference value or 3 inverted the point of reversal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function The drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign 7 5 3 3 2 Control via reference percentage channel 72 Percent Motorpoti Up 73 Percent Motorpoti Down The reference percentage can be set via digital control signals Via digital control inputs the function Motorpoti up or Motorpoti down is triggered Parameters Percent Motorpoti Up 72 or Percent Motorpoti Down 73 must be assigned logic signals or digital inputs Comman
199. ake 631 Braking Current 632 Braking Time Stopping behavior 7 Parameter Operation Mode 630 includes the direct current brake Using the direct current brake a motor can be decelerated faster than without direct current brake By impress ing a direct current part into the motor the losses inside the motor are artificially increased The im pression of the Braking Current 631 results in the motor heating up and should only be done for a short period in the case of internally ventilated motors Description Min Max Fact sett Braking Current 0 00 A Irn Nominal value of frequency inverter For the application of the Direct current brake the parameter Configuration 30 must be set to 110 IM sensor less control control in accordance with V f characteristic The setting of the parameter Braking Time 632 defines the time controlled stopping behavior Con tact controlled operation of the direct current brake is activated by entering the value zero for the Braking Time 632 Time controlled The direct current is controlled by the status of the signals Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise The current set by the parameter Braking Current 631 flows until the time set by the parameter Braking Time 632 has expired For the duration of the braking time the combined control signals Start clockwise and Start anticlock wise must be logical 0 Low or 1 High Contact controlled If the parameter Braking time 632 is set t
200. al value Reference Percentage Value 229 164 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Setting of the reference percentage via parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Refer ence Percentage Source 2 494 is described in chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel 7 5 4 3 Gear factor The gear factor can be set permanently or scaled via the Reference Percentage Source 476 during operation Scaling during operation can be effected via an analog voltage signal at a multifunction input The multifunction input must be set up as an analog input multifunction input at terminal X12 3 parameter Operation Mode MFI 452 multifunction input at terminal X12 4 parameter Op eration Mode MFI 562 Setting of the gear factor enables the realization of applications which require an adjustment of the transmission ratio during operations e g winding machines 7 5 4 3 1 Setting a fixed gear factor 685 Gear Factor Numerator 686 Gear Factor Denominator Via parameters Gear Factor Numerator 685 and Gear Factor Denominator 686 the gear factor is set permanently at the frequency inverter of the slave drive Gear Factor Numerator 685 Gear factor Gear Factor Denominator 686 No Description Min Max Fac set Gear Factor Numerator 300 00 300 00 686_ Gear Factor Denominator 300 00 7 5 4 3 2 Setting a variable gear factor 687 Analog factor at 100 688
201. als Fault in the the A D converter Remove all external connections signal terminals etc and check if the fault remains 326 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error list Error protocol vw Bonfiglioli F10 Meaning Voltage supply for optional communication module too low Communication via bus system faulty Disconnect bus system wiring and acknowledge the error message Check connections and wiring of the bus system Replace the communication module if the error occurs even if the bus system is dis connected If the communication module is replaced and the error occurs contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI Brake chopper overcurrent Also refer to chapter 7 10 4 Brake chopper and brake 10 resist F12 F13 00 Output frequency too high check control signals and settings Maximum frequency achieved by control Check deceleration ramps and connected brake resistor 01 The STO Diagnosis software recognized a fault in the STO switch off paths Check wiring connect screens Check the EMC environment If the fault remains exchange the device Fault of the STO diagnosis function If the device remains after a new start up ex change the device Internal Fault Contact the BONFILGLIOLI customer service Enable signals STOA and STOB were not actuated at the same time but with a high time offset Check the circuitry of the enable input signals The voltage of the STO signals is too low Chec
202. ameter value Max Frequency Rise 681 to the frequency at the operating point of the controller intervention No Description Min Max Fact sett Reference DC Link Limitation oS ae gt x gt x gt x Max Frequency Rise 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 10 00 Hz For a reliable operation of the overvoltage controller Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to set the mo tor chopper Trigger Threshold 507 lt Reference DC Link Limitation 680 10 V See chapter 7 10 5 Motor chopper 216 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions v Bonfiglioli Ud f P672 P671 Gradient limited Standard ramp by P683 FOC SERVO or P674 Mains voltage Power failure Resumption of power t 671 Mains Failure Threshold 672 Reference Mains Support Value With the power failure regulation short term power failures can be bridged Mains failure is detected when the DC link voltage has dropped below the set value of parameter Mains Failure Threshold 671 If a mains failure is detected the controller tries to regulate the DC link voltage to the value set with parameter Reference Mains Support Value 672 To that end the output frequency is continuous ly reduced and the motor with its rotating masses is switched over to generator operation Using field oriented Control FOC SERVO the reduction of the output frequency is done according to the config uration with a maximum of the current set by the paramete
203. ameter descriptions 677 Amplification 678 Integral Time The proportional and integrating part of the voltage controller can be set via parameters Amplification 677 and Integral Time 678 The control functions are deactivated by setting the parameters to 0 The controllers are P and I controllers in the corresponding settings No Description a laa or I Bm ms 2 The factory settings depend on the selected configuration and control procedure Configuration 30 110 2 Configuration 30 410 610 7 9 3 PI D controller technology controller The PID controller can be used for process control The connection of PID desired set value and PID real value of the application with the functions of the frequency inverter enables process control with out further components In this way applications such as pressure volume flow or speed control can be implemented easily Starting the PID controller Set one of the following parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 1 Analog Value MFI1A 30 Technology Controller or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 5 Keypad Motorpot 30 Technology Controller Desired set value for PI D controller Set one of the following parameters Reference Percentage Source 1476 1 Analog Value MFI1A or Reference Percentage Source 2494 5 Keypad Motorpot Select analog input or percent age For example 2 Analog Value MFI2A or 3 Fixed Percentage
204. ameters Gear Factor Numerator 685 and Gear Factor Denominator 686 The repetition frequency value specified via the repetition frequency input is multiplied by the gear factor This is the reference frequency for the slave drive The numerator of the gear factor is scaled using the Reference Percentage Source 1 476 The denominator of the gear factor is the value set in pa rameter Gear Factor Denominator 686 The repetition frequency value specified via the repetition frequency input is multiplied by the gear factor This is the reference frequency for the slave drive The numerator of the gear factor is the value set in parameter Gear Fac tor Numerator 685 The denominator of the gear factor is scaled using the Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Analog Numera 2 tor P 686 Denom inator P 685 Numera 3 tor Analog De nominator Block diagram of electronic gear 0 Ramp output _ Fixed aaa 1 o Repetition Frequency Input PLC Output eae 4 2504 Actual value Reference Ramp Frequency 283 Source Master Reference 125 Operation Mode 689 Gear Factor Numerator 685 Gear Factor Denominator 686 Analog factor at 100 687 a E Analog factor at 0 688 0 100 Reference percentage value Reference percentage value Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 Actu
205. and Start anticlockwise 691 e Selecti oA via arrow keys Confirm by pressing ENT e Select JoJ via arrow keys Confirm by pressing ENT Start drive RUN Keep pressed The drive accelerates to the JOG frequency 489 factory setting 5 Hz For clockwise rotation Set the JOG frequency 489 to positive values For anticlockwise rotation Set the JOG frequency 489 to negative values Set the acceleration value for clockwise rotation in parameter Acceleration clockwise 420 Set the acceleration value for anticlockwise rotation in parameter Acceleration anticlockwise 422 Parameter Maximum frequency 419 limits the adjustable frequency range Stop drive RUN Release the key The drive decelerates and comes to a standstill Set the deceleration value for clockwise rotation in parameter Deceleration clockwise 421 Set the deceleration value for anticlockwise rotation in parameter Deceleration anticlockwise 423 Change direction of rotation ENT The direction of rotation changes The direction of rotation can be changed while the drive rotates or at standstill Display of drive status P S 500 H The drive rotates at JOG frequency 489 The drive is stopped The alternating display shows the Jog frequency value and the message STOP a The function JOG can also be activated via a digital input Refer to chapter 7 5 1 6 JOG frequency and 7 6 6 7 Jog Start The selection JOG is a
206. and set the parameters required for a Select the application e g pump fan ae function conveyor system and set parameters to 6 7 applicable values ul m Control terminals Standard connection 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 1 Operator panel Start motor Increase speed in motor potentiometer Stop motor function If fault is present Switch to the higher parameter number Fault reset Increase parameter values Cancel Back to previ Reduce speed in motor potentiometer func ous menu tion END Confirm settings Switch to the lower parameter number RUN Reverse direction of Reduce parameter values rotation in motor po tentiometer function Press arrow key for a short time to set a value in discrete steps Keep arrow key pressed for a quick value changing When setting a parameter value the default value can be selected by pressing both arrow keys at the same time The access to the parameter menu and setup menu can be locked with a password Please refer to the notes in chapter 7 1 3 Set password The RUN and STOP key can be locked by parameter Local Remote 412 Please refer to chap ter 7 3 1 Control and chapter 7 5 3 4 1 Control via reference frequency channel 6 1 1 Menus Menu Functions Actual Shows actual values An actual value for permanent display during operation can be se lected Para Set parameters The follo
207. andard assembly and chapter 12 9 Assembly variants 283 Device data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile r EJ Bonfiglioli Technical data 11 2 6 AGL402 3 0 to 11 0 kW 400 V 3 phase Agile 402 i oe ie ae i a S aa 3 Recommended motor shaft power P kw 3 0 40 55 55 75 92 Output current term overload current 60 s I A 11 2 14 2 18 0 19 5 25 5 30 0 Short time overload current 1 s A eao 260 340 400 Switching frequency Minimum brake resistor R Q 106 106 106 48 48 48 Recommended brake resistor 770 V R Q 148 106 106 80 58 48 48 I A Bussmann Bussmann FWP 20A14Fa FWP 30A14Fa HxWxD mm 200 x 80 x 196 Rated current Maximum mains current 33 6 Fuses UL type 200 x 125 x 205 3 Dimensions 2 4 flexible with sleeve minals 0 2 6 rigid Terminals Terminals relay out 0 1 put Installation o vertical Interior fan ves O Heat sink fan Pt Pes Eek Power dissipation 2 kHz switch P w 133 167 230 235 321 393 470 ing frequency 1 According to DIN EN 61800 5 1 2 Dimensions of the basic device Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4 2 Installation for the standard assembly and chapter 12 9 Assembly variants 284 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Device data Technical data vw Bonfiglioli 11
208. anel 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 1 2 Motor control with operator panel Poti F variable frequency The function Poti F is applicable for variable speed operation Select one of the following settings for parameter Local Remote 412 3 Control via keypad 4 Control via keypad or contacts factory setting e Select 5 Keypad motor potentiometer Reference frequency source 2 492 e Switch on enable signals at digital inputs STOA terminal X11 3 and STOB terminal X13 3 e Select LolAL via arrow keys Confirm by pressing ENT conftm POE 1 F ty pressing ENT Start drive The drive accelerates to the sum of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference frequency source 2 492 The displayed value is the totalized refer for parameter Reference frequency source 1 475 or ence value Operation 0 Off 0 Hz js 1 The reference frequency can be both positive and negative 2 Positive only 3 Inverted Set speed Increase speed Decrease speed Press for a short time to change the frequency by increments of 0 1 Hz Keep pressed to change the frequency by Ramp Frequency Motorpoti 473 factory setting 2 Hz s Attention The change of direction of rotation can occur if Minimum Frequency 418 is set to 0 Hz Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 limit the setting range Stop drive STOP The drive stops Deceleration clockwise 421 or
209. arameter of the function Set the parameter to the digital input selection 71 75 76 77 P87 Start 3 Wire Ctrl P95 Brake Chopper Release P164 n T Control Change Over P183 External Error Not all functions are listed Digital outputs Factory setting After first commissioning Function Terminal Other possible functions P531 2 Run Signal X13 5 0 Off 1 Ready or Standby Signal P532 103 Inverted Error Signal X10 3 Error Signal 5 Reference Frequency reached P533 103 Inverted Error Signal X11 6 6 Reference Percentage reached P558 1 output 7 Ixt Warning overload 8 Warning Heat Sink Temperature P554 4 Setting Frequency X13 6 9 Warning Inside Temperature P550 1 digital 10 Warning Motor Temperature 11 Warning General Not all functions are listed 83 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Analog inputs Commissioning Multi function MFI1 Terminal P452 1 Voltage 0 10 V 2 Current 0 20 mA 5 Current 4 20 mA X12 3 6 Voltage charact 7 Current charact P454 Point X1 2 P455 Point Y1 0 P456 Point X2 98 P457 Point Y2 100 Multi function MFI2 P562 1 Voltage 0 10 V 2 Current 0 20 mA 5 Current 4 20 mA X12 4 6 Voltage charact 7 Current charact P564 Point X1 2 P565 Point Y1 0 P566 Point X2 98 P567 Point Y2 100 MFIL Preset characteristic P452 Define a characteristic P452 Factory setting X2 Y2 X2 Y2 f Hz MFI1
210. arameters cccccsssccecccsseeeceessseeeesesseeeeseeeeeeseeseeeesessaaeesesaageeeessagengs 114 7 2 3 Device testidega a A a a ana aada 117 7 2 3 1 Earth fault and short circuit test Test 1 ccccccsseceeeesseeeeeessaeeeeseaaeeeesesaaaeesenaaaes 117 7 2 3 2 Load test Test 2 siirsin aa naaa Naaa 118 7 2 3 3 Start device test via operator panel sssssrrrrseresrsrrrnrnnnrersnnnnnnnnnnnnuennnnnnnnnennnne 120 7 2 3 4 Start device test via control software or bus System ssesssssssssrrrrrrreurnnsrrrnrnenee 120 7 2 3 5 Automatic device test after error switch Off s ssssssssssrrrrnrrseusunsnnnnnnenennnnnnnrnnnne 121 7 2 3 6 Fan testrenn EEA EAEE 121 7 3 Operational Behavior sssssssssnn00ennnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 122 7al CONTO aranan a A EAT aa 122 73 2 Starting DENAVION riisist naaa a aA NANAS 123 7 3 3 Stopping behavi r cceiccedesveses auvecnencdiaencads canes eaaa Ena rai aN a RDA 127 5 This document 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x EJ Bonfiglioli Content Aaa AUO StA ii A e E a EE E a a r 129 743 5 Flying Sts veseacccectewet ones a a a i aa a rai 129 7 3 6 Directc rrent Drake ies secassscaiesisnaecasietasscassanetaanugeduacadaycvadiincsasieeaaded sa fenganwaaa erabane ddne 131 A3 POSIMOMING ipteiindersiseenstiesd hast e a saa vectee a Aa aa 132 7 4 Error and warning behavior ssssssssssnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 13
211. aseeeesaaes 113 Mains COMME CtION eserse 33 36 Maintenant ceeceseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 272 DCAINK irienna a 274 Fafi saiia anaa aa a aka 275 Master drive Traverse function s 250 Maximum frequency ssssssssrrrrrrrrererrrrrrnns 145 Mechanical installation Safety aiiai a aaia 27 Memory card s ssssssssssssrrsrsserrrenrsnnnsernnes 308 MENU sarias aan a a SS 52 Minimum frequency eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 145 MOGDUS asii a aE 77 Modulation controller seess 237 Monitoring Analog input signal 173 174 180 Controller intervention ccccsssseeeeeeeees 136 Effective current ccceeeeessseeeeseeeeeeeenees 250 Heat sink temperature seses 136 Inside temperature ccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaes 136 Load behavior ssesseeeerrreesrea 250 Motor temperature ccccsseseeeeeeeees 137 202 Output frequency sssssssssssssssrsrrrrrrerenesns 137 Overload mininainen Hestesiclaes 135 Phase failUre ccccsseceesesseseessseeeeseens 141 Warning Mask ceeeeeeeetneeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Warning mask application ccceeee 195 Monitoring functions cceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 96 Motor Chopper seeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeees 243 Motor CONNECTION ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaes 38 Motor data cccsseceeeessseeeeesseeeeessaaeeeeesnaes 113 Motor potentiometer 85 156 200 control via digital Inputs 157 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GD Bonfiglioli control via op
212. ases for high stator frequencies This is typically necessary if changes in the speed controller do not result in further improvements in the control behavior and the control behavior shows small oscilla tions at high stator frequencies e Rotate the motor at approx 66 of the rated speed without load 73 First commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CGO Bonfiglioli Commissioning e Check the Actual value sd 215 e Change the Cross Coupling Factor 746 until the oscillations are minimal in sq 225 NOTE Too high values set as Cross Coupling Factor 746 can result in Overcurrent switch offs Change the value in small steps max 5 per step 6 3 Commissioning of a communication interface The communication interfaces can be put into operation by means of the menu Setup at the opera tor panel Even without the knowledge of the parameter number s a communication interface can be set up quick and easy Further communication parameters can be set in the menu Para The com munication manuals describe the setting options and protocols in detail Protocol selection Display Use the arrow keys to select menu Setup p uw mm m C Use the arrow keys to select 4 Commissioning of a communication interface bus configuration o c un m co 3 Use the arrow keys to select a protocol O CANopen CAnoPn Profibus PeOFl b Systembus SYShUS Modbus noadblf VABus UALS TCP IP Ethernet In
213. asing values of Cross Coupling Factor 746 For checking signal sources Isd and Isq can be os cilographed using the scope function of the PC user software A minimum influence should be reached at 100 e Set the Cross Coupling Factor 746 to a value slightly below the determined optimum value Very high values for Cross Coupling Factor 746 e g 125 may result in an overcurrent circuit break 230 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 9 5 2 Torque controller The sensorless field oriented control for ASM configuration 410 and the sensorless field oriented control for PSM configuration 610 can be used for sensorless torque control alternative to the speed control The torque control is usable above the Frequency Limit 624 Below the Frequency Limit 624 the current impression is active with the current reference frequency as reference value In this case the torque is not controlled but results depending on the load and the Starting current 623 To achieve a starting in torque control the reference frequency should be set higher than Frequency Limit 624 This is guaranteed in example by setting Minimum frequency 418 gt Frequency Lim it 624 f lt Frequency Limit 624 Current impression f gt Frequency Limit 624 Direct Torque Control The Frequency Limit 624 is set automatically during the motor setup The energy saving function shouldn t be used when using the Torque cont
214. ata Set Change Over 1 70 73 IN3D X11 6 Data Set Change Over 2 71 7 Off The actual value parameter Active Data Set 249 shows the selected data set Save in a data set parameter values that are measured during Setup e Select Setup manually in menu of operator panel The data set selection is displayed Select data set 0 if all data sets are to contain the same parameter values Select one of the data sets 1 4 for commissioning of several motors or for different operating points Example For auto set up auto tuning and motor data select data set 1 d5Ek 4 see JED Data set 203 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Cw sgi Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions If Setup is performed the entered and measured motor data is saved in the selected data set Set a parameter value in a data set Example Set nominal motor voltage P370 in data set 2 P3770 4005 iE p Value of P370 in data set 2 Keep pressed Data set When the frequency inverter is switched on for the first time the data set selection is not displayed In this case all entered and measured motor data will be saved in all four data sets 7 6 6 12 Handshake Traverse 49 Handshake Traverse Function Via parameter Handshake Traverse Function 49 the signal source is selected for specification of the direction of rotation of the slave drive of the traverse function The traverse function is switched on vi
215. ated control or Foc or SYnch ENT Please note If you changed the configuration the device resets Please execute the before mentioned steps anew 1 For simple applications e g fans pumps Control according to V f characteristic In the case of control via operator panel Select UF IM Induction machine asynchronous motor 2 Control of an induction machine asynchronous motor For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy In the case of control via operator panel Select Foc 3 Control of a synchronous motor for higher demands on speed or torque accuracy In the case of control via operator panel Select Synch PMSM Permanently magnetized synchronous motor 62 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 First commissioning Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli Parameter Display Enter motor data according to motor rating plate O O V Aly Hz kw A A X min cos9 230 400 50 0 25 1 32 0 76 1375 0 77 uoLE P out SPEEd A F E9 AnPErE co5Ph Example of rating plate P376 Rated mechanical power P out Set the value using the arrow keys O Note Press the arrow keys for 1 s to set each figure individually Q 1s The following rated values are automatically preset if the last set value of rated mechanical power corresponds to a BONFIGLIOLI mo tor If a BONFIGLIOLI motor is connected check and confirm the values P370 Rated voltage in V uoLE P371 Rated current in A An PEr
216. ation IxR compensation Magnetisation current impression IxR compensation 621 Amplification 622 Integral time In setting Configuration 30 110 IM sensorless control V f control of asynchronous motor a current controller is available for the starting behavior The PI controller controls the current impres sion via parameter Starting current 623 The proportional and integrating part of the current control ler can be set via parameters Amplification 621 and Integral time 622 No Description Min Max Fact sett 621 Amplification 10 00 30000 ms 124 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 623 Starting current The Starting current 623 ensures particularly for high torque start a sufficient torque until the Fre quency limit 624 is reached Applications in which high current is permanently needed at a low speed are to be realized using forced ventilated motors to prevent thermal overload No Description Min Max Fact sett Starting current Irn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter In the following settings the starting current impression is used for the starting behavior Configuration 30 110 IM sensor less control V f control of asynchronous motor Operation mode 620 2 4 12 or 14 Configuration 30 410 IM sensor less field orientated control DMC asyn
217. atures its own processor The firmware of the power module is output via parameter Power Module Software Version 16 29 User Name The User Name 29 can be entered via the optional control software VPlus The name can be made up of 32 alphanumerical characters 7 1 1 Control level 28 Control level The Control level 28 defines the scope of the functions to be parameterized These operating instruc tions describe the parameters on the third control level These parameters should only be set by quali fied users No Identification Min Max Fact sett Control level 1 110 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Inverter Data Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 1 Parameters for quick commissioning 2 The parameters most used can be set Standard 3 All parameters can be set 7 1 2 Configuration 30 Configuration The Configuration 30 determines the control behavior with which the electric motor is controlled The operating instructions describe the following configurations and the relevant parameters in the third Control level 28 adjustment of parameter Control level 28 to value 3 Configuration 110 I M1 sensor less control Configuration 110 contains the functions for variable speed control of an asynchronous motor in a wide range of standard applications e g for control of fans and pumps The motor speed is set ac cording to the V f characteristic in accordance with the voltage frequency ratio Configu
218. avoid an error switch off of the frequency inverter the Warn ing limit heat sink temp 407 for the heat sink temperature limit and the Warning limit inside temp 408 as an internal temperature limit are to be parameterized The temperature value at which a warning message is output is calculated from the type dependent temperature limit minus the adjust ed warning limit The switch off limit of the frequency inverter is dependent of the construction size No Description Min Max Fact sett Warning limit heat sink temp Warning limit inside temp The exceeding of the maximum permissible internal temperature is signaled if the sensor for internal temperature or the sensor for the electrolytic capacitor temperature measures the type specific limit value For internal temperature and electrolytic capacitor temperature different limits are defined Output signals Reaching of warning limits is reported via digital signals 166 Heat sink tempera The value temperature limit minus Warning limit heat sink 8 ture warning 2 temp 407 was reached 167 Inside temperature The value temperature limit minus Warning limit inside temp 408 9 warning 2 was reached 170 1 The value Warning over temperature limit minus Warning limit heat sink temp 407 or 42 temperature 2 temperature limit minus Warning limit inside temp 408 was reached D For linking to fr
219. ax reference percentage 519 6 8 Set up via the Communication I nterface 796 SETUP Selection Parameter setting and commissioning of the frequency inverter via one of the communication inter faces include the plausibility check and the parameter identification functions The parameter selection during the guided commissioning procedure includes the basic parameters These are based on standard applications and support commissioning Parameter settings may only be changed by qualified staff Before starting the commis sioning process read the documentation and comply with the safety instructions At the beginning of the auto set up of a synchronous motor the motor shaft will be aligned when enable is switched on It must be ensured that personal or material dam age is excluded For parameter SETUP Selection 796 choose a function The function will be executed as soon as enable is switched on at digital inputs STOA and STOB The functions are also carried out automatically one after the other during the guided commissioning procedure 0 Clear Status The auto set up routine does not perform a function 1 Continue The warning message is acknowledged and the auto set up rou tine is continued The auto set up routine is stopped and a RESET of the frequency 2 Abort inverter is performed The auto set up routine is performed in data set 0 and the param 10 Complete Setup DSO eter values are stored in all of the four da
220. be set up as a voltage or current input Status of digital outputs in decimally encoded form of digital output OUT1D of multifunction output in setting Operation mode MFO1 254 Digital outputs X13 6 550 1 Digital MFO1D 252 Repetition frequency input of digital input output in setting Operation modeterminal X11 6 558 1 output OUT3D of relay output Measured heat sink temperature Warning or shutdown if tem 255 Heat sink temperature perature is too high a pete temperature Warning or shutdown if tempera 2 pede POU Ala 980 araeo PMAR MEOLA 258 es son at PWM input according to Op 259 Aviom o code and abbreviation See chapter Warning message with warning code and abbreviation 269 Warnings Please note Warnings 269 is not affected by Create warning mask 536 Warning message application with warning code and abbrevia Application Warnings tion Please note Warnings Application 273 is not affected by Create warning mask 626 27 275 Controller Status The reference value signal is limited by the controller coded in the controller status 27 STO Status status of digital inputs A STOA and B STOB for ena 3 8 Frequency MFO1F MFO X13 6 550 20 repetition frequency FF MFO1F or 30 Pulse Train PT MFO1F Reference bus frequency Reference value from serial interface Reference ramp frequency Reference value from reference frequency channel Actual value of
221. braking power 34 24 v 22 27 gt lt 15 5 109 v Bonfiglioli Mains Typ3 Resistor Continu Maximum Integrated volt ous power permissi thermal protec age Value Rated power ble oper tion ating voltage V Q kW W V 230 BR 160 100 100 1 6 160 900 Optional 230 BR 432 37 37 4 3 432 900 Optional 230 BR 667 24 24 6 6 667 900 Ja 230 BR 1332 12 12 13 3 1332 900 Ja 400 BR 213 300 300 2 1 213 900 Optional 400 BR 471 136 136 4 7 471 900 Optional 400 BR 696 92 92 6 9 696 900 Ja 400 BR 1330 48 48 13 3 1330 900 Ja 400 BR 2000 32 32 20 2000 900 Ja 400 BR 4000 16 16 40 4000 900 Ja 400 BR 8000 7 7 5 80 8000 900 Ja 295 Brake resistor 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli 12 3 1 230 V devices Options The following table shows the cross reference of brake resistors that can be used for a majority of applications The column Percentage duty cycle shows how long inside a duty cycle the brake resistor can be operated with nominal power Frequency inverter Recommended Power at percentage duty cycle brake resistor cycle time 120 s Type 1ph 3ph Type Percentage duty cycle Agile 202 kW kW 1ph 3ph 01 1 0 09 0 18 BR 160 100 100 89 02 1 0 12 0 25 BR 160 100 100 64 03 1 0 18 0 37 BR 160 100 89 43 05 1 0 25 0 55 BR 160 100 64 29 07 1 0 37 0 75 BR 160 100 43
222. c gear Set one of the following parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 1 Analog Value MFI1A 40 el Gear or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 5 Keypad Motorpot 40 el Gear The electronic gear enables the synchronization of drives without mechanical transmission elements such as shafts or clutches The reference value for the slave drive is the repetition frequency deter mined by the master drive This value can be multiplied by a gear factor The transmission from the master drive to the slave drive is done via a repetition frequency signal or via system bus The gear factor can be set permanently or varied during operation via freely configurable digital and analog signal sources through the percentage reference channel 125 Source Master Reference On the slave drive the reference value for the electronic gear must be selected via parameter Source Master Reference 125 For example 288 Repetition Frequency Input must be selected as the ref erence value source if the reference value is defined as a repetition frequency via digital input IN2D In this case Operation Mode IN2D 496 must be set to 20 RF Single Evaluation or 21 RF Double Evaluation RF Repetition Frequency If a system bus interface is used the reference value can be defined via the system bus Set parame ter Source Master Reference 125 according to system bus PDO which receives the reference value 7 5 4 1 Scope of function Elec
223. ce Frequency 48 Ramp up Time 436 14 Traverse Function Output Handshake Traverse Function 49 Ramp down Time 437 gt 15 Traverse Function Handshake Traverse Amplitude 438 from Master drive Proportional Step 439 Signal 14 Traverse Function Output is added to the reference frequency value During traverse operation the configured traverse parameter values cannot be changed The source of the handshake signal is selected via Handshake Traverse Function 49 251 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 48 Reference Frequency For traverse mode the reference value source is selected via parameter Reference Frequency 48 Traverse mode becomes active when Operation Mode 435 is switched on In traverse mode the values for Ramp up Time 436 and Ramp down Time 437 are active 15 118 Fixed frequencies 5 8 155 Actual speed 14 Traverse function output 16 I limit output 21 Rotor frequen 688 Electronic gear output 50 Reference analog value MFI1A 51 Reference analog value MFI2A 56 PWM Input 2501 2504 PLC output frequency 1 4 62 Reference frequency channel Attention The frequency range for traverse mode is added additional to the frequency reference Therefore the added frequency can result in values smaller than Minimum Frequency 418 or bigger than Maximum Frequency 419 To prevent too high frequencies the summed frequency is lim
224. ce initial commissioning of the frequency inverter On the operator panel the error code FXXXX is displayed The meaning of the error key is described in the following chapter 13 1 1 Error messages Via the PC user interface the number of operation hours h operation minutes m and the fault message can additionally be read out The current operating hours are shown by parameter Operating hours counter 245 The error message can be acknowl edged via the operator panel buttons or according to the link Error acknowledgement 103 Function hhhhh mm FXXXX fault message hhhhh mm FXXXX fault message Error 3 to error 16 Number of errors occurred after the initial commissioning of the frequency inverter No 310 Last Error 311 Last Error but one 312 to 325 362 No of Errors 363 No of self acknowledged errors Automatic error acknowledgment enables acknowledgment of errors Overcurrent F0507 and Overvolt age F0700 without intervention by an overriding control system or the user The No of self acknowl edged errors 363 shows the total number of automatic error acknowledgments No Description Function 363 No of self acknowledged Total number of automatic error acknowledg ment with syn Errors chronization 325 Error list 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Q amp I Bonfiglioli pi cs 13 1 1 Error messages 259 Actual Error Parameter Actual Error 259 shows the error co
225. ce parameter 367 Aa oe Warning The application warnings coded in warning status 361 Checksum The Checksum 361 parameter shows whether the storage of the error environment was free of errors OK or incomplete NOK No Description Function 361 Checksum Check protocol of the error environment 330 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error environment Error protocol 13 3 Troubleshooting vw Bonfiglioli The list shows a selection of possible measures if problems occur Not all problems listed will result in an error message Error message Shut down Parameter setting not possible Motor does not turn after press ing of RUN Troubleshooting Brake resistor connec tion Brake resistance High generator power High DC link voltage Main phase failure Overcurrent Short circuit or overload Earth fault Overtemperature Electromagnetic inter ference Overfrequency Enable is switched on and motor is running Access limited Setup is active Changes disabled by password Parameter setting No enable Error in control cables See chapter 13 1 1 Error messages Check Check value Reduce value if necessary Reduce deceleration value Check brake resistance Check brake resistor connection Reduce deceleration value Check DC link voltage limitation P680 DC link voltage higher than brake chopper trigger threshold P506 Check value Increase value if nec
226. ched Minimum flux formation time 779 Flux formation is stopped after the set flux formation time Maximum flux formation time 780 regardless of whether the reference flux value was reached or not Minimum flux formation time 779 Flux formation is stopped after the maximum flux lt Maximum flux formation time 780 formation time 780 Maximum flux formation time 781 Current during flux formation The field orientated control is based on separate control of the flux forming and the torque forming current component Upon startup the machine is magnetized and a current is impressed first With the parameter Current during flux formation 781 the magnetization current I g is set with the pa rameter Maximum flux formation time 780 the maximum time for the current impression is set The current impression is done until the reference value of the rated magnetizing current is reached or the Maximum flux formation time 780 is exceeded 780 Maximum flux formation time 10000 ms 1000 ms ms 2 50ms 1000 ms Current during flux formation Irn Nominal value of frequency inverter oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter Configuration 30 110 Configuration 30 410 Configuration 30 610 126 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 3 3 Stopping behavior 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 P68 amp P69 0 The stopping behavior can be defined via
227. chine No Description Min Max Fact sett Rated magnetising current 0 01 Irn Ian Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter 115 Machine data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions The rated magnetizing current determined during the guided commissioning procedure is set to an optimized value and does not have to be adjusted 718 Rated slip correction factor asynchronous motor field orientated control The rotor time constant results from the inductivity of the rotor circuit and the rotor resistance Due to the temperature dependence of the rotor resistance and the satura tion effects of the iron the rotor time constant is also dependent on temperature and current The load behavior and thus the rated slip depend on the rotor time constant The guided commissioning determines the machine data dur ing the parameter identification and sets the parameter Rated slip correction factor 718 accordingly The value calculated by the rotor time constants can be read out via the actual value Current rotor time constant 227 Parameter identification during guided commissioning Setup should be done while the motor is cold No Description Min Max Fact sett Rated slip correction factor 0 01 300 00 100 00 383 Voltage constant synchronous motor In Configuration 610 parameter Configuration 30 for control of synchronous motors the control be
228. chronous motor Configuration 30 610 PMSM sensor less field orientated control DMC synchronous motor 624 Frequency limit The Starting current 623 is impressed until the Frequency limit 624 is reached Permanent operating points below the frequency limit are only permissible if forced ventilated motors are used The transition to the control method of the selected Configuration 30 takes place above the frequen cy limit The Frequency limit 624 is set up automatically during the guided motor commissioning in field ori ented control configurations 410 and 610 In V f control configuration 110 the parameter Frequency limit 624 is not changed by the guided motor commissioning Descri ption Min Max Fact sett 0 00 Hz 100 00 Hz 2 60 Hz In the following settings the starting current impression is used for the starting behavior Configuration 30 110 IM sensor less control V f characteristic of asynchronous motor Operation mode 620 2 3 4 12 or 14 Configuration 30 410 IM sensor less field orientated control DMC asynchronous motor Configuration 30 610 PMSM sensor less field orientated control DMC synchronous motor 625 Brake release time In order to protect the motor holding brake against damage the motor may only start after the brake has been released Startup to reference speed is effected only after the Brake release time 625 has elapsed The time should be set such that it is
229. cription Min Max Fact sett Amplification Integral Time 10000 ms The dynamism of the current limit value controller and the voltage controller is influ enced by the setting of the parameter Dyn Voltage Pre Control 605 613 Current Limit 614 Frequency Limit Behavior in motor operation If the current set via parameter Current Limit 613 is exceeded the activated current limit value con troller will reduce the output frequency until the current limit is no longer exceeded The output fre quency is reduced as a maximum to the frequency set by the parameter Frequency Limit 614 If the current value drops below the Current Limit 613 the output frequency is raised back to the refer ence value Behavior in generator operation If the current set via parameter Current Limit 613 is exceeded the activated current limit value con troller will increase the output frequency until the current limit is no longer exceeded The output fre quency is increased as a maximum to the set Maximum Frequency 419 If the current is below the Current Limit 613 the output frequency is reduced to the required reference value again No Description Min Fact sett Orlen Frequency Limit 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 0 00 Hz Irn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter 228 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 9 5 Functions of field orien
230. ct closed 0 o O a E ae 1 1 0 i a a ae O t ae O O o 0 o Ek Number of digital inputs Number of fixed frequencies per data set 1 2 2 4 3 8 Fixed frequency change over factory settings 66 Fixed frequency change over 1 74 IN4D 67 Fixed frequency change over 2 7 Off 131 Fixed frequency change over 3 7 Off If the data set changeover function is used additionally via parameters Data Set Change Over 1 70 and Data Set Change Over 2 71 you can preset up to 32 fixed frequencies as reference values The fixed frequency changeover can also be controlled via digital signals instead of digital inputs by functions of the frequency inverter Via parameter Operation Mode 493 you can change the direction of rotation of the motor See chap ter 7 5 1 2 Positive and negative reference frequencies The direction of rotation can also be preset with the digital signal sources assigned to the parameters Start Clockwise 68 and Start Anticlock wise 69 Via the reference frequency channel see chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel the fixed reference values can be selected and linked to other reference value sources 7 5 1 4 Ramps 420 Acceleration Clockwise 421 Deceleration Clockwise 422 Acceleration Anticlockwise 423 Deceleration Anticlockwise The ramps determine how quickly the frequency value is changed if the reference value changes or after a start stop or brake
231. cy inverter The energy dissipation values are also valid for the switching frequencies of 4 8 12 and 16 kHz as at these operating points the output current is reduced Separation of energy dissipation Ps interior P Pu interior Energy dissipation interior Pa Energy dissipation heat sink Cold Plate of frequency inverter 2 Mounting plate as external heat sink 315 Assembly variants 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x EJ Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 2 3 Additional fan or liquid cooling The size of the heat sink can be reduced if fans are installed or a liquid cooling system is used in addi tion to the Cold Plate assembly The size of the external heat sink can be reduced proportionally to the increase in the flow rate of the cooling medium In the following a fan cooling system is described as an example For calculating the maximum per missible heat resistance Rin enforcea for cooling by means of a fan a proportionality factor is introduced This factor describes the increase of the maximum permissible thermal resistance at increasing flow rate of the cooling air The maximum permissible thermal resistance Rih enforced for enforced air cooling can be calculated as follows R Sth Rih enforced 7 a Rin Maximum permissible thermal resistance with free circulation of air Calculate according to the formula for Ry in the previous chapter or use the value indicated in the table a Proportionality
232. cy is kept at zero Hz not exceeding the Maximum flux formation time 780 After this time has expired at the latest the output frequency follows the adjusted V f characteristic Operation mode 2 includes operation mode 1 After the Maximum flux formation time 780 has elapsed at the latest the output frequency is increased according to the set acceleration and the starting current is Magnetisation impressed If the output frequency reaches the value set with the pa current impression rameter Frequency limit 624 the Starting current 623 is withdrawn There is a smooth transition to 1 4 times the frequency limit to the set V f characteristic As from this operating point the output current de pends on the load Factory setting Operation mode 3 includes operation mode 1 When the output frequen cy reaches the value set with parameter Frequency limit 624 the in crease of the output voltage by the IxR compensation becomes ef fec tive The V f characteristic is displaced by the portion of voltage which depends on the stator resistance In this operation mode the current set with the parameter Current dur ing flux formation 781 is impressed into the motor for magnetization after enable The output frequency is kept at zero Hz not exceeding the Maximum flux formation time 780 After the time has elapsed at the latest the output frequency is increased according to the set accelera tion and the starting current is impressed If the output fr
233. d Up The reference percentage increases at the set value of Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 509 Command Down The reference percentage decreases at the set value of Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 509 158 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Percent Motorpoti Percent Motorpoti Up 72 Down 73 0 0 The reference percentage does not change 1 0 The reference percentage increases at the set ramp 0 1 The reference percentage decreases at the set ramp The reference percentage is reset to the value of Minimum Reference Percentage 518 If another 1 1 reference percentage source is selected via parame ter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Refer ence Percentage Source 2 494 the reference fre quency is reset to the value of this source 0 contact open 1 contact closed If a negative reference value is set the drive is decelerated with command Percentage motorpoti up The reference value is changed in positive direction Limit The reference values are limited via parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519 Direction of rotation reversal If parameter Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is set to zero the direction of rotation of the drive can be reversed via the motorpoti function Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs as reference value The function Motorpotentiometer via digital inpu
234. d orientated con trol DMC may be suitable Set P30 to 410 asyn chronous motor or 610 synchronous motor Check if a mechanical brake is effective Check amplification and integral time settings of con trol functions Switch on slip compensation P660 Check parameters of V f characteristic If the PID controller is used check amplification integral time and derivative time Avoid electromagnetic interference on the control cables Install mains and motor cables separately from the control cables Use shielded control cables If an analog reference value is defined Select a filter time constant P451 for MFI1 or P561 for MFI2 Carry out setup Shorten cables 333 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Overvoltage Noise from drive PID controller output signal defective Digital inputs have 0 V instead of a voltage of approx 20 V Operating Instructions Agile High load torques in the case of field orientated control DMC Motor noise or switching noise in frequency in verter Output frequency is resonant frequency of system Parameter setting Connection Energy saving function 06 2013 Error protocol High load torques may cause error messages due to overvoltage For an asynchronous motor switch to sensor less control according to V f characteristic set P30 to 110 Reduce switching frequency P400 Install input filter Install output filter Connect moto
235. d plate must be plane The contact surfaces must be clean and degreased e For fixing the frequency inverter drill 6 threaded holes M6 in the installation surface For the in stallation dimensions refer to the following chapters e Deburr the threaded holes e Clean the contact surfaces of the external heat sink and cold plate e Apply a thin and uniform film of heat conducting paste on the cold plate thus the heat transmission resistance between the cold plate and the heat sink In this Gi The heat conducting paste compensates the roughness of the contact surfaces and way the cooling efficiency is increased e Mount the frequency inverter vertically on the heat sink using six M6 bolts The bolts must have a minimum length of 30 mm Tighten all bolts uniformly The maximum tightening torque of the fixing bolts in a typical construction is 3 4 Nm After the mechanical installation continue with the electrical installation according to chapter 5 Electrical Installation Comply with the safety instructions provided there 317 Assembly variants 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile G Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 2 5 2 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 kW to 1 1 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply iph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 0 18 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55
236. d to another function By default digital input IN1D has the function Start clockwise Parameter Start clockwise 68 Do not use digital input IN1D for positioning and a stopping behavior parameter Operation mode 630 at the same time 460 Positioning distance The feedback of the current position is referred to the revolutions of the motors relative to the time of the reference signal The positioning accuracy depends on the current Actual Frequency 241 the Deceleration clockwise 421 the No of pole pairs 373 the selected Positioning distance 460 and the configured control behavior The distance between the reference point and the required position is to be defined in motor revolu tions The calculation of the distance covered is done with the selected Positioning distance 460 ac cording to the application The setting 0 000 U for the Positioning distance 460 causes an immediate stop of the drive according to the selected stopping behavior for Operation mode 630 Description Min Max Fact sett 0 000 U 1000000 000 U 0 000 U U Revolutions 132 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli The actual value parameter Revolutions 470 facilitates the setting and optimization of the function The revolutions of the motor displayed should correspond to the Positioning distance 460 at the re quired position The minimum number of revolutions needed until the requir
237. de Error code Code Meaning FOO 00 No fault has occurred Frequency inverter overloaded check load behaviour Reduce ramps and speed Frequency inverter overloaded in low output frequency range 02 Frequency inverter overloaded 60 s check load behaviour 03 Short term overload 1 s check motor and application parameters 00 Heat sink temperature too high check cooling and ventilator F02 01 Heat sink temperature too cold check allowed ambient temperature 00 Inside temperature too high check cooling and ventilator F03 01 Inside temperature too cold check allowed ambient temperature 03 Capacitor temperature too high check cooling and ventilator 00 Motor temperature too high or sensor defective check connection at terminal X12 4 Motor circuit breaker tripped check drive 02 V belt monitoring reports no load on the drive Phase failure check motor and wiring 00 Overloaded check load situation and ramps Motor still rotates The motor is still excited and rotates and drive start command applies and the flying start function is deactivated or a device test is tried to start Overvoltage brake chopper Refer to chapter 13 3 Troubleshooting Shut down Overvoltage motor chopper Refer to chapter 13 3 Troubleshooting Shut down Electronics voltage DC 24 V too low check control terminal Electronics voltage too high check wiring of control termin
238. dmissible current flows T0101 Earth N U fault Short circuit between branch U and the negative DC link potential or PE T0102 Earth N V fault Short circuit between branch V and the negative DC link potential or PE T0103 Earth N W fault Short circuit between branch W and the negative DC link potential or PE T0104 Earth P U fault Short circuit between branch U and the positive DC link potential or PE T0105 Earth P V fault Short circuit between branch V and the positive DC link potential or PE T0106 Earth P W fault Short circuit between branch W and the positive DC link potential or PE T0114 Soft earth P U fault Short circuit between branch U and the positive DC link potential or PE T0115 Soft earth P V fault Short circuit between branch V and the positive DC link potential or PE T0116 Soft earth P W fault Short circuit between branch W and the positive DC link potential or PE Err S41 Internal error Abort and restart the test 7 2 3 2 Load test Test 2 If a synchronous motor is connected The test must not be started while the synchro nous motor runs Synchronous motors may move briefly while the test is performed It must be checked if there is a potential risk of personal injury or material damage If necessary access to hazard areas must be safely prevented Test 2 checks if a direct current can be impressed in the connected load motor in both directions Test 1 should be carried out before
239. e 5 6 4 Group drive In the case of a group drive several motors at one frequency inverter the total length must be di vided across the individual motors according to the value given in the table See chapters 5 6 1 and 0 Use a thermal monitoring element on each motor e g PTC resistor in order to avoid damage A group drive with synchronous server motors is not possible 40 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Motor Connection Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 5 6 5 Brake resistor Installing a brake resistor if feedback of generator energy is expected Overvoltage shutdowns can be avoided by this Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being ener gized unintentionally Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to work at the unit When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply the mains DC link voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time During operation the surface of the brake resistor can reach high temperatures The surface can keep high temperatures after operation for a certain time Do not touch the brake resistor during operation or operational readiness of the frequency inverter Non compliance may result in skin burn Install a safeguard for protection against contact or fix warning labels Do not install the brake resistor in the proximity to
240. e MFO1 X13 6 Selection 7 6 3 551 Analog Voltage 100 V 0 0 22 0 7 6 3 552 Analog Voltage 0 V 0 0 22 0 7 6 3 553 Analog Source MFO1A Selection 7 6 3 554 Digital Source MFO1D Selection 7 6 3 555 RF PT Output Value MFO1F Selection 7 6 3 556 RF Division Marks 30 8192 7 6 3 557 PT Scaling Frequency 0 32000 7 6 3 558 Operation Mode Terminal X11 6 Selection 7 6 4 559 Digital Inputs PNP NPN Selection 7 6 6 560 Tolerance Band 0 00 25 00 7 6 2 1 2 561 Filter Time Constant Selection 7 6 2 1 3 562 Operation Mode MFI2 Selection 7 6 2 563 Error Warning Behaviour Selection 7 6 2 1 3 564 Characteristic Curve Point X1 0 00 100 00 7 6 2 1 2 565 Characteristic Curve Point Y1 100 00 100 00 7 6 2 1 2 566 Characteristic Curve Point X2 0 00 100 00 7 6 2 1 2 567 Characteristic Curve Point Y2 100 00 100 00 7 6 2 1 2 570 Operation Mode Motor Temp Selection 7 4 6 571 Operation Mode Selection 7 10 6 1 572 Frequency Limit 0 300 7 10 6 1 573 Operation Mode Selection 7 9 1 574 Power Limit 40 00 95 00 7 9 1 575 Limitation Time min 5 300 7 9 1 576 Phase Supervision Selection 7 4 7 578 Allowed No of Auto Acknowl 0 20 7 4 8 579 Restart Delay ms 0 1000 7 4 8 580 Reduction Limit Ti Tc deg C 25 0 7 10 1 581 Operation Mode Selection 7 10 7 582 Trigger Limit Iactive 0 1 100 0 7 10 7 583 Delay Time S 0 1
241. e chapter 7 5 1 2 Positive and negative reference frequencies Parameter Repetition Frequency Pulse Train 252 shows the actual value of the repetition frequency input Output as percentage In the case of a parameterization as repetition frequency the read frequency value is also available as a percentage for the reference percentage channel 0 100 correspond to the signal frequency range 0 Maximum Frequency 419 at the repetition frequency input The conversion is done using the following formula Frequency value x 100 Maximum Frequency 419 Percentage value 7 6 7 3 Pulse train At digital input IN2D terminal X11 5 a pulse train pulse sequence signal can be defined as refer ence value Parameter Operation Mode IN2D 496 must be set to 30 Pulse Train For setting of the reference values the following settings can be selected Reference Frequency Source 1 475 10 Repetition Frequency Reference Frequency Source 2 492 10 Repetition Frequency 209 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 654 Pulse Train Scaling Frequency The pulse train pulse sequence signal at digital input IN2D terminal X11 5 is scaled Via parameter Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 you can set which input frequency corresponds to the value of Maximum Frequency 419 A read frequency of Maximum Frequency 419 means that at the pulse train input a
242. e display of the control unit reads dEFLt Parameters Control level 28 and Configuration 30 are not changed during resetting to factory settings Program ing 34 4444 With Keypad Parameter default settings Select P34 in Menu Para Press both arrow keys to jump to value 4443 Set P34 to 4444 and confirm with ENT This sets all parameters to the default values So 7 2 Machine data The input of the machine data is the foundation for the functionality of the control functions and methods You will have to enter the motor ratings during the guided commissioning setup 7 2 1 Rated motor parameters 370 Rated voltage 371 Rated current 372 Rated speed 373 No of pole pairs 374 Rated cosine Phi 375 Rated frequency 376 Rated mechanical power Parameterize the rated motor data according to the rating plate of the motor of the motor data sheet The default settings of the machine parameters are based on the nominal data of the frequency in verter and a four pole asynchronous motor The machine data required for the control functions and methods are checked for plausibility and calculated in the course of the commissioning Parameter Rated cosine Phi 374 is not available in configuration 610 synchronous motors No Description Min Max Fact sett 370 Rated voltage Urin 371 Rated current Ikn 372 Rated speed nn 373 No of pole pairs a 2 374 Rated cosine Phi cos n 375 Rated frequency 50 00 Hz 376 Pe
243. e eee eeeeee teen eee ea ae aaaae ee eeeeesaeaaaaaaaaeeeeseeeaeeaaaaes 71 6 2 8 Selection of actual value display cceecececeeeeeeeee tree eee ea ae aan eeeeeeeeaeeaaaaeeeeeeeseeeeaeanaaes 71 6 2 9 Commissioning without Setup eceeee cece eee eeeeeeeeeee eee ea cane eee eeeeeeesaeeaaaaaaaeeeeseeseaeaaaaes 72 6 2 10 Optional Optimization of Motor characteristics cccceeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeed 72 6 2 10 1 Speed Controller Softer set UP ccceccccseeeeeceeeeeee eee eee ese eee eaeaaeeeeasaaeeeeesaaae eens 72 6 2 10 2 Speed Controller Stronger set Up cccccceseeeeeccseeeeeeeeseeeeess ase eeeessaeeeeessaaeeeeesaaa eens 72 6 2 10 3 Voltage Constant 2 ticsssviscsescsastavescssaeer inci eeanisns ied earns aE a TATT NTA 73 6 2 10 4 Insufficient Torque during Start of FOC and SYNCH eeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeees 73 6 2 10 5 Cross coupling COMPENSATION eee ee eeee eset eee e ee eee eae eee tree eee saeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeesaaeaaaaes 73 6 3 Commissioning of a communication interface cccseeseeeeceeseeeeeeeeseeseneeseenenneanenens 74 6 4 After first COMMIUSSIONING cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeneaseesenoaseesenaanaeeeeenegseeesnonsennes 80 6 5 Typical fUNCTIONS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneaseeeeenaseeeeeneaseeeeneaseeeeseeeaseeseeeaaeeseeooaeeeesnoasennes 91 6 6 Error Acknowledgment via keypad scescccseseeeecneseeeeenaueeeeennaseesenoageeseeoaaeeee
244. e for some time The mains fuses and cable cross sections are to be selected according to EN 60204 1 and DIN VDE 0298 Part 4 for the nominal operating point of the frequency inverter According to UL CSA approved Class 1 copper lines with a temperature range of 60 75 C and matching mains fuses are to be used for the power cables The electrical installation is to be done according to the device specifications and the applicable standards and directives The control mains and motor lines must be kept physically separate from one another The cables connected to the frequency inverters may not be subjected to high voltage insulation tests unless appropriate circuitry measures are taken before Ppi 00000 LIMB Minimum Torque to tighten the screws 0 5 Nm 4 6 Ib in i Maximum Torque to tighten the screws 0 6 Nm 5 3 Ib in Recommended sizes of Mains fuses F1 are described in the technical data chapter 11 2 Device data Only for in DC link connections Comply with the notes on cable cross sections in chapter 5 4 Dimensioning of conductor cross section Cable cross sections mm 0 2 4 flexible cable with sleeve 0 2 6 rigid cable Mains terminals 36 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Mains Connection Electrical Installation Bonfiglioli Vectron Connection to I T mains For connection to IT mains pull out the plug type jumper
245. e frequency inverter File selection Progress indicator 0185 I r ae I 1 oone 3 bi l 4 rEAdY Q COPY rERAd in LOAd rEAd in 900 1 4 ENT rEAd in P3785 donE l 1 I N 4 N P 7 ii Va 254 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions Messages nolArd Err ili vw Bonfiglioli No memory card plugged No file with parameter values on memory card Parameter values were saved on memory card Parameter values were uploaded to frequency inverter Insufficient memory The parameter values were not copied to the memory card com pletely No more file numbers available Error while writing on the memory card Error while reading from the memory card Data content invalid Fault when loading from memory card memory card has contact problems Contact mounting of card Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Non permissible parameter value Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Non permissible parameter set Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Non permissible write access Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Write error EEPROM Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Checksum error EEPROM Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Value is only allowed to be written at inhibited state Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Error parame
246. e frequency inverter is suitable for operation at a supply network of a maximum of 480 VAC which delivers a maximum symmetrical current of 5000 A effective value if protected by fuses of class RK5 Only use copper cables with a temperature range of 60 75 C In the case of special applications you may also have to comply with further guidelines and instruc tions The frequency inverters are to be grounded properly i e large connection area and with good con ductivity The leakage current of the frequency inverters may be gt 3 5 mA According to EN 50178 a stationary installation must be provided The protective con ductor cross section required for ground ing the fixing plate must be selected according to the size of the unit In these applications the cross section must correspond to the recommended cross section of the wire Refer to chapter 5 4 Dimensioning of conductor cross section Degree of protection IP20 is only achieved with terminals plugged and properly mount ed covers Connection conditions The frequency inverter is suited for connection to the public or industrial supply mains according to the technical data It must be checked based on the specifications of EN 61000 3 2 if the devices can be connected to the public supply means without taking additional measures Increased requirements in connec tion with the specific application of the fre quency inverter are to be met by means of optional com
247. e from Rated Mech Power 376 Motor power and Rated Speed 372 Motor nominal speed The Torque control is only available in configurations 410 FOC and 610 SYNC 164 n T Control Change Over 74 IN4D 418 Minimum frequency 0 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 53 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 5 Hz s 421 Deceleration clockwise 0 01 Hz 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 Analog Value MFI1A 476 Reference percentage source 1 2 Analog Value MFI2A 477 Gradient percentage ramp 100 s 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 zero Operation mode reference frequency 493 source 1 reference 494 Reference percentage source 2 0 zero Operation mode reference percentage 495 source 2 positive only 518 Minimum reference percentage 0 519 Maximum reference percentage 100 520 Fixed percentage 1 0 521 Fixed percentage 2 20 Operation Mode MFI2 Multifunction sii input 2 1 Voltage 0 10 V Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 0 Coast to Stop Coast to Stop output 630 1p68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 651 Operation mode auto start O Off 767 Frequency Upper limit 50 Hz 768 Frequency Lower limit 50 Hz 66 Fixed frequency Change Over 1 7 Off 67 Fixed frequency Change Over 2 7 Off 68 Start Clockwise 71
248. e internal operating instructions for the frequency inverter The user manual of the frequency inverter must be included in the user manual of the whole plant 2 9 Operator s operating staff s responsibilities 2 9 1 Selection and qualification of staff e Any work on the frequency inverter may only be carried out by qualified technical staff The staff must not be under the influence of any drugs Note the minimum age required by law Define the staff s responsibility in connection with all work on the frequency inverter clearly e Work on the electrical components may only be performed by a qualified electrician according to the applicable rules of electrical engineering e The operating staff must be trained for the relevant work to be performed 2 9 2 General work safety e In addition to the user manual of the machine plant any applicable legal or other regulations relating to accident prevention and environmental protection must be complied with The staff must be instructed accordingly Such regulations and or requirements may include for example handling of hazardous media and materials or provision use of personal protective equipment e In addition to this user manual issue any additional directives that may be required to meet spe cific operating requirements including supervision and reporting requirements e g directives re lating to work organization workflow and employed staff e Unless approved of expressly by the manuf
249. e is stopped The control signals for Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise are pulses The functions Start clock wise and Start anticlockwise for the drive are latching type functions when signal Start 3 Wire Ctrl 87 is switched on Latching is cancelled when the latching signal is switched off Drive C C Xa ZY O Start Clockwise gt X Is E Start Anticlockwise LX gt CT Start 3 Wire i j j j Ctrl i i i t gt C Clockwise 1 Signals are ignored A Anticlockwise 2 Timet lt 32 ms The drive is started according to the configured starting behavior if the signal Start 3 Wire Ctrl 87 is switched on and a positive signal edge for Start clockwise or Start anticlockwise is detected Once the drive has started new edges 1 on the start signals will be ignored If the start signal is shorter than 32 ms 2 or if both start signals were switched on within 32 ms 2 the drive will be switched off according to the configured stopping behavior 200 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 3 wire control is activated with parameter Local Remote 412 Control of direction of rotation parameter Start Clockwise 68 Start Se Conio daie Anticlockwise 69 and signal Start 3 Wire Ctrl 87 via digital inputs See chapter 7 3 1 Control for further operation modes of parameter Local Remote 412 Start 3 Wire Ctrl87 7 Off 7
250. e used for filling level controls for example The function can be set up via parameter Back lash 618 See chapter 7 9 3 PID controller technology controller External DC 24 V power supply Via an external 24V power supply the control component of the frequency inverter can be powered independent of mains supply The frequency inverter can be disconnected from mains supply via con tactor for example Even with mains supply switched off parameterization is still possible the func tion of inputs and outputs and the communication are maintained The power consumption of the inverter during extended interruptions of operation can almost be re duced to zero See chapter 5 7 6 External DC 24 V power supply Temperature controlled fans The fans are controlled in two stages This is done for the inside fan and the heat sink fan together If the inside capacitor or heat sink temperature set via Switch On Temperature 39 is exceeded the heat sink fan and the inside fan are switched on at half power The fans will be switched off again as soon as the temperatures have dropped below the Switch On Temperature 39 by 5 C again If the internally defined maximum inside DC link capacitor or heat sink temperature thresholds are reached 5 C below maximum temperature the fans are switched to full power If the temperature drops to 5 C below the switch on threshold again the fans return to the half power stage See chapter 7 10 2 Fan
251. eans of a low pass filter in example in order to eliminate fault effects The setting range is between 0 ms and 5000 ms in 15 steps Filter deactivated The analog reference value is forwarded 0 Time constant 0 ms unfiltered 2 Time constant 2 ms Filter activated averaging of the input signal via the set value 4 Time constant 4 ms of the filter time constants 8 Time constant 8 ms 16 Time constant 16 ms 32 Time constant 32 ms 64 Time constant 64 ms 173 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions 453 Error Warning Behaviour For monitoring the analog input signal an operation mode can be selected via parameter Er ror Warning Behaviour 453 The input signal is not monitored Factory setting 1 Warning lt 1V 2 mA 7 oo signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA a warning message If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA a warning and fault 2 Shutdown lt 1V 2 mA message is issued The drive is decelerated according to stop ping behavior 2 If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA a warning and fault message is issued and the drive coasts to a standstill stopping behavior 0 Error Switch Off 3 z 1V 2 mA Monitoring of the analog input signal is active regardless of the enable of the frequency inverter Operation mode 2 defines the shut down and stopping of the drive regardless of the setting of pa rameter Operatio
252. ected Configuration 30 Additionally features such as Auto Start and the syn chronization and positioning functions facilitate the integration in the application 7 3 1 Control The frequency inverters are suitable for data communication and can be extended by communication modules In this way they can be integrated in an automation and control system Parameterization and commissioning can be done via the operator panel or a communication interface Control can be done via contacts keypad on the operator panel or communication interface 412 Local Remote Parameter Local Remote 412 defines the command sources for start stop and direction of rotation are to be issued The parameter enables choosing from control via contacts operator panel or com munication interface The commands start and stop as well as the definition of the direction of rotation parameters Start Clockwise 68 Start Anticlockwise 69 are issued via digital inputs Run Stop and Reset commands from the keypad keys are ignored The Start and Stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are controlled via the Remote Statemachine of the communication inter face The control is done via the Controlword which can be monitored via 410 Controlword or which can be used to simulate it With 411 Control via Contacts Control via Statema chine Statusword the state of the drive can be monitored The statusword is typically sent to the overlying control PLC Ru
253. ects and assessing func tions Qualified electrician The term Qualified Electrician covers qualified and trained staff who has special technical know how and experience with electrical installations In addition Qualified Electricians must be familiar with the applicable standards and regulations they must be able to assess the assigned tasks properly and identify and eliminate potential hazards Instructed person The term Instructed Person covers staff who was instructed and trained about in the assigned tasks and the potential hazards that might result from inappropriate behavior In addition instructed per sons must have been instructed in the required protection provisions protective measures the appli cable directives accident prevention regulations as well as the operating conditions and verified their qualification Expert The term Expert covers qualified and trained staff who has special technical know how and experience relating to frequency inverter Experts must be familiar with the applicable government work safety directives accident prevention regulations guidelines and generally accepted rules of technology in order to assess the operationally safe condition of the frequency inverter 14 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Terminology General safety instructions and information on use vw Bonfiglioli 2 2 Designated use The frequency inverter is designed according to the state of the art and recognized safety
254. ed Hz The frequency will not drop below this value even if a lower reference frequency is selected ENT Maximum Frequency in Hz F EJH Maximum motor speed Hz The frequency will not rise above this value even if a higher reference frequency is selected ENT Commissioning Setup complete and ready for operation done Finish the guided commissioning The device executes a reset 2 sec ENT onds after the message done is visible the reset is done automati cally Drive enabled rEAdY For further setting options select Para menu or PA A start the drive Via the operator panel or via signals at control terminals Start motor via operator panel 67 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x EJ Bonfiglioli Commissioning Parameter Display Select local menu for manual operation LocA ENT Select Poti F motor potentiometer menu Pot F ENT 350 H Switch on STOA X11 3 and STOB X13 3 RUN Press RUN button The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 minimum frequency Factory setting 3 50 Hz Using the arrow keys set the speed Start the drive via signals at control terminals Switch on Start clockwise at IN1D X11 4 or Start anticlockwise at IN2D X11 5 The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 minimum frequency Factory setting 3 50 Hz By means of a voltage 0 10 V on MFI1 X12 3 set the speed For potentiometer connection refer to chapter 5 7 1 Circuit fo
255. ed by configuring digital inputs of the slave frequency in verter as a reference frequency input If the master drive is a frequency inverter the repetition fre quency output of the master frequency inverter is used 7 5 4 6 1 Frequency inverter as master drive If the master drive of the electronic gear is a frequency inverter the following parameters for exam ple can be set for the transmission of the repetition frequency e Select operation mode 20 Repetition Frequency MFO1F for parameter Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 550 As a result the multifunction output is used as a repetition frequency output e Via parameter RF PT Output Value MFO1F 555 select an operation mode for multifunction output 1 e Set the value entered for parameter RF Division Marks 556 according to the frequency required at the repetition frequency output This is the number of pulses per motor revolution for the repe tition frequency The pulse duration depends on the motor speed By default this parameter is set to 1024 When making the settings take the frequency limit of the frequency output of 150 kHz into account The maximum value Smax which can be set for parameter RF Division Marks 556 is _ 150000 Hz Frequency value max 7 5 4 6 2 Frequency inverter as slave drive For the function of the electronic gear via the repetition frequency the following parameters for ex ample can be set at the frequency inverter of the Slave drive e
256. ed position is reached depends on the Actual frequency 241 and Deceleration Clockwise 421 or Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 as well as the No of pole pairs 373 of the motor min number of rotations Actual frequency 241 Deceleration 421 or 423 No of pole pairs 373 of motor f2 Us See minimum 9 a p ua ac ll Example f 20 Hz a 5 H2 s p 2 gt Umin 20 With an actual frequency of 20 Hz and a delay of 5 Hz s at least 20 rotations are needed until stand still at the required position This is the minimum value for the Positioning distance 460 a shorter positioning distance is not possible If the number of rotations until the required position is reached is to be lower the frequency must be reduced the deceleration increased or the reference point must be shifted 461 Signal correction The registration of the reference position via a digital signal can be influenced by a variable dead time while the control command is read and processed The signal running time is compensated by a posi tive figure for the Signal correction 461 The setting of a negative signal correction decelerates the processing of the digital signal No Description Min Max Fact sett Signal correction 327 68 ms 327 67 ms 462 Load correction The influences on the positioning which depend on the operating point can be cor rected empirically via parameter Load correction 462 If the required position is not reached the dec
257. eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeees 282 11 2 5 AGL402 0 25 t0 22 KW jiring ieee arse 283 11 2 6 AGL402 3 0 tO TL OKW Jione aa aa a aa 284 11 2 7 Increase of switching frequency ssssssssrssesesrsrnrnrrrreursnnnnnnnnnutunnnnnnnnnnnennnnn annn Nnnn Enae 285 11 3 Control electromics ccccseseeeeeneeseeeeeengeeueeneasenseenageuseeoaaeeeeueeonaseusennasensenoauennenoas 286 8 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 This document Content vw Bonfiglioli 11 4 Operation diagramS ccssccceesscseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeonseenenseeneseeoceeeeeeeeennseeneeseneeeseeenes 288 I2 OPTIONS waiisscciniis tecriesincscstsacecussteccecuccassinsndeasd duets adedewauuadewsuseusaceanisaduerseandecaws 290 a iya SARC A E E 290 12 2 Shield Sheets ccsscccssssccsseccsesecncseeceseeneeeeneeseeoessenenseeneeseeenasseoeeeeneaseeoeseeneeeeesesees 290 12 2 1 Shield sheet for Control CaDIES cceceeeesteeeeee se eeeeeeeaaeeeeees sae eeeee saa eeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeesaaas 290 12 2 1 1 DIMENSIONS visiiisien ieee atin E S a A E 292 12 2 2 Shield sheet for motor cables cceeeceeseeeeee esses ee eee eee ee eee ae a eeeee aaa eeeessaaeeeeseaaeneenenags 293 12 2 2 1 Size 1 and 2 3 0 18 kW to 5 5 kW 1 0 09 kW to 2 2 KW eeeeteeeeeeee tees 293 12 2 2 2 Size 3 3 5 5 KW to 11 0 KW i SKW oo eee cere reer ee eee teeter eee e eee eaaaaaeeeeees 294 12 3 Brake re SiStOr a E E 295 12 321 230 V devices oirne nusa tea vives sos ada E G
258. eeeeaes 52 MERU sesioni iaia 52 OPUIONS sisipin seraa onina A 291 Assembly VANIM e isrenas na aea aN E 309 Brake resistor ssesssssssssrsersserrsennnrnnsen 296 Communication module seses 308 DIN Fallens mannna aa 328 Input filter erritar 301 Line choke ssssssssrssnssernnenrsnrrsernnensana 298 Resource pack s sssssssssssrrsesrsrrsserrsesssns 308 Shield Sheet cc cscsccsssssssersesseeeessaeaes 291 USB Adaptor ccceecssseeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeeeas 308 Overload Capacity eeceeeceecsesseeeeeeeeeeees 278 P Parameter CODY cia RA 253 ESti sanne 343 PASSWOMG iiiar 112 Percentage ae e E E cd 154 RAMPS inasra 155 Reference value ssssssssrssrsserrrennnrrneen 151 PID controller s ssesssssssesssesserrnenrnnrrsennnes 219 PLG brinenmi e sn a Versace 205 PNPacccedsesevatertissnetssssesvaceuseerereees 48 186 196 POSIVIONING iioii as 132 Poti Fivsssiceverieed araa aE 56 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 356 Index POU Parea a o a veeaaeann a tae 58 Power failure regulation s es 216 Profi DUS a a 75 Protective FUNCTIONS cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaeees 96 PI1000 siti tentative 141 PT Cipanas 140 Pulse train UUs eiris 209 Qutp t inisiasi 185 Pulse train INpUt ssssssssssnsserrsensernresrnnnnsen 87 Pulse width modulation 239 Pump Application example n 99 101 PWM INpUtisisievectcor ives eneriicesiiiees 86 208 R Ramp FREQUENCY sascecsvecndieceraveertiecivecstonabecs 147 Percentage
259. eeeeeeeees 70 Shield Sh t ccccccssseeecssssseeesseseeeenseaaees 291 Slave drive traverse function c00eee 250 Slip COMPENSATION ee eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 226 Speed controli ssisscsks siniora iinan 82 Speed controller eceeeeeceseeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 232 Switch over speed torque control 202 SS Status messages auto Setup eee 68 Standby MOde cceseceessssseeesseeeeeeessaaeeees 261 Start anticlockwise 199 200 Parameters Menu PARA Index Start clockwise 199 200 Starting De hAVIO ceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 FOG gecesi n 89 N fiitins i E TE 88 Status device test 120 Stopping behavior ccccseeeeeeesseeeeeeeaaeees 127 Stopping behaviour ceeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeees 89 Storage aea e 20 Switching freqUeNcy ssssssssssssrrrrrrrrereerens 239 SYNChrOnization cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 System DUS vis tcnsdsdtetiieieieiavedsenieadeiavisined 76 System Cata eceeeccssssseeessseeeeeesaeeeenenaaees 253 T TCP IP osonni sexsvastecssdavescrevivretacrvsreteesoeievs 79 Technical data cccccceecsssseeeesseeeeesasaneeees 278 Technology controller sssr 219 Thermal time constant motor sses 249 Thermal time constant rotor s es 249 THEPMOCONtACE ceeeeeteseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaeeeeees 202 Three wire CONtIOL cceeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeee 200 Tolerance band cccecsssseeeeeeaeeeeeees 172 178 Multifunction input 1 sesser 172 Multifunc
260. eeeneeeeseneuseeeenoageeueeoagseesenenogseneas 270 9 8 Actual values Ethernet sssssssssnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn na 270 10 SERVICE sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannan nnmnnn nnna 271 ako SE a a E E E E E E T 271 10 2 Regular service WOrK cccsesseeeeeenseeeeennaeeueeenaseusnenaseuseanauseeeenoaseseusennasensenoanenseaoas 271 10 3 Monitoring of service interval 1 c ccseseeeeeseseeeeeeeseesenneuseseeneaeessenaaeeeeeseaaanenseaoas 273 ROG fo ee BG lo Sirasini asai anaE aara Aaa rier cert terrercrrr rere terre rere eer erer 273 10 32 Falser REEE ELERE AERA TEETE Sdeanne tingly 274 10 3 3 Re s tservice interval ussiisa naa AA a Eaa a 276 11 TECHNICAL DAT A errr reer re errecrerrreree rere creer ere eter Cree cre rerer errr Cet rrerr rr ere 277 11 1 General technical data s ssssss21111 1155 155 555 55 55 5 1 115 277 11 2 Device data ccsesceeecseseeeeeneeseeeeennseeeeeonaeeueennaseeseonageuseeeenuaseuengaaseusennaseuseaoauenseaoas 278 11 2 1 AGL202 3 0 18 to 0 55 kW 1 0 09 to 0 25 KW 230 V ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 279 11 2 2 AGL202 3 0 75 to 2 2 kW 1 0 37 to 1 1 KW 230 V cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 280 11 2 3 AGL202 3 3 0 to 4 0 KW 1 1 5 to 2 2 KW 230 V 20 eect eeeeeee eter eee ee aeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 281 11 2 4 AGL202 3 5 5 to 7 5 KW 1 3 0 KW 230 V cc ceeeeeeeeeeeee
261. eeoeaseeseonaseuseenagauseseeouaseeseonaseesenoasensenoas 307 12 9 Assembly Variants cscscecccsesseeeeeeeseeeeenseeueennaseeseenageuseeneuseseuseonaseeseonasenseooauensenoas 308 12 9 1 Feed through assembly This assembly set is not included in delivery s es 309 12 9 1 1 Cooling air flow rate required and energy dissipation eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 309 12 9 1 2 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 KW to 1 1 KW cc eeeeeeeee cesses teeeeeeeeees 310 12 9 1 3 Size 2 3 3 0 kW to 5 5 kW 1 1 5 KW to 2 2 KW eeeeee cere eee seen eteeeeeeeeees 311 12 9 1 4 Size 3 5 5 kW to 11 0 KW wissen rarities nian eag he 312 12 9 2 Cold Plate This assembly set is not included in delivery ccceccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeanaeeeeeaaes 314 12 9 2 1 Range of application ecececceceteeeeee tree eee sees eee terre ee eee eaea saat eres eeesaaaaaaaeeeeees 314 12 9 2 2 Required thermal properties of the external heat SINK eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 314 12 9 2 3 Additional fan or liquid COOLING ecceee cece eee eeeeeeeeeee eee ea aa naneeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaneeeeeeees 316 12 9 2 4 Application NOteS iis sisiscccecas veiesevisthtaveiteedegeveed Shee esiievtvsins a aE 316 129 25 ASSOMDIY 3 ececevtscdessiived ive vacced dees a a a a iN 317 12 9 3 Vibration proof This assembly set is not included in Celivery ccceccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeaaes 321 12 9 3 1 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW i 0 09 KW to
262. eference Modulation 750 Then the control loop can be excited with a jump function by modifying the reference modulation changeover between 95 and 50 By means of an oscillographed measurement of the flux forming current component on the analog output of the frequency inverter the controlling process of the modulation controller can be assessed The course of the signal of the flux forming current Isa should reach the stationary value after overshooting without oscillation An oscillating of the course of the current can be damped by increasing the integral time 7 9 5 6 1 Limitation of modulation controller 755 Reference I mr Lower Limit 756 Control Deviation Limitation The output signal of the modulation controller is the internal reference flux The controller output and the integrating part are limited via the parameter Reference Imr Lower Limit 755 or the product of Rated Magnetising Current 716 and Flux Reference Value 717 The magnetizing current parameter forming the upper limit is to be set to the rated value of the machine For the lower limit select a value which also builds up an adequate flux in the machine in the field weakening area The limitation of the control deviation at the output of the modulation controller prevents a possible oscillation of the control loop in the case of load surges The parameter Control Deviation Limitation 756 is stated as an absolute value and acts both as a positive and a negative limit No De
263. eference value is the single value of the selected reference value source Selection of source for reference value Reference value is zero Multifunction input 1 is the reference value source termi nal X12 3 Via Operation mode MFI 452 the input must 1 Analog Value MFI1A be set up as an analog input voltage or current Factory setting for Reference percentage source I 476 See chapter 7 6 1 Multifunction input MFI1 Multifunction input 2 is the reference value source termi nal X12 4 Via Operation mode MFI2 562 the input must be set up as an analog input voltage or current See chapter 7 6 2 Multifunction input MFI2 The selected fixed percentage is the reference value source The fixed percentage of the current data set is 3 Fixed Percentage selected via Fixed percentage value changeover 1 75 and Fixed percentage value changeover 2 76 See chapter 7 5 2 Fixed percentages Reference value source is the function Percentage motor 4 Motorpot via Digital Inputs poti up 72 and Percentage motorpoti down 73 See chapter 7 5 3 Motor potentiometer The operator panel is the reference value source with keys A for increasing the percentage and W for reducing the percentage Factory setting for Reference percentage source 2 494 See chapter 7 5 3 4 2 Control via reference percentage channel Digital input IN2D terminal X11 5 which is set as PWM input or the pulse train input are used as the reference value source PWM in
264. egulates itself to the torque reference and the load behavior To avoid an unintentional speed mostly too high speeds in some cases also too small speeds and avoidance of current impression the frequency is limited by Frequency Upper Limit 767 and Frequency Lower Limit 768 by the speed controller As from the limit value the drive is controlled to maximum speed Frequency Upper Limit 767 and Frequency Lower Limit 768 which corresponds to the behavior of the speed controller Additionally the controller limits the speed to Maximum Frequency 419 This limitation is set by the speed control ler changes in the speed controller affect the speed behavior in the limit area of the 3 mentioned parameters In the current impression the speed is limited additional to Minimum Frequency 418 in Direct Torque Control this limit is not active 231 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions Description Min Max Fact sett ICER Upper Limit 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz 768 Frequency Lower Limit 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz Note Positive values limit the speed in clockwise direction negative values limit the speed in anti clockwise direction In example if both values are positive gt 0 Hz anticlockwise movement is inhib ited If the torque control is activated while the actual frequency lies outside the defined range of Frequency Upper Limit 767 and Frequency
265. eleration duration is increased by a positive load correction value The distance between the reference point and the required position is extended Negative values accelerate the braking process and reduce the position ing distance The limit of the negative signal correction results from the application and the Position ing distance 460 Description Min Max Fact sett No 32768 32767 0 133 Operational Behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Ly B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 463 Activity after positioning The behavior of the positioning after the required position of the drive is reached can be defined via parameter Activity after positioning 463 The drive is stopped with the stop ping behavior of Operation mode 630 In this setting only the second digit of Operation mode 630 is evaluated If the state Hold is selected this state is considered all other states will result in state Switch Off Waiting for positionina sig The drive is stopped until the next signal edge with a new edge 1 nal g Torp g sig of the position signal it is accelerated in the previous direction of rotation 0 End positioning The drive is held until the next signal edge with a new edge of 2 Reversal by new edge the position signal it is accelerated in the opposite direction of rotation The drive is stopped and the power output stage of the inverter is switched off The drive is stopped for the
266. ency 6 10 00 Hz P487 Fixed Frequency 7 25 00 Hz P488 Fixed Frequency 8 50 00 Hz P66 7 Off P66 P67 P131 Selection P67 71 INID 0 0 0 P480 P131 72 IN2D 1 0 0 P481 73 IN3D P558 0 Input 1 1 0 P482 74 IN4D 0 1 0 P483 75 IN5D 0 1 1 P485 76 MFIiD P452 3 NPN or 4 PNP 1 1 1 P486 77 MFI2D P562 3 NPN or 4 PNP 1 0 1 P487 other signal sources 0 0 1 P488 Via the signal states at the digital inputs the fixed frequencies can be selected P475 or P492 3 Fixed Frequency The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency P418 and Maximum Frequency P419 Blocking Frequencies Factory setting Reference frequencies are hidden Mechanical resonance of the plant can be avoided Two blocking frequencies can be set P447 1st Blocking Frequency 0 00 Hz pr ea P448 2nd Blocking Frequency 0 00 Hz output wi P449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 00 Hz i ee oes Select the frequency range to be hidden In this range there is no stationary op erating point 1P449 P449 P447 Reference value internal Blocking hysteresis felocking hysteresis P447 P449 P447 P449 PWM input A PWM signal at input IN2D X11 5 can be used as reference value P496 10 PWM 0 100 of P419 maximum frequency or of P519 maximum 11 PWM 100 100 reference percentage P652 and P653 for scaling P476 or P494 10 Repetition percentage The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequenc
267. ency or the percentage value lies at 0 4 mA The deviations from 20 mA and 0 mA allow the operation even with voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values 169 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile EJ Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions Incliniation 19 6 mA 0 4 mA pa 19 2 mA i 19 2 mA Maximum reference value Maximum Frequency 419 Maximum Perc 519 Current 4 20 mA Parameter Operation Mode MFII 452 must be set to 5 Current 4 20 mA The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 19 6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The zero crossing of the frequency or the percentage value lies at 4 4 mA The deviations from 20 mA and 4 mA allow the operation even with voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values Incliniation 19 6 mA 4 4 mA ue 15 2 mA a 15 2 mA Maximum reference value Maximum Frequency 419 Maximum Perc 519 f Hz 50 Hz P452 1 OV 0 2V 10 Vv U V P452 2 0 mA 20 mA P452 5 4 mA 20 mA 7 6 1 1 2 Voltage input characteristic and current input characteristic For parameter Operation Mode MFI 452 6 Voltage characteristic or 7 Current characteristic must be selected Voltage signal MFI1A 0 V 10 V The output signal is influ 6 Voltage characteristic enced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set vi
268. enenens 336 15 PARAMETER CSU iscssstensstccetesciassadesewanaadacciassasssewasaassiesassaestaussasssaaadinessazedesean 339 15 1 Actual values Menu Actual ccsscsscssccsccnsensensensensensecssonsensensensensensenssenseensensensens 339 15 2 Parameters Menu PARA csscsscssccsccsccnsensensensensensecssnsensensensensenseecsensecssensensenses 343 NDEX 0 ecccceccnee seen ceeeneeeecneeeeeneeeee eee eneeeseneeasenseasaeeesengsaseaeeaseesagenseasaeseeeesaeeesenseaseenss 354 10 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 This document General information about the documentation vw Bonfiglioli 1 General information about the documentation For the series of devices AGL Agile is for the safety related commissioning and opera tion to be complied with the following documentation e This Operating instructions e Application manual Functional Safety Agile For better clarity the documentation is structured according to the customer specific requirements made on the frequency inverter Quick start guide The Quick Start Guide describes the basic steps required for mechanical and electrical installation of the frequency inverter The guided commissioning supports you in the selection of necessary parame ters and the configuration of the frequency inverter by the software Operating instructions The Operating Instructions describe and document all functions of the frequency inverter The param eters required for adapting the frequency in
269. ensions of the basic device Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4 2 Installation for the standard assembly and chapter 12 9 Assembly variants 282 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Device data Technical data vw Bonfiglioli 11 2 5 AGL402 0 25 to 2 2 kW 400 V 3 phase Agile 402 OC 0 e 07 08 ate i DOO 1 Recommended motor shaft power P kw 0 25 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 Output current r lal os 12 15 21 30 40 5 term overload current 60 s I A 1 2 18 2 25 315 45 6 0 8 2 Short time overload current 1 s Ae ea 50 Tag EE 11 0 Switching frequency Minimum brake resistor R Qf 300 300 300 300 300 220 220 AN ended Diane resistor R 2432 1594 930 634 462 300 220 tT Al o8 12 18 24 28 33 Rated current 5 8 Maximum mains current Fuses Fuses UL type Dimensions Degree of protection Mains and motor ter 4 flexible with sleeve Terminals minals 6 rigid Terminals relay out 0 1 1 5 put installation ee o ntti fang i sink fan Power dissipation 2 kHz switch ing frequency p w 19 29 4 53 70 89 122 1 According to DIN EN 61800 5 1 2 Dimensions of the basic device Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4 2 Installation for the st
270. entage value by Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 509 factory setting 10 s The change of sign can occur if Minimum Frequency 418 is set to 0 Hz Minimum reference percentage 518 and Maximum reference percentage 519 limit the setting range Change sign RUN ENT The sign of the reference percentage value changes Only possible for torque control parameter n T Control Change Over 164 Display of drive status 00g The reference percentage value at rotating drive The reference percentage val ue is the sum of Reference percentage source 1 476 and Reference percentage source 2 494 P S The drive is stopped The alternating display shows the reference percentage z000 5 0F value and the message STOP 1 Factory setting of parameter Reference frequency source 2492 In the factory setting the reference frequency value can be set via operator panel keypad 2 In the factory setting the reference percentage value can be positive or negative 58 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operator panel Commissioning i JOG vw Bonfiglioli The selection Poti P is only available if the parameter Local Remote 412 was set like descri bed above The function JOG is applicable for fixed speed operation e Switch on enable signals at digital inputs STOA terminal X11 3 and STOB terminal X13 3 e If digital inputs are intended for start signals Switch off the signals of the parameters Start clockwise 68
271. equency reaches the value set with the parameter Frequency limit 624 the Starting current 623 is withdrawn There is a smooth transition to the V f characteristic and a load dependent output current is obtained At the same time the increase of the output voltage by the IxR compensa tion becomes effective as from this output frequency The V f character istic is displaced by the portion of voltage which depends on the stator resistance Operation mode 12 contains an additional function to guarantee a start ing behavior under difficult conditions The magnetization and starting Magnetisation current impression are done according to operation mode 2 The ramp current impression stop takes the current consumption of the motor at the corresponding with ramp stop operating point into account and controls the frequency and voltage change by stopping the ramp The Controller status 275 signals the intervention of the controller by displaying the message RSTP In this operation mode the functions of operation mode 12 are extend Magnetisation ed by the compensation of the volt age drop across the stator re current impression sistance When the output frequency reaches the value set with parame with ramp stop ter Frequency limit 624 the increase of the output voltage by the IxR IxR compensation compensation becomes effective The V f characteristic is displaced by the portion of voltage which depends on the stator resistance Magnetis
272. equency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs 7 4 3 Controller status 409 Controller Status Message Intervention by a controller can be displayed via the operator panel The selected control methods and the matching monitoring functions prevent a switch off of the frequency inverter The interven tion of the function changes the operating behavior of the application and can be displayed by the status messages with parameter Controller status 275 The limit values and events which result in the intervention by the corresponding controller are described in the corresponding chapters The behavior during the intervention of a controller is configured with the parameter Controller Status Message 409 The intervention of a controller is not reported 0 No Message The controllers influencing the operating behavior are dis played in the Controller status 275 parameter 1 Warning Status The limitation by a controller is displayed as a warning by the operator panel Chapter 7 6 5 8 Warning mask contains a list of controllers and describes further ways for evaluating the controller states 136 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error and warning behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 4 4 Frequency switch off limit 417 Frequency Switch off Limit The maximum permissible output frequency of the freq
273. er With footprint filter and line choke upstream on mains input side With booktype filter With booktype filter and line choke upstream on mains input side On request Interference suppression class Agi e size 3 AGL 202 19 5 5 kW AGL 202 21 7 5 kW Installation measure Agile 3 AGL202 19 3 0 kW Without EMC input filter without line choke AGL202 21 3 0 kW Without EMC input filter with line choke 15 A or 25A With footprint filter With footprint filter and line choke upstream on mains input side With booktype filter With booktype filter and line choke upstream on mains input side On request 306 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Input filter Options vw Bonfiglioli 12 6 Communication module CM 232 Raa anus or Modbus CM 485 RS485 VABus or Modbus CM PDPV1 Profibus DP V1 CM CAN CANopen or system bus Further communications modules are listed in chapter 3 1 Inverter type and warning signs on the device The VABus protocol is used for communication with the PC software VPlus for parameter settings monitoring and diagnosis Installation and commissioning of a communication module are described in the separate instruction manuals of the communication protocols 12 7 USB adaptor Via an optional USB adaptor the communication interface X21 can be connected to the USB interface of a PC It enables parameter se
274. er Status CK Ee Hz 277 STO Status O 278 Frequency MFO1F Hz 0 00 fms 282 Reference Bus Frequency 283 Note The parameters Current error 260 Warnings 270 and Application Warnings 270 are only accessi ble Fieldbus They cannot be accessed via the VPlus PC Software or the Operator Panel No Description Unit Display range Chapter Peak Value vdc Average Value vdc Peak Value Heat Sink Temp Average Value Heat Sink Temp Peak Value Inside Temperature deg C 0 Timax 0 ns Timax Peak Value Tabs Average Value Tabs Peak Value Active Power pos Peak Value Active Power neg Peak Value Capacitor Temp 0 Temax Average Value Capacitor Temp _deg C_ 0 Temax Energy positive Energy negative kWh Last error S 00000 00 FXXXX Last Error butone 00000 00 FXXXX 340 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Actual values Menu Actual Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli No Description Unit Display range Chapter 312 Error3 i y 313 Eror4 sd 314 Eror5 sd 315 Error6 Cd 316 Ewor2 Cd 317 Error 8 00000 00 FXXXX 318 Error9 i 319 Eror4o Cd 320 Error4dt sd 321 Erori
275. erator panel s es 160 Motor protection motor Circuit Dreaker eccsseeeeeeeseeeeeees 244 Motor Protection sssrinin 244 Motor Protection by I t Monitoring 248 MOUNUING 2 7 tessttrestesteie i ateerecees 27 Multifunction input cccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 168 Multifunction input 1 Characteristic cccsssecessesssseeeeaneeeesenaes 170 Error Warning behaviour 0e 174 Filter time constant ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 set as analog input eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 set as digital input eee 174 Tolerance band en 172 Multifunction input 2 Character istiC ccccceessssseseeeeseeeeenensaees 177 Error Warning behaviour 2 06 180 Filter time constant s e 179 set as analog input eeeeeeeee eee 175 set as digital input ccseeeeeeeeeee ees 181 Tolerance Dand cccccsssseeesssseeeeessaeeees 178 Multifunction output eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 181 ANAIOG esc cvencensitalawatdceteiearesesvecstncccsnie 183 CharacteristiC cccccccesssseeeeesseeeeeeesaaes 182 Digitalis Sesiaveiateeaass 184 Operation MOdC cccecsssseeeeesseeeeeeeeaaes 182 Pulse train cseessseesesseseeeesseeeeesseaeetenes 185 Repetition frequency ssssssssrsrrrereererrns 184 Multiplexe iissa 205 N INPNicsocdvesctiesasterncdstiecheareeeertteerss 48 186 196 Oo OC overload Capacity cccecsseeeeeeaneeees 278 Operator Panel eceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee
276. ered in Amperes The current limits of the controller can be linked to the fixed limits and analog input parameters The assignment is done via the parameters Isq Limit Source Motor Operation 734 and Isq Limit Source Generator Op 735 No Description Min Max Fact sett Oc Current Limit Current Limit Generator Op 0 01A 0 01A Inn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter Tf the minimum value is set the value of Current Limit 728 is used 1 The default settings for amplification and integral time refer to the recommended machine data This enables a first function test in a large number of applications Switch over between settings 1 and 2 for the current fre quency range is done by the software ac cording to the selected limit value 234 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 730 Torque Limit 731 Torque Limit Generator Operation The output value of the speed controller is limited by an upper and a lower torque limit parameter Torque Limit 730 and parameter Torque Limit Generator Operation 731 The limit values are input as a percentage of the rated motor torque The assignment of fixed values or analog limit values is done via the parameters Torque Limit Source Motor Op 736 and Torque Limit Source Gen Op 737 No Description Min Max Fact sett 0 00 650 00 650 00 Torque Limit Generator Operatio
277. eristic in setting 1 Linear for Type V f Characteristic 606 U f P418 FMIN P419 FMAX _ Operating range P603 UC P601 UK P600 US P602 FK P604 FC f FMIN Minimum Frequency 418 FMAX Maximum Frequency 419 US Starting Voltage 600 UK Voltage Rise 601 FK Rise Frequency 602 UC Cut Off Voltage 603 FC Cut Off Frequency 604 No Description Min Max Fact sett 600 Starting Voltage 100 0 V 5 0 V 601 Voltage Rise 100 200 10 602 Rise frequency 100 20 603 Cut Off Voltage AGL202 280 0 V 230 0 V faci4o2 60 0v 560 0V 400 0V 604 Cut Off Frequency 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 50 00 Hz The guided commissioning takes the parameterized rated motor values and reference data of the frequency inverter into account when it comes to pre set ting the V f characteristic In the case of asynchronous machines the speed can be increased at a constant torque if the motor winding can be switched over from star to delta connec tion If the data for delta connec tion indicated on the rating plate of the asynchro nous motor were entered the cut off frequency is increased automatically by the square root of three The Cut Off Voltage 603 UC and Cut Off Frequency 604 FC set in the factory are derived from the motor data Rated Voltage 370 and Rated Frequency 375 With the parameterized Starting Volt age 600 US the linear equation of the V f characteristic results
278. ernal Error is output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External error 183 is present The drive is stopped at the set emergency stop ramp and the error mes sage F1454 External Error is output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External error 183 is present Emergency Stop Error For setting up external warnings parameters User Warning 1 1363 and User Warning 2 1364 can be used Check chapter 7 6 5 9 Warning mask application for further details 7 4 6 Motor temperature 570 Operation Mode Motor Temp Automatic shut down of the frequency inverter or the output of a warning message offers protection against overheating of the motor For monitoring the motor temperature a temperature sensor must be connected to multifunction input 2 Parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 must be set according to the connected temperature sensor The motor temperature is evaluated via one of the following temperature sensors Thermal contact bimetal temperature sensor PTC resistor motor PTC KTY measuring resistor Resistor PT1000 Motor temperature measurement enables monitoring of temperature limits via a thermal contact or PTC resistor or temperature measurement temperature monitoring and temperature display via a KTY measuring resistor or a resistor PT 1000 137 Error and warning behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Therm
279. ershooting of the speed controller Alternatively you can calculate the mechanical time constant at a known mass moment of inertia The mechanical time constant is the time the drive needs during acceleration from standstill with rated torque applied until the Rated Speed 372 is reached 7 9 5 5 Field controller 717 Flux Reference Value 741 Amplification 742 Integral time The flux forming current component is controlled by the field controller The guided commissioning optimizes the parameters of the field con troller by measuring the time constant and magnetizing curve of the connected asynchronous motor The parameters of the field controller are selected such that they can be used without changes in most applications The proportional and the integrating part of the field controller are to be set via parameters Amplification 741 und Integral Time 742 Description X Fact sett Flux Reference Value T ae D D 100 00 Amplification 0 0 1000 742 Integral Time 1000 0ms 100 0 ms Please note that changes within the Field controller parameters should only be done in the basic speed area When an optimization of the Field controller is necessary set the Integral Time 742 Act Rotor Time Constant 227 2 meaning to the half of the rotor time constant In most application cases this change is sufficient When further optimizations are necessary follow the step described in the following procedure e Set the output frequenc
280. es the thermal motor time constant This output may be permanently 100 This corresponds to the complete thermal capacity of the motor If 102 is reached the drive switches off with an error message Both outputs are connected to the adjustable alarm limit 42 2t Single Motor The I t capacity of the motor is monitored with rat Error Switch Off ed values from the active dataset If the fixed threshold values exceed 100 motor 120 stator the drive switches off with fault F0401 in the active dataset 51 12t Multi Motor Operation The I2t capacity of the motors regarding their relat Warning ed ratings is monitored in each of the four data sets If the Warning Limit Motor Ft 615 is reached the warning message A0200 is signaled from the active data set 52 It Single Motor The 12t capacity of the motor is monitored with rat Warning ed values from the active dataset If the Warning Limit Motor Ft 615 is reached the warning message A0200 is signaled from the ac tive data set 248 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 61 I t Multi Motor Operation The I t capacity of the motors regarding their relat Warning and Error Switch Off ed ratings is monitored in each of the four data sets If the Warning Limit Motor Ft 615 is reached the warning message A0200 is signaled from the active data set If the fixed threshold
281. es 111 Synchronous MOtOF sssssssssesrsrrrrrrrreeeens 111 Filter time CONStANL cececesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 179 Multifunction input 1 ecese 173 Multifunction input 2 c ecccesseeeeeeees 179 Fixed FreQUeNCieS cccceecssseeeeessaeeeeeeeaaes 86 Fixed freQUENCY ccceseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaes 146 ChangeOver a 147 201 Fixed percentage sssessssrrrrrrrrererrsrrrnns 154 Changeover sssssssseeesrsrrrrrrereererrenns 155 201 Flux forming finished eeen 191 Flux reduction ssssssssssesssrrenrsrirserrrrerererne 259 ElVING Stait siina 129 Frequency Parameters Menu PARA 355 vw Bonfiglioli En E E TE 145 RAMPS oaia 147 Frequency Limit s ssssessssrssrrrrrnsrrrrnrerrrnn 247 Function table ssssssssssrsressssrrserrnenssnnrees 205 G Gear factor siris inianan naanin 165 Ea E T 165 VAR ADIC aarin 165 General information about the documentation save evaysadeetodtvaenscssesiers dansctovestereectstvucere 11 Group d VE isinne ai 40 H HYSUCreSIS asin E 150 Frequency hysteresis ccssseceeeseseeeeee 150 of analog input signal 172 179 l Installation ccccceecssseeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeees 20 27 mechanical ssssssesserrsesssrrrssrrsnsserrrenssns 27 Intelligent current limits s es 212 J JOG positionen aa a ni 59 150 Starts ues extvesavecexe seas cntees 201 K Keypad eee 52 KIY irria TEE 140 L LeadiNg ssiri ea aAA 149 M Machine data ccccccssseeeecseeeeees
282. es for Rp min are listed in chapter 11 Technical data If the calculated resistance R of the brake resistor is between two standard series values the lower resistance must be selected e Calculation of relative operation time OT OT tp OT Relative operation time percentage duty cycle E tb Braking time duty cycle te Cycle time Example tb 48 s t 120 s OT to 0 4 40 t t In the case of infrequent short braking operations typical values of the relative operation time OT are at 10 for long braking operations 120 s typical values are at 100 In the case of frequent deceleration and acceleration operations it is recommended that the relative operating time OT be calculated according to the above formula The calculated values for Py pea Rb and OT can be used by the resistor manufacturers for determining the resistor specific permanent power 243 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 10 5 Motor chopper 507 Trigger Threshold The field orientated control systems for asynchronous motors configuration 410 FOC contain the function for adapted implementation of the generator energy into heat in the connected three phase machine This enables the realization of dynamic speed changes at minimum system costs The torque and speed behavior of the drive system is not influenced by the parameterized braking behavior The parameter
283. eted again and replaced by the static values The static values contain the motor data measured during commissioning setup Real time tuning is switched on Optimized control parameters are saved after shut down of the frequency inverter non volatile Each data set is saved separately In this way real time tuning may also be used for operating cases with motor changeover Real time tuning is switched on Optimized control parameters are not saved after shut down or restart of the frequency inverter Optimized controller settings are applied in a new data set after a data set changeover Combination of Latching and Taking Over Real time tuning is switched on Optimized control parameters are saved after shut down or restart of the frequency inverter non volatile Optimized controller settings are applied in a new data set after a data set changeover 3 Latching 5 Taking Over Latching and Taking 7 Over 7 10 Special functions The configurable functions of the corresponding control methods enable another field of application of the frequency inverters The integration in the application is made easier by special functions 7 10 1 Pulse width modulation 400 Switching Frequency The motor noises can be reduced by changing over the parameter Switching Frequency 400 A re duction of the switching frequency should be up to a maximum ration of 1 10 to the frequency of the output signal for a sine shaped output signal
284. eters Refer to chapter 7 1 3 Set password NOTE The setting of Parameter Set Password 27 only does not lock the control facilities of the keypad Start Stop Change direction of rotation Poti F and Poti P are still available 153 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile L B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 5 2 1 Limits 518 Minimum Reference Percentage 519 Maximum Reference Percentage The setting range of the percentages is defined by the parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The relevant control methods use the two limit values for scaling and calculating the frequency Description X Fact sett Minimum Reference Percentage x T m ar 0 00 Maximum Reference Percentage 0 00 300 00 100 00 7 5 2 2 Positive and negative reference percentages 495 Operation Mode reference percentage source Via parameter Operation Mode 495 you can define if the reference value set via parameters Refer ence Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 is to be either positive or negative only or if it can be both positive and negative You can also output the reference percentage as an inverted value compared to the selected reference value source Reference percentage channel is switched off Reference percent age is 0 The reference percentage can be both positive and negative The 1 reference value values of Reference Percentage S
285. ett 1543 Base Parameter Actual Sys amenn a 1600 241 tem Value of actual value Actual frequenc Factory setting Actual System Value 242 Actual Frequency 241 x 1 000 e Set an actual value parameter number in parameter Base Parameter Actual System Val ue 1543 e Seta factor in parameter Factor Actual System Value 389 Parameter Actual System Value 242 shows the scaled actual value 7 10 10 Service interval monitoring Refer to chapter 10 3 Monitoring of service interval 7 10 11 Copy parameters Parameter values can be saved on a memory card via operator panel or via PC control software VPlus Note Field bus communication is not possible or faulty during data storage or data reading by means of the memory card Note To use the copy function use the memory card Resource pack offered by Bonfiglioli Vectron Bonfiglioli Vectron doesn t take any responsibility for the malfunctioning of the memory cards of other manufacturers 253 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions 7 10 11 1 Copying using the operator panel Storage on a memory card Parameter values of a frequency inverter can be saved on standard digital memory cards Bonfiglioli Vectron Resource Pack and uploaded on another frequency inverter d i SAVE LOAD
286. f motor characteristics The motor characteristics are set correctly for most of the applications with the default settings In some cases optimization of the motor characteristics can be necessary or improve the performance significantly The optimization possibilities are described in chapter 6 2 10 Operating Instructions Agile 64 06 2013 Commissioning Display ENT FrEGlo ENT Fr E H ENT done ENT rEAdy PACA First commissioning Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli 6 2 3 Start first commissioning of a synchronous motor e Switch on enable at STOA X11 3 and STOB X13 3 e Switch off enable at IN1D X11 4 and IN2D X11 5 if a circuit for control via control terminals is installed e Switch on the power supply e Start commissioning Setup on operator panel If the unit is in as delivered condition or after resetting the unit to the factory settings the guided commissioning procedure is started automatically The operator panel displays the menu item Setup Guided commissioning can also be opened by selecting the Setup menu m CW Setup Parameter Display Start commissioning SEEUP Using arrow keys select Complete commissioning or FULL or Measure motor data only notar Commissioning of a communication interface buUSLUn Refer to chapter Note Select Full setup if the frequency inverter is commissioned for the first time Select Motor setup if o
287. f no output filter is installed Motor Connection 39 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation 5 6 2 Motor cable length with output filter du dt Longer motor cables can be used after taking appropriate measures e g use of low capacitance ca bles and output filters The following table contains recommended values for the use of output filters Type Agile 202 Agile402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph unshielded cable shielded cable Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 daum noum 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 111 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 15 2 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 300 m 200 m 19 2 5 5 193 3 0 5 5 5 5 213 3 0 7 5 7 5 22 3 o 9 2 300 m 200 m 23 3 11 5 6 3 Motor cable length with sinus filter Motor cables can be longer if sinus filters are used By conversion in sinus shaped currents high frequency portions which might limit the cable length are filtered out Consider the voltage drop across the cable length and the resulting voltage drop at the sinus filter The voltage drop results in an increase of the output current The frequency inverter must be suitable for the higher output cur rent This must be considered in the projecting phase In the case of motor cable lengths exceeding 300 m contact BONFIGLIOLI servic
288. ficient of the motor defines the ratio of the leakage inductivity to the main inductivi ty The torque and flux forming current components are thus coupled via the leakage coefficient Op timization of the leakage coefficient within the field orientated control systems demands acceleration to various operating points of the drive Unlike the torque forming current sq 216 the flow forming current sd 215 should be largely independent of the load torque The flow forming current compo nent is inversely proportional to the leakage coefficient If the leakage coefficient is increased the torque forming current increases and the flux forming component drops The adjustment should re sult in a relatively constant actual current sd 215 matching the set Rated magnetizing current 716 regardless of the load on the drive The sensor less control system uses the parameter Leakage Coefficient 378 in order to optimize the synchronization to one drive No Description Min Max Fact sett 378 Leakage Coefficient 20 0 716 Rated magnetising current asynchronous motor field orientated control The Rated magnetising current 716 is a measure for the current in the motor The motor voltage will build up accordingly in no load operation depending on speed The guided commissioning deter mines this value at approx 30 to 50 of the Rated current 371 This current can be compared to the field current of an externally excited direct current ma
289. figuration 110 parameter Configuration 30 is based on the proportion al change of output voltage compared to the output frequency according to the configured character istic By setting the V f characteristic the voltage of the connected 3 phase motor is controlled according to the frequency The torque to be applied by the motor at the corresponding operating point demands the control of the output voltage proportional to the frequency At a constant output voltage output frequency ratio of the frequency inverter the magnetization is constant in the nominal operating range of the 3 phase motor The rating point of the motor or end point of the V f characteristic is set via the guided commissioning with the parameter Cut Off Voltage 603 and the parameter Cut Off Frequency 604 The lower frequency range where an increased voltage is necessary for the start of the drive is criti cal The voltage at an output frequency of zero is set with parameter Starting Voltage 600 A voltage increase deviating from the linear course of the V f characteristic can be defined by parameters Volt age Rise 601 and Rise Frequency 602 The parameter value percentage is calculated from the linear V f characteristic Via the parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 the working range of the motor or the V f characteristic is defined 211 V f characteristic 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions Linear charact
290. flammable or heat sensitive materi als Do not cover the brake resistor Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends using a temperature switch Depending on the selected resistor the temperature switch is integrated as a standard or optional available A de A tailed list is included in Chapter 12 3 Brake resistor The temperature switch discon nects the frequency inverter from mains supply if the brake resistor is overloaded Using Brake resistors without temperature switches can result in critical states 41 Motor Connection 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile COO Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation Minimize cable lengths X2 T 000000 L2 UVWrmo i3 E r Ll L2 L3 __ 0090 Minimum Torque to tighten the screws 0 5 Nm 4 6 Ib in Maximum Torque to tighten the screws 0 6 Nm 5 3 Ib in NOTE BONFIGLIOLI provides suitable brake resistors Refer to chapter 12 3 Brake resistor For calculation of brake resistance refer to chapter 7 10 4 1 Dimensioning of brake resistor NOTE DC connection requires a power estimation of the complete system The brake resistor is operational dependent on the enable of the frequency inverter The contactor K1 must disconnect all plant components from the mains Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Motor Connection
291. formation given on this function in chapter 7 3 5 Flying Start must be observed With parameter Allowed No of Auto Acknowl 578 you can define the number of automatic error acknowledgements which are permitted within 10 minutes An acknowledgement repeated above the permissible number within 10 minutes will result in the fre quency inverter being switched off The errors Overcurrent F0507 and Overvoltage F0700 have separate error acknowledgement coun ters Description Max rect sett TAllowed No of Auto Acknowl B 579 Restart Delay Oms 1000 ms 7 5 Reference Values 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel 475 Reference Frequency Source 1 492 Reference Frequency Source 2 Via the reference frequency channel you can define how the reference rotary frequency for the motor is to be specified For each of parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Fre quency Source 2 492 you can select a reference value specification option The selected reference values are added and output as rotary frequency reference value for the motor The settings of frequency limits Parameter Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 and blocking frequencies parameter 1st Blocking Frequency 447 2nd Blocking Frequency 448 as well as Frequency Hysteresis 449 are considered 142 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli If the same setting is selected for parameter
292. function is added to another reference value via Reference Percentage Source 1 476 plus Reference Percentage Source 2 494 If the value of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 is reached and the other reference value is increased the output value of the motorpoti function is reduced It is reduced so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the maximum reference percentage value If the value of Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is reached and the other reference value is reduced the output value of the motorpoti function is increased It is increased so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the minimum reference percentage value In the settings for Operation Mode 495 1 reference or 3 inverted the point of re versal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function The drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign 162 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Lock the control possibilities of the control panel If drive start and stop and the change of direction of rotation at the operator panel must be locked e For parameter Local Remote 412 select a value that is different from 3 or 4 e Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of the parameter Refer to chapter 7 1 3 Set password 7 5 4 Electronic gear Starting the electroni
293. g Via parameter Max Temp Motor Winding 617 you can set the temperature value above which a warning message is output or an error switch off of the frequency inverter is effected The value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is evaluated if the analog signal of a temperature sen sor is connected to multifunction input 2 and one of the following settings is selected for parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 21 23 KTY 31 33 PT1000 Description Min Max Fact sett Max Temp Motor Winding 200 C 150 C Output signals Warnings are displayed in parameter Warnings 269 and output via digital signals 168 10 2 Motortempera __ ture warning 17 The monitoring function selected via Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 signals a thermal overload or reaching of the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 1 For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs 3 For monitoring via parameter Create Warning Mask 536 7 4 6 1 Technical demands on measuring resistors PTC resistor Multifunction input 2 terminal X12 4 is designed for connection of a PTC resistor with the following specifications Rated response temperature 90 C to 160 C in steps of 10 K Temperature characteristic according to DIN 44081 KTY84 measuring resistor Multifunction
294. g 356 error environment show the warnings i independent from the created Warning mask Parameter Controller Status 275 and Controller Status 355 error environment show the Controller Status independent from the created Warning mask 7 6 5 9 Warming mask application 626 Create Warning Mask Application The Warning mask Application signals via a digital signal if an afore configured warning applies The configuration of the Warning mask Application is carried out via Create Appl Warning Mask 626 Depending on the application any number of warnings can be configured This enables internal and or external control using a common output signal The display of Warning Application 273 is not affected by the Warning mask The configured warning mask is not changed 2 Activate all warnings a reports stated are linked in the warning 10 Warning V belt Operation Mode 581 for V belt monitoring signals no load operation of the application The time remaining until service of DC link or fan has 16 Warning Service expired 17 Warning User 1 esis set on digital input User Warning 1 1363 is 18 Warning User 2 set on digital input User Warning 2 1364 is 102 Deactivate all warnings All warnings are deactivated 110 Deactivate warning V belt Warning 10 is deactivated 116 Deactivate warning service Warning 16 is deactivated 117 Deactivate warning User 1 Warning 17 is deactivated 118 Deactivate warning User 2 Warning 18 i
295. g display shows the reference frequency 350 H value and the message STOP y i The selection Poti F is only available if the parameter Local Remote 412 was set like described above 57 Operator panel 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning Poti P variable percentage reference value The function Poti P is applicable for operation with variable percentage values in example this is used with the technology controller and the direct torque control Select one of the following settings for parameter Local Remote 412 3 Control via keypad 4 Control via keypad or contacts factory setting e Select 5 Keypad motor potentiometer for parameter Reference percentage source 1 476 or Reference percentage source 2 494 e Switch on enable signals at digital inputs STOA terminal X11 3 and STOB terminal X13 3 e Select LolAl via arrow keys Confirm by pressing ENT e Select Pot F via arrow keys Confirm by pressing ENT Start drive RUN The displayed reference value is the sum of Reference percentage source 1 476 and Reference percentage source 2 494 Operation 0 Off 0 2 mode 495 1 _ The reference value can be both positive and negative 2 Positive only 3 Inverted Set per O Increase percentage value centage value Decrease percentage value Press for a short time to change the frequency by increments of 0 1 Keep pressed to change the perc
296. ge Overload capacity 0 Functions Parameterization The frequency inverters Agile meet the requirements of the low voltage directive 2006 95 EEC and EN 61800 5 1 For compliance with standard 2004 108 EC comply with installation instructions in this document The frequency inverters Agile meet the requirements of EN 61800 3 for use in industrial environments Devices that are marked with the UL proof label fulfill the requirements according to UL508c Operation 0 55 C as from 40 C power reduction should be considered Operation 3K3 EN60721 3 3 maximum relative humidity 85 no water condensation IP20 if covers and connection terminals are used properly Up to 1000 m at rated specifications Up to 3000 m at reduced power Storage according to EN 50178 BONFIGLIOLI recommends that the unit be connected to mains voltage for 60 minutes after one year at the latest Continuous operation 100 Iyn Up to 150 I for 60 s Up to 200 I for 1 s Overload capacity can be used every 10 minutes Control methods adjusted to motors and application configuration Adjustable speed torque control Various protection functions for motor and frequency inverter Positioning relative to a reference point Flying Start function S ramps for jerk limitation during acceleration and deceleration PID controller technology controller Parameterizable Master Slave operation via system bus
297. gile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli The time remaining until service has expired See chap ter 10 3 1 DC link Output signal of a PLC function Signal source 2401 PLC output buffer 1 is the output signal The assign Eon eure 2 ment is performed via parameter PLC target output 1 1350 or PLC target output 2 1351 Output signal of a PLC function Signal source 2402 PLC output buffer 2 is the output signal In a table PLC Output Buffer 2 function the assignment is performed via parameter PLC target output 1 1350 or PLC target output 2 1351 Output signal of a PLC function Signal source 2403 PLC output buffer 3 is the output signal In a table Warning service DC link PLC Output Buffer 3 function the assignment is performed via parameter PLC target output 1 1350 or PLC target output 2 1351 Output signal of a PLC function Signal source 2404 PLC output buffer 4 is the output signal In a table function the assignment is performed via parameter PLC target output 1 1350 or PLC target output 2 1351 PLC Output Buffer 4 Obj 0x3003 DigOut 1 to g4 Obj 0x3003 DigOut 5 100 to 194 Operation modes inverted LOW active Sources of CAN objects 7 6 5 1 Digital message Signals output via a digital output can be linked to a function of the frequency inverter The signals selected for the following parameters can be linked to functions Operation mode
298. gital signals 179 Mains failure Failure of mains voltage and mains support selected via Operation Mode 13 Mains failure 670 of the voltage controller 1 For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs Mains voltage Power failure Off t 675 Shutdown Threshold 676 Reference Shutdown Value The DC link voltage which is available in the case of a power failure is supplied by the motor The output frequency is continuously reduced and the motor with its rotating masses is switched over to generator operation The reduction of the output frequency is done with a maximum of the current set by the parameter Gen Ref Current Limit 683 or the ramp Mains Support Deceleration 673 Mains Support Deceleration 673 is only active if the Actual frequency is smaller than Shutdown Threshold 675 The time required until the motor has come to a standstill results from the regenerative energy of the system which results in an increase in the DC link voltage The DC link voltage set with the parameter Reference Shutdown Value 676 is used by the voltage controller as a control figure and kept con stant The voltage rise enables optimization of the braking behavior and the time until the drive has come to a standstill The behavior of the controller can be compared to stopping behavio
299. har Multi Motor 1i Op Warning stored IU Sw Off stored K Char Multi Motor Op Warning stored 111 K Char Single 122 Motor Warning stored Char Sing Motor Err Please check chapter 7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by I2t monitoring Please check chapter 7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by I t monitoring In each of the four data sets the rated values are monitored Over loading the drive is prevented by the fault switch off F0401 The internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable These settings are to be used for short time mains shut downs The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the active data set Overloading the drive is prevented by the fault switch off F0401 The internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable These settings are to be used for short time mains shut downs In each of the four data sets the rated values are monitored Over loading the drive mechanism is signaled by a warning message A0200 The internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable These settings are to be used for short time mains shut downs The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the active data set Overloading the drive mechanism is signaled by a warning message A0200 The internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable These settings are to be used for short time mains shut downs K
300. haracteristic according to the configured functions Description Min Max Fact sett Minimum Reference Percentage 300 00 0 00 Maximum Reference Percentage 300 00 100 00 178 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 560 Tolerance Band The analog input characteristic with change of sign of the reference value can be adapted by the pa rameter Tolerance Band 560 of the application The adjustable tolerance band extends the zero pas sage of the speed relative to the analog control signal The parameter value percent is relative to the maximum current or voltage signal No Description Min Max Fact sett Tolerance Band 0 00 25 00 2 00 X2 Y2 X2 Y2 Pos maximum value Pos maximum value ov 0 mA 10 V ov 20ma 0 mA lt 10 V zero point 20 mA tolerance band X1 Y1 X1 Y1 o Y1 o Y1 Neg maximum value Neg maximum value Without tolerance band With tolerance band The default Minimum Frequency 418 or Minimum Reference Percentage 518 extends the parameter ized tolerance band to the hysteresis X2 Y2 pos MAXIMUM valie Rei eer ree ti ttt ti ta pos minimum value Ape 10V 20 mA neg minimum value zero point tolerance band X1 Y1 neg maximum value AOAO OEE EPET A TOTT Tolerance band with set maximum frequency For example the output variable
301. havior should be optimized by setting parameter Voltage constant 383 The auto setup during the guided commissioning setup identifies the voltage constant of the syn chronous motor If a value gt 0 mV was entered before manually the voltage constant will not be determined during auto setup The entered value is maintained For the voltage constant refer to the motor data sheet In the motor data sheet the value may be V indicated in T This value can be taken over for Parameter Voltage constant 383 1000 min Description Mi Max Fact sett No n i 6500 0 mVmin If the guided commissioning Setup is not carried out the auto setup should be carried out via pa rameter SETUP selection 796 in order to improve the drive behavior particularly for small speeds Select one of the settings 10 14 for SETUP selection 796 During the guided commissioning via keypad and VPlus for Bonfiglioli motors the voltage constant is pre allocated For Non Bonfiglioli motors the voltage constant should be entered if it is known If the voltage con stant is unknown set Voltage constant 383 to 0 mV before the commissioning to ensure the auto matic calculation and measurement The voltage constant should be optimized after the guided commissioning procedure In no load op eration set 50 of the rated speed Change the voltage constant in small steps until parameter Rotor flux 225 displays the value 101 0 5 In the case of m
302. he D controller responds to announced changes and causes a fast control behavior The D controller can stabilize the control circuit and reduce vibra tion On the other hand errors e g interference voltages are amplified In order to use the output value of the PID controller as the reference frequency setting 30 Tech nology Controller must be selected for Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 If the technology controller is selected as the reference frequency source the settings of the PID controller are activated 221 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile So Bonfi gli oli Parameter descriptions The behavior of the PID controller is set with Proportional part Amplification 444 Integral part Integral Time 445 Differential part Derivative Time 446 PID desired set value Reference percentage channel Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 _ Amplification 444 Backlash 618 Selection Source of Minimum value PID desired set value Actual value lt gt Reference Percentage P 478 Value 229 lt 0 50 gt 0 50 PID real value m re Fixed Frequency 1 480 Reale ee Max F 441 Actual Percentage Source 478 Operation Mode Component Actual Value Actual value Failure 440 Actual Percentage Value 230 Derivative Time 446
303. he electrolyte capacitors is measured by a sensor so that high ambi ent temperatures are taken into account for service interval calculation 1534 Operation Mode Service I nterval DC link Via parameter Operation Mode Service Interval DC link 1534 you can set how the warning is to occur when the remaining service interval until service has expired The information can be indicated in a parameter or a service message can be output The service interval remaining until service is monitored The re maining service interval in percent can be indicated via parameter Service Interval DC link 1530 No service info or message is out put The service interval remaining until service is monitored The re Service Parameter maining service interval in percent can be indicated via parameter 1 Message Service Interval DC link 1530 As soon as the remaining time until service has expired parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show the message M0001 Service DC Link Factory setting The service interval remaining until service is monitored The re maining service interval in percent can be indicated via parameter Service Interval DC link 1530 As soon as the time remaining until service has expired Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show the message M0001 Service DC Link A warning message will be output and a warning signal will be set The warning will also be displayed on the operator panel 0 No Action 2 Alarm Mes
304. he fans will be switched to full power when a critical temperature threshold is reached To protect the device a device fault is triggered when reaching an internal switching off temperature threshold The fans will be switched off again as soon as the heat sink temperature has dropped below the Switch On Temperature 39 by 5 C and the internal temperatures dropped 5 C below their first switch on thresholds No Description Min Max Fact sett Switch On Temperature 0 C Further fan control setting options Operation mode 43 external fan for digital outputs additionally enables the control of an external fan Via the digital output the external fan is switched on as soon as the Switch On Temperature 39 for the internal fans was reached See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs Via parameter Standby Mode 1511 you can set that the internal fans are switched off if enable is switched off See chapter 8 3 Standby mode 7 10 3 Standby mode and energy saving function Refer to chapter 8 Energy saving 241 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions 7 10 4 Brake chopper and brake resistor 506 Trigger Threshold The frequency inverters feature a brake chopper transistor The external brake resistor is connected to terminals Rb1 and Rb2 The parameter Trigger Threshold 506 defines the switch on threshold of the brake chopper The generator output of the drive wh
305. he modification speed of the reference speed value as from which a torque necessary for acceleration of the drive is pre controlled The acceleration of the mass is a function of the Mech Time Constant 727 of the system The value calculated from the increase of the reference value and the multiplication factor of the torque required is added to the output sig nal of the speed controller Description X Fact sett ca Heh CAA 1 0 Hz s Mech Time Constant 60000 ms For optimal setting the acceleration pre control is switched on and the mechanical time constant is set to the minimum value The output value of the speed controller is compared to the minimum ac celeration time during the acceleration processes The frequency ramp is to be set to the highest val ue occurring in operation at which the output figure of the speed controller is not yet limited Set the value of Minimum Acceleration 726 to half the set acceleration ramp In this way it is ensured that the acceleration pre control becomes active During several acceleration attempts increase the Mech Time Constant 727 until the output value signal source 37 acceleration pre control output during the acceleration roughly corresponds to the torque forming current I signal source 141 In the case of drives with a high friction or other high resistance torque deduct the corresponding portion from the torque forming current I before This setting should also minimize ov
306. hernet communication manual i e Profinet VABus TCP Modbus TCP 1 For maintenance work contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 342 Actual values Menu Actual Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli 15 2 Parameters Menu PARA No Description Unit _ Setting range 0 Serial Number Characters 71 Optional Modules Characters CM VABus Baud Rate Selection CM CAN 49 Handshake Traverse Function 62 DY o w IN 63 Frequency Motorpoti Down ixed Frequency Change Over 67 Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 Start Clockwise Start Anticlockwise Data Set Change Over 1 m 2 Data Set Change Over 7 6 6 11 a Pee EES ree 72 PercentMotorpoti Up Selection 7 5 3 3 2 aed pos aed 68 Start Clockwise 69 Start Anticlockwise Z0 Data Set Change Over4 Z1 Data Set Change Over2 72 V ercent Motorpoti Down 7 5 3 3 2 Z5 Fixed Percent Change Over 1 7 6 6 6 76 Fixed Percent Change Over 2 7 6 6 6 81 JOG Stat i O 7 5 1 6 95 Brake Chopper Release _ Selection 7 6 6 3 _103 Error Acknowledgment Selection 7 6 6 8 Source Master Reference Selection 754 Fixed Frequency Change Over 3 selecion Hr n T Control Change Over Selection ss 7 6 6 10 183 External Error Selection 7 66 15 Thermal contact for P570 Selection 7 6 6 9 343 Parameters Menu PARA 06
307. his the parameters Amplification 700 and Parameter Integral Time 701 are available The proportional and integration and component of the current con trollers can be switched off by setting the parameters to zero Description Min Max Fact sett mpeation 0 00 amp 10 00 ms 10 00 ms The guided commissioning has selected the parameters of the current controller in such a way that they can be used without having to be changed in most applications If in exceptional cases an optimization of the behavior of the current controllers is to be done the reference value jump during the flux formation phase can be used for this The reference value of the flux forming current components leaps to the figure Current during Flux Formation 781 with suitable parameterization and then changes controlled to the magnetizing current after the expiry of the Max Flux Formation Time 780 The operating point necessary for the adjustment demands the setting of parameter Minimum Frequency 418 as the drive is accelerated after magnetizing The measurement of the jump reply which is defined by the ratio of the currents mentioned should be done in the mo tor supply line by means of a measuring current transformer of a sufficient bandwidth The internally calculated actual value for the flux forming current component cannot be output via the analog output for this measurement as the time resolution of the measurement is not sufficient To set the
308. ical control variables and various calculated actual values of the machine or system The different actual values can be read out for operational and error diagnosis via a communication interface or in the Actual menu of the operator panel 9 1 Actual values of frequency inverter No Description Function 222 DCHink voltage Direct voltage in DC link 223 Modulation Output voltage of the frequency inverter relative to the mains voltage 100 Urin 228 Internal Reference Fre Total of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference fre quency quency source 2 492 Total of Reference percentage source 1 476 and Reference 229 Reference percentage percentage source 2 494 as reference value of the reference percentage channel 230 Actual percentage value Actual value signal at the Actual percentage source 478 Status of digital inputs in decimally encoded form of enable signal STOA AND STOB of the six digital inputs of multifunction input 1 in setting Operation mode MFTI 452 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP ac tive 24 V 243 Digital Inputs Hardware of multifunction input 2 in setting Operation mode MFI2 562 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP ac tive 24 V of digital input output in setting Operation mode terminal X11 6 558 0 input IN3D Represents the status of the physical inputs also refer to actual value Digital inputs 250 244 Working ho
309. ically to the speed e g control of a fan the pow er consumption can be reduced and energy can be saved In the low speed range where the full torque is not required energy is saved Setting the quadratic V f characteristic is possible if the following control method is selected for pa rameter Configuration 30 110 IM sensor less control V f characteristic 606 Type V f characteristic Via parameter Type V f characteristic 606 you can switch the characteristic from linear to quadratic Linear V f characteristic U f Factory setting 1 Linear See chapter 7 7 V f characteristic Quadratic V f characteristic U f 259 Quadratic V f characteristic 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile eR Bonfiglioli Energy saving The quadratic characteristic follows the function U f P6014 P6007 P602 P604 f Hz P418 frn P419 fpa After switching over to the quadratic characteristic the characteristic is defined by the following pa rameters Starting Voltage 600 Voltage Rise 601 Rise Frequency 602 Cut Off Voltage 603 Cut Off Frequency 604 The parameters must be adjusted to the application Additionally check the settings for Starting Cur rent 623 and Frequency Limit 624 The parameters are described in chapters 7 7 V f characteristic and 7 3 2 Starting behavior The working range is between Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 8 3 Standby mode Standby
310. ich leads to the increase in the DC link volt age is converted to heat by the external brake resistor above the limit set via parameter Trigger Threshold 506 No 506 Trigger Threshold Min Max 1000 0 V 325 0 V 1000 0 V 780 0 V Set parameter Trigger Threshold 506 such that it is between the maximum DC link voltage which the mains can generate and the maximum admissible DC link voltage of the frequency inverter Umains 1 1 v2 lt Udgc lt Udmax If the parameter Trigger Threshold 506 is set larger than the maximum admissible DC link voltage the brake chopper cannot become active the brake chopper is switched off If the parameter Trigger Threshold 506 is set to a value below the DC link voltage generated by the mains error message FO705 chapter 13 1 1 Error messages is displayed if the start command is issued to the frequency inverter If the DC link voltage exceeds the maximum value of DC 800 V error message F0700 see chapter 13 1 1 Error messages will be signaled The sampling time of the function is 62 5 us The brake chopper remains on for at least 62 5 us after the set trigger threshold was exceeded even if the value drops below the trigger threshold within this period again Ug Trigger Threshold 506 Brake chopper OFF t 62 5 us Release or disable brake chopper Via the signal assigned to parameter Brake Chopper Release 95 the brake chopper can be released
311. igital outputs 338 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Warning status and warning status application Parameter list vw Bonfiglioli 15 Parameter list The parameter list is structured according to the menu branches of the control software The parame ters are listed in ascending numerical order A headline shaded can appear several times i e a sub ject area may be listed at different places in the table The parameter is available in the four data sets Vv The parameter value is set by the SETUP routine R The parameter cannot be written when the frequency inverter is in operation Ten Urm Prin Nominal values of frequency inverter o lt Overload capacity of frequency inverter 15 1 Actual values Menu Actual No Description Unit Display range Chapter VABus SST Error Register 0 15 210 Stator Frequency Hz 0 00 999 99 9 2 211 rms Current A 0 0 Imax 9 2 212 Output Voltage V 0 0 Urn 9 2 213 Active Power kW 0 0 Pmax 9 2 214 Active Current A 0 0 Imax 9 2 215 Isd A 0 0 Imax 9 2 216 Isq A 0 0 Imax 9 2 221 Slip Frequency Hz 0 0 999 99 9 2 222 DC Link Voltage V 0 0 Ugmax 25 9 1 223 Modulation 0 100 9 1 224 Torque Nm 9999 9 9 2 225 Rotor Flux 0 0 100 0 9 2 226 Winding Temperature deg C 0 999 9 2 227 Act Rotor Time Constant ms 0 Tmax
312. ile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli With the parameters Analog Voltage 100 551 and Analog Voltage 0 552 the voltage range at 100 and 0 of the output parameter is set If the output value exceeds the reference value the output voltage also exceeds the value of the parameter Analog Voltage 100 551 up to the maxi mum value of 22 V or the maximum value of an external voltage supply NOTE If Operation Mode MFO X13 6 550 Analog PWM MFO1A and parameter s Ana log Voltage 100 551 lt Analog Voltage 0 552 then the smaller voltage value of Analog Voltage 100 551 is put out 553 Analog Source MFO1A If the multifunction output is to be used as analog output parameter Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 550 must be set to 10 Analog PWM MFO1A For parameter Analog Source MFOIA 553 the analog actual value to be output at the multifunction output can be selected Operation mode MFO1 10 Analog PWM MFO1A X13 6 550 Analog Source MFOIA 553 7 Abs Actual Frequency Select an analog signal source 10 Analog PWM MFO1A 0 Off Analog mode at the multifunction output is switched off Abs value of the stator frequency 0 00 Hz Maximum Fre 1 Abs Fs quency 419 2 Abs Fs betw fmin fmax Abs value of the stator frequency Minimum Frequency 418 a i Frequency 419 7 Abs Actual Frequency 7 Abs Actual Frequency APS sonora ep eal 0 00 Hz Maxim
313. in Error acknowledgement 103 8 4 Further energy saving options DC link connection By DC link connection of several frequency inverters energy can be saved as the energy recovered when one motor is decelerated can be used for accelerating the other drive In this case the accelera tion energy does not have to be taken from mains supply If the deceleration energy from a motor is not used for accelerating the other motor it will be used for covering the consumption of the coupled frequency inverters Energy optimized braking The voltage controller can be set up such that the kinetic energy recovered during deceleration opera tions is not converted to heat in a brake resistor The brake ramp will be adjusted automatically such that the DC link voltage does not exceed a certain value The motor is decelerated in an energy saving way The consumption of the frequency inverter is covered by the deceleration energy of the drive so that no energy is taken from mains supply The voltage controller is described in chapter 7 9 2 Voltage controller PI D controller technology controller saving energy when the reference value is reached The PID controller technology controller can switch off the motor when the reference value PID desired set value is reached Saving energy is possible particularly in the case of asynchronous mo tors as these motors consume the magnetizing current even when they are at a standstill The func tion can b
314. in the warning 10 Activate Warning Ixt The frequency inverter is overloaded Ixt Ixt 405 has been reached Ixt Ixt 406 has been reached temperature sink temp 407 reached perature temp 408 reached ence value 16 Activate Warning Init Frequency inverter is being initialized 17 Activate Warning Motor Warning behavior according to parameterized Operation Temperature Mode Motor Temp 570 at maximum motor temperature Tprc Activate Warning Mains Fail ure Activate Warning Motor Pro tective Switch 18 Phase Supervision 576 reports a phase failure 19 Operation Mode 571 for motor circuit breaker triggered 20 Activate Warning Fmax ea os 419 was exceeded The frequency The input signal at analog input MFI1A is less than 1 V 2 mA 1 oe analog in accordance with operation mode p Error Warning Behaviour 453 f The input signal at analog input MFI2A is less than 1 V 2 mA 2 Penre iaai analog in accordance with operation mode p Error Warning Behaviour 563 23 Activate Warnings system A slave on the system bus signals an error bus 24 Activate Warning Udc The DC link voltage has reached the type dependent mini mum value 25 Activate Application Warning A warning application is signaled 30 Activate Warning Controller Controller is active according to Operation Mode 670 Udc Dynamic Operation 31 Activate Warning Controller The output frequency in the case of a power failure is below Shutdown the Shutdo
315. inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 7 6 6 7 Jog Start 81 J OG Start The selected signal source starts the JOG function The drive accelerates to the rotary frequency set via parameter JOG Frequency 489 JOG Start 81 7 Off 7 6 6 8 Error Acknowledgment 103 Error Acknowledgement The frequency inverters feature various monitoring functions which can be adapted via the error and warning behavior Switching the frequency inverter off at the various operating points should be avoided by an application related parameterization If there is a fault switch off this report can be given via the parameter Program ming 34 or the logic signal can be acknowledged with parameter Error Acknowledgment 103 Error Acknowledgment 103 75 IN5D Possibilities of error acknowledgement Via the Stop key of the operator panel A reset via the STOP key can only be executed if Parameter Local Remote 412 allows the control via keypad via parameter Program ming 34 via parameter Error Acknowledgement 103 which is assigned a logic signal or a digital input A reset via a digital input can only be executed if Parameter Local Remote 412 allows that control or if a physical input with the suffix Hardware is selected When using a Fieldbus and control via Statemachine Setting the reset bit in the Controlword Re fer to the Communication manuals for details 7 6
316. inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile ey B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Scaling The analog input signal is mapped to the freely configurable characteristic The maximum admissible setting range of the drive can be set via the frequency limits or percentage limits In the case of the parameterization of a bipolar characteristic the set minimum and maximum limits for both directions of rotation are effective The percentage values of the characteristic points are relative to the limits selected Description X Fact sett Minimum Frequency 0 7 Hz sae D Hz 3 50 Hz Maximum Frequency 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 50 00 Hz The control system uses the maximum value of the output frequency which is calculated from the Maximum Frequency 419 and the compensated slip of the drive mechanism The frequency limits define the speed range of the drive and the percentage values supplement the scaling of the analog input characteristic in accordance with the functions configured Description Min Max Fact sett Minimum Reference Percentage 300 00 0 00 Maximum Reference Percentage i 300 00 100 00 450 Tolerance Band The analog input characteristic with change of sign of the reference value can be adapted by the pa rameter Tolerance Band 450 of the application The adjustable tolerance band extends the zero pas sage of the speed relative to the analog control signal The parameter value percent is relative to
317. ins input side On request With booktype filter FTVO16A With booktype filter FTVO16A and line choke 10 A upstream on mains input side Interference suppression class Ag e size 3 AGL 202 19 5 5 kW AGL 202 21 7 5 kW Installation measure Agile 3 AGL202 19 5 5 kW Without EMC input filter without line choke AGL202 21 7 5 kW Without EMC input filter with line choke 15 A or 25 A Class C3 With footprint filter FT VO03B AGL Class C1 With footprint filter FTVOO3B AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on Class C1 mains input side With booktype filter FTVO16A Class C1 With booktype filter FTVO16A and line choke 15 A upstream on mains Class C1 input side 305 Input filter 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli 12 5 3 3 AC 1x230 V Interference suppression class Agi e size 1 Installation measure Options Agile 1 Without EMC input filter without line choke Class C3 Without EMC input filter with line choke With footprint filter FS28364 8 07 With footprint filter FS28364 8 07 and line choke upstream on mains input side With booktype filter FTVO007A With booktype filter FTV007A and line choke upstream on mains input side On request Interference suppression class Agi e size 2 Installation measure Agile 2 Without EMC input filter without line choke Class C3 Without EMC input filter with line choke With footprint filt
318. inverter is an IP 20 protection class device For this reason use of the device in explo sive atmospheres is not permitted 15 Designated use 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile F Bonfiglioli General safety instructions and information on use 2 4 Residual risks Residual risks are special hazards involved in handling of the frequency inverter which cannot be elim inated despite the safety compliant design of the device Residual risks are not obviously identifiable and can be a potential source of injury or health hazard Typical residual hazards include Electrical hazard Danger of contact with energized components due to a defect opened covers or enclosures or im proper working on electrical equipment Danger of contact with energized components inside of the frequency inverter if no external discon nection device was installed by the operator Electrostatic charging Touching electronic components bears the risk of electrostatic discharges Thermal hazards Risk of accidents by hot machine plant surfaces e g heat sink transformer fuse or sine filter Charged capacitors in DC link The DC link may have dangerous voltage levels even up to three minutes after shutdown Danger of equipment falling down over e g during transport Center of gravity is not the middle of the electric cabinet modules 2 5 Safety and warning signs at frequency inverter e Comply with all safety instructions and danger information provided on
319. iometer Control via digital inputs or operator panel vw Bonfiglioli Save the reference value P474 0 Not Latching 1 Latching Define reference value via motor potentiometer P475 Reference frequency source 1 0 Zero 4 Motorpot via Digital Inputs 5 Keypad Motorpot or P492 Reference frequency source 2 0 Zero 4 Motorpot via Digital Inputs 5 Keypad Motorpot Motor potentiometer via digital inputs P62 7 Off P63 71 IN1D 72 IN2D 73 IN3D 74 IN4D 75 IN5D 76 MFIID 77 MFI2D Other signal sources Select digital inputs for P62 and P63 P62 IN D Increase reference value P63 IN D Reduce reference value Keypad motor potentiometer A Increase reference value YV Reduce reference value The last reference value set via the motor potentiometer is saved After shut down and restart the drive will be accelerated to this value P473 Ramp for Motor potentiometer 2 00 Hz s limited to values from P420 to P423 Factory setting f Hz P4194 P473 P473 P418 4d a P62 t S JIND 1 m y P63 S JIND 4 mn P475 5 P475_4 P492 P492 85 After first commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning Fixed Frequencies Factory setting P480 Fixed Frequency 1 0 00 Hz P481 Fixed Frequency 2 10 00 Hz P482 Fixed Frequency 3 25 00 Hz P483 Fixed Frequency 4 50 00 Hz P485 Fixed Frequency 5 5 00 Hz P486 Fixed Frequ
320. ion of the parameterized data of the system 9 3 1 Actual system value The drive can be monitored via the actual value Actual system value 242 See chapter 7 10 9 System data No Description Function Actual System Value Calculated actual value of drive 9 4 Actual value memory The assessment of the operating behavior and the service of the frequency inverter in the application are facilitated by storing various actual values The actual value memory guarantees monitoring of the individual variables for a definable period The parameters of the actual value memory can be read out via a communication interface and displayed via the operator panel In addition the operator panel enables monitoring of the peak and mean values in the Actual menu branch No Description Function 231 Peak Value Long Term Ixt Utilization of the device dependent overload of 60 seconds 232 Peak Value Short Term Ixt Utilization of the device dependent overload of 1 second 287 Peak Value Vdc The maximum DC link voltage measured 288 Average Value Vdc mean DC link voltage calculated in the period of observa 289 Peak Value Heat Sink Temp es ics measured heat sink temperature of the frequency 290 The mean heat sink temperature calculated in the period of Temp observation 391 The maximum measured inside temperature in the frequency ture inverter 392 The mean inside temperature calculated in the pe riod of ob perature servatio
321. ior must be selected For state P68 and P69 logic 0 a stopping behavior must be selected 1 Nominal value of frequency inverter 89 After first commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Commissioning V f characteristic Factory setting if P30 110 IM sensorless control 606 Type V f characteristic 1 Linear Linear characteristic 2 Quadratic For applications where the torque increases quadratically to the speed Suitable for energy saving 600 Starting Voltage 5 0 V Linear Output voltage at output frequency of 0 Hz U V 601 Voltage Rise 10 Increase of output voltage deviating from line ar characteristic P601 602 Rise Frequency 20 Increase of output voltage deviating from line P600 ar characteristic 603 Cut Off Voltage 230 0 or 400 0 V P602 p604 f Hz Coordinate for setting of V f characteristic P418 fan P419 frox 604 Cut Off Frequency 50 Hz Quadratic Coordinate for setting of V f characteristic U V P602 P604 f Hz P418 f P419 fa The working range is between P418 minimum frequency 3 50 Hz and P419 maxi mum frequency 50 Hz Motor temperature monitoring Evaluate thermo contact at MFI1 X12 4 570 1 Thermo contact P204 Warning only 2 Thermo contact P204 Error Switch Off 3 Thermo contact P204 Error Switch Off 1 minute delayed Further evaluations PTC KTY PT1000 90 Operating Instructions Agile 06
322. ir number it can occur that the Voltage constant cannot i be entered in the valid value range up to 6500 00 mVmin In this case you can enter the value with factor 10 smaller In the device the ratio input voltage rated speed is validated and the factor 10 is corrected automatically if necessary Comply with chapter 7 2 2 Further motor parameters 6 2 10 4 Insufficient Torque during Start of FOC and SYNCH In the sensorless control the motor rotation is controlled below the Frequency limit 624 via a current impression with Starting current 623 Both parameters are set up during the Autotuning Frequency limit 624 is set to approx 5 of the Rated frequency The value can be reduced in most applica tions Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to set up the Frequency limit 624 always gt 2 5 of the rated frequency and at least 1 Hz Check your changes via the Scope function Starting current 623 affects the Torque during the Start If the Torque during the Start should be increased increase Starting current 623 motor thermally and eventually even destruct the motor Always check the thermal sta A Please note that a continous operation with a high Starting current can overload the bility of the motor after increasing the Starting current Comply with chapter 7 3 2 Starting behavior 6 2 10 5 Cross coupling compensation Using permanent excited synchronous motors can require a cross coupling compensation in individual c
323. is entered the search is in On according to a positive direction clockwise field of rotation with a negative reference reference value the search is in a negative direction anti clockwise field of rotation During operation of a synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 the flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill Synchronization to the drive is only done in positive direction clockwise On clockwise field of rotation only During operation of a synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 the flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill Synchronization to the drive is only done in negative direction anticlock On anticlockwise wise field of rotation only During operation of a synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 the flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill For a synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 only the flux direction is determined The drive must be at a standstill Synchronization to a turn ing drive is not possible This method is faster than operation modes 1 4 For a synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 only the Flying Start is performed The search is continued until a rotary frequency is detected which is greater than the Frequency limit 624 If the stator frequency drops below the frequency limit the search run is continued This operation mode can be used for synchronous motors in torque cont
324. is propor tional to the voltage at MFI1 Fixed Frequen Set P475 or P492 to 3 Keypad motorpoti 7 5 1 cies In P480 P488 set frequency values 7 5 1 3 For P66 P67 P131 select digital inputs 7 6 6 5 Select a frequency value via these digital inputs Digital signals Set P475 or P492 to 4 Motorpoti via digital inputs 7 5 1 For P473 set an acceleration value 7 5 3 3 1 For P62 Motorpoti up and P63 Motorpoti down select digital 7 6 6 4 inputs Signals at the chosen digital inputs increase the output frequency motor speed Communication The reference frequency is transmitted via a bus system Protocol interface Set P475 or P492 to 20 Fieldbus Reference Value 1 For simple applications e g fans pumps In the case of control via operator panel Select UF 2 Control of an induction machine asynchronous motor For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy In the case of control via operator panel Select Foc 3 Control of a synchronous motor For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy In the case of control via operator panel Select Synch Instructions on relevant protocol Typical functions 91 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Acceleration and deceleration Commissioning Factory setting Chapter Accelerate Can be set separately for clockwise and anticlockwise operation 7 5 1 4 cl
325. is switched off the display of the operator panel the internal fans 1 Stepi Keypad fan Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off 11 Step1 Power unit the display of the operator panel the internal fans the power unit 1 This setting is independent of the setting of parameter Time until Keypad Standby 1510 2 The internal fans will continue to run for a sufficiently long time and will be switched off then 261 Standby mode 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Xo Bonfiglioli Energy saving Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off the display of the operator panel the internal fans the digital and analog inputs and outputs the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13 4 Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off Step1 Communication the display of the operator panel the internal fans anoptional communication module Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off the display of the operator panel Step1 Power Unit 1 O the internal fans the power unit the digital and analog inputs and outputs the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13 4 Standby mode is switched on The following functions are switched off if enable is switched off Step1 Power Unit
326. ital input for connection of a motor thermal contact Alternatively you can select the operation mode for an analog voltage or current signal The current signal is continuously monitored and the fault message F1407 displayed if the maximum figure is exceeded 5 Current 4 20 mA Current signal MFI2A 4 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic 7 6 2 1 Multifunction input set as analog input MFI 2A The Multifunction input can be evaluated either as analogue or digital signal In the following the evaluation for analogue signals is described 7 6 2 1 1 Voltage input and current input For parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562 1 Voltage 0 10 V 2 Current 0 20 mA or 5 Cur rent 4 20 mA must be selected 1 Voltage 0 10 V Voltage signal MFI2A 0 V 10 V Fixed characteristic 2 Current 0 20 mA Current signal MFI2A 0 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic 5 Current 4 20 mA Current signal MFI2A 4 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic 175 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage Voltage 0 10 V Parameter Operation Mode MFII 452 is set to 1 Voltage 0 10 V The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 9 8 V and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or paramete
327. ited Maximum Frequency 419 lt 100 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 20 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 gt 100 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 x 1 2 Traverse function with Setting Reference Frequency 48 0 Ramp output Traverse function Traverse function Operation mode 435 Traverse function Reference frequency 48 Frequency ramp Internal Frequency flim Reference t fmax D Summed Frequenc ez reference val T eference value 252 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 10 9 System data For monitoring the application process parameters are calculated from electrical control parameters 389 Factor Actual System Value 1543 Base Parameter Actual System Value Actual values e g actual frequency torque can be scaled The drive can be monitored via the actual value Actual System Value 242 The actual value to be monitored and scaled must be selected For parameter Base Parameter Actual System Value 1543 the number of the actual value parameter must be set The value of the actual value parameter is multiplied by the Factor Actual System Value 389 and can be read out via param eter Actual System Value 242 Actual System Value 242 actual value from parameter 1543 x Factor Actual System Value 389 No Description Min Max Fact sett 389 Factor Actual System Value 100 000 100 000 1 000 No Description Min Max Fact s
328. ition frequency output 329 Error environment 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile REJ Bonfiglioli Error protocol No Description Function Decimally encoded status of the enable signal STOA AND STOB ofthe six digital inputs and 350 Status of digital inputs of multifunction input 1 if Operation mode MFI 452 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP active 24 V and of multifunction input 2 if Operation mode MFI2 562 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP active 24 V Decimally encoded status of digital output at terminal X12 5 of multifunction output at terminal X13 6 if Operation mode 351 Status of digital outputs MFO X13 6 550 1 Digital MFO1D of digital input output at terminal X11 6 if Operation mode ter minal X11 6 558 1 output OUT3D of relay output at terminal X10 Time of the error in hours h minutes m and seconds s after 352 Time since release enable signal hhhhh mmiss 10 100 100 353 Heat sink temperature Measured heat sink temperature 354 Inside temperature Measured inside temperature 355 Controller status The reference value signal is limited by the controller coded in the controller status 356 The warning messages coded in warning status 357 Software service parameter 358 lInt value2 Software service parameter 359 Software service parameter 360 Software servi
329. k 2 10 3 Transport and Storage The frequency inverters must be transported and stored in an appropriate way During transport and storage the devices must remain in their original packaging The units may only be stored in dry rooms which are protected against dust and moisture and are exposed to little temperature deviations only The requirements of DIN EN 60721 3 1 for storage DIN EN 60721 3 2 for transport and labeling on the packaging must be met The duration of storage without connection to the permissible nominal voltage may not exceed one year 2 10 4 Handling and installation Do not commission any damaged or destroyed components Prevent any mechanical overloading of the frequency inverter Do not bend any components and never change the isolation distances Do not touch any electronic construction elements and contacts The frequency inverter is equipped with components which are sensitive to electrostatic energy and can be damaged if handled improperly Any use of damaged or destroyed components will endanger the ma chine plant safety and shall be considered as a non compliance with the applicable standards Only install the frequency inverter in a suitable operating environment The frequency inverter is exclusively designed for installation in industrial environments If seals are removed from the case this can result in the warranty becoming null and void 2 10 5 Electrical connections The five safety rules must be co
330. k the dimensioning of the DC 24 V sup ply that supplies the STO inputs The STO diagnosis software was not able to detect a clear defined STO level Check the wiring and STO triggering device Ensure that clear signal levels can be received DC 0 V DC 24 V If the fault persists check if the fault persists with another drive The STO diagnosis software has recognized that the STO signal levels of the device 08 don t correlate to each other at different measurement points Check the wiring put the screens on correctly If the fault persists exchange the device The STO diagnosis software recognized that an STO signal is too high inside the de vice Check the wiring apply a clear defined signal level OV 24 V If the fault per sists exchange the device 00 Earth fault on output check motor and wiring 10 Minimum current monitoring check motor and wiring No actual value for technology controller Missing actual value was reported according to setting for Operation mode actual value failure 440 Temperature measurement with KTY measuring resistor defective Check signal and measuring resistor External error drive responded according to parameter setting for Operation mode ext 54 error 535 Error was triggered via the logic signal or digital input signal assigned to parameter External error 183 F20 10 Communication error according to parameter X21 VABus Watchdog Timer 1502 11
331. l according to V f characteristic not suita ble Mechanical brake High load torques in the case of field orientated control DMC High load torques in the case of sensor less con trol V f characteristic PID controller The reference value is defined via an external source The motor cables are too long vw Bonfiglioli Reduce load Reduce acceleration and deceleration values Check rated current Use larger motor Check connection of thermal contact or measuring resistance at MFI2 Check setting of P570 temperature evaluation Check setting of P617 for KTY or PT1000 Comply with permissible ambient conditions Ensure sufficient cooling Carry out setup For an asynchronous motor switch to control accord ing to V f characteristic set P30 to 110 Switch off Flying Start if possible not recommended for synchronous motors Use P 645 20 if possible Reduce load torque Reduce acceleration values Use larger motor Check P418 Maximum frequency Check acceleration and deceleration values Set P475 and P492 to the appropriate reference fre quency source For definition of reference value via multifunction input For P452 terminal X12 3 and P562 terminal X12 4 select the correct signal to set the reference value 1 voltage or 2 current Check values for P420 acceleration clockwise and P422 acceleration anticlockwise Carry out setup For high torques at low speed fiel
332. l input output I N3D OUT3D Q Mo XB3 r 6 X2 ray x X11 gt 1N2HZK4M OIE 5 558 Operation mode terminal X11 6 digital input output Terminal X11 6 can be set as a digital input or digital output In the factory setting terminal X11 6 can be used as input for dataset changeover 0 Input IN3D The digital input output is set as digital input Factory setting 1 Output OUT3D The digital input output is set as digital output 559 Digital inputs PNP NPN If the digital input output terminal X11 6 is set as digital input the evaluation can be selected as PNP high switching or NPN low switching via parameter Digital inputs PNP NPN 559 Parameter Operation Mode Terminal X11 6 558 must be set to 0 Input IN3D 0 NPN active 0 V Digital input NPN Low switching with negative signal 1 PNP active 24 V Digital input PNP High switching with positive signal Factory setting The parameter also effect the NPN PNP evaluation change over of IN1D IN2D IN4D and IN5D The digital input IN3D can control functions of the frequency inverter via signal 73 IN3D In the factory setting digital input IN3D has the function Dataset changeover 1 if Operation Mode Termi nal X11 6 558 is set to 0 input IN3D Data Set Change Over 1 70 73 IN3D input signal at digital input IN3D The signal selected via parameter Operation Mode OUT3D X11 6 533 is output at the digital in put output te
333. l lt P738 721 and Integral Time 1 fl lt P738 722 are considered with the default parameter Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 If parameter Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 is set to a value greater than 0 00 Hz parameters Amplification 1 fl lt P738 721 Integral Time 1 fl lt P738 722 will be active below this limit and parameters Amplification 2 fi gt P738 723 Integral Time 2 fl gt P738 724 will be active above this limit The parameterized amplification at the current operating point can additionally be assessed via the parameter Backlash Damping 748 depending on the control deviation In particular the small signal behavior in applications with a gearbox can be improved by a value higher than zero percent 233 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions No Description Min Max Fact sett 721 Amplification 1 f lt P738 0 00 200 00 722 Integral Time 1 f lt P738 0 ms 60000 ms 723 Amplification 2 f gt P738 0 00 200 00 724 Integral Time 2 f gt P738 60000 ms 738 Speed Control Switch Over Limit 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 55 00 Hz 748 Backlash Damping 0 300 100 The optimization of the speed controller can be done with the help of a reference value leap The amount of the leap is defined by the set ramp or limitation The optimization of the PI controller should be done at the maximum admissible reference figure change rate
334. late in kW j uoLt P out SPEEd Foc Freq ANPErE coSPh Entry of PoLPrS number of pole pairs in control method SYnch Enter the other rated motor values similarly A current Ampere speed cosine phi poles frequency 0 25 kW tunE Automatic measurement of further motor data CALC Select if the data of a BONFIGLIOLI motor has been entered Presetting of further motor data is loaded tun n9 Measuring Wait until EAdY or Acc is displayed Switch on gt Auto tuning rERd if otor Enable has been selected BONFIGLIOLI motor Enter similarly 500 JEC Ace Acceleration ramp clockwise Default 5 Hz s Acceleration 5 00 Hz s Deceleration dEC Deceleration ramp clockwise Default 5 Hz s clockwise 499 clockwise FrEWLo Minimum frequency Default 3 50 Hz FrE9H Maximum frequency for speed limitation Default 50 00 Hz SEO Message only if signal is missing Set enable signals at X11 3 and X13 3 SAQO Warning SFOQ Error message Auto tuning completed an Minimum 3 50 Hz Maximum frequency 349 H frequency Enter similarly Gok JED eA Olea Setup completed and Drive enabled Optional initialization further Penis settings _ Note The overview shows the sequence for an asynchronous motor When commissioning synchronous servo motors the motor type BCR BTD Other has to be se lected additionally and the order of the entry of the motor pa
335. lioli 7 6 6 1 List of control signals e Select the function that is to be controlled For example Start drive in anticlockwise operation e Select the control signal for the parameter of the function For example select 74 IN4D for parameter Start Anticlockwise 69 In this case the drive starts anticlockwise operation if a signal applies on digital input IN4D enable signal must also be set Signal input is switched on Signal input is switched off Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA 70 Inverter Release X11 3 and STOB X13 3 Or enable signal in remote mode via communication interface Signal at digital input IN1D X11 4 Or signal in remote mode 71 IN1ID erties via communication interface Signal at digital input IN2D X11 5 Or signal in remote mode 72 IN2D ER via communication interface Signal at digital input IN3D digital input output X11 6 in Op 73 IN3D eration Mode Terminal X11 6 558 0 input IN3D Or signal in remote mode via communication interface Signal at digital input IN4D X12 1 Or signal in remote mode 74 IN4D ination i via communication interface Signal at digital input IN5D X12 2 Or signal in remote mode 75 IN5D i ie via communication interface Signal at multifunction input MFI1 X12 3 in Operation mode MFI 452 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP ac 76 MFI1D ii err tive 24 V Or signal in remote mode vi
336. log signal at multifunction input 2 terminal X12 4 Via pa rameter Operation mode MFI2 562 the input must be set up as an analog input voltage or current See chapter 7 6 2 Multifunction input MFI2 Percentage signal at digital input IN2D Evaluation can be se 32 Rep Percentage Input lected via parameter Operation mode IN2D 496 See chapter 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency input Value of parameter Actual Percentage RAM 529 Actual Per 40 Actual Percentage RAM centage RAM 529 can be set via Fieldbus but is not visible in VPlus or the keypad 704 RxPDO1 Word 1 Process data from system bus Refer to system bus instructions 705 RxPDO1 Word 2 Process data from system bus Refer to system bus instructions 2521 Puopua Parenage 1 lane turton te rear See apalet 2521 PLC Output Percentage 1 table function is the PID real value source See application manual PLC Output value of a PLC function Percentage output 2 of the 2522 PLC Output Percentage 2 table function is the PID real value source See application manual PLC 1 Analog Input MFI1A 2 Analog Input MFI2A 223 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions Inputs for reference percentage source PID Technology controller Actual Percentage Source 478 Analog input Voltage current Analog MFI1 X12 3 Digital j I j I I Operation Mode MFII 452 Analog in
337. ls in factory settings VDC out E Operating Instructions Agile Voltage output 24 VDC out F 1 5 mm max 2 5 mm 46 06 2013 Control terminals Standard connection Electrical Installation Bonfiglioli Vectron 5 7 3 Further setting options for control terminals Relay output X10 1 f X10 2 Status signal function ae P533 103 Inv Error Signal signal Tun Digital inputs O g x10 3 Le OUT2D C J P559 0 NPN active 0 V CT Digital output Function PNP active 24 V O P531 103 Run Signal Status signal function C JIN1D X11 4 PC 71 IN1D X13 5 9 OUT1D Function i j IN2D X11 5 P _ 72 IN2D or Multi function output P496 0 Off Low Status signal function 10 PWM IN2D 0 100 P554 4 Setting frequency X13 6 0 MFO1 pee 11 PWW IN2D 100 100 TSEEqIg orF ajig 20 Repetition frequency ra f single evaluation 1 Digital Ha P553 7 Abs Actual frequency 21 Repetition frequency 10 Analog O L_ a cue een 20 Repetition P555 1 Actual frequency Functi
338. ltage motor shaft power Frame size N Musee 202 230 V utput 0 Uinput 0 1kKHz 3ph USTED 63 KA Ogata Rat aie x 402 400 V E2048 Integrated Filter IP2 eo eae aoe Piper temp ah soled 40 C i mi La Part number amp Serial number quipmen Item Code iii ii PART No imi 0 0 iil A l i 2074 Warning Electrostatic sensitive components sera NO MINDI ona 4S j Warning High leakage current AA A A A Waming High leakag Warning Dangerous voltage Risk of electric shock A A 1 Labeling for Functional Safety if applicable Please check the Application manual Functional Safety 2 Labeling for UL508c if applicable Warning Hot surfaces Recommended motor shaft power at specified power supply Specifier Frame size AGL 402 AC 3x400 V AGL 202 AC 3x230 V AGL 202 AC 1x230 V 01 1 E 0 18 kW 0 09 kW 02 1 0 25 kW 0 25 kW 0 12 kW 03 1 0 37 kW 0 37 kW 0 18 kW 05 1 1 0 55 kW 0 55 kW 0 25 kw 07 1 0 75 kw 0 75 kw 0 37 kw 09 1 1 1 kW 1 1 kw 0 55 kW 11 1 1 5 kW 1 5 kW 0 75 kW 13 1 2 2 kW 2 2 kW 1 1 kw 15 2 3 0 kW 3 0 kW 1 5 kW 18 2 2 4 0 kw 4 0 kw 2 2 kW 19 2 5 5 kW asd 193 5 5 kW 5 5 kW 3 0 kW 21 3 3 7 5 kW 7 5 kW 3 0 kW 22 3 9 2 kW 23 3 11 0 kw Inverter type and warning signs on the device 23 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli 3 2 Type designation AGL40
339. mal properties of the external heat sink The heat in the frequency inverter due to the energy dissipation of the electronic components rectifi er and IGBT must be dissipated to a heat sink via the cold plate of the frequency inverter The capacity to dissipate this heat mainly depends on the size of the heat sink surface the ambient temperature and the heat transmission resistance An increase of the heat transmission rate can only be realized to a certain extent by increasing the surface of the heat sink An additional increase of the heat dissipation by increasing the heat sink is not possible The frequency inverter must be mounted with the cold plate on an external heat sink with the lowest thermal resistance possible Thermal resistance The thermal resistance Rin is calculated from the difference between the maximum heat sink tempera ture and the ambient temperature referred to the energy dissipation of the frequency inverter The ambient temperature to be considered refers to the immediate environment of the frequency inverter Rin Thmax Ta Pa Max permissible heat sink temperature of the frequency inverter Th max 75 C Ambient temperature of the heat sink Ta 35 C Difference between the maximum heat sink temperature and the ambi AT 40K ent temperature Th mac Ta Energy to be dissipated by the heat sink Pa device specific 314 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants
340. mined within 100 ms to 300 ms For higher frequencies a wrong fre quency is determined and the synchronization fails In operation modes 1 to 4 the Flying Start cannot determine whether a synchronization attempt has failed For operation of a synchronous motor the flux direction can be determined in order to prevent align ment of the motor shaft jerking during start up Determining the flux direction takes approx 20 ms In this process there are short torque pulses This method is not suitable for very dynamic drives since the torque pulses result in a rotation of the drive and consequently in wrong measurements Once the flux direction was determined the flux is formed Parameter Minimum flux formation time 779 Maximum flux formation time 780 Current during flux formation 781 in order to improve the starting behavior 129 Operational Behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 7 Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 0 off The synchronization to a rotating drive is de activated Factory setting An attempt is made to synchronize to the drive in positive direction clock wise field of rotation and in negative direction anticlockwise field of rota tion During operation of a synchronous motor Configuration 30 610 the flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill The search direction is defined by the sign of the reference value If a posi tive reference value clockwise field of rotation
341. mmissioning SA If an error or a warning is signaled during commissioning the following causes are possible Code Message Meaning _ _ _ _ _ The value of the parameter Rated Voltage 370 is out of the rated voltage SA001 Rated voltage range of the frequency inverter The maximum reference voltage is indicat ed on the nameplate of the frequency inverter SA002 Efficienc For an asynchronous motor the calculated efficiency is in the limit range y Check Rated Voltage 370 Rated Current 371 and Rated Power 376 68 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 First commissioning Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli The value entered for parameter Rated Cosine Phi 374 is outside of the ids ol deca cel ae normal range 0 6 to 0 95 Correct the value For an asynchronous motor the calculated slip is in the limit range Check cy Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency 375 Stator re The following causes are possible The motor cable cross section is not SA021 sistance high sufficient The motor cable is too long The motor cable is connected incor value rectly Rotor re The following causes are possible The motor cable cross section is not SA022 sistance high sufficient The motor cable is too long The motor cable is connected incor value rectly Rated Slip SA041 Correction Check Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency 375 Factor low value Rated Slip Correction Factor high value The motor data for star co
342. model In the course of the guided commissioning setup the parameter identification is carried out to measure the further motor parameters The values of the following parameters will not be measured by the frequency inverter during the guided commissioning setup Changing the measured values is normally not required Configuration 30 110 Configuration 30 410 Asynchronous motor Asynchronous motor Stator resistance 377 Rated voltage correction factor 368 Leakage coefficient 378 Stator resistance 377 Leakage coefficient 378 Rated magnetising current 716 Rated slip correction factor 718 Configuration 30 610 Synchronous motor Stator resistance 1190 Voltage constant 383 if no input before Stator inductance 384 377 Stator resistance asynchronous motor 1190 Stator resistance synchronous motor The resistance of the stator winding is measured during the guided commissioning The measured value is saved as a phase value in parameter Stator resistance 377 and is 3 times smaller than the winding resistance in delta connection By default the stator resistance of a standard motor is entered to match the reference output of the frequency inverter 114 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Machine data Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Description 65535 MQ 1190 0 0019 100 0009 10 0002 In settings 110 and 410 of parameter Configuration 30 2 In setting 610 of parameter Configuration 30
343. motor after a start com mand Parameter Status Device Test 1541 indicates the status of the device test and messages generated during the test The device test will possibly start some time after the frequency inverter is switched on because the test must not be carried out with the motor magnetized 7 2 3 6 Fan test The function of the interior fan and heat sink fan is tested Dependent on the type of the frequency inverter fans are possibly not installed refer to chapter 11 2 Device data The device test can be started via the operator panel e Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB e Select menu item Test in Local menu e Select Test 3 e Press ENT button to start Test 3 The interior fan and heat sink fan must rotate Press ESC button to finish the test EESe_3 GD E u GO Eest e a Loch EESE If STO is displayed if the fan test is to be started enable must be switched on at inputs STOA and STOB Check for unusual operating noise and remove any soiling and dust if necessary If a fan does not rotate contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI 121 Machine data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile X Xo Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions 7 3 Operational Behavior The operational behavior of the frequency inverter can be adjusted to the application by setting the parameters appropriately In particular the acceleration and deceleration behavior can be selected according to the sel
344. motor circuit breakers are commercially available for various applications with different trigger characteristics L G U R and K as shown in the diagram below As frequency inverters in most cases are used for supplying motors which are classified as operating equipment with very high starting currents only the K characteristic was realized in this function akim 7 i D Z K 7 K 17 K Tii 152 3 5 10 30 x nominal current 245 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Parameter descriptions GD Bonfiglioli Unlike the operation of a conventional motor circuit breaker which disconnects the equipment to be protected immediately if the trigger threshold is reached this function provides the possibility of issu ing a warning instead of disconnecting the equipment immediately The rated current of the motor circuit breaker refers to the rated motor current stated via parameter Rated Current 371 of the corresponding data set The rated values of the frequency inverter are to be considered accordingly when it comes to dimen sioning the application The function of the motor circuit breaker can be linked to different data sets In this way it is possible to operate different motors via one frequency inverter Thus each motor can be equipped with its own motor circuit breaker In case a motor is operated via the frequency inverter for which some setting values e g minimum and maximum frequency a
345. mplied with Never touch live terminals The DC link may have dangerous voltage levels even up to three minutes after shutdown When performing any work on with the frequency inverter always comply with the applicable national and international regulations laws on work on electrical equipment plants of the country when the frequency inverter is used The cables connected to the frequency inverters may not be subjected to high voltage insulation tests unless appropriate circuitry measures are taken before Only connect the frequency inverter to suitable supply mains 20 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Organizational measures General safety instructions and information on use vw Bonfiglioli 2 10 5 1 The five safety rules When working on in electrical plants always follow the five safety rules 1 2 3 4 5 2 Isolate Secure to prevent restarting Check isolation Earth and short circuit Cover or shield neighboring live parts 10 6 Safe operation During operation of the frequency inverter always comply with the applicable national and inter national regulations laws on work on electrical equipment plants Before commissioning and the start of the operation make sure to fix all covers and check the terminals Check the additional monitoring and protective devices according to the applicable na tional and international safety directives During operation never open the machine plant Do not connect discon
346. must be selected 7 Of No signal for switch on of the energy saving function Factory setting J1 INID The signal at digital input IN1D terminal X11 4 switches on the energy saving function The signal at digital input IN2D terminal X11 5 switches on the energy 72 IN2D i saving function The signal at digital input IN3D terminal X11 6 switches on the energy 73 IN3D saving function For Operation Mode Terminal X11 6 558 0 Input IN3D must be selected The signal at digital input IN4D terminal X12 1 switches on the energy 74 IN4D d saving function The signal at digital input IN5D terminal X12 2 switches on the energy 75 IN5D i f saving function The signal at multifunction input 1 terminal X12 3 switches on the en 76 MFI1D ergy saving function For Operation Mode MFI 452 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PNP active 24 V must be selected The signal at multifunction input 1 terminal X12 3 switches on the en 77 MFI2D ergy saving function For Operation Mode MFII 562 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PNP active 24 V must be selected Pa ee ee ee 163 Reference Fre The energy saving function is switched on if the frequency is reached quency reached 164 Setting Frequen The energy saving function is switched on if the value of Setting Fre cy quency 510 is reached 8 2 Quadratic V f characteristic For applications where the torque increases quadrat
347. n 113 Machine data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile COO B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Urin Nominal Frequency inverter voltage usually 400 V or 230 V Ian Nominal Frequency inverter output current Prin Nominal Frequency inverter power Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter In the case of asynchronous machines the speed can be increased at a constant torque if the motor winding can be switched over from star to delta connection The changeover leads to a modification of the dependent rated figures by a square root of three NOTE The rated data of the motor are to be entered according to the specifications on the rating plate for the motor connection type used star or delta connection If the data entered deviate from the rating plate the parameters will not be identified correctly Parameterize the rated data according to the rating plate of the motor for the wiring of the motor winding Consider the increased rated current of the connected asynchronous motor Input via operator panel The motor ratings must be entered when the Setup menu is selected on the operator panel The motor ratings can be entered in menu Para for parameters 370 376 7 2 2 Further motor parameters In particular the field orientated control requires the determination of further data which cannot be read off the rating plate of the asynchronous or synchronous motor for the precise calculation of the machine
348. n 293 Peak Value Tabs oo abs current calculated from the measured motor 294 Average Value Iabs The mean abs current calculated in the period of observation 268 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Actual values of the system Actual values vw Bonfiglioli No Description Function The mean capacitor temperature calculated in the period of observation The calculated energy to the motor in motor operation 302 Energy negative The calculated energy from the motor in generator operation The actual values can be read out and monitored in the Actual menu of the operator panel 237 Reset Memory Parameter Reset Memory 237 in menu Para of the operator panel enables resetting of the mean and peak values The mean value and the peak value are reset to zero 0 No Reset 3 1 4 Sees Sapacior Reset Peak Value Capacitor Temp 298 35 P Value Capacitor Reset Average Value Capacitor Temp 299 4 269 Actual value memory 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Xo Bonfiglioli Actual values 9 5 Actual values of the CAN system bus No Description Function System bus state indication Node State Refer to system bus instructions System bus state indication CANSState Refer to system bus instructions 9 6 Actual values CANopen Description Function No Status indication of CANopen communication L200 NOGe stale Refer to CANopen instructions Status indication of CANo
349. n Stop and Reset commands from the keypad keys are ignored The Start and Stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are Control via Remote an ae Contacts controlled via logic signals through the communication protocol Run Stop and Reset commands from the keypad keys are ignored 3 Control via Keypad The start and stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are YP entered via the operator panel 4 Control via Keypad or The start and stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are Cont entered via the operator panel or via digital inputs Factory setting 5 Control 3 Wire Control of direction of rotation parameters Start Clockwise 68 Start Anticlockwise 69 and signal Start 3 wire control 87 via digital inputs If the operation mode is changed while the drive is running the drive will not be A stopped if no stop command is present in the new operation mode In order to be able to control the drive the output stage must be enabled by digital inputs STOA and STOB Signals via physical contacts IN1D IN5D MFI1 MFI2 are only evaluated if an oper ation mode with Control via Contact or Control 3 Wire 0 4 or 5 is selected In all other operation modes 1 2 3 physical contacts are only evaluated if the cor responding signals in the digital inputs with the suffix Hardware are selected Please comply with chapter 7 6 6 Digital inputs Signals not referring to a physical in
350. n 0 00 650 00 650 00 Anticlockwise Clockwise operation M operation a Torque Limit 730 generator motor motor generator p Torque Limit Generator Operation 731 Torque Limit Generator Operation 731 Torque Limit 730 2 a ena x a fe x Speed is limited by Maximum Frequency 419 732 P Comp Torque Upper Limit 733 P Comp Torque Lower Limit The output value of the P component of the torque controller is limited by parameter P Comp Torque Upper Limit 732 and P Comp Torque Lower Limit 733 The limit values are input as torque limits as a percentage of the rated motor torque No Description Min Max Fact sett P Comp Torque Upper Limit 0 00 650 00 650 00 P Comp Torque Lower Limit 0 00 650 00 650 00 739 Power Limit 740 Power Limit Generator Operation The power output by the motor is proportional to the product of speed and torque This output power can be limited at the speed controller output with Power Limit 739 and Power Limit Generator Op eration 740 The power limits are entered in kW No Description Min Max Fact sett 0 00 kW Power Limit Generator Operation 0 00 kw Prin Nominal Frequency inverter power Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter 235 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile EJ B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 9 5 3 2 Limit value sources 734 I sq Limit Source Motor Operation 735 I sq Limit Source Generat
351. n Mode 630 for the stopping behavior The drive is stopped according to stopping behavior 2 If the set holding time has expired an error message is issued The drive can be started again by switching the start signal on and off Operation mode 3 defines the free coasting of the drive as described in stopping behavior 0 regard less of the setting of parameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior Attention A The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error Warning Behaviour 453 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 454 Example Error Warning Behaviour 453 2 Shutdown lt 1V 2mA or 3 Error Switch Off lt 1V 2mA In the factory settings of the parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 454 shutting down or error switch off are affected at an output frequency 0 Hz If shutting down or error switch off are to be effected at an output frequency of 0 Hz the Point X1 must be adjusted e g X1 10 1 V Y ONE PAE ETE E X1 2 Y1 0 02V iv 98v X 7 6 1 2 Multifunction input set as digital input MFI 1D Multifunction input MFI1 terminal X12 3 can be configured as a digital input Via parameter Opera tion Mode MFII 452 the evaluation can be selected as PNP high switching or NPN low switching The multifunction input set as digital input can be linked to the functions of the frequency inverter Signal 76 MFI1D must be assigned a function Digital signal M
352. nal frequency range 0 Maximum Frequency 419 at the pulse train input The conversion is done using the following for mula Frequency value Maximum Frequency 419 Percentage value x 100 210 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 6 7 4 Further setting options An offset can be set via the reference frequency channel or via the function of the electronic gear For example you can set in the reference frequency channel Reference Frequency Source 1 475 10 Repetition Frequency and Reference Frequency Source 2 492 3 Fixed Frequency Via the fixed frequencies parameters 480 488 you can set the required offset A filter can be set via PLC function see application manual PLC 7 7 V f characteristic 606 Type V f characteristic Via parameter Type V f Characteristic 606 you can set the characteristic to linear or quadratic Linear V f characteristic U f Factory setting Quadratic V f characteristic U f For applications where the torque in creases quadratically to the speed Suitable for energy saving 2 Quadratic See chapter 8 2 Quadratic V f characteristic Too small set values of the V f characteristic affect the dynamic behavior of the drive 7 8 Linear V f characteristic 600 Starting Voltage 601 Voltage Rise 602 Rise Frequency 603 Cut Off Voltage 604 Cut Off Frequency The sensorless control in con
353. nal is not available if parameter Local Remote 412 is set to 2 Control via Remote Contacts Operation mode 70 inverted LOW active 70 Inverter Release 270 Inverter Release inverted 525 Inverter Re Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA X11 3 lease Hardware and STOB X13 3 Inverter Re 537 lease Hardware Operation mode 525 inverted LOW active inverted 9 2 Actual values of machine The frequency inverter controls the behavior of the machine in the various operating points Control parameters and actual values of the machine can be displayed Function 210 Stator Frequency The output voltage motor voltage of the fre quency inverter i Calculated effective output current motor current of the frequency inverter 212 Output Voltage Calculated effective value of linked output voltage motor voltage of frequency inverter 213 Active Power Active power calculated from the voltage the current and the control variables 214 Active Current Active current calculated from the rated motor parameters the con trol variables and the current Current component of the field orientated control forming the mag 215 Isd netic flux Torque forming current component of field orientated control 221 Slip Frequency Difference from the synchronous frequency calculated from the rated motor parameters the control variables and the current Torque at the current
354. nal status on digital input STOA for enable 285 STOB inverted Inverted signal status on digital input STOB for enable 292 STOA Signal status on digital input STOA for enable 170 Warning Overtemperature 264 Warning service DC link 265 Warning service fan 293 STOB Signal status on digital input STOB for enable 323 Power is on oe if mains voltage is switched on and pre charging is fin Parameter Operation mode energy saving function 1550 is set 471 Energy saving function is to 1 manual or 2 automatic The digital input or logic sig active nal selected for parameter Energy saving function on 1552 has switched on the energy saving function 198 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions Inverter Re IN1D Hardware IN2D Hardware IN3D Hardware IN4D Hardware IN5D Hardware MFI1D Hardware MFI2D Hardware 537 to 544 640 Out PZD3 Boolean 655 Out PZD18 Boolean vw Bonfiglioli X11 3 and STOB X13 3 Signal at digital input IN3D digital input output X11 6 in Op eration Mode Terminal X11 6 558 0 Input IN3D Signal at digital input INSD X12 2 Signal at multifunction input MFI1 X12 3 in Operation Mode MFI 452 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PNP active 24 V Signal at multifunction input MFI2 X12 in Operation Mode MFI 562 3 Digital NPN active 0 V or 4 Digital PN
355. nce Modulation 750 the field forming current component and thus the flux in the machine are reduced In order to make the best possible use of the voltage available the figure selected via parameter Op eration Mode 753 is put into proportion to the DC link voltage That means that with a high mains voltage there is also a high output voltage available the drive only reaches the field weakening area later and produces a higher torque 0 Usa control The modulation is calculated from the ratio of torque forming voltage q component U to the DC link voltage The modulation is calculated from the abs voltage value DC link volt 1 U abs value control f age ratio Factory setting The integrating part of the modulation controller is to be set via parameter Integral Time 752 238 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Description Min X Fact sett Reference Modulator 3 00 Tc aie 102 00 1000 0 ms The percentage setting of the Reference Modulation 750 is basically a function of the leakage induc tivity of the machine The default value was selected such that in most cases the remaining deviation of 5 is sufficient as a reserve range for the current controller For the optimization of the controller parameters the drive is accelerated with a flat ramp into the area of field weakening so that the modulation controller intervenes The limit is set via parameter R
356. nch V T0223 Earth fault Phase W Earth fault cutoff during impression of pos current in branch W T0224 U earth fault Earth fault cutoff during impression of negative current in branch U T0225 V earth fault Earth fault cutoff during impression of negative current in branch V T0226 W earth fault Earth fault cutoff during impression of negative current in branch W T0231 U Soft earth fault The DC link voltage has increased Insulation problem in motor T0232 V Soft earth fault The DC link voltage has increased Insulation problem in motor T0233 W Soft earth fault The DC link voltage has increased Insulation problem in motor T0234 U Soft earth fault Phase U Insulation problem in motor T0235 V Soft earth fault Phase V Insulation problem in motor T0236 W Soft earth fault Phase W Insulation problem in motor T0260 Asymmetric phase voltages Err S41 Internal error Abort and restart the test If Test 2 signals an earth fault while Test 1 did not signal an earth fault a current measurement will probably be defective If Test 2 signals a short circuit there is either a short circuit in the load or a current measurement is defective 119 Machine data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 7 Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 2 3 3 Start device test via operator panel The device test can be started via the operator panel e Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB e Select menu item Test in Local menu
357. ncy inverter is switched off if the motor is thermally overloaded The error switch off is dis played by message F0400 The error switch off is delayed by one minute For parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 the digital input to which the thermal contact is connected must be selected In the factory setup multifunction input 2 can be used for connection of a thermal contact Thermal contact for P570 204 is set to MFI2D The input signal must be digital The evaluation NPN PNP of the input signal can be set via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562 Monitoring for temperature limit A thermal overload is displayed via the operator panel and parameter Warnings 269 Multifunction input 2 can be used as input for monitoring of a temperature value with motor PTC PTC as per DIN 44081 The input signal must be analog Monitoring for temperature limit The frequency inverter is switched off immediately if the motor is thermally overloaded The error switch off is displayed by message F0400 Multifunction input 2 can be used as input for monitoring of a temperature value with motor PTC PTC as per DIN 44081 The input signal must be analog Monitoring for temperature limit The frequency inverter is switched off if the motor is thermally overloaded The error switch off is dis played by message F0400 The error switch off is delayed by one minute Multifunction input 2 can be used as input for monitoring of a temperature value with motor PTC PTC a
358. nding on the load The slip compensation is deactivated Factory setting The load dependent slip speed is compensated The slip compensation is activated during the guided commissioning The Stator Resistance 377 is required to ensure a correct function and is measured during the guided commissioning If no guided commissioning is executed the slip compensation can be activated manually In these cases enter the value for the Stator Resistance 377 manually according to the motor data sheet For parameter Configuration 30 setting 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic must be selected 661 Amplification 662 Max Slip Ramp 663 Frequency Lower Limit The control behavior of the slip compensation can only be optimized via the parameters in the case of specific applications The parameter Amplification 661 determines the correction of the speed and the effect of the slip compensation proportionally to the change of load Parameter Max Slip Ramp 662 defines the maximum frequency change per second in order to avoid an overload in the case of a load change The parameter Frequency Lower Limit 663 determines the frequency as from which the slip compen sation becomes active No Description Min Max Fact sett Amplification 300 0 100 0 Max Slip Ramp 0 01 Hz s 650 00 Hz s 5 00 Hz s Frequency Lower Limit 0 01 Hz 999 99 Hz 0 01 Hz 227 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile ey B onfi gli
359. nect any components equipment during operation The machine plant holds high voltage levels during operation is equipped with rotating parts fan and has hot surfaces Any unauthorized removal of covers improper use wrong installation or operation may result in serious injuries or material damage Some components e g the heat sink or brake resistor may be hot even some time after the ma chine plant was shut down Don t touch any surfaces directly after shutdown Wear safety gloves where necessary The frequency inverter may hold dangerous voltage levels until the capacitor in the DC link is dis charged Wait for at least 3 minutes after shutdown before starting electrical or mechanical work on the frequency inverter Even after this waiting time make sure that the equipment is deener gized in accordance with the safety rules before starting the work In order to avoid accidents or damage only qualified staff and electricians may carry out the work such as installation commissioning or setup In the case of a defect of terminals and or cables immediately disconnect the frequency inverter from mains supply Persons not familiar with the operation of frequency inverters must not have access to the fre quency inverter Do not bypass nor decommission any protective facilities The frequency inverter may be connected to power supply every 60 s This must be considered when operating a mains contactor in jog operation mode For commissioning
360. nection Frequency inverter Recommend Rated cur Inductance Power dissipa ed line choke rent tion Typ Typ Agile 402 kW A mH W 02 1 0 25 03 1 0 37 05 1 0 55 07 1 0 75 LCVT004 4 7 32 20 09 1 1 1 11 1 1 5 13 1 2 2 LCVT006 6 4 88 25 152 3 0 LCVT008 8 3 66 30 18 2 4 0 LCVT010 10 2 93 30 192 5 5 LCVT015 15 1 95 45 193 5 5 LCVT015 15 1 95 45 213 7 5 LCVT018 18 1 63 70 22 3 9 2 LCVT025 25 1 17 70 23 3 11 LCVT034 34 0 86 85 298 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Options Line choke Options 12 4 4 Dimensions LCVS006 LCVSO18 Bonfiglioli Vectron Type Dimensions Assembly Weight Connection a b c n2 n d mm mm mm mm mm mm kg mm Nm PE LCvVs006 60 62 75 44 38 3 6 0 5 0 75 2 5_ 1 0 1 2 2 5 mm LCVS008 60 67 75 44 43 3 6 0 6 0 75 2 5_ 1 0 1 2 2 5 mm LCVS010 66 80 70 50 51 48 0 8 0 75 2 5 1 0 1 2 M4 LCVS015 78 78 80 56 49 48 1 1 0 75 4 0 1 5 1 8 M4 LCVS018 85 85 95 64 50 4 8 1 8 0 75 4 0 1 5 1 8 M4 LCVT004 LCVT025 LCVT034 C Swe Oo Oo Oo d BAS a m a L n p mh al la n A l a JL b L a JL b Type Dimensions Assembly Weight Connection a b C n2 ni d mm mm mm mm mm mm kg mm Nm PE LCVT004
361. nel is the reference value source with keys A for increasing the frequency and W for reducing 5 Keypad Motorpot the frequency Factory setting for Reference frequency source 2 492 See chapter 7 5 3 4 1 Control via reference frequency channel The frequency signal at digital input IN2D is the reference value source For parameter Operation mode IN2D 496 of the repetition frequency input 20 repetition frequency single evaluation or 21 repetition frequency double evaluation must be selected See chapter 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency input The reference value is transmitted via a bus system Profibus The value of PZD2 is used as reference value CANopen The value of object 0x6042 Target Velocity is used as reference value The output of the PID controller is the reference value source If this source is selected for Reference frequency 30 Technology Controller source 1 475 or Reference frequency source 2 492 the technology controller is switched on See chapter 7 9 3 PID controller technolog i The output of the electronic gear is the reference value source If this source is selected for Reference frequency 40 electr Gear source 1 475 or Reference frequency source 2 492 the electronic gear is switched on See chapter 7 5 4 Electronic B i Frequency output 1 of a PLC function block is the refer ADE EUS Ap Peen ence value source See application manual PLC 143 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile
362. nfiglioli Commissioning Closed loop fan control 2 On according to reference Operation 651 P68 il Operation mads K lt Operation mode 645 0 OFF oY mode P69 J f _ function 155 Plyi ri 1 ON o 4 r SK Flying start PERN t E Energy saving utpui N N H eR 1552 desired 4 frequency z function on 155 with signal 163 set valuet Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 Reference frequency reached Start _ clockwise Start anti clockwise Enable Amplification444 Max I component max PID desired Kiinid 2 Analog value MFI2A _ _ set value ag Reference percentage P 478 lt 0 5 min ma 0 source 476 Maximum gt 0 50 Z frequency 442 480 Fixed frequency Minimum PID real I 1 Analog value MFI1A k Acti al percentage ee l a n a Error signal who Run signal cteristi P449 P449 Frequency 1 hysteresis 449 U V Ist Blocking H frequency 447 Acceleration P447 fref internal clockwise 420 Min frequency se Max frequency 419 2 f Hz Type Vif characteristic 606 102 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Applications Commissioning cee Vectron 6 7 4 Fan for heating ventilation air conditioning system 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 50 Hz 420 Accelerati
363. ng Warning according to configured Operation mode motor Bae arning Mies Temperatike temp 570 and Max motor winding temp 617 11 Warning General The message is displayed via parameter Warnings 269 The selected limit values Warning limit heat sink temp 12 Warning Overtemperature 407 Warning limit inside temp 408 or the maximum motor temperature have been exceeded Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation ac 13 Mains Failure tive according to Operation Mode 670 for the voltage controller 14 Warning Motor Protect Switch Parameterized Operation Mode 571 for the motor cir cuit breaker triggered A controller or the Operation Mode 573 of the intelli 15 Warning Current Limitation gent current limits limit the output current See chapter 7 6 5 6 Current limitation The overload reserve for 60 s has been used up and the output current is being limited See chapter 7 6 5 6 Current limitation The overload reserve for 1 s has been used up and the output current is being limited See chapter 7 6 5 6 Current limitation Max heat sink temperature T reached intelligent cur 18 Controller Current Limit Tc rent limits of Operation Mode 573 active See chapter 7 6 5 6 Current limitation Maximum motor temperature reached intelligent cur 19 Controller Current Limit Motor Temp rent limits of Operation Mode 573 active See chapter 7 6 5 6 Current limitation 22 Warning V Belt Warning of Operation mode
364. ng 913 Output DeMux Bit 3 Error signal Receiver 925 Output DeMux Bit 15 Settings on transmitter e InVPlus start application VTable via the button bar e In VTable assign the required signal sources for sending to parameter Mux Inputs 1252 index 1 to index 16 A setting for index 0 results in this setting being taken over for all other indices e Assign signal source 927 Output MUX to a TxPDO process data parameter of the system bus or a PZDx IN process data parameter of Profibus Settings on receiver e Assign the corresponding RxPDO signal sources of the system bus or OUT PZD signal sources of Profibus to parameter DeMux Input 1253 The transmitted signals are available at the receiver as signal sources 910 to 925 7 6 7 Input PWM repetition frequency pulse train 496 Operation Mode I N2D PWM repetition frequency pulse train A PWM signal pulse width modulated signal frequency signal or a pulse train pulse sequence sig nal can be used for definition of a reference value The signal at digital input IN2D at terminal X11 5 is evaluated according to the selected Operation Mode IN2D 496 The PWM signal or repetition frequency is zero 0 Off Factory setting PWM signal detection at digital input IN2D at terminal X11 5 10 PWM 0 100 0 100 of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 or 0 100 of Maximum Frequency 419 See 7 6 7 1 PWM input PWM signal detection at digital input
365. ng Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Index A Acceleration RAMPpS eeeeeeeeeeeaes 147 Acceleration pre COntrol csssseesesseeeerees 235 Acknowledge error messages s s 202 AUTOMAT C sive sisvecsecesendieendeseitesvanceveeeds 142 via lt 9 ee 98 via logic signal eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 via Parameter 34 Program ming 113 Actual values MEMO eesti dieeeehee tiie ea et teceteieneiaes 269 of frequency inverter eeeeeeeeees 266 Of MACHING sivsessissssewevievvesdieestbeesiviesives 268 Of System sesceesssssseeeseeaeeeeeseaenenseaaens 269 Adaptor USB c scsssceeesssseeeessseeeseasaeeees 308 Analog INPUTS siss isani ninaa 84 Analog OUtpUtS ssssssssrsesssrrrrrrrnrrrenesrrnrnnns 84 Assembly Cold Plate Size Ternes ara a 322 aa E E E E T 322 SIZE e 323 DIN rail SZO Tianara 328 Feed through r E E A E E T 311 SZE Aona 312 r e E E E E 314 Standard T E T 28 SIZE E E TE esate 29 SO 3 aoaaa 30 Vibration proof SIZG 1 P E T 324 SIZE E E T TA 325 E E E A E 326 AUO SETUD i svceseitccsaiesagetsssevetsneeneenedatees 108 AUTO SCAN aisian anaa E 129 B Blocking frequencies 150 Blocking Frequencies ssssssssssseresesrrrrrrres 86 Brake Control via digital output seses 191 Direct current Drake cccsseeeeeesseeeeeees 131 Brake CHOPPel ccccsssseecessseeeesenseeeeseees 241 Relea Seinien anna 204 Brake r SiStOr ccccccccssseeeeeasseeeesssaeeeeseae
366. ng to parameter Rated Current 371 In setting Configuration 30 610 PMSM sensor less field orientated control DMC synchronous motor parameters Ref Isd Upper Limit 743 and Ref Isd Lower Limit 744 are set to 10 of the value of Rated Current 371 during guided commissioning setup No Description Min Max Fact sett Ref Isd Upper Limit 00 ede Im Ref Isd Lower Limit Im Im 00 Irn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter The limits of the field controller define not only the maximum current occurring but also the dynamic properties of the controller The upper and lower limits restrict the modification speed of the motor flux and the torque resulting from it In particular the speed area above the nominal frequency should be observed for the modification of the flux forming component The upper limit is to be estimated from the product of the set magnetizing current and the correction factor Flux Reference Value 717 although the limit must not exceed the overload current of the drive 7 9 5 6 Modulation controller 750 Reference Modulation 752 Integral Time 753 Operation Mode modulation controller The modulation controller which is designed as an I regulator automatically adapts the output value of the frequency inverter to the machine behavior in the basic speed area and in the field weakening area If the modulation exceeds the figure set with parameter Refere
367. nktion f MFI2 X12 4 Reference frequency values a Setting range ee ca oO P475 1 Analog value MFI2A eee sys A a D leE 1 Analog value MFI2AJD Minimum Frequency 418 Hz 3 Digital NPN active 0 v 0 P 77 MFI2D P492 1 Analog value MFIZAO Maximum Frequency 419 __ Hz 4 Digital PNP active 24 v _ PL_J 77 MFI2D Reference percentage values _ 5 Current 4 20 mA O P476 1 Analog value MF2A 0 6 Voltage Characteristic J P464 P567 OF s Minimum Reference Per entage 518 LT a 7 Current Characteristic characterisic points P494 T Analog value MFI2A Maximum Reference Percentage 519 Yo Error Warning behaviour P563 For output at MFO1 P550 2 Analog Actual analog value P253 P553 41 Absolute value analog input MFI2A Further possible usage of MFI1 and MFI2 PID controller technology controller Torque control P475 30 Technology controller O P164 6 On lt z Reference P476 1 Analog value MFI1A L1 P452 1 2 5 6 or 7 P492 30 Technology controller _ value 2 Analog value MFI2A C P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 PID 3 o or A reference R476 ieee cen esa o Poni at pe 7 P494 1 Analog value MFI1A L P452 1 2 5 6 or 7 value a ga 2 Analog value MFI2A C P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 P494 1 Analog value MFI1A L P452 1 2 5 6 or 7 Temperature monitoring via MFI2 2 Analog value MFI2A P562 1 2 5 6 or 7 lt PID P478 1 Analog value MFI1A L P452 1 2 5 6 or 7 P570 1 3 Thermal contact _ P562 3 or 4 P
368. nly the motor data are to be measured and other settings are not to be changed ENT Select data set 0 dSEt O Select another data set for commissioning of several motors or for different operating points ENT P30 Configuration control method cert ENT Using arrow keys select UF Foc SYnch 610 PMSM sensor less field orientated control 1 For simple applications e g fans pumps Control according to V f characteristic In the case of control via operator panel Select UF IM Induction machine asynchronous motor 2 Control of an induction machine asynchronous motor For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy In the case of control via operator panel Select Foc 65 First commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Parameter P371 P370 P376 P372 P373 P375 Please note If you changed the configuration the device resets Please execute the before mentioned steps anew BCR motor series of Bonfiglioli Vectron BTD motor series of Bonfiglioli Vectron Other synchronous servo motor Enter motor data according to the name plate Standstill Torque MO in Nm Set the value using the arrow keys Note Press the arrow keys for 1 s to set each figure individually Rated current in A If a BCR or BTD motor of Bonfiglioli Vectron was selected the follow ing data are preselected based on the standstill torque and the rated current If a BONFIGL
369. nnection were entered the motor however is sA051 Check motor connected in delta Change motor cable connections for star connection Check Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency 375 connection Check motor data entered for delta connection Repeat commissioning Setup via operator panel The machine data for delta connection were entered the motor however Check motor is connected in star Change motor cable connections for delta connection connection Check motor data entered for star connection Repeat commissioning Set up via operator panel SA053 bias MON Check connections at frequency inverter and motor connection If an error or a warning is signaled Press ESC to correct a parameter value after an error message or warning Press ENT to suppress a warning message Setup is continued It is recommended that the entered data be checked SA052 In the case of problems not triggering an error message you can try to find an appropriate measure following the instructions in chapter 13 3 Troubleshooting If errors or warning messages occur during operation proceed according to the instructions in chap ters 13 1 1 Error messages and 14 3 Warning status and warning status application 69 First commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x EJ Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 2 6 Error messages during commissioning SF If an error or a warning is signaled during commissioning the following causes
370. nnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn mnnn 257 8 2 Quadratic V f characteristic wiiicissccsccssssssesescsscescnessecnsecssnsseacsercesasssenssnnenneensensnncnnscs 259 8 3 Standby Mode cccccsseseeeeceeseeeeeneaseeseenaeeeeeeneaeeeeeeoaseeseeeenauseseeoeaseesenoaseesenoaseesennaaees 260 8 4 Further energy Saving Options ccccsssseeeeeseseeeeeneaseeseenngeeseeoeaseeseeeaseesenoeaeseesennanees 263 9 ACTUAL VALUES scscseccpesiceancsccanecassicsnadaasscauceussansesewanessneusienanasesssenatenssaadeusssucane 265 9 1 Actual values of frequency inverter s ssssss s1ns1 1155 1555 51 5 155 5 265 9 L1 STO StatuSecscccaccccntegiavsneravecdicentiescceevevcandiccedeaeageaceetbeseunusesdecendiboestevuayeeesevdecateceayes 267 9 2 Actual values of machine ccseseeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeeaseeseeeaseeseeeuaeeeeeeenegeeeeeneneeenes 267 9 3 Actual values of the System sssceeccsesseeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneaseeeeeeaeesenouaeeeeseenegeeeeenaasennes 268 9 3 1 Actual system vale siisii onua aaa i aaia 268 9 4 Actual value Memory s sssssssnnnnsnnnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn na 268 9 5 Actual values of the CAN system buUS ssssssssnnuunnnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn na 270 9 6 Actual values CANOpen cccccseseeeeeseeseuseeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneuseesennuseesenauoaseeseeueuseseenouseneas 270 9 7 Actual values Modbus and VABUS ceccseeseeeeenesee
371. noanasenees 98 6 7 Applications cececseseeeeeeeeseeeeennaeeueeeneseuseenaaeeseeneaseseseennaseuseooaseeseeneseseeuegeeessnoasennes 99 67 1 PUNMD i isieateeevoncideeds seienuey teas k elviae Aa N a E e aaa 99 O7 2 FAMo ea eE a E a N ck coves seu a EA ENN RS 100 6 7 3 Fan or pump with closed control lOOp s ssssssssrsesssrsrnrnrnsrnssunnnnnnnnnennnsnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnn nnne 101 6 7 4 Fan for heating ventilation air conditioning SyStem ssssssssrssrsesssrrnrnrnreresnsnnrnnnenes 103 6 7 5 CONVEYING DIANE sssrinin a Na N ieee 104 6 COMPS O ea nerina EE EEE A AE EA E S a EN 105 6 77 Travel APPIN CATIONS siisii nai ana aaia aAA aa ariii 106 6 7 8 TOQUE Contohna a TA Ea a aa aA 107 6 8 Set up via the Communication I nterface sssssssssennnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanna 108 7 PARAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 110 7 1 Inverter Data sssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 110 AF Control levelsssccsisatciieaen tise a a iene 110 72 Configuratio isma a a aaa 111 FAs Set passWord iscir aAA AA aKa ET ENAN NIANA 112 Zia PROGFANMIMING seirian a a a Aa aaa A AE Eaa 113 7 2 Machine Cata cccscccccsseseeeeceeseeueeneaseeseeneuseeeeneuseeeenoaseeseuenoasseseeneaseeseuoaseesenoseesenoaaees 113 7 2 1 Rated motor ParAMEtelS neers nee ee enna eeee RENEE ann 113 7 2 2 Further motor p
372. not touch the terminals because the capacitors may still be charged If voltage supply is switched on no covers of the frequency inverter may be removed After service all covers must be installed and the terminals must be checked The frequency inverter complies with protection class IP20 only if the covers are mount ed properly Avoid soiling during service work After service make sure that no foreign particles e g chips dust wires screws tools are inside the frequency inverter Do not touch electronic components or contacts The frequency inverter is equipped with components which are sensitive to electrostatic energy and can be damaged if handled improperly Only use original spare parts 10 2 Regular service work Cleaning instructions e Use dry oil free air to remove dust e Use appropriate air pressure for cleaning e Do not use solvents for cleaning circuit boards e Use antistatic materials for cleaning in order to avoid electrostatic charging 271 Safety 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Service BONFIGLIOLI recommends regular maintenance of the frequency inverter Service periods depend on the field of application and the ambient conditions Case and e Remove any soiling and dust Heat eink e Check screws for tight fit tighten if necessary e Check component for damage and replace if necessary Fan e Remove any soiling and dust e Check for unusual operating noise
373. ns Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 0 Off The switch off of the power stage is not influenced Factory setting If the control deviation lt Backlash 618 and at the same time the 1 Active Fixed Frequency 1 Actual Frequency lt Switch Off Threshold Stop Function 637 the power stage is switched off The Switch off behavior which is set up by the Stopping behavior Operation mode 630 is not changed by Backlash Motor Power off 616 While this function is switched on the power stage is additionally switched off if the control deviation lt Backlash 618 and Actual Frequency lt Switch Off Threshold Stop Function 637 The motor is switched on again as soon as the control deviation is larger again than the set up threshold of Backlash 618 7 9 4 Functions of sensorless control The configurations of the sensorless control contain the following additional functions which supple ment the behavior according to the parameterized V f characteristic Configuration 30 110 7 9 4 1 Slip compensation 660 Operation Mode slip compensation The load dependent difference between the reference speed and the actual speed of the 3 phase motor is referred to as the slip This dependency can be compensated by the current meas urement in the output phases of the frequency inverter The activation of Operation Mode 660 for the slip compensation enables as speed control without feedback The stator frequency and speed are corrected depe
374. nt limitation can be output via the op eration modes of the digital outputs If the function of the intelligent current limits is deactivated within the sensorless control operation modes 16 to 19 are switched off in the same way 7 6 5 7 External fan Operation mode 43 external fan enables the control of an external fan Via the digital output the fan is switched on as soon as the Switch on temperature 39 for the internal fans was reached See chapter 7 10 2 Fan 7 6 5 8 Warning mask 536 Create warning mask The Warning mask signals via a digital signal if an afore configured warning applies The configuration of the Warning mask is carried out via Create warning mask 536 Warnings and controller status messages can be combined This enables internal or external control using a common output signal The display of Warning 269 and Controller Status 275 is not affected by the Warning mask Select a setting 1 43 for message activation Select a setting 101 143 for deactivation of a message 192 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 0 No change Configured warning mask is not modified f The warnings and controller status messages stated are linked L Acivate Everything in the Ana mask 2 Activate all Warnings The warnings reports stated are linked in the warning mask 3 Activate all controller states a OUST status reports stated are linked
375. ntage channel see chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel the fixed percentages can be selected and linked to other reference value sources Linking is effected via pa rameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 154 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli No Description Min Max Fact sett 520 Fixed Percentage 1 300 00 300 00 0 00 521 Fixed Percentage 2 300 00 300 00 20 00 522 Fixed Percentage 3 300 00 300 00 50 00 523 Fixed Percentage 4 300 00 300 00 100 00 e Set the required number of fixed percentages parameters 520 523 e For fixed percentage changeover parameters 75 76 131 select digital inputs e Select fixed percentages with signals at digital inputs 75 Fixed Percent Change Over 1 76 Fixed Percent Change Over 2 By combining the logic states of the fixed percentage changeover modes 1 and 2 fixed percentages 1 through 4 can be selected Fixed Percent Fixed Percent Active fixed value an Over 175 Over 2 76 fF o0 FF ixed Fixed Percentage 1520 1 520 a a R Fixed Percentage 2 521 Fixed Percentage 3 522 po rived Percentage 4 523 0 contact open 1 contact closed Number of digital inputs Number of fixed percentage values per data set 1 2 2 4 If the data set changeover function is used additionally via parameters Data Set Change Over 1 70 and
376. ntelligent current limits in particular in applications with dynamic load al ternations Parameter Operation Mode 573 defines the threshold to the activation of the intelligent current limit The parameterized rated motor current or the reference current of the frequency invert er is synchronized as the limit value of the intelligent current limits In the control method according to V f characteristic setting 110 of Configuration 30 the intelligent current limits take effect to the current limit controller The intelligent current limits are active only in the case of an active current limit controller In the field orientated control setting 410 or 610 of Configuration 30 the maximum torque forming current is limited by the intelligent current limits 20 Motor Temp Limitation to the motor temperature Tmotor 21 Motor Temp Ixt Operation mode 20 and 1 Tmotor Ixt 30 Tc Motor Temp Operation mode 10 and 20 Tc Twotor 31 Tc Motor Temp Ixt Operation mode 10 and 20 Tc Tmotor Ixt Factory setting In the operation modes with overload reserve Ixt there is a reduction of the output current when the threshold value is exceeded with a distinction being made between long and short term overload reserve After the short term overload 1 s has been used up the output current is reduced to the long term overload current matching the present switching frequency After the long term overload current has been used up
377. ntroller 7 9 42 x o Current controller zosi x J x x Acceleration pre control 7954 x x X X Field controller 7 9 5 5 XxX X X X x x x 1 Asynchronous motor 2 Direct moment control 3 Permanently excited synchronous motor 111 Inverter Data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile oy B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Asynchronous motor Synchronous motor Ea Field orientated control Modulation controller E a E O Starting behavior Cna x x Starting current impression 732 x x x Flux formation aal a ee Stopping behavior a x e l Direct current brake 736 x e Auto start re E E Flying Start 7 3 5 Energy saving eee a Energy saving function Flux reduction a E a a E Reference point positioning Sal e he PLC function 766 16 x lt lt lt Frequency reference channel 752 x x x Reference percentage channel 7543 x x x Fixed frequencies 7543 x x o x OoOo ox Fixed percentages 7 5 52 Blocking frequencies 7 5 1 5 train Brake chopper ee E E E a E Motor circuit breaker zos x x V belt monitoring o7 x x Motor chopper zos J id x Real time tuning 7 9 6 X X X X X X X X X x x XxX X X x x x xX X X X Xx x x XxX X X X x paa x x x gi i th x lt x xX x X X X x X X lt X 7 1 3 Set password 27 Set password As a protection against unauthorized access the parameter Set password 27 can be
378. o the value 0 0 s the direct current brake is controlled by the Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise signals The time monitoring and limitation by Braking Time 632 are deactivated The braking current will be impressed until the controller enable control signal STOA and STOB becomes logical 0 low Description Min Max Fact sett 632 Baking Tine 200 0 s 633 Demagnetizing time To avoid current surges which can possibly lead to an error switch off of the frequency inverter a direct current may only be impressed into the motor after the motor has been demagnetized As the demagnetization time depends on the motor used it can be set with the parameter Demagnetizing time 633 The selected demagnetizing time should be approximately three times the Act Rotor Time Con stant 227 Description Min Max Fact sett Demagnetizing Time 634 Amplification 635 Integral Time The selected stopping behavior is supplemented by a current controller to control the direct current brake The PI controller controls the current impression of the parameterized Braking Current 631 The proportional and integrating part of the current controller can be set via parameters Amplification 634 and Integral Time 635 The control functions can be deactivated by setting the parameters to 0 131 Operational Behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile ey B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Description X Fact sett stan 00
379. ockwise and Clockwise Define how fast the output frequency changes if anticlockwise P420 and P421 _ the reference frequency is changed or during Anticlockwise startup stops or braking operations P422 and P423 S curve P430 The drive is accelerated and decelerated more uniformly and 7 5 1 4 load surges are avoided Reference torque Factory setting Chapter Set P30 to 410 asynchronous motor or 610 synchronous motor 7 1 2 Set P164 to 6 On or to a signal source e g digital input Via the 7 9 5 2 signal source the changeover to torque control can be effected 7 6 6 10 Setting via Operator panel Set P494 to 5 Keypad Motorpot 7 5 3 4 2 In Local menu select function Poti P Using the arrow keys set the reference torque percentage referred to the nominal motor torque Analog input Set P476 to 1 Analog Value MFI1A terminal X12 3 7 5 2 Set P452 to 1 Voltage 0 10 V 7 6 1 The reference torque is proportional to the voltage at MFI1 Limitation via Limits P418 Minimum Frequency only in current impression phase 7 5 1 1 P419 Maximum Frequency Speed Controller P767 Frequency Upper Limit 7 9 5 3 1 P768 Frequency Lower Limit Setting inputsand outputs Factory setting Chapter IN1D X11 4 Assign signal 71 IN1D to a function P68 7 6 6 IN2D X11 5 Assign signal 72 IN2D to a function P69 or 7 6 6 set as input for PWM repetition frequency or pulse train via P496 7 6 7 IN4D X12 1 Assign signal
380. of Minimum Frequency 418 If another reference fre quency source is selected via parameter Reference 1 1 Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 the reference frequency is reset to the value of this source 0 contact open 1 contact closed 157 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions If a negative reference value is set the drive is decelerated with command Frequency motorpoti up The reference value is changed in positive direction Limit The reference values are limited via the parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Fre quency 419 Direction of rotation reversal If parameter Minimum Frequency 418 is set to zero the direction of rotation of the drive can be re versed via the motorpoti function Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs as reference value The function Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs can be selected via the following parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 Reference Frequency Source 2 492 See chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel Frequency setting using the motorpoti function can be used for adjustable varying speed or for speed control In the case of a torque control Parameter n T Control Change Over 164 this function is switched off and a percentage setting option via the motorpoti function is available Chapter 7 6 6 1 List of control signals contains a table summarizing the av
381. off threshold is to be adjusted according to the load behavior of the drive and the device output as the drive must be controlled to a speed below the switch off threshold Description M Max rac sett T Switch Off Threshold Stop Function 100 0 If the motor builds up a stopping torque it may be possible that the switch off thresh old stop function is not reached due to the slip frequency and the standstill of the drive is not recognized In this case increase the value of the Switch off threshold stop func tion 637 638 Holding time stop function The Holding time stop function 638 is considered in stopping behaviors 1 and 4 Controlling to speed zero leads to a heating of the motor and should only be done for a short period in internally ventilated motors No Description Min Max Fact sett _ Holding time stop function 0 0s 200 0 s 128 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 3 4 Autostart Comply with VDE provision 0100 part 227 and pro vision 0113 in particular Sections 5 4 protection against automatic after main line voltage failure and voltage recovery and Section 5 5 Undervoltage protection A Appropriate measures must be taken to exclude any risk for staff machines and produc tion goods In addition to that all specific regulations relevant to the application as well all national directives are to be complied with
382. oli Parameter descriptions 7 9 4 2 Current limit value controller 610 Operation Mode current limit value controller Via a load dependent speed control the current limit value controller ensures that the drive system is not overloaded This is extended by the intelligent current limits described in the previous chapter The current limit value controller reduces the load on the drive e g during acceleration by stopping the acceleration ramp The switch off of the frequency inverter which happens when the acceleration ramps have been set at an excessive gradient is thus prevented The current limit value controller is switched on and off via parameter Operation Mode 610 The current limit value controller functions and the intelligent current limits have been deactivated Factory setting The current limit value controller is active 611 Amplification 612 Integral Time The control behavior of the current limit controller can be set via the proportional part parameter Amplification 611 and the integrating part parameter Integral Time 612 If in exceptional cases optimization of the controller parameters is required proceed with the following steps e Change parameter Current Limit 613 with a big step analyze the changes in the Scope e Fora more dynamic behavior increase Amplification 611 and or decrease Integral Time 612 e Fora less dynamic behavior decrease Amplification 611 and or increase Integral Time 612 No Des
383. on clockwise 10 H2 s 421 Deceleration clockwise 0 01 Hz 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 analog value MFI1A 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 zero 493 Operation mode reference frequency 1 reference source 558 Operation mode terminal X11 6 digital 1 Output OUT3D input output 573 Operation mode intelligent current 11 Ixt Tc limitation to overload and max heat limits sink temperature 606 Type V f characteristic 2 quadratic 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 0 Coast to Stop Coast to Stop P68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 645 Operation Mode Flying Start 2 On according to reference 651 Operation mode auto start 1 On 1550 Operation mode energy saving function Automatic 1552 Energy saving function on 163 Reference Frequency reached 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 531 Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal 533 Operation mode OUT3D X11 6 digital 25 Warning Mask input output Fan Heating ventilation air conditioning Blocking frequen Acceleration eq 1 Analog value MFI1A P449 P449 Frequency fmax oie ike Reference frequency nme rysteresis 449 ce 475 Ist Blo ocking frequency 447 Acceleration Win Frequency 418 p447 fref internal clockwise 420 EE STEQUENS Max frequency 419 clockwise i Type V f Star
384. on 30 Pulse Train J frequency J IN4D X12 1 PL_ 74 IN4D 30 Pulse Train 5 P556 Division Marks Function P557 Scaling Factor JIN5D X12 2 PL 75 IN50 CANopen or CAN Systembus STOA o X13 3 CM CAN CAN terminals X12 5 0 CAN H Protocol Enable Option X12 5 X12 6 Si Cc STOB 9 X11 3 P276 1 CANopen CAN system bus X12 69 CAN L 7 2 CAN system bus CANopen o Digital Input Output i Xi Modbus or VABus Function P558 0 Input IN3D C PL_j 73 IN3D J CM 232 485 Connection Protocol IN3D 11 6 1 Output OUT3D _ P532 103 Inv Error Signal option X21 lt X210 RS485 Status signal function Tp5solo NPN active 0 V LILIE p395 0 CM VABus X21 VABus C RJ45 OUT3D 1 PNP active 24 V 1 CM VABus _ X21 Modbus 0 RR 2 CM Modbus X21 VABus Multi function inputs Function l MFI1 X12 3 Reference frequency values Setting range Pasa voltage 0 10 V PA7S i Analog value MFTTAI imam Frequency 48 IRE 3 Digital NPN active 0 v H P 76 MFI1D P492 1 Analog value MFI1A C Maximum Frequency 419 Hz 4 Digital PNP active 24 v C P __ 76 MFI1D Reference percentage values Fort a co as Pasy P476 1 Analog value MF1A D rrinimum Reference Percentage 518 a 7 Current Characteristic C characterisic points P494 1 Analog value MFI1A _ M etimum Reference Percentage 519 Error Warning behaviour P453 For output at MFO1 P550 2 Analog Actual analog value P251 P553 40 Absolute value analog input MFI1A Fu
385. on according to UL508c the devices are only allowed to be used in environments ac cording to Pollution Degree 2 According to UL508c Warn or Marking labels are not allowed to be removed 50 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control terminals Standard connection Commissioning Bonfiglioli Vectron 6 Commissioning The unit may also be commissioned as described in the Quick Start Guide This guide is supplied with the device In this chapter first commissioning and commissioning for typical applications are described Prior to commissioning all covers must be fixed all standard equipment components of f The frequency inverter may only be commissioned by qualified staff the frequency inverter must be installed and the terminals must be checked Procedure Chapter Mechanical Installation 4 Elect 1nstalation_ i Electrical Installation Control via operator panel Connect switch for enable signals a Control via signals at control terminals Connect Switch for enable signals Switch for motor start and reversal of direction of rotation Potentiometer for speed setting Commissioning with operator panel Commissioning with operator panel 6 1 2 Start motor via control signals Start motor via operator panel Switch on Select Poti F menu Start clockwise at IN1D X11 4 or Press RUN Start anticlockwise at IN2D X11 5 Adjusting parameter settings to application Identify
386. on or star connection according to the motor data Delta connection Star connection X2 A X2 Y BOOOOOD DOOOOO U V W Rbirb2 U V W RbtRb2 4 r Minimum Torque to tighten the screws 0 5 Nm 4 6 Ib in Maximum Torque to tighten the screws 0 6 Nm 5 3 Ib in Comply with the notes on cable cross sections in chapter 5 4 Dimensioning of conductor cross section Cable cross sections mm 0 2 4 flexible cable with sleeve Motor terminals 0 2 6 rigid cable 38 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Motor Connection Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 5 6 1 Length of motor cables without filter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph unshielded cable shielded cable Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 E 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 25m 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 11 1 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 15 2 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 100 m 50 m 19 2 z 5 5 193 3 0 5 5 5 213 3 0 7 5 22 3 w 9 2 100 m 50 m 23 3 11 The specified lengths of the motor cables must not be exceeded i
387. ona Franca sector C calle F n 6 08040 Barcelona Tel 34 93 4478400 Fax 34 93 3360402 www tecnotrans com tecnotrans tecnotrans com Bonfiglioli France 14 Rue Eug ne Pottier BP 19 Zone Industrielle de Moimont II 95670 Marly la Ville Tel 33 1 34474510 Fax 33 1 34688800 www bonfiglioli fr btf bonfiglioli fr Bonfiglioli India PLOT AC7 AC11 Sidco Industrial Estate Thirumudivakkam Chennai 600 044 Tel 91 0 44 24781035 24781036 24781037 Fax 91 0 44 24780091 24781904 www bonfiglioliindia com bonfig vsnl com Bonfiglioli Italia Via Sandro Pertini lotto 7b 20080 Carpiano Milano Tel 39 02 985081 Fax 39 02 985085817 www bonfiglioli it customerservice italia bonfiglioli it Bonfiglioli New Zealand 88 Hastie Avenue Mangere Bridge Auckland 2022 New Zealand PO Box 11795 Ellerslie Tel 64 09 634 6441 Fax 64 09 634 6445 npollington bonfiglioli com au Bonfiglioli Osterreich Molkereistr 4 A 2700 Wiener Neustadt Tel 43 02622 22400 Fax 43 02622 22386 www bonfiglioli at info bonfiglioli at Bonfiglioli South East Asia No 21 Woodlands indusrial park E1 02 03 Singapore 757720 Tel 65 6893 6346 7 Fax 65 6893 6342 www bonfiglioli com au sales bonfiglioli com sg Bonfiglioli South Africa 55 Galaxy Avenue Linbro Business Park Sandton Tel 27 11 608 2030 OR Fax 27 11 608 2631 www bonfiglioli co za bonfigsales bonfiglioli co za Bonfiglioli
388. op Error If the PID real value is missing the drive will be shut down and d p error F1409 actual value is missing will be signaled If the PID real value is missing 20 Active Error error F1409 actual value is missing will be signaled 224 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 480 Fixed Frequency 1 in case of missing PID real value If the PID real value is missing lt 0 5 the output frequency is guided to the value of Fixed Fre quency I 480 The minimum value monitoring prevents an acceleration of the drive if the PID real value is missing If the PID real value is available again the controller continues operation automati cally Description Min Max Fact sett Fixed Frequency 1 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz 0 00 Hz The Fixed Frequency 1 480 must be in the range between Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 If the Fixed Frequency 1 480 is set to a value smaller than the Minimum Frequen cy 418 the output frequency is guided to Minimum Frequency 418 The frequency will not drop below Minimum Frequency 418 444 Amplification P Parameter Amplification 444 defines the amplification factor by which the control deviation is multi plied The control deviation can be reduced by large amplification values but very high values may cause the control circuit to become unstable vibrations If the value is set too low large control de viations are
389. operational Select Full setup if the frequency inverter is commissioned for the first time Select Motor setup if only the motor data are to be measured and other settings are not to be changed 60 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 First commissioning Commissioning Bonfiglioli Vectron 6 2 1 Overview Setup can be selected via menu item Setup After first switch on Setup is displayed automatically gt ENT FULL Select for the first commissioning notor Select for only motor data measuring bUSCGn Select for commissioning of communication CN C E O ED Furr ENT GSEt_0 CENT i Data set query is only displayed if Setup is manually selected via the i Orma Complete 2 Data set selection menu item Setup Choose data set 0 Another setting is only A raae ARAE AS seer necessary for setup of various motors ister motor buUSCOn Control method Communication UF Asynchronous motor V f control with variable speed default Foc Asynchronous motor Field oriented control High drive mens SYnch Synchronous motor dynamics and accurate speed control and torque control cee ED LF JD a Control Motor typeplate example Press or for 15s method to increment or A V Aly a w A Aly min eoso Seenen each dioit 230 400 50 0 25 1 32 0 76 1375 0 77 Entry of coSPh in Rated power 0 25 kw Motor Hj 2 pd irethod UF and from motor Rated voltage typep
390. opping behavior 2 if the digital logic signals Start Clockwise 68 0 and Start Anticlockwise 69 0 To achieve this the value 12 Stop Off Stop Hold must be set for parameter Operation mode PO8 amp P69 1 P6S amp P69 0 630 By selecting the stopping behavior you also select the control of a mechanical brake if operation mode 41 Open brake is used for one digital output for controlling the brake stopping behavior 0 The inverter is disabled immediately The drive deenergized immediately and Coast to Stop coasts freely The drive is brought to a standstill at the set deceleration As soon as the drive is at a standstill the inverter is disabled after a after a holding time The holding time can be set via the parameter Holding time stop function 638 Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied for the dura tion of the holding time Stopping behavior 1 Stop and Switch off 127 Operational Behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions The drive is brought to a standstill at the set deceleration and remains perma Stopping behavior 2 nently supplied with cur rent Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting Stop and hold current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied as from standstill The drive is brought to a standstill at the emergenc
391. or Op 736 Torque Limit Source Motor Op 737 Torque Limit Source Gen Op As an alternative to limiting the output values by a fixed value linking to an analog input value is also possible The analog value is limited via parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518 Maximum Reference Percentage 519 but does not consider the Gradient Percentage Ramp 477 of the refer ence percentage value channel The assignment is done with the help of the parameters Isq Limit Source Motor Operation 734 and Isq Limit Source Generator Op 735 for the torque forming current component Isq The sources for the torque limits can be selected via the parameters Torque Limit Source Motor Op 736 and Torque Limit Source Gen Op 737 Multifunction input 1 is the source Via parameter Operation Mode 101 Analog Input MFI1A MFTII 452 multifunction input 1 must be set up as a voltage or current input Multifunction input 2 is the source Via parameter Operation Mode 102 Analog Input MFI2ZA MFI2 562 multifunction input 2 must be set up as a voltage or current input The percentage signal at the repetition frequency input IN2D ter Sn Percentage minal X11 5 Operation Mode IN2D 496 must be set to 20 or 21 See chapter 7 6 7 Input PWM repetition frequency pulse train 110 Fixed Limit The selected parameter figures for limiting the speed controller are taken into account Factory setting 714 RxPDO2 Word 1 Process data of the system bus Refer to instruc
392. or after an emer gency stop a non recurrent direct restart is permissible After a failure and restoration of the power supply the motor may start unexpectedly if the Auto Start function is activated If staff is endangered a restart of the motor must be prevented by means of external circuitry Before commissioning and the start of the operation make sure to fix all covers and check the terminals Check the additional monitoring and protective devices according to EN 60204 and ap plicable the safety directives e g Working Machines Act or Accident Prevention Directives 21 Organizational measures 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile q AF Bonfiglioli General safety instructions and information on use 2 10 7 Maintenance and service troubleshooting Visually inspect the frequency inverter when carrying out the required maintenance work and inspections at the machine plant Perform the maintenance work and inspections prescribed for the machine carefully including the specifications on parts equipment replacement Work on the electrical components may only be performed by a qualified electrician according to the applicable rules of electrical engineering Only use original spare parts Unauthorized opening and improper interventions in the machine plant can lead to personal injury or material damage Repairs on the frequency inverters may only be carried out by the manufac turer or persons authorized by the manufacturer Check protec
393. or digital outputs 555 RF PT Output Value MFO1F repetition frequency pulse train Multifunction output MFO1 can be used as a frequency output Parameter Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 550 must be set to 20 Repetition Frequency RF MFO1F The output signal can be select ed via parameter RF PT Output Value MFOIF 555 Operation mode 10 Analog PWM MFO1A 20 Repetition Frequency RF MFO1F MFO J1 X13 6 550 0 Off Repetition frequency mode switched off 1 Actual Frequency aa n Actual frequency 241 2 Stator Frequency Abs value of the Stator frequency 210 5 Repetition Frequency Input Abs value of the Repetition frequency input 252 The maximum frequency value output is foutp max 2 x Maximum Frequency 419 x RF Division marks 556 Scaling If the multifunction output is set as a frequency output the output frequency can be scaled Parame ter Operation Mode MFO X13 6 550 must be set to 20 Repetition frequency RF MFO1F 556 RF Division marks repetition frequency mode The repetition frequency mode for the multifunction output corresponds to the emulation of an incre mental sensor The parameter RF Division marks 556 must be parameterized according to the fre quency to be output 184 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Description Min Max Fact sett RF Division marks 30 8192 1024 The frequenc
394. or oscillating behavior at approx 5 of the rated Voltage Constant 6 2 10 3 frequency Transition from current impression to Field oriented control Unsufficient Torque during Start of FOC and SYNCH Starting behavior 6 2 10 4 6 2 10 1 Speed Controller Softer set up If regularly a fault Overfrequency or Overcurrent occurs or the connected motor hums even at zero speed or the motor speed oscillated then the Speed controller is typically set to dynamic Set Amplification I fl lt P738 721 lower and Integral Time 1 f lt P738 722 higher Please note that Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 offers different settings of the speed control ler for different speed ranges Above the Switch Over threshold the parameters Amplification 2 Ifl gt P738 723 and Integral Time 2 f gt P738 724 are effective for the speed controller With setting Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 0 Amplification 1 f lt P738 721 and Integral Time 1 fl lt P738 722 are effective over the complete frequency range Comply with chapter 7 9 5 3 6 2 10 2 Speed Controller Stronger set up If the motor doesn t follow dynamic enough a reference value step load step more dynamic set tings of the speed controller can enhance the dynamic behavior Set Amplification 1 fl lt P738 721 higher and Integral Time 1 fl lt P738 722 lower Please note that Speed Control Switch Over Limit 738 offers different settings of the speed con
395. ory setting The service interval remaining until service is monitored The re maining service interval until service can be indicated via parameter Service Interval Fan 1531 As soon as the time remaining until service has expired Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show the message M0002 Service fan A warning message will be output and a warning signal will be set The warning will also be displayed on the operator panel 2 Alarm Message Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays message M0000 if the remaining time until service of the fan has not elapsed and no service is required Warning signal Expiry of the time remaining until service is signaled For linking to frequency inverter functions For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 or 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs Warning service Operation mode service interval fan 1534 must be set to 2 Warning Service interval remaining until next service 1531 Service Interval Fan Parameter Service Interval Fan 1531 indicates the service interval remaining until next service in percent of maintenance interval If a value of 0 is displayed service is required It should also be checked if the component must be replaced The service interval remaining until service is an estimated value The service interval actually remaining until next service also depends on the ambient condi
396. otor that is selected according to the technical data of the frequency inverter is ready for operation The parameters of the frequency inverter must be set to the factory setting Commissioning by means of Setup with the operator panel is not necessary After first switch on the Setup message is displayed automatically Select an actual value for example Actual Frequency 241 in menu Actual to hide this message If the operation should be changed between asynchronous motor setting 110 or 410 of Configura tion 30 and synchronous motor setting 610 of Configuration 30 the frequency inverter must be reset to the factory setting This enables commissioning without Setup via operator panel 6 2 10 Optional Optimization of motor characteristics The motor characteristics are set correctly for most of the applications with the default settings In some cases optimization of the motor characteristics can be necessary or improve the performance significantly The following optimizations usually result from the described behavior Objectionable or faulty behavior Controller Chapter Overfrequency or Overcurrent error switch off Speed Controller 6 2 10 1 Motorspeed swings Speed Controller 6 2 10 1 Motor hums audible Speed Controller 6 2 10 1 Motor doesn t follow fast enough to a Reference value Speed Controller 6 2 10 2 step Vibration response at low speeds often occurs with Voltage Constant 6 2 10 3 unknown or inexact motor data Jerky
397. otor is connected and the rated values have been confirmed Calc instead of tune is displayed If calc is selected ENT no further motor parameters are measured The data is loaded and stored If instead an auto tuning should be done use the arrow keys to switch from Calc to tune Auto tuning auto set up Further motor parameters are measured tun mG automatically if tune was selected Wait until the auto tuning operation is complete and the next prompt is displayed If Motor Other was selected at the beginning of the setup proce U canSe dure the determined Voltage constant is displayed Correct this set ENT ting if the value is known from the motor data sheet For Bonfiglioli motors this step is not necessary and the Voltage con stant is set automatically If the Voltage constant is unknown set the value to Zero The Setup will determine the Voltage constant automatically if the value is set to zero If Motor measurement of motor data only was selected at the rEAdY beginning of the setup procedure ready is displayed Acceleration clockwise in Hz s Alec Ramp gradient Change rate Hz s of output frequency after a change of the reference value or after a start command ENT Deceleration clockwise in Hz s JEL Ramp gradient Change rate Hz s of output frequency after a change of the reference value or after a stop or brake command ENT Minimum Frequency in Hz FrEWla Minimum motor spe
398. otors with a very high number of pole pairs e g higher than 20 it is possible that the maximum setting range of the parameter is not sufficient In this case divide the voltage constant by 10 and enter the value The division by 10 is con sidered internally 384 Stator inductance synchronous motor In configuration 610 for the control of synchronous machines the control behavior can be improved for high dynamic requirements by setting the parameter Stator inductance 384 116 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Machine data Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli The value of parameter Stator inductance 384 refers to the quantity between two motor phases and can typically be taken from the data sheet of the motor No Description Min Max Fact sett 384 Stator inductance 0 1 mH 500 0 mH 1 0 mH 1192 Peak current synchronous motor The parameter Peak current 1192 is used during commissioning of the motor to set the limit for the reference Isq value in the frequency inverter This is to protect the connected synchronous motor The value can be taken from the motor rating plate or the motor data sheet Exceeding the value specified by the manufacturer may result in motor damage Description Min Max Fact sett ie 0 01 Irn 100000 Em 100 Irn Irn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter 7 2 3 Device test For easier troubleshooting in the device or in a plant the in
399. ource 1 476 and Reference Per centage Source 2 494 are added up Factory setting The reference percentage can only be positive The reference per centage is limited to the range from 0 to the Maximum Refer 2 Positive only ence Percentage 519 The values of Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 are added up then the result is limited to positive values The reference percentage is inverted compared to the sign of the selected reference value source The values of Reference Percent age Source I 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 are added up then the result is inverted 3 Inverted The inversion of the reference percentage by means of signal start anticlockwise or operator panel is only possible if the reference percentage is used as torque reference Use parameter n T Control Change Over 164 for switching on the torque control 7 5 2 3 Fixed percentages 520 Fixed Percentage 1 521 Fixed Percentage 2 522 Fixed Percentage 3 523 Fixed Percentage 4 Via digital logic signals or digital inputs fixed preset reference values can be selected The fixed percentages define reference values Four fixed percentages can be set The fixed percent ages can be selected via Fixed Percent Change Over 1 75 and Fixed Percent Change Over 2 76 Logic signals or digital inputs must be assigned to the parameters Fixed Percent Change Over 1 75 and Fixed Percent Change Over 2 76 Via the reference perce
400. owing the evaluation for analogue signals is described 7 6 1 1 1 Voltage input and current input For parameter Operation Mode MFI 452 1 Voltage 0 10V 2 Current 0 20 mA or 5 Cur rent 4 20 mA must be selected Voltage signal MFI1A 0 V 10 V Fixed characteristic 1 Voltage 0 10 V Factory setina 2 Current 0 20 mA Current signal MFI1A 0 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic 4 Current 4 20 mA Current signal MFI1A 4 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage Voltage 0 10 V Parameter Operation Mode MFII 452 is set to 1 Voltage 0 10 V The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 9 8 V and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The zero crossing of the frequency or the percent age value lies at 0 2 V The deviations from 10 V and 0 V allow the operation even with voltage sup plies that have small deviations from the nominal values Incliniation 9 8 V 0 2 V 7X 9 6 V r 9 6 V Maximum reference value Maximum Frequency 419 Maximum Perc 519 Current 0 20 mA Current 0 20 mA Parameter Operation Mode MFII 452 must be set to 2 Current 0 20 mA The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 19 6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequen cy 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The zero crossing of the frequ
401. own Time 438 TraverseAmplitude 439 Proportional Step In the case of the master drive the superimposed traverse frequency is linearly opposite to the limit Traverse Amplitude 438 and then reverses its direction When the direction is reversed a proportion al step is effected Via a handshake signal the master drive informs the slave drive that the traverse output has changed its direction The traverse function of the slave drive has the same gradient as the traverse function of the master drive but an opposite sign When the slave drive reaches the limit Traverse Amplitude 438 before switch over of the handshake signal the frequency is maintained until switch over is effected If the handshake signal is received before the frequency limit is reached the direction is reversed immediately The Percentage values of Traverse Amplitude 438 and Proportional Step 439 refer to the current frequency value set up by Reference Frequency 48 fA Proportional Step 439 Master drive Traverse Amplitude 438 Reference Frequency 48 gt fA Slave drive Reference Frequency 48 0 gt Ramp down i Ramp up Time 437 lt Time 436 gt Handshake gt t No Description X Fact sett Ramp up Time E D S 5s Ramp down Time 320 00 s 5s Traverse Amplitude 0 01 50 00 10 Proportional Step 0 00 50 00 0 01 Input signals Traverse function Output signals Operation Mode 435 Referen
402. p and the change of direction of rotation at the operator panel must be locked e For parameter Local Remote 412 select a value that is different from 3 or 4 e Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of the parameter Refer to chapter 7 1 3 Set password 7 5 3 4 2 Control via reference percentage channel The reference percentage of the drive can be set via the operator panel in menu Local Poti P The reference percentage is increased or decreased via the arrow buttons Button A The reference percentage increases at the set value of Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 509 Button VW The reference percentage decreases at the set value of Ramp Percentage Motorpoti 509 Button A pressed briefly The reference percentage is increased by 0 1 each time the button is pressed Button V pressed briefly The reference percentage is reduced by 0 1 each time the button is pressed Press the buttons briefly to fine tune the reference percentage 161 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions Keypad motor potentiometer The reference percentage does not change The reference percentage increases at the set ramp Pressed briefly Reference percentage increases by 0 1 The reference percentage decreases at the set ramp Pressed briefly Reference percentage decreases by 0 1 AtY The reference percentage is reset to its initial value Function
403. pacity No Description Control level Min Max Fact setting 608 Thermal time constant Motor 1 in AGL 1 min 240 min 30 min 3 in ACU 609 Thermal time constant Stator 1 in AGL 1s 600 s 15s 3 in ACU 615 Warning Limit Motor I t 1 in AGL 6 100 80 3 in ACU Output signals Digital signals signal that of the function motor protection has been triggered 180 Warning motor Triggering of the function motor protection according to Operation 14 protection Mode 571 is signaled 1 For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs 249 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 10 7 V belt monitoring 581 Operation Mode V belt monitoring 582 Trigger Limit l active 583 Delay Time Continuous monitoring of the load behavior and thus of the connection between the 3 phase machine and the load is the task of the V belt monitoring system Parameter Operation Mode 581 defines the functional behavior if the Active Current 214 or the torque forming current component Jsq 216 field orientated control method drops below the set Trigger Limit lactive 582 for a time longer than the set Delay Time 583 The function is deactivated Factory setting If the active current drops below the threshold value the warning
404. pen communication Sian SANTE Refer to CANopen instructions 9 7 Actual values Modbus and VABus No Description Function 11 VABus SST Error Register Modbus or VABus error register Refer to VABus instructions 282 Reference Bus Frequency Reference value from serial interface Modbus or VABus error status word Refer to Modbus or VABus 411 Status Word instructions 9 8 Actual values Ethernet No Description Function 1431 Module Info MAC ID physical biunique Network address 270 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Actual values of the CAN system bus Service Grmi Vectron 10 Service This chapter contains information for maintaining the device 10 1 Safety Any service work must be carried out by qualified staff Unauthorized opening and improper interventions can lead to personal injury or material damage Repairs on the frequency inverters may only be carried out by the manufactur er or persons authorized by the manufacturer During any service work comply with the documentation Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being ener gized unintentionally Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply the mains DC link voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time Wait for some minutes until i the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to work at the unit Do
405. ponents Commutating chokes and EMC filters are optionally available Operation on unearthed mains IT mains is admissible after pulling out the IT mains plug in jumper Interference free operation with residual current device is guaranteed at a tripping current gt 30 mA if the following points are observed All current sensitive residual current devices Type B to EN 50178 Use EMC filters with reduced leakage current or if possible do not use EMC filters at all The length of the shielded motor cable is lt 10 m and there are no additional capacitive compo nents between the mains or motor cables and PE For connection to IT mains refer to chapter 5 5 Mains Connection 31 Safety 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile QI Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation 5 2 Electrical connections overview Mains DC link connection Relay output X10 Control terminals X13 X12 1x11 a Push I_A gt pull Off Brake resistor Rb1 und Rb2 For connection refer to the corresponding chapter 5 3 EMC Information The frequency inverters are designed according to the requirements and limit values of product norm EN 61800 3 with an interference immunity factor EMI for operation in industrial applications Elec tromagnetic interference is to be avoided by expert installation and observation of the specific product information Measures Ins
406. position distance of positioning operation The time remaining until next service in percent of maintenance 1530 Service Interval DC link interval If a value of 0 is displayed service is required It 1531 Service Interval Fan Ea Output signal at multifunction output in setting Operation mode must also be checked if a component must be replaced Refer to chapter 10 3 1 DC link The time remaining until next service in percent of maintenance interval If a value of 0 is displayed service is required It must also be checked if a component must be replaced Refer to chapter 10 3 2 Fan 1533 Maintenance Note SA Refer to chapter 10 3 Monitoring of service 1541 Status device test Service of device test Refer to chapter 7 2 3 Device test The actual values can be read out and monitored in the Actual menu of the operator panel 266 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Actual values of frequency inverter Actual values vw Bonfiglioli 9 1 1 STO Status Parameter STO Status 277 can be used for extended diagnosis of the two digital inputs STOA and STOB for enable The statuses of the inputs are shown in bit encoded form o 1 STOA input missing 8 Switch off STOB input 7 The signal states at digital inputs STOA and STOB can be linked to functions of the frequency inverter Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA X11 3 and STOB X13 3 The sig
407. possible Description Min Max Fact sett Amplification 15 00 15 00 The sign of the amplification defines the control direction i e if the PID real value increases and the sign of the amplification is positive the output frequency is reduces e g pressure control With a rising PID real value and negative sign of the amplification the output frequency is increased e g in temperature control systems refrigerating machines condensers 445 Integral Time 1 Parameter Integral Time 445 defines the time constant for calculation of the integral of the PID input signal The I controller totals the control deviation over time and divides the result by the value of Integral Time 445 If the Integral Time 445 is set to small values the control deviation is compen sated quickly Very low values for the Integral Time 445 may cause the control circuit to become unstable vibrations No Description Fact sett 445 Integral Time Der ms If parameter Integral Time 445 is set to zero the I controller is deactivated The amplification P is included in the calculation of the integral time I see figure PID controller BONFIGLIOLI recommends setting the Integral Time 445 to a value greater than the sampling time which is 2 ms in the case of the Agile device 441 Max I Component Parameter Max I Component 441 defines the maximum output signal of the I controller In applica tions with quickly changing load torques
408. put Voltage Current Analog nt a fies alue MFI2 X12 4 Digital j i Operation Mode MFI2 562 Repetition frequency Operation Mode IN2D 496 Repet Freq Divider 497 Actual percentage RAM Actual Percentage RAM 529 CAN H X12 5 CANopen __ RxPDO 1 Word 1 CAN L CAN system bus RxPDO 1 Word 24 X12 6 CM CAN CAN system bus X310 CANopen i CAN Interface CM CAN X12 276 Function Table VTable Index 1343 FT instruction 1350 FT target output 1 2521 FT Output Percentage 1 2522 FT Output Percentage 2 __ 1351 FT target output 2 2521 FT Output Percentage 1 2522 FT Output Percentage 2 440 Operation Mode Actual Value Failure Via parameter Operation Mode Actual Value Failure 440 you can set how the frequency inverter will respond to a missing PID real value lt 0 5 In this way the drive can be prevented from starting if a PID real value is missing The function enables for example monitoring of a sensor cable for bro ken wires The function should be switched on in order to avoid critical operating behavior e g accel eration to maximum frequency if the actual value signal fails 0 Off No response if PID real value is missing Missing PID real values lt 0 5 will be evaluated as PID real values i F If the PID real value is missing the output frequency is guided to ACHE Fixed Frequency the value of Fixed Frequency 1 480 Factory setting 10 Active St
409. put For parameter Operation mode IN2D 496 select setting 10 PWM input 0 100 or 11 PWM input 100 100 Pulse train input For parameter Operation mode IN2D 496 select setting 30 pulse train See chapter 7 6 7 Input PWM repetition frequency pulse train The reference value is transmitted via a bus system The 20 Fieldbus Percentage Value field bus must write the value in format xxx xx into pa rameter 524 from which the value is then used The torque reference value for torque control is transmit ted via CANopen bus system The signal source contains the value of CANopen object 0x6071 Refer to the commu nication manual CANopen 7 Percentage output 1 of a PLC function is the reference aak PLC OR pur Percentage value source See application manual PLC i Percentage output 2 of a PLC function is the reference eee RDC Ouipun Percentage value source See application manual PLC The reference percentage channel can be used in all configurations parameter Configuration 30 2 Analog Value MFI2A 5 Keypad Motorpot 10 Repetition Percentage Value 95 Obj 0x6071 Target Torque 152 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions Block diagram Bonfiglioli Vectron The block diagram shows the reference percentage setting options Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 Zero g Analog Value MFI1A Analog Val
410. put are evaluated independent of the operation mode Local Remote 412 122 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior Parameter descriptions w Bonfiglioli Lock the Reference value facilities of the control panel If the setting possibility of the reference frequency at the operator panel must be locked For the fol lowing parameters the setting 5 Keypad Motorpot must not be selected Reference Frequency Source 1 475 Reference Frequency Source 2 492 Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of parameters Refer to chapter 7 1 3 Set password NOTE The setting of parameter Set Password 27 only does not lock the control facilities of the keypad Start Stop Change direction of rotation Poti F and Poti P are still available 7 3 2 Starting behavior The starting behavior of the machine can be configured In Configuration 110 V f control of asyn chronous motor the starting behavior can be set via parameter Operation mode 620 In the field orientated control method of configurations 410 asynchronous motor and 610 synchro nous motor the starting behavior can be set via the limits Maximum flux formation time 780 and Current during flux formation 781 Parameter of starting behavior in the configurations U f DMR DMR Asynchronous Synchronous motor motor Configuration 30 110 410 610
411. r 2 Shut down and Stop as the voltage controller brings the drive to a standstill at the maximum deceleration ramp and supplies it with the remaining DC link voltage If the DC link voltage is restored before the shutdown of the drive but after falling below Shutdown Threshold 675 the drive is still decelerated to standstill 218 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli If the mains voltage is restored after the shutdown of the drive but before the undervoltage switch off has been reached the frequency inverter signals a fault The operator panel displays the fault mes sage F0702 If the mains failure without shutdown Shutdown Threshold 675 0 Hz takes so long that the fre quency has been reduced to 0 Hz the drive is accelerated to the reference frequency when the mains supply is restored If the mains failure with or without shutdown takes so long that the frequency inverter shuts off com pletely the frequency inverter will be in the Standby state when the mains supply is restored If the inverter is enabled again the drive will start If the drive is to start automatically after restoration of the mains supply if the inverter is enabled permanently Operation Mode 651 of auto start must be switched on No Description Min Max Fact sett Shutdown Threshold 999 99 Hz reference Shutdown Value AGL202 225 0v 375 5 v 365 0 V AGL402 425 0v 775 0 V 730 0
412. r Gen Ref Current Limit 683 Gen Ref Current Limit 683 is active in configurations 410 and 610 FOC and SERVO The threshold values of the voltage controller are calculated starting with the current DC link voltage with the parameters Mains Failure Threshold 671 and Reference Mains Support Value 672 If the mains voltage is restored before a switch off is effected by the mains undervoltage detection system the drive is accelerated to its reference frequency at the set acceleration or according to the parameter Acceleration on Mains Resumption 674 If the value of parameter Acceleration on Mains Resumption 674 is set to the default value of 0 00 Hz s the drive is accelerated at the values set for the ramp parameters Acceleration Clockwise 420 or Acceleration Anticlockwise 422 No Description Min Max Fact sett Mains Failure Threshold 200 0 V 50 0 V 100 0 V Reference mains support value 200 0 V 10 0 V 40 0 V 217 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions The frequency inverter reacts to the signals at the control inputs both when the power failure regulation is switched on and in normal operation A control via externally sup plied control signals is only possible in the case of a no break supply As an alterna tive supply of the control signals through the frequency inverter is to be used Output signals Mains failure and mains support are signaled via di
413. r Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The zero crossing of the frequency or the percent age value lies at 0 2 V The deviations from 10 V and 0 V allow the operation even with voltage sup plies that have small deviations from the nominal values Incliniation 9 8 V 0 2 V 9 6V P 9 6 V Maximum reference value Maximum Frequency 419 Maximum Perc 519 Current 0 20 mA Current 0 20 mA Parameter Operation Mode MFI 452 must be set to 2 Current 0 20 mA The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 19 6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequen cy 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The zero crossing of the frequency or the percentage value lies at 0 4 mA The deviations from 20 mA and 0 mA allow the operation even with voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values Incliniation 19 6 mA 0 4 mA 19 2 mA E 19 2 mA Maximum reference value Maximum F requency 419 Maximum Perc 519 Current 4 20 mA Parameter Operation Mode MFI 452 must be set to 5 Current 4 20 mA The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 19 6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The zero crossing of the frequency or the percentage value lies at 4 4 mA The deviations from 20 mA and 4 mA allow the operation even with voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values Incliniation 19 6 mA
414. r Warnings 269 The warning is dis played as soon as the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is KTY MFI2 Error Switch Off KTY MFI2 Err Switch Off 1 min delayed PT1000 MFI2 Warning only reached Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for tempera ture measurement with a measuring resistor PT1000 The input signal must be analog Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows the actual value Temperature measurement The frequency inverter is switched off immediately as soon as the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is reached The error switch off is displayed by message F0400 Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperature measurement with a measuring resistor PT1000 The input signal must be analog Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows the actual value Temperature measurement The frequency inverter is switched off as soon as the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is reached PT1000 MFI2 The error switch off is displayed by message F0400 The error Err Switch Off 1 min switch off is delayed by one minute Multifunction input 2 can be delayed reached as input for temperature measurement with a measuring resistor PT1000 The input signal must be analog Parameter Wind ing Temperature 226 shows the actual value PT1000 MFI2 Error Switch Off Error Acknowledgment Thermal contact or MPTC An error message can be acknowledged if the sensor does not signal overtemperature anymore K
415. r and frequency inverter to PE poten tial Install mains and motor cables separately from the control cables Avoid motor vibration Set blocking frequencies P447 P448 and hysteresis P449 to disable output frequency ranges Set P475 or P492 to 30 Technology controller Set P476 or P494 to the source for the reference value Set P478 to the source for the actual value Start signal P68 or P69 starts the PID controller Check connection for actual value signal Caused by functionality see chapter 8 3 If undesired Deactivate Energy saving function P1511 or select an operation mode that doesn t switch off the I O s 334 Troubleshooting Operational and error diagnosis vw Bonfiglioli 14 Operational and error diagnosis Operation of the frequency inverter and the connected load are monitored continuously Various func tions document the operational behavior and facilitate the operational and error diagnosis 14 1 Status of digital signals The status display of the digital input and output signals enables checking of the vari ous control sig nals and their assignment to the corresponding software functions in particular during commissioning Parameters Status digital inputs 350 and Status digital outputs 351 show decimal values which must be converted to binary values in order to obtain the status information Assignment reer are 7 6j5j aj 3 2 1 0 Control sig Control sig Control sig Control
416. r control via control terminals Optional optimization of motor characteristics The motor characteristics are set correctly for most of the applications with the default settings In some cases optimization of the motor characteristics can be necessary or improve the performance significantly The optimization possibilities are described in chapter 6 2 10 6 2 4 Status messages during commissioning SS The following status messages are possible during commissioning setup ss000 OK Auto setup routine has been carried out SS001 PC Phase 1 The plausibility check PC of the motor data is active SS002_ PC Phase 2 The calculation of dependent parameters is active S S003 STO The parameter identification demands enable on digital input STOA and STOB SS004 Parameter identifica The rated motor values are checked by the parameter identifica tion tion feature SS010 Setup already active The setup routine via the operator panel is being carried out SS030 No Release No enable signal The parameter identification demands enable on digital input STOA and STOB SS031 Error Error during the auto set up routine Check the value of Actual error 259 SS032 Warning Phase The parameter identification feature diagnosed an unbalance dur Asymmetry ing the measurements in the three motor phases SS099 Setup not carried out The setup is not carried out until now 6 2 5 Warnings during co
417. r descriptions If the data set is changed during acceleration or deceleration it is ensured that the S curve of the previous data set is finished first Unintentional jumps between different gradients of the S curve are avoided 7 5 1 5 Blocking frequencies 447 1st Blocking Frequency 448 2nd Blocking Frequency 449 Frequency Hysteresis In certain applications it is necessary to block out reference frequencies In this way resonance points of the system as stationary operating points are avoided The parameters st Blocking Fre quency 447 2nd Blocking Frequency 448 and Frequency Hysteresis 449 define two resonance points A blocking frequency is active if the parameter values of the blocking frequency and the frequency hysteresis are not equal to 0 00 Hz The area faded out as a stationary working point by the hysteresis is passed through as quickly as possible according to the ramp set If the output frequency is limited as a result of the selected con trol parameter settings e g if the current limit is reached the hysteresis is passed through with a delay The behavior of the reference value can be determined from its direction of movement accord ing to the following diagram Description Min Fact sett No Max Reference value output i Hysteresis Hysteresis lt gt i fo 4 y Blocking Hysteresis fsoxng t Hysteresis Reference value f internal Blocking 150 Operating Instructions Agile 06
418. rake irsini a aa a a E aN 192 7 6 5 6 Current limitation sarsana aaa aaa aa a aa 192 7 6 5 7 Extermal fan serors a a a a aaraa 192 7 6 5 8 Warning MASK wiscsscecctuzcesnedss iaka na a aa a Kanaa Aaa a EEEa aai 192 7 6 5 9 Warning mask application sssssssssssrrrrssrssrsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnan nn nnna 195 6 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 This document Content vw Bonfiglioli 7 6 6 Digital NPutS sisisi ene a a a aaa aaa aai 196 7 6 6 1 List OF control Signals sasies a a a aaa 197 7 6 6 2 Start command rssmi a E E RE Aai 200 7 6 6 3 B Wite COmtrol seis iiiswesivadeecdvededs Soeveknn oe beced isdeds bosee dxsuaindivedecndvnbeac tees baesepbassenniad lhe 200 7 6 6 4 Motor potentiometers N AEE ET AT 201 7 6 6 5 Fixed frequency changeover s scccecssseceecseseeeecseseseesseaseeesesaaaeeesssaaeeessseaeensssages 201 7 6 6 6 Fixed percentage chANGCOVER sssini nsina raad nananana aE a 201 7 6 6 7 JOG Stait eaa E a S 202 7 6 6 8 Error Acknowledgment sissioni nana aa a aaia 202 7 6 6 9 Thermalkcontact asien anena aa aE a AE RETEA a AEA AERES 202 7 6 6 10 n T control changeover sssrini aa aE EAN aA 203 7 6 6 11 DataSet changeover mainnir aiina aAA NEA a a a 203 7 6 6 12 Handshake Traverse urrureninvsiininnnn an a aaa 204 7 6 6 13 Brake chopper release ss sssessssnnserrsnnssrnnesssnnnsennnennannnonnnnrnnnnnnernnnnnennnnnnnnennenn 204 TOOTE USSR WANING asena nsen eaaa aE aE E EN EEEE 204 7 6 0 15
419. rameters is adjusted 6 2 2 Start first commissioning of an asynchronous motor e Switch on enable at STOA X11 3 and STOB X13 3 e Switch off enable at IN1D X11 4 and IN2D X11 5 if a circuit for control via control terminals is installed e Switch on the power supply e Start commissioning Setup on operator panel 61 First commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Commissioning If the unit is in as delivered condition or after resetting the unit to the factory settings the guided commissioning procedure is started automatically The operator panel displays the menu item Setup Guided commissioning can also be opened by selecting the Setup menu m CW Setup Parameter Display Start commissioning SEEUFP Using arrow keys select Complete commissioning or FULL or Measure motor data only notar Commissioning of a communication interface bUSLUn Refer to chapter Note Select Full setup if the frequency inverter is commissioned for the first time Select Motor setup if only the motor data are to be measured and other settings are not to be changed ENT Select data set 0 dSEt O Select another data set for commissioning of several motors or for different operating points ENT P30 Configuration control method cert ENT Using arrow keys select 110 IMt sensor less control SLC or UF or 410 IM sensor less field orient
420. ration 410 IM sensor less field orientated control DMC Configuration 410 contains the functions for sensor less field orientated control of an asynchronous motor The current motor speed is determined from the present cur rents and voltages in combination with the motor parameters Separate control of torque and flux forming current enables high drive dynamism at a high load moment In this configuration parallel connection of several 3 phase motors is possible to a limited extent only Configuration 610 PMSM sensor less field orientated control DMC Configuration 610 contains the functions for sensor less field orientated control of a synchronous motor The current motor speed is determined from the present cur rents and voltages in combination with the motor parameters Separate control of torque and flux forming current enables high drive dynamism at a high load moment This configuration is intended for the connection of a single motor Parallel connection of several synchronous motors is not intended and possible to a very limited extent only Asynchronous motor Synchronous motor oe Field orientated control Torque control 7952 x x Switch over speed torque control 7 6610 x x Dynamic voltage pre control P7ea d Intelligent current limits 791 x x x Voltage controller fp 792 x x x PID controller technology controller 793 x x x Slip compensation mea a sd Current limit value co
421. re changed via the data set switch over only one motor circuit breaker may be installed This functionality can be set for single or multi motor operation via parameter Oper ation Mode 571 The function is deactivated Factory setting _ K Char Mul Motor Op Err Sw Off 2 Char Sing Motor Err Sw Off 11 K Char Multi Motor Op Warning K Char Single 22 Motor Warning In each of the four data sets the rated values are monitored Over loading the drive is prevented by the fault switch off F0401 The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the active data set Overloading the drive is prevented by the fault switch off F0401 In each of the four data sets the rated values are monitored Over loading the drive mechanism is signaled by a warning message A0200 The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the active data set Overloading the drive mechanism is signaled by a message A0200 I2t Single Motor i aera ae 42 Error Switch Off Please check chapter 7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by I2t monitoring I2t Multi Motor Op eration Warning Please check chapter Motor Protection by I t monitoring7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by I2t monitoring 2 53 eae Morr Peas check chapter 7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by I t monitoring I2t Multi Motor Op eration Warning and Error Switch Off I2t Single Motor Warning and Error Switch Off 61 K C
422. reduce mains harmonics and reactive power Additional the increase of product life is possible Consider the reduction of the maximum output voltage if a line choke is installed The line choke must be installed between mains connection and input filter BONFIGLIOLI provides applicable line chokes Refer to chapter 12 4 Line choke Input filter Input filters reduce the conducted radio frequency interference voltage The input filter must be in stalled upstream on mains side of the frequency inverter The frequency inverters meet the requirements of the low voltage direc tive 2006 95 EC and the requirements of the EMC directive 2004 108 EC The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 relates to the drive system The documentation provides information on how the applicable standards can be complied if the frequency inverter is a component of the drive system The declaration of conformity is to be issued by the supplier of the drive system 5 4 Dimensioning of conductor cross section e The cable dimensions must be selected according to the current load and voltage drop to be ex pected e Select the cable cross section of the cables such that the voltage drop is as small as possible If the voltage drop is too great the motor will not reach its full torque e Comply with any additional national and application specific regulations and the separate UL in structions For typical mains fuses refer to chapter 11 Technical data Select cro
423. regulations The frequency inverters are electrical drive components intended for installation in industrial plants or machines Commissioning and start of operation is not allowed until it has been verified that the ma chine meets the requirements of the EC Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC and DIN EN 60204 1 The frequency inverters meet the requirements of the low voltage directive 2006 95 EEC and DIN EN 61800 5 1 CE labeling is based on these standards Responsibility for compliance with the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC lies with the operator Frequency inverters are only available at specialized dealers and are exclusively intended for commercial use as per EN 61000 3 2 No capacitive loads may be connected to the frequency inverter The technical data connection specifications and information on ambient conditions are indicated on the rating plate and in the documentation and must be complied with in any case 2 3 Misuse Any use other than that described in Designated use shall not be permissible and shall be consid ered as misuse For example the machine plant must not be operated e by uninstructed staff e while it is not in perfect condition e without protection enclosure e g covers e without safety equipment or with safety equipment deactivated The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from such misuse The sole risk shall be borne by the operator 2 3 1 Explosion protection The frequency
424. relay 103 Inv error signal Pump control Blocking frequen V f characteristic 9a ne value MFI1A P449 P449 Frequency 3 UM 1 2 O gq J Reference frequency pmm hysteresis 44 8 source I 475 Ea Ist Blocking fmin i frequency 447 Acceleration i P447 fref internal clockwise 420 in frequen a Max frequency 419 f Hz Type Vif characteristic 606 Start clockwise Start anti clockwise Enable Stopping behavior P68 as ig Operation mode Operation mode Operation mode Reference P69 i i P68 amp P69 1 z energy saving function1550 Y s E Energy saving function on P68 amp P69 0 t rg Ig i 630 1552 with signal 163 E Reference frequency reached t t Error signal Run signal OUT1D X13 5 99 Applications 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 7 2 Fan 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 421 Deceleration clockwise 0 01 Hz 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 Zero 493 Operation mode reference frequency 1 reference source 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 53 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 50 Hz s 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 Analog Value MFI1A 606 Type V f characteristic 2 quadratic 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 0 Coast to Stop Coast to Stop P68
425. requency source 475 Frequency fmax hysteresis 449 Nees Ist Blocking 7 fmin S frequency 447 P447 face interna Min frequency 418 Max frequency 419 clockwise Deceleration 421 clockwise POS amp P69 1 Start clockwise Start anti clockwise Enable Stopping behavior P68 4 io Operation mode 1 1 Reference P69 gt o speed Error signal Run signal Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 P68 amp P69 0 630 t t 104 Applications Commissioning v Bonfiglioli Vectron 6 7 6 Compressor 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 50 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 12 5 Hz s 421 Deceleration clockwise 0 01 Hz 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 Analog Value MFI1A 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 zero 493 Operation mode reference frequency 1 reference source 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 0 Coast to Stop Coast to Stop P68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 670 Operation mode voltage controller 3 Ud limitation and mains support active Ud DC link voltage 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 531 Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal
426. requency Change Over 2 67 Fixed percent Change Over 2 n T Control IN4D SS MMMM Change Over _ X12 1 TF ooooq woeSoS oS Data set m Dast ilmo Tato stan T Data set P68 L Operation mode Change Over 2 e 0 9 peaRpcO t bs OFFS Operation 651 Fixed frequency Pi om 0 a amp mode Change Over 1 9 E Hz 4 A P68 amp P69 0 1 ONo Fixed frequency Hz TN Change Over 2 7 9 E Output 630 Fixed percent gt Change Over o E frequency t t ixed percent Change Over 2 _ 9 u ee Reference value Blocking frequenc Acceleration Frequency limits Frequency limits 10 VD z A AOVDC x13 4 1 Analog value MFI1A A P449 P449 Frequency fmax fmax speed e MELL_ X12 3 gt o joa Reference frequency fret pana hysteresis 449 ji ind gt GND 9 source 1 475 at 1st Blocking A 5 ma Sif TW 0 10 VDC L a X13 2 o m frequency 447 Acceleration t fmin t fmin P447 f clockwise 420 Min frequency 418 Freq upper limit Reference 10 VDC X13 4 Ref internal Max frequency 419 Freg Lower limit torque MFI2 A X12 4 0 10 VOCL_GND_4 y435 Multifunction input Reference value Ramp Percentage limits 1 Voltage 0 10 V 2 Analog value MFIZA A NEL PPX10 1 oe Operation mode Pee Reference percentage gt In 7 N X10 2 MFI2 562 o pug Gradient percentage Min reference percentage 518 Error signal OUT2D X10 3 ramp Run signal OUT1D X13 5 t 477 M
427. requency Change Over I 66 Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 67 and Fixed Frequency Change Over 3 131 Via the reference frequency channel see chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel the fixed frequencies can be selected and linked to other reference value sources Linking is effected via pa rameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Frequency Source 2 492 No Description Fact sett 480 0 00 Hz 481 ved Freuency2 0 80 Hz 968 00 10 00 Hz 482 25 00 Hz 483 50 00 Hz 485 5 00 Hz 486 10 00 Hz 487 Fixed Frequency 7 25 00 Hz 488 50 00 Hz e Set the required number of fixed frequencies parameters 480 488 e For fixed frequency changeover parameters 66 67 131 select digital inputs e Select fixed frequencies with signals at digital inputs 146 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 66 Fixed Frequency Change Over 1 67 Fixed Frequency Change Over 2 131 Fixed Frequency Change Over 3 By combining the logic states of the fixed frequency change over inputs 1 2 and 3 fixed frequencies 1 through 8 parameters 480 to 488 can be selected Change Over 1 Change Over2 Change Over 3 Active fixed value setting 66 67 131 0 Fixed frequency 480 0 Hz 0 Fixed frequency 2481 10 Hz 0 Fixed frequency 3 482 25 Hz 0 Fixed frequency 4 483 50 Hz 25 0 Fixed frequency 7 487 Fixed frequency 8 488 0 contact open 1 conta
428. rminal X11 6 Parameter Operation Mode Terminal X11 6 558 must be set to 1 Output OUT3D Operation Mode OUTSD X11 6 533 103 Inv Error Signal 186 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions Ww Bonfiglioli 7 6 5 Digital outputs 531 Operation Mode OUT1D X13 5 Digital output 532 Operation Mode OUT2D X10 relay 533 Operation Mode OUT3D X11 6 Digital input output 554 Digital Source MFO1D Multifunction output The digital signals listed in table Operation modes for digital outputs can be output via Digital output Multifunction output set as digital output Digital input output set as digital output Relay output If the multifunction output or digital input output is to output a digital value the relevant output must be set up as a digital output Analog Multifunction Operation Mode MFO1 _ _ Digital output ADD X13 6 550 10 a 1 MFO1D Digital in Operation Mode Termi i _ Output put output PELS nal X11 6 558 O INpUE Nee ouTsD Factory settings of digital outputs a out 13 5 Operation Mode OUTID X13 5 531 2 Run signal Multifunc eee i tion output X13 6 Digital Source MFOID 554 4 Setting frequency Digital in x41 6 Operation Mode OUT3D X11 6 533 103 Inv error signal put output Relay out f put X10 Operation Mode OUT2D X10 relay 532 103 Inv error signal NOTE
429. rol via bus system 80 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 After first commissioning Commissioning Bonfiglioli Vectron Selection of reference frequency P475 Reference Frequency Source 1 Factory setting P492 Reference frequency source 2 Additional reference value only for combination of two reference sources 0 Zero 20 Fieldbus Reference Value 1 Analog Value MFI1A P475 30 Technology Controller 2 Analog Value MFI2A 40 Electronic gear 3 Fixed Frequency 2501 PLC Output Frequency 1 4 Motorpot via Digital Inputs 2502 PLC Output Frequency 2 5 Keypad Motorpot P492 10 Repetition Frequency P4751 P475 P4753 P4754 P4927 P492 P4927 P492 IN1D 9X11 4 4 4 o 4j 2o IN2D J E 0X11 5 4 4 o IN4D X12 1 floja Zo 1 l j i 75 P66 75 P62 FA nla paso P67 Lopes Fy 1PNP pP131 2 NPN IN3D z 9X11 6 o o P558 P558 MFI1 P452 OIN OIN o 3 4 pe ae OX12 3 ae ee Seer ce Lee E Zo 1 6 P452 P452 P452 GND 1 U 0 10 V 3 NPN 3 APN I 2 1 0 20 mA 4 PNP 4 PNP 2 5 7 5 I 4 20 mA MFI2 P562 CUI p454 P457 o 3 4 10VDC N 77 77 X12 4 i o oo R ag P562 pse2 OO OG PS62 GND 1 U 0 10 V 3 NPN I o 2 1 0 20 mA 4 PNP i 2 5 7 5 I 4 20 mA 0 6UL 7I P464 P467 4 P475 P475 _ 1 P475 _ p4g2 gt p492 10 p492 20 IN1D E A 9X11 4 Sosa IN2D DOSY f
430. rolled drives An example application is the operation in wind energy converters For an asynchronous motor Configuration 30 410 Wait for speed Applicable for torque controlled drives which have to supply only reaction torque without active acceleration If the drive is externally accelerated to the speed which is sufficient for sensor less field orientated control switch over to torque control is carried out 3 4 _ Determine flux direction only 20 Operation above ave frequency limit Operation modes 2 3 and 4 define a direction of rotation for the Flying Start and avoid a deviating direction The Flying Start can accelerate drives by checking the rotary frequency if the drives have a low moment of inertia and or a small load moment In operation modes 1 to 4 it cannot be ruled out that a wrong direction of rotation is determined For example a frequency not equal to zero may be determined although the drive is at a standstill If there is no overcurrent the drive is accelerated accordingly The direction of rotation is defined in operation modes 2 3 and 4 NOTE The Flying Start function is designed for the operation of motors without brake Brake motors may not be operated optimum in individual cases depending of parameteriza tion and brake control with the Flying start function 130 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operational Behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 3 6 Direct current br
431. roller since it influences the control dynamics significantly An overview of important parameters for using the Torque Controller is compiled in chapter 6 7 8 Torque control 7 9 5 2 1 Torque reference The reference torque can be specified as follows e Set parameter n T Control Change Over 164 to 6 On or link it to a digital signal and switch this on e Via parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 select a source for the reference torque For example The reference torque can be set via the arrow keys of the operator panel if the following setting is selected Reference Percentage Source 2 494 5 keypad motorpoti factory setting The reference torque can be set via multifunction input 1 MFI1A if the following setting is select ed Reference Percentage Source 1 476 1 analog value MFI1A factory setting 100 Torque refer to the calculated Torque from Rated Mech Power 376 Motor power and Rated Speed 372 Motor nominal speed Parameter Torque 224 shows the actual torque Select an applicable operation mode for parameter Operation Mode Flying Start 645 Refer to chap ter 7 3 5 Flying Start 7 9 5 2 2 Upper limit and lower limit of the frequency in Torque Control 767 Frequency Upper Limit 768 Frequency Lower Limit In many cases limitation of the speed is required in the operating points with reduced or without load torque because the speed r
432. rranty and liability BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH would like to point out that the contents of this user manual do not form part of any previous or existing agreement assurance or legal relationship Neither are they intended to supplement or replace such agreements assurances or legal relationships Any obligations of the manufacturer shall solely be based on the relevant purchase agreement which also includes the complete and solely valid warranty stipulations These contractual warranty provisions are neither extended nor limited by the specifications contained in this documentation The manufacturer reserves the right to correct or amend the specifications product information and omissions in these operating instructions without notice The manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage injuries or costs which may be caused by the aforementioned reasons In addition to that BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH excludes any warranty liability claims for any per sonal and or material damage if such damage is due to one or more of the following causes e inappropriate use of the frequency inverter e non compliance with the instructions warnings and prohibitions contained in the documentation e unauthorized modifications of the solar inverter e insufficient monitoring of parts of the machine plant which are subject to wear e repair work at the machine plant not carried out properly or in time e catastrophes by external impact and Force Majeure 12
433. rs this user manual must also be handed over 13 Obligation 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile AF Bonfiglioli General safety instructions and information on use 2 General safety instructions and information on use The chapter General safety instructions and information on use contains general safety instructions for the Operator and the Operating Staff At the beginning of certain main chapters some safety in structions are included which apply to all work described in the relevant chapter Special work specific safety instructions are provided before each safety relevant work step 2 1 Terminology According to the documentation different activities must be performed by certain persons with certain qualifications The groups of persons with the required qualification are defined as follows Operator This is the entrepreneur company who which operates the frequency inverter and uses it as per the specifications or has it operated by qualified and instructed staff Operating staff The term Operating Staff covers persons instructed by the Operator of the frequency inverter and assigned the task of operating the frequency inverter Qualified staff The term Qualified Staff covers staff who is assigned special tasks by the Operator of the frequency inverter e g installation maintenance and service repair and troubleshooting Based on their qualifi cation and or know how qualified staff must be capable of identifying def
434. rval until service parameter Service Interval DC link 1530 can be set to 100 if setting 1 DC link is selected for parameter Reset Service Intervals 1539 10 3 2 Fan Signalling when service is required The service interval remaining until service of the fan largely depends on the wear and tear of the bearing components For this reason the service interval remaining until service depends on the speed and operating time of the fan The service interval remaining until service is calculated from these two values 1535 Operation Mode Service I nterval Fan Via parameter Operation Mode Service Interval Fan 1535 you can set how the warning is to occur when the remaining service interval until service has expired The information can be indicated in a parameter or a service message can be output 274 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Monitoring of service interval Service vw Bonfiglioli The service interval remaining until service is monitored The re 0 No Action maining service interval until service can be indicated via parameter Service Interval Fan 1531 No service info or message is output The service interval remaining until service is monitored The re f maining service interval until service can be indicated via parameter Service Parameter 1 Service Interval Fan 1531 As soon as the remaining time until Message service has expired parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show the message M0002 Service fan Fact
435. s Configuration 30 610 the motor chopper function is deactivated to prevent damages to the motor The other functions of the voltage con troller are not affected by this For asynchronous motors in V f control Configuration 30 110 the motor chopper function is not operative The other functions of the voltage controller are not affected by this The brake chopper is active dependent of the setting of Reference DC Link Limitation 680 See chapter 7 10 4 Brake chopper and brake resistor for parameterizing the switching threshold 215 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions Overvoltage controller active P680 Ud P421 or P423 680 Reference DC Link Limitation 681 Max Frequency Rise The overvoltage controller prevents a switch off of the frequency inverter in generator operation The reduction of the drive speed by a ramp gradient selected via parameter Deceleration Clockwise 421 or Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 can lead to an overvoltage in the DC link If the voltage exceeds the figure set by the parameter Reference DC Link Limitation 680 the deceleration is reduced in such a way that the DC link voltage is regulated to the set value If the DC link voltage cannot be regulated to the set reference value by the reduction of the deceleration the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency raised The output frequency is calculated by addition of the par
436. s 241 COMMOCUOM ces saccivisestitieacasceeiaceessteschiiaxes 41 CIMENSIONING ceee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeee teens 242 C Cable lengthissnssini nisin 39 40 CANOPEN asse3icseaassetnesacetcs cashaee reaa aae 75 CE COMPOMMILY sesiceseessccesesceereccaseaderseeceneeee 278 Cold Plate isisisi 318 SIZE E E et eee nveiiees 322 SIZE A E E E E E TT 322 ET E PEE E E E E E 323 COMMISSIONING sssssssssersrnserrrnnrnrrrrernrnnrernna 51 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 354 Index COMMUNICATION cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 98 MOUIES ccccesseeeesesseeeeseeaeeeesesaeeeesseas 308 SOUUP sipain 55 74 Compressor Application example 105 Conductor cross SectiOn eeeeeeeeeeees 34 Configuration ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 COMMECUON sivina 32 COMON anisina niria 122 Control FUNCtIONS ccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeanaeeeees 212 Intelligent current limits 212 PUD sen cet Gearecsecssixeseessinneee 219 Power failure regulation 216 Voltage controller 214 Control level cccccsseceesesseeeesesssseesesaaaeees 110 Control panel LOGK ET 123 144 153 161 163 Control Signals ssssssssssssssssssrrrrnrnnerennsnnna 196 Control terminals Setting Options anisina 47 Standard settings cccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeees 43 Conveying plant Application example 104 Copy parameter values seeen 253 Copying with Memory Card Warning MESSAGE eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
437. s 255 COpyrigRt erinra iiaia 13 Current controller n se 228 Current limit value controller sses 227 Current limitation s e 192 D Data SO nnen na 94 203 CNANQCOVEN siguran 203 Deceleration RAMPS ccccssseeeecesseeeeeeeaaes 147 DECOMMISSIONING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 22 Demultiplexer cccsssseeessssseeeesesseeeesenes 205 Designated USC ccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneees 15 Device test sisenenud ninnan inaa 117 DidgNOSiS iseasi 339 Digital input 2 Operation mode ssssssssssrsssrsrrresrrrennes 207 P lse tralMiicniii ona 209 PWM wi ssciccssnaeeicat Merhcootbecs atid ectiieniek 208 Repetition frequency s es 208 Digital input output eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 185 Digital inpUtS eceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 83 196 Evaluation logic 48 186 196 LOGIC SIQMAl ssrin 196 Digital outputs ccseeeeeeesseeeeeeaneeees 83 186 LOGIC Signal Sinnani 187 DIMENSIONS siaran nein 27 DIN Pail c scseusvoecseuvenetceveve cnt iesnunceseedentends 328 SIZG A E A T 328 Direct current Drake cccssseeeesesseeeeeeeees 131 Direction Of rotation eseese 147 155 CHECK arnoia 71 Start clockwise start anticlockwise 199 200 DMC Direct Moment Control 111 Parameters Menu PARA Index E Electrical connection cccssseeeeeeseeeeensaaes 32 Electrical CONNECTIONS cseeeeeeesteeeeenaaees 20 Electrical Installation 31 Sate siissthiswietin saints 31 Electronic Geah 95 163 Act
438. s deactivated The selected warning mask application can be read out via parameter Actual Appl Warning Mask 627 The above operation modes of parameter Create Appl Warning Mask 626 are encoded in the Actual Appl Warning Mask 627 The code is calculated by hexadecimal addition of the individual operation modes and the corresponding abbreviation A O1C1 2 Activate all warnings A 0001 BELT 10 Warning V belt A 0040 SERVICE 16 Warning Service A 0080 User 1 17 Warning User 1 A 0100 User 2 18 Warning User 2 195 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Output signals The output of a warning is signaled 215 Warning 1 7 mask appli 2 Output of warning activated in Create Appl Warning Mask 626 cation d For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs Parameter Warning Application 273 shows the Application Warnings independent from the created Warning mask 7 6 6 Digital inputs The assignment of the control signals to the available software functions can be adapted to the appli cation in question In addition to the available digital control inputs further internal logic signals are available as sources Each of the individual software functions is assigned to the various signal source
439. s of the frequency inverter can be controlled 168 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 1 Voltage 0 10V oa MFI1A 0 V 10 V Fixed characteristic Facto 2 Current 0 20 mA Current signal MFI1A 0 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic 3 Digital NPN active 0 V ney signal MFI1D 0 V 24 V Low switching with negative 4 Digital PNP active 24 V sie signal MFI1D 0 V 24 V High switching with positive 5 Current 4 20 mA Current signal MFI1A 4 mA 20 mA Fixed characteristic Voltage signal MFI1A 0 V 10 V The output signal is influ 6 Voltage characteristic enced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 454 457 Current signal MFI1A 0 mA 20 mA The output signal is in 7 Current characteristic fluenced by the set characteristic The characteristic can be set via parameters 454 457 Multifunction input MFI1 is configured by default for an analog reference value source with a voltage signal of 0 V to 10 V Alternatively you can select the operation mode for an analog current signal of 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA The current signal is continuously monitored and the fault message F1407 displayed if the maximum figure is exceeded 7 6 1 1 Multifunction input set as analog input MFI 1A The Multifunction input can be evaluated either as analogue or digital signal In the foll
440. s on system bus The value is processed as frequency 709 RxPDO1 Long2 Process data of system bus Refer to instructions on system bus The value is processed as frequency 2501 PLC Output Frequency 1 Output value of a PLC function Refer to application manual PLC 2502 PLC Output Frequency 2 Output value of a PLC function Refer to application manual PLC 10001 12502 Inverted values of signal sources 1 to 2502 7 9 5 2 4 Switching over between speed control and torque control Via the signal assigned to parameter n T Control Change Over 164 you can switch between speed control and torque control See chapter 7 6 6 10 n T control changeover 232 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 9 5 3 Speed controller 720 Operation mode speed controller The control of the torque forming current components is done in the outer control loop by the speed controller Via parameter Operation Mode 720 you can select the operation mode for the speed con troller The operation mode defines the use of the parameterizable limits These are referred to the direction of rotation and the direction of the torque and depend on the selected configuration Speed controller off controller is deactivated or the torque forming component is The limitation of the speed controller assigns the upper limit to the Limits for motor operation of the drive Independent of the direction of rota
441. s per DIN 44081 The input signal must be analog Temperature measurement A thermal overload is displayed via the operator panel and parameter Warnings 269 The warning is dis played as soon as the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is reached Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for tempera ture measurement with a KTY measuring resistor KTY84 The in put signal must be analog Parameter Winding temperature 226 shows the actual value 138 06 2013 Error and warning behavior Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Temperature measurement The frequency inverter is switched off immediately as soon as the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is reached The error switch off is displayed by message F0400 Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperature measurement with a KTY measuring resistor KTY84 The input signal must be analog Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows the actual value Temperature measurement The frequency inverter is switched off as soon as the value of Max Temp Motor Winding 617 is reached The error switch off is displayed by message F0400 The error switch off is delayed by one minute Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperature measurement with a KTY measur ing resistor KTY84 The input signal must be analog Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows the actual value Temperature measurement A thermal overload is displayed via the operator panel and paramete
442. s possible Devices with Functional Safety are marked accordingly For information regarding the marking please comply with the application manual Functional Safety Type designation Device overview v Bonfiglioli Vectron 3 3 Software Version Identification The Software version plate is situated right from the memory card slot and left from the Control terminals SW Version 25 Software Version Identification 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile G amp D Bonfiglioli 3 4 Overview of components and Heat sink Communication interface X21 oe WS Device overview connection terminals Mains connection SES Relay output potential f elay output potential free SS gt AN SS Type plate SS Operator panel n Plug in section for A optional communication module with RJ45 connection Memory card slot N Control terminals dl ue Motor connection See Mains voltage connection Chapter 5 5 The safety instructions must be complied with strictly Chapter 5 1 Motor Connection Chapter 5 6 The safety instructions must be complied with strictly Chapter 5 1 Control terminals and relay output Chapter 5 7 The safety instructions must be complied with strictly Chapter 5 1 CAN connection terminals Separate instructions on System bus or CANopen Operator panel Chapter 6 1 Port for memor
443. s reduced can be set via parameter Reduction Limit Ti Tc 580 If the heat sink temperature falls below the thresh old set via parameter Reduction Limit Ti Tc 580 by 5 C the switching frequency is increased again step by step No Description Min Max Fact sett Reduction Limit Ti Tc 25 C The limit for the switching frequency reduction is influenced by the intelligent current limits depending on the selected Operation Mode 573 and the output current If they have been switched off or provide the full overload current the switching frequency is reduced when the output current exceeds the limit of 87 5 of the long term over load current 60 s The switching frequency is increased if the output current drops below the reference current of the next highest switching frequency 7 10 2 Fan 39 Switch On Temperature The fans run in two power stages The fans ar switched on with the following conditions e Ifthe inside capacitor or heat sink temperature exceeds the value of Switch On Temperature 39 the inside fan and the heat sink fan will be switched on and run at half power A possible external fan is also switched on via the parameterized digital output e Independent of the setting of Switch On Temperature 39 the fans start at half power when internal fixed temperature thresholds internal temperature Capacitor temperature haven been reached e If the measured temperatures increase also at half power of the fans t
444. s via parameterizable inputs This enables a flexible use of the digital control signals 559 Digital inputs PNP NPN Via parameter Digital inputs PNP NPN 559 the evaluation at the digital inputs can be selected as PNP high switching or NPN low switching 0 NPN active 0 V a input NPN Low switching with negative sig Digital input PNP High switching with positive sig 1 PNP active 24 V nal Factory cori g p g In order to use multifunction input MFI1 as a digital input setting 3 or 4 must be selected for parame ter Operation Mode MFII 452 X12 3 3 Digital NPN active 0 V Low switching with negative signal 4 Digital PNP active 24 V High switching with positive signal In order to use multifunction input MFI2 as a digital input setting 3 or 4 must be selected for parame ter Operation Mode MFI2 562 Rias PEOI Low switching with negative signal Factory 4 Digital PNP active 24 V High switching with positive signal In order to use the digital input output terminal X11 6 as a digital input setting 0 Input IN3D must be selected for parameter Operation Mode Terminal X11 6 558 i The digital input output is set as digital in X11 6 0 Input IN3D it Facto ttina For setting of X11 6 as digital output refer to chapter 7 6 4 Digital input output IN3D OUT3D 196 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfig
445. saaaeees 242 7 10 4 1 Dimensioning of brake resistor c ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeea aaa eeeeeeeeeeeaeaaanaaes 243 7 10 5 Motor Chopper riisiin ee a a a ened eens 244 7AO 6 Motor PrOteCthomice sseesscicssedeesdveccssecssavecassbennsbediseedsaaddensbecsususecuseenseyuevsgeessepeesvedenmees 245 7 10 6 1 Motor protection by Motor Circuit Breaker sssssessssssssrrrrnrnsrrennnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnne 245 7 10 6 2 Motor Protection by It MOnitoring sccsessecsesssessessssssssssesseeseessaesseessetenees 248 710 7 V p lt MOMIRONING 55 ccdscesessesasssiccaecccsssnereg Ta aaa A a aTa 250 7 10 8 Traverse TUMCCION kasiri ea a AT EE a AA E 250 7 10 9 System Catal isinisisi airar aran a ia a iiaa raaa aa araa 253 7 10 10 Service interval MONItOT NO ssinsrorcssinia nan ai 253 70 1 Copy Parameters agsia snan Na e a aa aAa S aaa 253 7 10 11 1 Copying using the operator Panel c ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaaaaees 254 7 This document 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x EJ Bonfiglioli Content 7 10 11 2 Copying using the PC control software ssssssssrssssssssrrnnnnnnerennsnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnne 256 7 10 12 Converter Profibus from to Internal Notation cccccccssscceseeeessseeeseeeseeessaeeesaaees 256 8 ENERGY SAVING bossssssssscssiscticcssessicrccsancaaenasccadccndssecanenasssaacancaaatadnencaeanstaadensenee 257 8 1 Energy saving function ssssssssssssennnuunnn
446. sage Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays message M0000 if the remaining service interval until service of the DC link has not elapsed and no service is required 273 Monitoring of service interval 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Service Warning signal Expiry of the time remaining until service is signaled 264 For linking to frequency inverter functions Warning service For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the 50 DC link parameters 531 532 533 or 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs Operation Mode Service Interval DC link 1534 must be set to 2 Warning Time remaining until next service 1530 Service I nterval DC link Parameter Service Interval DC link 1530 indicates the service interval remaining until next service in percent If a value of 0 is displayed service is recommended It should also be checked if the com ponent must be replaced High ambient temperature and frequency inverter is not in operation Even with the frequency inverter switched off the electrolyte capacitors may age due to high ambient temperatures The times at which the frequency inverter is switched off are not considered in the calculation of the time remaining until next service As a result the indicated service interval until next service may be too long The remaining service interval until service is an estimated value The remaining service inte
447. scription Min Max Fact sett Reference Imr Lower Limit 0 01 Irn 0 01 Irn Control Deviation Limitation 0 00 100 00 10 00 Inn Nominal value of frequency inverter Oc Overload capacity of frequency inverter 7 9 6 Real time tuning optimizing motor parameters in operation 1520 Operation mode real time tuning Motor parameters measured during commissioning setup at standstill will change during operation e g as a result of changing motor winding temperatures Real time tuning compensates these chang es While the drive is running the controller settings are adjusted continuously to changing motor properties and the control behavior is optimized Real time tuning can be used in V f characteristic control Configuration 30 110 and the field orientated control methods Configuration 30 410 or 610 Parameter Operation mode real time tuning 1520 enables the following settings Activation of real time tuning Optimized control parameters are to be saved after shut down of the frequency inverter Optimized controller parameters are to be applied in a new data set after a data set changeover 239 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Ly B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions parameters are not changed during operation Factory setting Real time tuning is switched on After shut down or restart of the frequency inverter or after a data set changeover the changed controller parameters are del
448. sholds of P506 and P507 DC link limitation active Overvoltage controller switched on the 1 Udc Limitation active Brake and Motor chopper are active and switch with the parameter ized thresholds of P506 and P507 Factory setting Power failure regulation switched on Brake and Motor chopper are 2 Mains Support active active and switch with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and P507 Suitable for quick shutdown 3 Udc Limit amp Mains Overvoltage controller and power failure regulation switched on with Supp active motor chopper Power failure regulation switched on During the Mains Support mo Mains Support active tor and brake chopper are deactivated In all other cases motor and Chopper not active brake chopper are active and switch with the parameterized thresh olds of P506 and P507 Overvoltage controller and power failure regulation switched on During the Mains Support motor and brake chopper are deactivated In all other cases motor and brake chopper are active and switch with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and P507 Udc Limit amp Mains 13 Supp active Chopper not active The function motor chopper is available only in the field orientated control methods in configuration 410 parameter Configuration 30 When an operation mode with motor chopper is selected set the Trigger Threshold 507 lt Refer ence DC Link Limitation 680 10 V See chapter 7 10 5 Motor chopper For synchronous motor
449. srssssrrrnsnrrrnnnnnrensnnnnnnnnntnnnnnnnnn nanten nnnnnnnn 227 7 9 4 1 Slip compensatio issemmi ea a adi ain aa 227 7 9 4 2 Current limit value controller ssssssssssssssssssrssrrrsrnsrnrnsnrnrnnnntnrinannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnae 228 7 9 5 Functions of field orientated control sssssssssssssrsrssrrrsrnnrnrnnntnnnnnntntnnnnnnnnetannnannnnnnnan 229 7 9 5 1 Current Controler isian aaaeaii aA Aaa aaa aaRS 229 7 952 TORQUE CONTIOM ER aiino a a a aa 231 7 9 5 3 Speed CONtHONED sisiran aa n aa deacetnenesteanatvnaneaeaieeausis 233 7 9 5 4 Acceleration pre control cccccccssseesesssseesesenseeeeseeseeeesssaseeesesasseeeesasaeeessaeeeeeaas 236 7 9 5 5 Field Controller siiin imanni aa a AA ENRETE 237 7 9 5 6 Modulation Controller v s iis iecseistocciecsesceteiaei sed eveelnediiensteivtvaavsesdsateaeevonaeesee 238 7 9 6 Real time tuning optimizing motor parameters in OperatiONn ccccsssseeeesseeeeeeeaeeeeees 239 7 10 Special FUNCTIONS 11 cceceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeneaseeeenoaseesenoassesenseooaseesenoaseesenoessensnoaees 240 7 10 1 Pulse Width modulation 00 te ener ne nner ses aaa ee eesaaaeeeesaaaaes 240 FAQ a a E E A suede ctavecnsseceugeve sce eedea E A T A Sotupeende site bu bbeelaees 241 7 10 3 Standby mode and energy Saving FUNCION ccceee eee e eee a eeeeee eee ee eee eaeaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaee 241 7 10 4 Brake chopper and brake resistor cccceeeessseeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaaeeeesaaaeeeesaeaaeeesasaaaeese
450. ss sections of PE conductor according to EN61800 5 1 Mains cable up to 10 mm2 Install two protective conductors of the same size as the mains cable or one protective conductor of a size of 10 mm2 Mains cable 10 16 mm2 Install one protective conductor of the same size as the mains cable Mains cable 16 35 mm2 Install one protective conductor with a cross section of 16 mm2 Mains cable gt 35 mm2 Install one protective conductor of half the size of the mains ca ble 34 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Dimensioning of conductor cross section Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli 5 4 1 Typical cross sections The following table provides an overview of typical cable cross sections copper cable with PVC insula tion 30 C ambient temperature continuous mains current max 100 rated input current Actual cable cross section requirements may deviate from these values due to actual operating conditions Single phase connection L1 N 230 V 01 0 09kW 02 0 12 kW 03 0 18 kW 05 0 25 kW 07 0 37 kW 1 5 mm2 2x1 5 mm or 1x10 mm2 1 5 mm2 09 0 55 kW 11 0 75 kw 13 1 1 kW 15 1 5 kW 18 2 2 kW 2 5 mm2 2x2 5 mm2 or 1x10 mm2 1 5 mm2 el ee 4 mm2 2x4 mm2 or 1x10 mm2 1 5 mm2 21 3 0 kw D Connection on protective earth on mounting plate Three phase connection L1 L2 L3 230 V 01 0 18 kW 02 0
451. stall the mains supply cable separate from the control and data cables and the motor cable DC link connection The frequency inverter may be connected via the terminals and of terminal block X10 to fur ther Agile or ACTIVE devices or to a common direct voltage source Cables longer than 300 mm are to be shielded The shield must be connected across a wide area contact on both sides to the un painted conductive mounting panel Control connection Control and signal cables must be kept physically separate from the power cables Analog signal lines must be shielded The shield is to be connected to the unpainted conductive mounting panel that is connected to equipotential bonding An optional shield sheet can be used for shielding Refer to chapter 12 2 1 Shield sheet for control cables Motor and brake resistor Connect the shield of the motor cable to the unpainted conductive mounting panel that is connected to equipotential bonding An optional shield sheet can be used for shielding Refer to chapter 12 2 2 Shield sheet for motor cables The signal cable used for monitoring the motor temperature must be kept separate from the motor cable Connect the shield of this line on both sides If a brake resistor is used the connection cable must be shielded Connect the shield in consideration of EMC 33 EMC Information 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile yy Bonfiglioli Electrical Installation Line choke Line chokes
452. stic Curve Point Y2 100 00 100 00 100 00 The coordinates of the points relate as a percentage to the analog signal with 10 V or 20 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519 The direc tion of rotation can be changed via the digital inputs and or by selection of the points The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error Warning Behaviour 563 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 564 In the settings 6 Voltage characteristic or 7 Current characteristic of parameter Operation Mode MFTI 452 the following characteristic is effective Y X2 98 Y2 100 Pos maximum value Point 1 X1 2 00 10 V 0 20 V Y1 0 00 50 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 50 Hz X1 2 Y1 0 Point 2 X2 98 00 10 V 9 80 V Y2 100 00 50 00 Hz 50 00 Hz 10v X v 0 ma 0 2 V 20 mA Neg maximum value 177 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions The characteristic can be adjusted via parameters 564 567 of the application The freely configurable characteristic enables setting a tolerance at the ends as well as a reversal of the direction of rotation The following example shows the inverse reference value specification with additional reversal of the direction of rotation This is often used in pressure control systems Pos maximum val
453. stics The output current is limited by the current limit value controller or the speed GoU 2 Tim controller C 00 40 Tlim The output power or the torque is limited by the speed controller C 00 80 Tctr Switch over of field orientated control between speed and torque controlled control method C 01 00 Rstp le Operation Mode 620 selected in starting behavior limits the output cur C 02 00 IxtLtLim Ss limit of the long term Ixt 60 s reached intelligent current limits C 04 00 IxtStLim a limit of the short term Ixt 1 s reached intelligent current limits Max heat sink temperature T reached intelligent current limits of Operation C 08 00 TAM Mode 573 active Max motor temperature Tprc reached intelligent current limits of Operation C 10 00 PTClim Mode 573 active Reference frequency reached the Maximum Frequency 419 The frequency C 20 00 Flim eee a limitation is active Example The controller status is displayed C0024 UDctr Ilim The controller status results from the hexadecimal sum of the controller codes 0004 0020 0024 At the same the power failure regulation and also the current limita tion of the speed controller are active 14 3 Warning status and warning status application The current warning is displayed by a message in the warning status and can be used for an early message of a critical operational condition Warnings are also displayed on the operator panel If sev eral warnings are present
454. sumption of the frequency inverter In addition the generator energy generated during braking operation can be used instead of converting it to heat Energy saving options The frequency inverter offers the following energy saving options Standby mode of frequency inverter Standby mode of operator panel Energy saving function The operating point of the motor is optimized so that the power consump tion is kept to a minimum Quadratic V f characteristic in the case of control of an asynchronous motor DC link connection Energy optimized braking PID controller technology controller When the reference value is reached the motor is switched off External DC 24 V power supply Power supply can be switched off while the system is not in opera tion Temperature controlled fans Automatic switching frequency changeover Inthe frequency inverter special energy saving circuitry is integrated 8 1 Energy saving function The operating point of the motor is optimized so that the power consumption is kept to a minimum and energy saving is maximized The energy saving function can be switched on if one of the follow ing control methods for parameter Configuration 30 is selected 110 IM sensor less control V f characteristic 410 IM sensor less field orientated control DMC Via the following parameters the energy saving function can be set up Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 15
455. sures if a warning message is issued The warning message can be read via parameter Warnings 269 or output via one of the digital con trol outputs 7 4 1 Overload I xt 405 Warning limit short term I xt 406 Warning limit long term I xt The permissible load behavior depends on the technical data of the frequency inverters and the ambi ent conditions The selected Switching frequency 400 defines the rated current and the available overload for one second or sixty seconds The Warning limit short term Ixt 405 and Warning limit long term Ixt 406 are to be parameterized accordingly No Description Min Max Fact sett Warning limit short term Ixt 100 Warning limit long term Ixt 100 Output signals Reaching of warning limits is reported via digital signals 165 Warning Ixt 1 The Warning Limit Short Term Ixt 405 or Warning Limit Long Term Ixt 7 Ixt warning 406 has been reached 1 For linking to frequency inverter functions 2 For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 Digital outputs 135 Error and warning behavior 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfi glioli Parameter descriptions 7 4 2 Temperature 407 Warning limit heat sink temp 408 Warning limit inside temp The ambient conditions and the energy dissipation at the current operating point result in the fre quency inverter heating up In order to
456. t repetition frequency or pulse train is selected for Operation Mode IN2D 496 In the factory settings IN2D is linked to parameter Start Anticlockwise 69 If the PWM repetition frequency or pulse train input and the function Start anticlockwise are to be used parameter Start Anticlockwise 69 must be assigned another digital input 7 6 7 1 PWM input Digital input IN2D terminal X11 5 can be used as PWM input For parameter Operation Mode IN2D 496 select setting 10 PWM 0 100 or 11 PWM 100 100 For definition of reference values the following settings can be selected Reference Percentage Source 1 476 10 Repetition Percentage Value Reference Percentage Source 2 494 10 Repetition Percentage Value The percentage is referred to Maximum Reference Percentage 519 652 PWM Offset 653 PWM Amplification Via parameters PWM Offset 652 and PWM Amplification 653 the PWM input signal can be adjusted for the application No Description Min Max Fact sett PWM Offset 100 00 100 00 0 00 PWM Amplification 1000 0 100 0 PWM signal Ton T PWM Input 258 shows the actual value of the PWM input PWM frequencies in the range between 50 Hz and 15 kHz can be evaluated PWM value PWM Offset 652 x PWM Amplification 653 208 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Output as frequency val
457. t Clockwise 68 X11 5 IN2D 72 IN2D Start Anticlockwise 69 X12 1 IN4D 74 IN4D Fixed Frequency Change Over 1 66 X12 2 IN5D 75 IN5D Error Acknowledgment 103 X11 3 STOA 70 Enable fixed assignment Enable X13 3 STOB 70 Enable fixed assignment Changeover of evaluation at digital inputs Terminal Operation modes X11 4 INID 0 NPN active 0 V X11 5 IN2D Digital inputs X12 1 IN4D PNP NPN 559 X12 2 INSD 1 PNP active 24 V Multifunction inputs analog input digital input Terminal Operation modes Function Analog Operation Reference Frequency X12 3 MF11A 1 voltage 0 10 V Mode 1 voltage Source 1 475 Refer Digital 2 current 0 20 mA MFII 0 10V ence Percentage MF1D 3 digital NPN active OV 452 Source 1 476 Analog 4 digital PNP active 24V O ti dicital Thermo contact for MFI2A 5 current 4 20 mA ei on see P570 204 X12 4 Digtal 6 voltage characteristic T 3 active Set Operation Mode i 7 current characteristic MEI2D 562 OV Motor Temp 570 to 1 20r3 Digital output Terminal Function X13 5 OUTID Operation mode OUTID X13 5 531 2 Run Signal Multifunction output analog output digital output Terminal Operation modes Function s Digital Source Setting Fre MFO1D nn 1 Digital MFO1D MFOID 554 4 quency MFO1A ee 10 Analog PWM Analog Source 7 Abs value of Mode MFO1A MFOIA 553 actual frequency ee meoir MFO 59 aera RF PT Output Val Actual Frequen X13 6 quency ue MFOIF 555 cy 550 MFO1F Pulse
458. t anti characteristic clockwise V f characteristic Enable Stopping Deliavior Operation mode Reference energy saving speed function 1550 p lying star t TE Energy saving Tera ixt i p function on 1552 Maximum heat with signal 163 gt Reference frequency e neriure Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 Operc ode reached Error signal P68 amp P69 0 630 j y Run signal x 1 0 Operation mode 573 103 Applications 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 7 5 Conveying plant 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 53 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 5 Hz s 421 Deceleration clockwise 5 Hz s 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 Analog Value MFI1A 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 zero 493 Operation mode reference frequency 1 reference source 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 0 Coast to Stop Coast to Stop P68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 645 Operation Mode Flying Start 2 On according to reference 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 531 Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal Conveyor belt drive lt o ee een Ye Refer Ad e f
459. t is configured as digital output 0 24 V Analog PWM Multifunction output is configured as analog output 0 24 V Factory MFO1A setting PWM frequency 126 Hz Multifunction output is configured as analog output 0 24 V Factory AE a i setting PWM frequency 32 kHz Function available in devices marked integrated Functional Safe cy RF MFO1F 24 V fmax 150 kHz 30 Pulse train PT MFO1F 2 Dependent on the voltage supply of the control unit The maximum guaranteed values is 15 V 10 11 Multifunction output is configured as pulse train output Output characteristic analog mode If the multifunction output is set as an analog output an output characteristic can be set Parameter Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 550 must be set to 10 Analog PWM MFO1A factory setting 551 Analog Voltage 100 552 Analog Voltage 0 The voltage range of the output signal at the multifunction output can be adjusted The value range of the actual value selected via parameter Analog Source MFO1A 553 is assigned to the value range of the output signal which is adjusted via the parameters Analog Voltage 100 551 and Analog Voltage 0 552 Description Min X Fact sett Analog Voltage 100 Analog Voltage 0 Analog Source MFO1A 553 with actual abso Analog Source MFO1A 553 with sign lute value 22V 22V 10V 10V 5V ov ov 0 50 100 100 0 100 182 Operating Instructions Ag
460. t signals Reaching of a limit selected in Operation Mode 573 can be signaled via digital outputs 15 Warning Current Limitation _ The intelligent current limits limit the output current Controller Current Limit The overload reserve for 60 s has been used up and the out 16 i E Long Term Ixt put current is being limited Controller Current Limit The overload reserve for 1 s has been used up and the output 17 NA Short Term Ixt current is being limited Max heat sink temperature T reached The intelligent current limits are active Controller Current Limit Max motor temperature reached The intelligent current limits Motor Temp are active 18 Controller Current Limit Tc 19 214 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 9 2 Voltage controller 670 Operation Mode voltage controller The voltage controller contains the functions necessary for monitoring the DC link voltage The DC link voltage which rises in generator operation in example during the braking process of the motor is controlled to the set limit value by the voltage controller The power failure regulation uses the rotation energy of the drive to bridge short term power failures The voltage controller is set with parameter Operation Mode 670 The function is switched off Brake and Motor chopper are active and switch with the parameterized thre
461. t sink 309 Assembly variants 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 1 2 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 kW to 1 1 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 0 18 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 11 1 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 60 43 U C 222 10 7 Poo 58 M e l i A Sr Li a p 195 222 10 i ler ae 7 Te cl cs D Y y a Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm 310 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Assembly variants Options vw Bonfiglioli 12 9 1 3 Size 2 3 3 0 kW to 5 5 kW 1 1 5 kW to 2 2 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply 1ph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 15 2 1 5 3 0 3 0 18 2 2 2 4 0 4 0 19 2 a e 5 5 56 251 I e h l Ye CAG a ei bij j Z h KELL la
462. t stopped by user T0002 Permanent error Non acknowledgeable error present No further test possible T0003 Signals on digitals inputs STOA and STOB for enable missing No enable T0010 At the beginning of the test an inadmissible current flows T0201 U open It was not possible to impress a positive current in branch U T0202 V open It was not possible to impress a positive current in branch V T0203 W open It was not possible to impress a positive current in branch W T0204 U open It was not possible to impress a negative current in branch U T0205 V open It was not possible to impress a negative current in branch V T0206 W open It was not possible to impress a negative current in branch W T0211 U short circuit Short circuit cutoff during impression of positive current in branch U T0212 V short circuit Short circuit cutoff during impression of positive current in branch V T0213 W short circuit Short circuit cutoff during impression of positive current in branch W T0214 U short circuit Short circuit cutoff during impression of negative current in branch U T0215 V short circuit Short circuit cutoff during impression of negative current in branch V T0216 W short circuit Short circuit cutoff during impression of negative current in branch W T0221 Earth fault Phase U Earth fault cutoff during impression of positive current in branch U T0222 Earth fault Phase V Earth fault cutoff during impression of positive current in bra
463. t up routine again In case an error message is displayed again enter the value 110 for parameter Configura tion 30 sensorless control according to V f characteristic if value 410 was set so far Carry out the set up routine again R sistance The measurement of the stator resistance did not deliver a plausible value Check the cables at the terminals of the motor and the frequency inverter 012 measurement failed The leakage inductance measurement has failed because the motor has a high slip Correct the rated motor values in parameters 370 371 372 Inductance SF Fozi noe for proper connection and check the contacts for corrosion and safe con tact Carry out the set up routine again The measurement of the rotor resistance did not deliver a plausible value F022 measurement Check the cables at the terminals of the motor and the frequency inverter failed for proper connection and check the contacts for corrosion and safe con tact Carry out the set up routine again SF026 vi abort The setup routine is aborted If an error or a warning is signaled Press ESC to correct a parameter value after an error message or warning Press ENT to suppress a warning message Setup is continued It is recommended that the entered data be checked S Resistance S In the case of problems not triggering an error message you can try to find an appropriate measure following the instructions in chapter 13 3 Troubleshooting
464. ta sets identically rec ommended Plaus Check Machine The auto set up routine checks the rated motor parameters in the ae Data DSO four data sets plausibility check 108 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Set up via the Communication Interface Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli 21 Se Data DS1 bility Data DS2 bility Data DS3 bility Data DS4 bility The auto set up routine determines extended motor data via the _ Calculation and Para parameter identification feature calculates depend ent parameters Ident DSO and stores the parameter values in all of the four data sets identi cally Ident DS1 calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 1 Ident DS2 calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 2 Ident DS3 calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 3 34 Calculation and Para Further motor data are measured dependent pa rameters are Ident DS4 calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 4 _ Para Ident Machine Extended motor data are measured and saved identically in all Data only DSO data sets Other parameter values already set are maintained Data only DS1 parameter values already set are maintained Data only DS2 parameter values already set are maintained Para Ident Machine Extended motor data are measured and saved data set 3 Data only DS3 _ Para Ident Machine Extended motor data are measured and saved data set 4 Other Data onl
465. tall the frequency inverters on a metal mounting panel that is connected to the equipotential bonding Ideally the mounting panel should be galvanized not painted Provide proper equipotential bonding within the plant Plant components such as control cabinets control panels machine frames must be connected to the equipotential bonding by means of low inductive wire mesh Connect the shields of the cables on both sides to the mounting panel that is not painted and connected to the equipotential bonding Connect the shield of analog control cables to the equipotential bonding only on one side near to the frequency inverter Connect the frequency inverter and other components e g external filters and other components to the equipotential bonding via short cables Keep the cables as short as possible make sure that cables are installed properly using appropri ate cable clamps etc Contactors relays and solenoids in the electrical cabinet are to be provided with suitable interfer ence suppression components 32 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Electrical connections overview Electrical Installation vw Bonfiglioli L1 1 fuse L 2 circuit breaker L3 3 line choke optional N 4 input filter optional 1 5 cable shield 6 brake resistor optional 7 output filter optional Optional shield sheets can be used for the cable shielding Refer to chapter 12 2 Shield sheets Mains Connection In
466. tarting current P623 is impressed The IxR compensation compensates the voltage drop at the stator resistor Operation Mode 0 Off Control according to V f characteristic 1 Magnetization Set P780 and P781 2 Magnetization Current Impression Set P623 P624 P780 and P781 3 Magnetization IxR Compensation Set P624 P780 and P781 4 Magnetization Current Impression Set P623 P624 P780 and P781 IxR Compensation 12 Magnetization Current Impression Set P623 P624 P780 and P781 with Ramp Stop For high start torque 14 Magnetization Current Impression Set P623 P624 P780 and P781 with Ramp Stop IxR Compensation For high start torque Starting Current value Ipm PI controller for start current P621 P part 2 00 For sufficient torque if a high start torque is re P622 I part 50 ms quired The start current is impressed until the output frequency reaches the value of P624 Frequency Limit 2 60 Hz The starting current is impressed up to this output frequency Max Flux Formation Time 300 ms The current during flux formation value of P781 is not impressed longer than this time Current during Flux Formation value Irn Upon startup this current value is impressed The time for current impression is limited 1 Nominal value of frequency inverter 88 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 After first commissioning Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli Starting behaviour field oriented P623 P624 77
467. tated control The field orientated control systems are based on a cascade control and the calculation of a complex machine model In the course of the guided commissioning a map of the connected machine is pro duced by the parameter identification and transferred to various parameters Some of these parame ters are visible and can be optimized for various operating points 7 9 5 1 Current controller 700 Amplification 701 Integral Time The current controller with the parameters Amplification 700 and Integral Time 701 is applicable for field orientated control setting 410 or 610 of parameter Configuration 30 In the control according to V f characteristic setting 110 of parameter Configuration 30 the current controller is only applicable for the function Flying Start parameter Operation Mode Flying Start 645 The inner control loop of the field orientated control comprises two current controllers The field orientated control thus impresses the motor current into the machine via two components to be con trolled This is done by controlling the flux forming current value Isa controlling the torque forming current value Isg By separate regulation of these two parameters a decoupling of the system equivalent to an external ly excited direct current machine is achieved The set up of the two current controllers is identical and enables joint setting of am plification as well as the integral time for both controllers For t
468. ter 5 minutes fault F0703 is displayed During this time the warning mes sage A0100 is displayed The phase monitor switches the frequency inverter off immediately with error message F0403 in the case of a motor phase failure Mains Error Switch 10 off Mains amp Motor Er ror Switch Off after 5 minutes with error message F0703 in the case of a mains phase failure _ In the case of a mains phase failure the drive is stopped after 5 20 Mains Shutdown minutes fault F0703 is displayed The drive is switched off immediately in the case of a motor phase 21 Mains amp Motor failure Shutdown The drive is stopped after 5 minutes in the case of a mains phase failure 7 4 8 Automatic Error Acknowledgment 578 Allowed No of Auto Acknowl 579 Restart Delay The automatic error acknowledgment enables acknowledgment of the faults Overcurrent FO507 and Overvoltage F0700 without intervention by an overriding control system or the user If one of the aforementioned errors occurs the frequency inverter switches the power semi conductors off and waits for the time stated with the parameter Restart Delay 579 If the error is acknowledged the speed of the machine is determined with the quick Search Run function and synchronized to the ro tating machine The automatic error acknowledgment makes use of Quick Synchronization opera tion mode regardless of the Flying Start Operation Mode 645 The in
469. ter 7 6 6 8 Error Acknowledgment 98 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Error Acknowledgment via keypad Commissioning v Bonfiglioli Vectro 6 7 Applications The parameters required for typical applications are listed Selecting an application makes commis sioning easier Depending on the application additional settings may be required Note The PC software VPlus provides application masks for easy commissioning of applications 6 7 1 Pump 30 Configuration 110 IM sensorless control V f characteristic 420 Acceleration clockwise 10 Hz s 421 Deceleration clockwise 0 01 Hz 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 Zero 493 Operation mode reference frequency 1 reference source 418 Minimum frequency 10 Hz 419 Maximum frequency 53 Hz 420 Acceleration clockwise 10 H2 s 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 1 Analog Value MFI1A 606 Type V f characteristic 2 quadratic 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 11 Stop Off Stop Off P68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 651 Operation mode auto start O Off 1550 Operation mode energy saving function 2 Automatic 1552 Energy saving function on 163 Reference Frequency reached 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 7 Off 531 Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10
470. ter Rated Rated volt Operating Operational Operational Weight current age frequency leakage temperature current range Type A V Hz mA XC kg FTV001B AGL 8 3x480 275 50 60 Hz 3 5 25 100 0 9 FTV002B AGL 10 3x480 275 50 60 Hz 3 5 25 100 1 1 FTV003B AGL 26 3x480 275 50 60 Hz 3 5 25 100 1 7 Safety terminal block Flex wire AWG 10 Flex wire 4 mm Solid wire 6 mm Dimensions FTV001B AGL FTV002B AGL Input filter 301 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli FTVO003B AGL 12 5 2 Booktype filter 230 Options The filter can be installed next to the frequency inverter onto the mounting plate The connection terminal consists of a safety terminal block Frequency inverter Recommended filter kW Size Type 0 25 2 2 1 FTVOO7A 3 0 4 0 2 FTVO16A 5 5 7 5 3 FTVO16A 9 2 11 0 3 FTVO30A Filter Rated Rated Operating Operational Operational Power Weight current voltage frequency leakage cur temperature loss rent range Type A V Hz mA AC W kg FTV007A 7 3x480 50 60 Hz 33 25 100 3 8 0 5 FTVO16A 16 3x480 50 60 Hz 33 25 100 6 1 0 8 FTVO30A 30 3x480 50 60 Hz 33 25 100 11 8 1 2 At 25 C 5
471. ter type Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions Unknown parameter The mentioned parameter is not contained inside the target device If an error occurs in the LOAD function while the parameters are written the error number and the parameter number will be displayed alternately Press button ENT to continue the function Press button ESC to cancel the function Please check the compatibility of different firmware versions when copying parameter sets between different devices When copying from a device with a newer firmware version into devices with older firmware versions in individual cases the warning mes sage Err 111 may appear The market software of the Agile device series is downward compatible Data from devices with older firmware versions can be transferred to devices with newer firm ware Parameters are always saved in control level 3 Professional on the memory card This is independent of the currently selected control level 255 Special functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO B onfi glioli Parameter descriptions 7 10 11 2 Copying using the PC control software Parameter values can be saved on standard digital memory cards Bonfiglioli Vectron Resource Pack using the PC control software VPlus and uploaded on a frequency inverter 0e 05 VPlus bil CI SAVE LOAD
472. terfaces without EtherCAT LEP P ENT EtherCAT doesn t require parameterization at the frequency inverter The settings are done for EtherCAT completely via the PLC 1Selection is possible only if an optional communication module CM PDPV1 is installed 74 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Commissioning of a communication interface Commissioning vw Bonfiglioli CANopen Parameter Display 387 CAN Node Number node id 385 CAN Baudrate baud 276 CAN interface setting CM CAN X12 IF SEE Set the terminals X12 5 and X12 6 to protocol CANopen 2 Or Set an optional communication module CM CAN to CANopen Node ID 1 cer en waa a os Bus configuration Node ID Deactivated SETUP communication P387 x 20 50 100 i25 C 250 CANopen at X12 5 and X12 6 a a System bus at module CM CAN bFud_ GD _000 EDS LF set GD __ GD Baud rate kBaud Interface setting CANopen at module CM CAN P385 P276 System bus at X12 5 and X12 6 Profibus Parameter Display 391 Profibus Node ID node id Node ID CF ES ETES Peak EED IONE Bus configuration Profibus O ode ID Deactivated SETUP communication 75 Commissioning of a communication interface 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Bonfiglioli Commissioning Systembus Parameter Display 900 Node ID nodE d 903 Baudrate baud 276 CAN interface setting CM CAN X12 IF SEE Set
473. ternal and externally connected hardware can be tested Errors in the frequency inverter external sensors the load motor and electrical con nections will be identified In order to be able to test individual components separately the device test is split up in individual tests which can be activated separately 7 2 3 1 Earth fault and short circuit test Test 1 there is a potential risk of personal injury or material damage If necessary access to hazard areas must be safely prevented If a synchronous motor is connected The test must not be started while the synchronous motor runs A Synchronous motors may move briefly while the test is performed It must be checked if Test 1 checks if there is an earth fault or a short circuit against DC link potential in the load motor or in the frequency inverter This test can be carried out with or without load In this test all six IGBTs transistors will be switched on briefly individually No current may flow in this process even if the load is connected P 117 Machine data 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CO Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions If for example there is a short circuit between the positive DC link potential P or and branch U see illustration the test would be stopped and error T0104 earth P U fault would be displayed This may either be a hard short circuit or a soft short circuit i e a short circuit with a relatively high resistance
474. the frequency inverter The hysteresis can be defined as a percentage of the adjustable range Max Min via parameter Reference Value Reached Tolerance Band 549 Description Fact sett en Reference Value Reached Toler pion pane So ance Band 190 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions wv Bonfiglioli Operation mode OUTID X13 5 531 digital output or 5 Reference frequency reached Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 532 or or Operation mode OUT3D X11 6 533 digital input output or 6 Reference percentage Digital Source MFO1D 554 multifunction output reached Reference Value Reached Tolerance Band 549 Set the value For linking to functions 163 Reference frequency reached or 178 Reference percentage reached Reference frequency Internal Reference Frequency 228 or Actual Frequency 241 Reference percentage or Reference Percentage Value 229 J Actual Percentage Value 230 av Digital output 163 Reference Frequency reached 178 Reference Percentage reached m m Example Maximum control deviation Hz Af x Reference Value Reached Hysteresis 549 Maximum Frequency 419 Minimum Frequency 418 x Reference Value Reached Hysteresis 549 50 Hz 3 5 Hz x 5 2 325 Hz Actual frequency Z Maximum frequency 50 Hz Reference frequency 30 Hz Minimum frequency 3 5 Hz
475. the frequency inverter 332 The output voltage motor voltage of the frequency inverter 335 Phase current Ia Measured current in motor phase U 336 Phase current Ib Measured current in motor phase V 337 Phase current Ic Measured current in motor phase W 338 Calculated effective output current motor current of the frequency inverter Current component forming the magnetic flux or the calculated 339 Isd reactive current reactive c rrent 340 Isq active current Current component forming the torque or the calculated active current 341 Rotor magnetizing cur Magnetizing current relative to the rated motor parameters and the rent operating point Torque calculated from the voltage the current and the control 342 Torque variables Input signal at multifunction input 1 terminal X12 3 in analog F Analog pee Operation mode MFII 452 voltage or current Input signal at multifunction input 2 terminal X12 4 in analog 374 Analog Input MEIA Operation mode MFI2 562 voltage or current Output signal at multifunction output 1 terminal X13 6 in setting 346 Analog output MFO1A 10 Analog PWM MFO1A of parameter Operation mode MFO1 X13 6 550 DC link Cap Tempera 348 ture Measured capacitor temperature Signal at multifunction output 1 in setting 20 repetition frequency FF MFO1F for Operation mode MFO1 X13 6 550 and according to selection for RF PT Output Value MFOIF 555 349 Repet
476. the frequency inverter e Safety information and warnings on the frequency inverter must not be removed 16 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Residual risks General safety instructions and information on use vw Bonfiglioli Vectron 2 6 Warning information and symbols used in the user manual 2 6 1 Hazard classes The following hazard identifications and symbols are used to mark particularly important information Identification of immediate threat holding a high risk of death or serious injury if not A avoided Identification of immediate threat holding a medium risk of death or serious injury if not avoided Identification of immediate threat holding a low risk of minor or moderate physical inju ry if not avoided NOTE Identification of a threat holding a risk of material damage if not avoided 2 6 2 Hazard symbols Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning A General hazard A Suspended load Electrical voltage A Hot surfaces 2 6 3 Prohibition signs Symbol Meaning No switching it is forbidden to switch the machine plant assembly on 17 Warning information and symbols used in the 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile user manual GS Bonfiglioli General safety instructions and information on use 2 6 4 Personal safety equipment Symbol Meaning Q Wear body protection 2 6 5 Recycling Symbol Meaning Recycling to avoid waste
477. the maximum current or voltage signal No Description Min Max Fact sett Tolerance Band 0 00 25 00 2 00 X2 Y2 X2 Y2 Pos maximum value Pos maximum value oy 10 V oy 10 V zero point 20 mA tolerance band X1 Y1 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 PPR Y1 Neg maximum value Neg maximum value Without tolerance band With tolerance band Hysteresis The default Minimum Frequency 418 or Minimum Reference Percentage 518 extends the parameter ized tolerance band to the hysteresis 172 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli X2 Y2 pos MaxXiMUM Value hoes eee ee seriuni pos minimum value Ape 10V lt 20 mA zero point tolerance band neg minimum value X1 Y1 neg maximum value AEON panatea es ues AEI TACE T OOIE EAE Tolerance band with set maximum frequency For example the output variable coming from positive input signals is kept on the positive minimum value until the input signal becomes lower than the value for the tolerance band in the negative direc tion Then the output variable follows the set characteristic 7 6 1 1 3 Monitoring of analog input signal 451 Filter time constant The time constant of the filter for the analog reference value can be set via the parameter Filter time constant 451 The time constant indicates the time during which the input signal is averaged by m
478. ticles e g chips dust wires screws tools can get inside the frequency inverter Otherwise there is the risk of short circuits A To avoid serious physical injury or considerable damage to property only qualified staff and fire A The frequency inverter complies with protection class IP20 only if the covers compo nents and terminals are mounted properly Overhead Installation or installation in horizontal position is not permissible NOTE Mount the devices with sufficient clearance to other components so that the cooling air can circulate freely Avoid soiling by grease and air pollution by dust aggressive gases etc Suction intakes of fans may not be covered 4 2 Installation Mounting distance d gt 100mm 27 Safety 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Gyo Bonfiglioli Mechanical Installation 4 2 1 Size 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 kW to 1 1 kW Valid for the following devices Frequency inverter Type Agile 202 Agile 402 Mains supply iph 3ph 3ph Power kW kW kW 01 1 0 09 0 18 aaa 02 1 0 12 0 25 0 25 03 1 0 18 0 37 0 37 05 1 0 25 0 55 0 55 07 1 0 37 0 75 0 75 09 1 0 55 1 1 1 1 111 0 75 1 5 1 5 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 amp Dimensions 170 60 to H 120 l 244 200 220 3 i er ed 30 Assembly
479. tiometer The reference speed or the percentage reference value of the drive can be set via digital control signals or with the operator panel Digital control signals Function Motorpoti via digital inputs Operator panel Function Keypad motorpoti The functions Motorpoti via digital inputs and Keypad motorpoti can be selected via the following parameters Via the reference frequency channel Reference Frequency Source 1 475 Reference Frequency Source 2 492 Via the reference percentage channel Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 The functions Motorpoti via digital inputs and Keypad motorpoti control via opera tor panel can be selected at the same time To that end one of the functions must be selected for Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and the other function for Refer ence Frequency Source 2 492 Then the reference value can be changed by both keypad and digital inputs 7 5 3 1 Operation modes of motor potentiometer 474 Operation Mode motorpoti Operation Mode 474 of the functions Motorpoti via digital inputs and Keypad motorpoti defines the behavior of the function at different operating points of the frequency inverter When the drive starts it can accelerate to the last reference value set Upon dataset changeover the set reference value can be taken over each start Factory setting jt tating When started the motor accelerates to the reference
480. tion Mode MFI2 562 is required in the factory setting You only have to set up the required evaluation via parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp 570 7 6 6 10 n T control changeover 164 n T Control Change Over The field orientated control procedures in configurations 410 and 610 contain the functions for speed or torque de pendent control of the drive The changeover can be done in ongoing operation as an additional functionality monitors the transition between the two con trol systems The speed controller or the torque controller is active depending on the n T Control Change Over 164 For information on how to set up the speed controller refer to chapter 7 9 5 3 Speed controller For information on how to set up the torque controller refer to chapter 7 9 5 2 Torque controller _n T Control Change Over 164 7 Off 7 6 6 11 Dataset changeover 70 Data Set Change Over 1 71 Data Set Change Over 2 Parameter values can be stored in four different data sets This enables the use of various parameter values depending on the current operation point of the frequency inverter The changeover between the four data sets is done via the logic signals assigned to the parameters Data Set Change Over 1 70 and Data Set Change Over 2 71 Data Set Change Data Set Change i Over 1 70 Over 2 71 Acie dataset Data set 1 DS1 Data set 2 DS2 Data set 3 DS3 oa Jaa et 4 054 0 contact open 1 contact closed D
481. tion input 2 sessen 178 Torque COMO lsira aa oie 230 Control Application example 00 107 Reference VAlUC cccssseeesssseeeesssaeeeeseaas 92 TOrQue Control eeceeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 82 TRANSDOM T E 20 Travel application Application example 106 Traverse function ccceeeeeeesteeeeeeaneeeeeees 250 Handshake ssssssessssrnsesrnersssnnsennenrnsen 203 Type designation sssssssssrrsrrsereresrrrrrrrnes 24 Parameters Menu PARA 357 vw Bonfiglioli U UL Approval sissisesioirnia nanea 278 USB adaptor ss cvssecseesevtessvcers ceecesceesseve scree 308 User NAMG wisccctiiccttiecteiiecteieceeieeetenseeeieees 110 User WAPING sissisodan 204 V Mff ssesstucveniscentecectsiveandsestenennnt en teneiereneene 111 Character istiC cccceceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 210 LINC AN inansa 211 Quadratic reenen 260 V f characteristic cccccccsscessssessseesseeeesaes 90 V f Starting behaviour 88 VABUS srn nan raya anena 78 Vibration proof SIZE A E T E caeseuscesuresiuseeies 324 SIZED a E 325 SIZE 1S sete wakes a a aE E 326 Voltage controller sssssssssssrrrrrrrrererrsrrnnns 214 Voltage input sssssssssrrssssssssrrnrnrnnerenrsrrnnnnns 49 Ww Warning behavir ceececcseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 135 Warning code Of Warning MASK eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 of warning mask application 195 Warning limit motor I t cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 249 Warning
482. tional shield sheet an EMC conform cabling can be effected Shield sheets for control cables and shield sheets for motor cables are available for each construction size 12 2 1 Shield sheet for control cables With an optional shield sheet the shields of control and communication cables can be connected to PE potential The shield sheet offers three ways of shielding the cables by means of shielding clamp shielding connector or shielding connection clamp Assembly Fix the shield sheet e Remove the lower cover 290 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Safety Options Shield sheets Ww Bonfiglioli Vectron e Loosen the lower screw slightly don t turn out completely e Push the shield sheet from the bottom into the frequency inverter housing completely e Tighten the screw Maximum tightening torque 3 Nm e Fix the lower cover 291 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Options 12 2 1 1 Dimensions 1 50 6 25 17 75 22 75 30 165 C 39 85 i 28 i a 16 14 80 i 14 i 12 i i 6 48 i 0 8 amp 3 2888 28 88 8 8 g o t O N oOo Ff Lee t Tt Oo Om A N e 292 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Shield sheets Options vw Bonfiglioli 12 2 2 Shield sheet for motor cables With an optional shield sheet the shield of the motor cable can be connected to PE potential 12 2 2 1 Size 1 and 2 3 0
483. tions for ex ample As a result the indicated service interval until next service may be too high Service the fan regularly See chapter 10 2 Regular service work The service interval remaining until service parameter Service Interval Fan 1531 can be set to 100 if setting 2 fan is selected for parameter Reset Service Intervals 1539 275 Monitoring of service interval 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x E Bonfiglioli Service 10 3 3 Reset service interval 1539 Reset Service I ntervals The remaining service interval until service in percent can be reset to the initial value via parameter Reset Service Intervals 1539 0 No Action No service interval remaining until service is reset Reset Service Interval The service interval remaining until service of the DC link is reset Parameter Service Interval DC link 1530 indicates 100 again l DCLink _ Reset Service Interval The service interval remaining until service of the fan is reset Pa rameter Service Interval Fan 1531 indicates 100 again 7 Fan 276 Monitoring of service interval Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Technical data vw Bonfiglioli 11 Technical data This chapter contains the technical data of the Agile series 11 1 General technical data CE conformity EMC directive Interference im munity UL Approval Ambient tempera ture Environmental class Degree of protec tion Altitude of installa tion Stora
484. tions on system bus 715 RxPDO2 Word 2 Process data of the system bus Refer to instructions on system bus 2521 PLC Output Percent Output value of a PLC function Refer to application manual PLC age 1 2522 PLC Output Percent Output value of a PLC function Refer to application manual PLC age 2 The limit values and assignment to different limit value sources are data set related in the configurations The use of the data record changeover demands an examination of the parameters in question 105 7 9 5 3 3 Switching over between speed control and torque control Via the signal assigned to parameter n T Control Change Over 164 you can switch between speed control and torque control See chapter 7 6 6 10 n T control changeover 7 9 5 4 Acceleration pre control 725 Operation Mode The acceleration pre control controlled parallel to the speed controller reduces the reaction time of the drive system to a change of reference values The acceleration pre control is active in the speed controlled configurations and can be activated via parameter Operation Mode 725 The control system is not influenced Factory setting 1 Switched on The acceleration pre control is active according to the limit values 236 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control functions Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 726 Minimum Acceleration 727 Mech Time Constant The minimum acceleration time defines t
485. tive equipment regularly Before performing any maintenance work the machine plant must be disconnected from mains supply and secured against restarting The five safety rules must be complied with 2 10 8 Final decommissioning Unless separate return or disposal agreements were made recycle the disassembled frequency in verter components Scrap metal materials Recycle plastic elements Sort and dispose of other component materials Electric scrap electronic components lubricants and other utility materials must be treated as special waste and may only be disposed of by specialized companies DO In any case comply with any applicable national disposal regulations as regards envi ne ronmentally compatible disposal of the frequency inverter For more details contact the competent local authorities 22 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Organizational measures Device overview vw Bonfiglioli 3 Device overview This chapter describes the characteristic of the Agile series 3 1 I nverter type and warning signs on the device e Determine the type of frequency inverter e Verify that the rated input voltage corresponds to the local power supply e Verify that the recommended motor shaft power of the frequency inverter corresponds to the rated power of the motor Type designation AGL 402 05 1 BONFIGLIOLI 47807 Krefeld I 1 VECTRON Germany Rated Recommended 2 NJI A FS ip 400 V 1480 V 80 Sie input vo
486. to a value according to Profibus notation The converter can also be used for other purposes in example when using the internal PLC program ming In F PDP word 1 1370 and In F PDP word 2 1371 convert the Profibus Notation into the internal Frequency 0x4000 in Profibus Notation 100 refers to In F Convert Reference 1374 in Hz In F intern long 1 1372 and In F intern long 2 1373 convert an internal frequency value into Profi bus Notation 0x4000 in Profibus Notation 100 refers to In F Convert Reference 1374 in Hz The Profibus Notation is limited to values from 200 0x8000 to 200 0x7FFF 0x4000 100 In F Convert Reference 1374 Ox7FFF 200 2x In F Convert Reference 1374 0x8000 200 2x In F Convert Reference 1374 0xC000 100 In F Convert Reference 1374 The values converted this way can be used as internal source 774 Out F PDP Conv1 long1 as output of In F PDP word I 1370 Profibus Not gt Frequency 775 Out F PDP Convi long2 as output of In F PDP word 2 1371 Profibus Not gt Frequency 776 Out F PDP Convi word1 as output of In F PDP long 1 1372 Frequency gt Profibus Not 777 Out F PDP Conv2 word2 as output of In F PDP long 2 1373 Frequency gt Profibus Not 256 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Special functions Energy saving w Bonfiglioli 8 Energy saving Energy can be saved in a drive by reducing the losses in the electric motor or by reducing the energy con
487. to be activated via Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior must be selected according to the application The non linear S shaped curve of the ramps is not active in the case of an emer gency stop of the drive No Description Min Max Fact sett Emergency Stop Clockwise 0 01 Hz s 9999 99 Hz s 5 00 Hz s Emergency Stop Anticlockwise 0 01 Hz s 9999 99 Hz s 5 00 Hz s f ON ee eo ee ee Clockwise rotating field Deceleration Clockwise 421 or Emergency Stop Clockwise 424 Acceleration Clockwise 420 Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 or Emergency Stop Anticlockwise 425 Acceleration Anticlockwise 422 Anticlockwise rotating field 148 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Reference Values Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 426 Maximum Leading The parameter Maximum Leading 426 limits the difference between the output of the ramp and the current actual value of the drive The set maximum deviation is a dead time for the control system which should be kept as low as possible In case the drive is loaded heavily and high acceleration and deceleration values are selected it is possible that a set controller limit is reached while the drive is accelerated or decelerated In this case the drive cannot follow the defined acceleration or deceleration ramps With Maximum Leading 426 you can limit the maximum leading of the ramp No Description Min Max Fact sett Maximum Leading 0 01 H
488. trol methods use the two limit values for scaling and calculating the frequency Description X Fact sett Minimum Frequency 0 at Hz oe 7 Hz 3 50 Hz Maximum Frequency 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 50 00 Hz The parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 can only be changed while the output stage is inhibited 719 Slip Frequency The torque forming current component and thus the slip frequency of the 3 phase machine depend on the required torque in the case of the field orientated control methods The field orientated control method also includes the parameter Slip Frequency 719 to limit the torque in the calculation of the machine model The rated slip calculated from the rated motor parameters is limited in accordance with the Slip Frequency 719 which is parameterized as a percentage No Description Fact sett Slip Frequency ae 330 7 5 1 2 Positive and negative reference frequencies 493 Operation Mode reference frequency source Via parameter Operation Mode 493 you can define if the reference frequency value set via parame ters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Frequency Source 2 492 is to be either posi tive or negative only or if it can be both positive and negative You can also output the reference fre quency as an inverted value compared to the selected reference value source The reference frequency channel is switched off The reference frequency is 0 Hz The reference frequency can be
489. troller for 72 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 First commissioning Commissioning W Bonfiglioli different speed ranges Above the Switch Over threshold the parameters Amplification 2 fl gt P738 723 and Integral Time 2 fl gt P738 724 are effective for the speed controller Comply with chapter 7 9 5 3 In different applications the Acceleration Pre Control can enhance additionally the dynamic behavior please comply with the notes in chapter 7 9 5 4 Depending on the application inverter power motor power gear power driven load i and its load the frequency inverter might not be able to supply physically the requested power In this case the dynamic behavior has to be adjusted to the environmental con ditions or the project planning has to be checked 6 2 10 3 Voltage Constant After the Setup was completed including the motor tuning the Voltage constant can be changed manually If the Voltage Constant is not set optimum the result might be a jerky or oscillating behav ior at approx 5 of the rated frequency transition from starting current impression to Field Oriented Control the exact transition point is defined via Frequency limit 624 Proceed with the Optimization of the Voltage Constant as follows e Rotate the motor at approx 50 of the rated speed without load e Check the Actual value Rotor flux 225 e Change the Voltage constant 383 until the Rotor flux 225 equals 101 With Motors with a high pole pa
490. tronic gear Reference value defined via repetition frequency input or system bus Gear factor numerator and denominator can be set separately Gear factor can be scaled during the operation Offset frequencies can be added depending on digital signals The system bus transmission of the repetition frequency value from the master drive to the slave drive is effected via the system bus interface at terminals X12 5 and X12 6 or via an optional communication module CM CAN 7 5 4 2 Operation modes of electronic gear 689 Operation Mode electronic gear Via parameter Operation Mode 6839 for the electronic gear you can determine if the gear factor is to be set permanently or to be scaled via a signal source e g an analog input signal at the slave drive The repetition frequency of the master drive is multiplied by the gear factor Via parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 the output value of the electronic gear must be selected as the source in the reference frequency channel 163 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile E Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions The electronic gear is deactivated Factory setting The repetition frequency value specified via the repetition frequency input P 685 Numera is multiplied by the gear factor This is the reference frequency for the 1 tor P 686 Denom slave drive inator The gear factor is calculated from the values of par
491. ts can be selected via the following parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 Reference Percentage Source 2 494 See chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel Chapter 7 6 6 1 List of control signals contains a table summarizing the available signal sources for parameters Percent Motorpoti Up 72 and Percent Motorpoti Down 73 Addition of reference values If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value via Reference Percentage Source 1 476 plus Reference Percentage Source 2 494 If the value of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 is reached and the other reference value is increased the output value of the motorpoti function is reduced It is reduced so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the maximum reference percentage value If the value of Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is reached and the other reference value is reduced the output value of the motorpoti function is increased It is increased so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the minimum reference percentage value Inthe settings for Operation Mode 495 1 reference value or 3 inverted the point of reversal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function The drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign 159 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile CGO Bonfiglioli
492. ttings monitoring and diagnosis via PC software VPlus Ig A VPlus X21 RJ45 BS RJ45 USB NIH l Adaptor 12 8 Resource pack The frequency inverter can be extended by an optional resource pack memory card Resource pack Capacity 2 GB SPI protocol Parameter copy function Integrated documentation Parameter values of a frequency inverter can be saved on standard digital memory cards and upload ed on another frequency inverter Refer to chapter 7 10 11 Copy parameters Note To use the copy function use the Resource pack offered by Bonfiglioli Vectron Bonfiglioli Vectron doesn t take any responsibility for the malfunctioning of the memory cards of other manufacturers 307 Communication module 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Options 12 9 Assembly variants Assembly variants of the Agile device series Standard included in the scope of supply see chapter 4 2 Installation Feed through This assembly set is not included in delivery Cold Plate This assembly set is not included in delivery Vibration proof This assembly set is not included in delivery DIN rail for size 1 This assembly set is not included in delivery Feed through Cold Plate Vibration proof DIN rail cA LI LIE WB Wg Wo 1 1 1 Mounting plate 2 Mounting plate as external heat sink 3 DIN rail
493. ual valssia nanasa 166 Gear factor sssssssssssssssrrrsenerrrrerrrnnnsnrnne 165 Off SE erinteni iaaa aai 166 Operation Modes s ssssssssssssrsrrrrrrerennens 163 EMG pornn aaa a a 32 Emergency StOD ccceeeeeeee sees eeeeeeeeeeeaeees 148 Enable Status Of INPUtS ceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaaees 268 Energy SAVING cseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaenees 97 258 Energy saving fUNCtION eeeeeeereteeees 258 Error behavior esseere 135 Error environment ersa 333 Error iStores 329 Error message Memory card COPYING sssr 255 Error MESSagES erisnrsissnrirr rnin Innra 330 Of auto SetUD rniii iias 70 Error PrOtOC0l cccccccsseeeeeesseeeeeesaeeeeesaaes 329 Error Warning behaviour Multifunction input 1 sesser 174 Multifunction input 2 0 0 0 180 External CrrOr csssseeecsesseseeseasseeeeennes 137 204 External fan c csssceeccsssseeeesaaeeeeesaaaeeensaaas 192 External power Supply eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 49 F Factory reset Complete reset eceeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeees 113 Factory setting single parameter via keypad seeen 60 Fan exterMal siipiin 192 Switch On Temperature 240 Fan Application example 100 101 103 Feed through SIZ Li A E I T 311 SIZED E E E E E T 312 T E E ies vers tease 314 Feed through assembly 310 Field DUS ernen aaas 98 Field controller ccccsssseeesssseeeeeseeeeeesans 236 Field orientated control Asynchronous Motor eeeeeeeeeeene
494. ue The input percentage value can be selected as frequency value for the reference frequency channel Parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 enables the selection 10 PWM 0 100 11 PWM 100 100 The range 0 100 or 100 100 on the PWM input corresponds to the frequency range 0 Maximum Frequency 419 Input value 100 f Maximum Frequency 419 7 6 7 2 Repetition frequency input Digital input IN2D terminal X11 5 can be used as repetition frequency input For parameter Opera tion Mode IN2D 496 20 RF Single Evaluation or 21 RF Double Evaluation must be selected For definition of reference values the following settings can be selected Reference frequency source 1 475 10 Repetition Frequency Reference frequency source 2 492 10 Repetition Frequency The percentage is referred to Maximum Frequency 419 497 Rep Freq Divider The signal frequency at the selected repetition frequency input can be scaled via parameter Rep Freq Divider 497 The parameter value is comparable to the number of division marks of an encoder per revolution of the drive The frequency limit of digital input IN2D is to be taken into account for the frequency of the input signal Description Min Max Fact sett Rep Freq Divider 1 8192 1024 An inverted evaluation can be set via the reference frequency channel in parameter Operation Mode 493 Se
495. ue MFI2A Fixed Percentage Motorpot via Digital Inputs Keypad Motorpot pO S 10 20 95 2521 PLC Output Percentage 2 2522 Reference percentage value Operation Mode 495 Repetition Percentage Value X Fieldbus Percentage Value Obj 0x6071 Target Torque PLC Output Percentage 1 off I l 0 Reference value I l Zero Analog Value MFI1A Analog Value MFI2A Fixed Percentage Motorpot via Digital Inputs Keypad Motorpot o Repetition Percentage Value 4 Fieldbus Percentage Value Obj 0x6071 Target Torque 23 PLC Output Percentage 1 2521 2522 PLC Output Percentage 2 Start Stop direction of rotation Reference Positive only Percentage limits Percentage Value 229 0 N E Amx 4 o O O Reference O L Yonn N percentage Min Reference Percentage 518 value inverted Max Reference Percentage 519 n T Control Change Over 164 Start clockwise 68 Start anticlockwise 69 ql 3 a Lock the control possibilities of the control panel If the setting possibility of the reference percentage at the operator panel must be locked For parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 the setting 5 Keypad Motorpot must not be selected and for parameter Reference Percentage Source 2 494 the setting 5 Keypad Motorpot must not be selected Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of param
496. ue Point 1 SZ 1 2 Y1 100 X1 2 00 10 V 0 20 V Y1 100 00 50 00 Hz 50 00 Hz 50 Hz 90 Point 2 420ma X2 98 00 10 V 9 80 V Y2 80 00 50 00 Hz 40 00 Hz ov A 0 mA iii The change of direction of rotation is done in this exam ple at an analog input signal of 5 5 V pos neg maxi mum figure AQ E y a EE E E ain ientaniectitiaa X2 98 Y2 80 The definition of the analog input characteristic can be calculated via the two point form of the line equation The speed Y of the drive is controlled ac cording to the analog control signal X Yate thi X1 Y1 X2 X1 Scaling The analog input signal is mapped to the freely configurable characteristic The maximum admissible setting range of the drive can be set via the frequency limits or percentage limits In the case of the parameterization of a bipolar characteristic the set minimum and maximum limits for both directions of rotation are effective The percentage values of the characteristic points are relative to the limits selected Description X Fact sett Minimum Frequency 0 or Hz 7 Hz 3 50 Hz Maximum Frequency 0 00 Hz 999 99 Hz 50 00 Hz The control system uses the maximum value of the output frequency which is calculated from the Maximum Frequency 419 and the compensated slip of the drive mechanism The frequency limits define the speed range of the drive The percentage limits complement the scaling of the analog input c
497. uency inverter can be set to a low frequency value via parameter Frequency Switch off Limit 417 If this frequency limit is exceeded by the Stator frequency 210 or the Actual frequency 241 the frequency inverter is switched off and error signal F1100 is displayed Description Min Max Fact sett rl rrequeng Switch off Limit 0 00 F Hz 999 99 Hz 999 99 Hz Please comply with the descriptions of parameters Minimum frequency 418 and Maximum frequen cy 419 in chapter 7 5 1 1 Limits 7 4 5 External error 535 Operation mode ext error Parameterization of an external error enables switching off or shutting down several frequency invert ers at a time if a fault occurs in the plant or the drive If an error occurs in a frequency inverter the error signal can be transmitted via a bus system and the required reaction can be triggered in another frequency inverter Parameter External error 183 can be assigned the logic signal or digital input signal which is to trigger the external error Via parameter Operation mode ext error 535 the response to an external error can be configured 0 Disabled No response to external errors The drive is switched off and the error message F1454 External Error is 1 Error Switch Off output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External Error 183 is present The drive is stopped at the current deceleration ramp and the error mes Shutdown Error sage F1454 Ext
498. um Frequency Absolute value of reference value from reference percentage 10 Abs Reference Percentage channel Total of Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Refer ence Percentage Source 2 494 Absolute value of reference value from reference percentage Abs Ref Percentage betw channel Minimum Reference Percentage 518 Maximum Ref min Yomax erence Percentage 519 Total of Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 i Abs value of current effective current Iactive 0 0 A Nominal sili tiie TANE frequency inverter current Abs value of flux forming current component 0 0 A Nominal 21 Abs Isd frequency inverter current Abs value of torque forming current component 0 0 A Nomi 11 22 Abs Isq nal frequency inverter current Abs value of current effective power Pactive 0 0 kW Rated Mech Power 376 30 Abs Pactive 31 Abs T Abs value of calculated torque M 0 0 Nm rated torque 32 Abs Inside Temperature Abs value of measured inside temperature 20 C 100 C 33 Abs Heat Sink Tempera Abs value of measured heat sink temperature 20 C 100 C ture 34 Abs Capacitor temperature Abs value of measured capacitor temperature 20 C 100 C 40 Abs Analog Input MFI1A Abs signal value at analog input MFI1A DC 0 0 V 10 0 V 41 Abs Analog Input MFI2A Abs signal value at analog input MFI2A DC 0 0 V 10 0 V
499. um Frequency 418 Blocking frequencies parameters 447 to 449 are not considered Controls via JOG Start 81 and button RUN in JOG menu may be used at the same time If a start command is issued during JOG operation Parameter Start Clockwise 68 or Start Anticlockwise 69 the frequency inverter returns to normal operation mode If the start command is reset the frequency inverter returns to JOG operation again 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel 476 Reference Percentage Source 1 494 Reference Percentage Source 2 The reference percentage channel combines various signal sources for definition of the reference fig ures The percentage scaling facilitates integration into the application and processing of process pa rameters Reference percentages may be used for example for setting reference values for the PID controller technology controller of torques For each of parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 you can select a reference value source The selected reference values are added Percentage value limit settings Parameter Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Refer ence Percentage 519 are considered 151 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile ey Bonfiglioli Parameter descriptions If the same setting is selected for parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 the reference value is not doubled In this case the r
500. unction 7 1 I nverter Data Parameters can be set via the operator panel or the optional PC software VPlus Version 6 0 1 or higher O Serial Number The Serial Number O is entered on the type plate during the production of the frequency inverter Information on the device type and the production data with 8 digit number are displayed In addi tion the serial number is printed on the rating plate Serial Number Q For example 9120801234 serial no 1 Optional modules Modular extension of the hardware is possible via the plug in slot The communication module detect ed by the frequency inverter Parameter Optional module 1 and the corresponding designations are displayed on the operator panel and in the optional control software VPlus after initialization For the parameters which can be set for the communication module refer to the corresponding operating instructions For example CM 485 12 Inverter Software Version The firmware stored in the frequency inverter defines the available parameters and functions of the software The software version is indicated in parameter Inverter Software Version 12 In addition the 9 digit software key is printed on the rating plate of the frequency inverter For example Inverter Software Version 12 6 1 4 On the rating plate Version 6 1 4 Software 152 800 011 15 Copyright c 2012 BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON 16 Power Module Software Version The power module of the frequency inverter fe
501. ure controlled fans automatic switch frequency change 8 4 over energy optimized braking Service Chapter Service inter The time remaining until service of DC link P1530 and fan P1531 10 3 val can be displayed If the time is expired a message in P1533 DC Link P1534 10 3 1 or a warning will be output The reaction Fan P1535 10 3 2 can be set up Test functions Chapter For finding errors and defects at the frequency inverter sensors the load and the electrical connections Earth fault Test for earth fault or short circuit with DC link potential 7 2 3 1 short circuit test Load test Test of IGBTs the load e g for short circuit current measurement 7 2 3 2 and for broken cables Start test With opera Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB 7 2 3 3 tor panel Select menu item Test in Local menu Select test 1 Comply with the instructions in chapter 7 2 3 1 Earth fault and short circuit test Test 1 Then select test 2 With PC Via P1540 select 11 Start Test 1 or 12 Start 7 2 3 4 software Test 2 VPlus Automatic Via P1542 select which test is to be started each time after an error 7 2 3 5 test switch off Kapitel Test of fan The function of the fans is tested Start test With opera Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB 7 2 3 6 tor panel Select menu item Test in Local menu Select Test 3 Press ENT The fans must rotate Press ESC Typical functions 97
502. urs counter on hours in which the output stage of the inverter is 245 Operation hours counter Operating hours of the frequency inverter in which supply volt age is available 246 Capacitor temperature Measured capacitor temperature Warning or shutdown if tem perature is too high According to Data set change Over 1 70 and Data set change 209 ACUE daia pe Over 2 71 of the data set currently used Status of digital inputs in decimally encoded form of enable signal STOA AND STOB of the six digital inputs of multifunction input 1 in setting Operation mode MFTI 452 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP ac 250 Digital inputs tive 24 V of multifunction input 2 in setting Operation mode MFI2 562 3 digital NPN active 0 V or 4 digital PNP ac tive 24 V of digital input output terminal X11 6 in setting Operation mode terminal X11 6 558 0 input IN3D Input signal at multifunction input 1 Via parameter Operation 251 Analog input MFI1A mode MFII 452 multifunction input 1 must be set up as a voltage or current input 265 Actual values of frequency inverter 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile E Bonfiglioli Actual values No Description Function Signal on repetition frequency input according to Operation mode IN2D 496 Input signal at multifunction input 2 Via parameter Operation 253 Analog input MFI2A mode MFI2 562 multifunction input 2 must
503. us and warning status application 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO Bonfiglioli Operational and error diagnosis 273 Application Warnings 367 Application warning status Parameter Application Warnings 273 displays the current warning Parameter Application warning status 367 displays the warning at failure switch off Meaning of code displayed by parameters Application Warnings 273 and Application Warning State 367 NO WARNING _ No warning message present Warning V belt by Operation Mode 581 Service of DC link or fan required The time remaining until next ser vice has expired At least for one of the parameters Operation Mode Service Interval DC link 1534 or Operation Mode Service Interval Fan 1535 the setting 2 Warning is selected SERVICE Service of DC link required The value of Service Interval DC link 1530 has reached the value 0 Service of fan required The value of Service Interval Fan 1531 has reached the value 0 The signal set on digital input User Warning 1 1363 is active The signal set on digital input User Warning 2 1364 is active Output signals Application Warnings are signaled via digital signals 1 216 Warning application zy Signal if a message is output Application Warnings 273 DFor linking to frequency inverter functions For output via a digital output Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531 532 533 554 See chapter 7 6 5 D
504. utputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli 7 6 6 15 External error 183 External Error Parameterization of an external error enables switching off or shutting down several frequency invert ers at a time if a fault occurs in the plant or the drive If an error occurs in a frequency inverter the error signal can be transmitted via a bus system and the required reaction can be triggered in another frequency inverter The logic signal or digital input signal which is to trigger the external error can be assigned to parameter External Error 183 Via parameter Op Mode ext Error 535 the response to an external error can be configured See chapter 7 4 5 External error 0 Disabled No response to external errors Factory setting The drive is switched off and the error message F1454 External Error is Error Switch Off output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External Error 183 is present The drive is stopped at the current deceleration ramp and the error mes Shutdown Error sage F1454 External Error is output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External Error 183 is present The drive is stopped at the set emergency stop ramp and the error mes sage F1454 External Error is output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External Error 183 is present Emergency Stop Error External Error 183 7 Off For setting up external warnings parameters
505. vailable independent of the setting of parameter Lo cal Remote 412 1 The commands Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise have a higher priority than the start of the function JOG Operator panel 59 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile x E Bonfiglioli Commissioning 6 1 3 Set a parameter to the factory setting Select the parameter number in menu Para Confirm by pressing ENT Press simultaneously The parameter shows now the value of the factory setting END Press ENT to confirm this value as the new value for the parameter 6 1 4 Restrict the scope of operation The scope of operation can be restricted Lock the functions start stop and change direction of rotation at the operator panel Refer to chapter 7 5 3 4 1 Control via reference frequency channel Lock the setting of the reference frequency Refer to chapter 7 5 1 Reference frequency channel Lock the setting of the reference percentage Refer to chapter 7 5 2 Reference percentage channel 6 2 First commissioning During commissioning with Setup Full a control method according to V f characteristic or field orientated control and the connected motor type asynchronous or synchronous motor can be se lected The motor data must be entered according to the motor type plate Further motor data is measured automatically The prompt of basic parameter entries like maximum frequency or accelera tion is displayed After Setup the drive is
506. value via parameters Analog factor at 100 687 and Analog factor at 0 688 e Set the Gear Factor Denominator 686 to the required value e Set multifunction input MFI1 as an analog voltage input by adjusting Operation Mode MFII 452 to 1 Voltage 0 10 V e For the Reference Percentage Source 1 476 select operation mode 1 Analog Value MFI1A In this example the default settings for Analog factor at 100 687 and Analog factor at 0 688 an adjusted gear factor denominator of 2 and a reference percentage of 75 will result in a gear factor numerator of 1 1 and a reference frequency for the Slave of 10 Hz 1 1 2 5 5 Hz Analog Factor at 100 687 1 2 fervsssssssscscsscsssesssesseeseessesessseseesseseesenseesenteny i Ae e E RS Analog Factor at 0 688 0 8 0 75 100 Actual value Reference Percentage Value 229 7 5 4 4 Offset Via the parameters Reference Frequency Source 2 492 you can select frequencies as an offset which are added to the reference frequency Adding a fixed frequency to the reference frequency e Set parameter Reference Frequency Source 2 492 to 3 Fixed Frequency e In one of parameters 480 488 fixed frequencies set a frequency value e Select the fixed frequency of the set parameter via parameters 66 67 and 131 fixed frequency changeover See chapter 7 5 1 3 Fixed frequencies The frequency for the offset can be set via the operator panel if Reference Frequency Source 2
507. values exceed 100 motor 120 stator the drive switches off with fault F0401 in the active dataset Both incidences are triggered from the active dataset 62 I2t Single Motor The I2t capacity of the motor is monitored with rat Warning and Error Switch Off ed values from the active dataset If the Warning Limit Motor Ft 615 is reached the warning message A0200 is signaled from the ac tive data set If the fixed threshold values exceed 100 motor 120 stator the drive switches off with fault F0401 in the active dataset Both incidences are triggered from the active dataset 608 Thermal time constant motor 609 Thermal time constant rotor 615 Warning limit motor It The thermal time constant of the motor is in the range from few minutes to a couple of hours This motor specific parameter is set via 7hermal time constant motor 608 Substantially smaller is the thermal stator time constant To protect the stator winding additional mon itoring is required which is determined by Thermal time constant stator 609 These values can be taken from the corresponding motor data sheets When estimated time constants are used because the required data are not available then an optimal thermal motor protection cannot be guaranteed A warning limit allows the user to prevent an imminent I2t fault trip through appropriate measures Warning limit motor Ft 615 is used to set the warning signal between 6 and 100 of thermal ca
508. ved via a communication interface Control be P444 proportional component amplification P445 integral component 7 9 3 haviour integral time P446 differential component derivative time Start P68 71 IN1D or P69 72 IN2D 7 6 6 2 Operating Instructions Agile 94 06 2013 Typical functions Commissioning w Bonfiglioli Electronic gear Factory setting Chapter Synchronization of drives Reference Set P496 to 20 repetition frequency single evaluation or 21 Rep 7 6 7 value for etition frequency double evaluation IN2D X11 5 is the frequency slave drive input Set P497 typically identical to P556 of the master drive 7 6 7 2 Switch on Set P475 or P492 to 40 electr gear 7 5 1 Gear factor Fixed Set P689 to 1 P 685 Numerator P 686 Denomina 7 5 4 3 1 tor Set P685 and P686 Variable Set P689 to 2 Analog Numerator P 686 Denominator 7 5 4 3 2 or 3 P 685 Numerator Analog Denominator Set the range via P687 and P688 For P476 or P494 select a signal source Via the signal 7 5 2 source the gear factor can be changed during operation Master drive Output MFO1 Set P550 to 20 Repetition Frequency MFO1F 7 6 3 For P555 select a frequency source 1 Actual Frequency Via P556 set the output frequency Positioning _ Chapter P458 to 1 Reference positioning The reference point is detected via 7 3 7 digital input IN
509. verter to specific applications as well as the wide range of additional functions are described in detail Application manual The application manual supplements the documentation for purposeful installation and commissioning of the frequency inverter Information on various subjects connected with the use of the frequency inverter is described specific to the application Installation instructions The installation manual describes the installation and use of devices complementing the Quick Start Guide and the user manual The following instructions are available for the Agile series Operating Instructions Agile Functions of the frequency inverter Quick Start Guide Agile Installation and commissioning Delivered with the device Application manual Func Description of the Functions and usage of the integrated Functional tional Safety Safety Application manuals Communication via the RS485 interface at terminal X21 Communication Manuals Modbus and VABus Communication via the control terminals X12 5 and X12 6 system bus and CANopen CM 232 CM 485 Manuals Modbus and VABus CM CAN Manuals system bus and CANopen CM PDPV1 Manual Profibus DP V1 CM VABus TCP Manual for Ethernet Module CM VABus TCP i P CM ModbusTCP Manual for Ethernet Module CM Modbus TCP i P CM EtherCAT Manual for Ethernet Module CM EtherCAT i P CM ProfiNet Manual for Ethernet Module CM ProfiNet i P CM EtherNet I
510. wing selection limits the number of visible and adjustable param eters Easy For elementary applications and quick commissioning Setting options for about 40 50 parameters dependent on Configuration 30 Std For standard applications Setting options for about 180 parameters Pro For higher requirements Setting options for about 380 parameters The limitation of the number of parameters can also be set via parameter Control lev el 28 All actual values are displayed independent of the control level Local Control the motor by means of the operator panel Poti F Set output frequency drive speed PotiP Set percentage values For example in torque control or PID control Jog Keep pressed RUN key The drive operates with fixed set frequency Test For finding errors and defects at the frequency inverter sensors the load and the electrical connections Setup Guided commissioning Select control method and motor type Enter motor data Guided commissioning also for the available communication interfaces Full For first commissioning Entry and measurement of motor data Motor Only motor data measurement Buscon For commissioning of a communication interface Copy Copy parameters by means of a memory card 52 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Operator panel Commissioning Motor st d drive enabled Motor stopped drive not enabled st OP Warning
511. witched off In the other operation modes of the stop behavior the control of the brake is possible At the start of a free coasting of the drive the digital output is switched off This is similar to the behavior in the case of stopping behavior with shutdown The drive is de celerated and supplied with current for the set holding time Within the set holding time the con trol output is switched off and thus the brake activated Stopping behavior Operation mode 41 Open brake switches off the digital output as 0 signed to the function immediately The mechanical brake is activated Stopping behavior Operation mode 41 Open brake switches off the digital output as OPRIM Denavio signed to the function when the Switch off threshold stop function 637 1 4 i i is reached The mechanical brake is activated Operation mode 41 Open brake leaves the digital output assigned to 2 5 the function switched on The mechanical brake remains open Stopping behavior Operation mode 41 Open brake switches off the digital output as 7 signed to the function when the Braking time 632 has elapsed The mechanical brake is activated 7 6 5 6 Current limitation Operation modes 15 to 19 link the digital outputs and the relay output to the functions of the intelli gent current limits The reduction of power by the set figure in percent of the rated current depends on the selected operation mode Accord ingly the event for intervention of the curre
512. wn Threshold 675 32 Activate Warning Controller Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active ac Mains Failure cording to Operation Mode 670 for the voltage controller Activate Warning Controller The DC link voltage has exceeded the Reference DC Link 33 ae ane Udc Limitation Limitation 680 Activate Warning Controller The Dyn Voltage Pre Control 605 accelerates the control 34 oti Voltage Pre Control characteristics 35 oo Warning canoer The output current is limited 36 Activate Warning Controller The output power or the torque is limited by the speed con Torque Limitation troller Activate Warning Controller Switch over of field orientated control between speed and 37 Torque Control torque controlled control method 38 Activate Warning Ramp Stop The Operation Mode 620 selected in starting be havior limits the output current 193 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile 2o B o nfi gli oli Parameter descriptions Activate Warning Contr In Overload limit of the long term Ixt 60 s reached intelligent 39 f nay tel Curr Lim LT Ixt current limits active 40 Activate Warning Contr In Overload limit of the short term Ixt 1 s reached intelligent tel Curr Lim ST Ixt current limits active Activate Warning Contr In Max heat sink temperature T reached Operation Mode 573 41 cap aps tel Curr Lim Tc for intelligent current limits active 42
513. xPDO of the system bus or OUT PZDx of Profibus On the output of the demultiplexer the logic signals 910 Output DeMux Bit 0 to 925 Output DeMux Bit15 are available e g for control of PLC functions 9 Zero 704 727 RxPDO Word 740 741 Remote control word remote state word 754 757 OUT PZD word 900 Controller status 927 Output MUX 910 925 Output DeMux Bit 0 output DeMux Bit 15 206 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 Control inputs and outputs Parameter descriptions vw Bonfiglioli Example Transfer of a user defined status word from a slave to a master via system bus or Profibus parameterization of multiplexer and demultiplexer using PC application VTable in VPlus User defined Status word VTable 927 MUX Output lt 15 14 3 2110 Multiplexer PR KA Parameter Index Assign signal sources Systembus TxPDO1 Word 950 Mux input 1252 1 lt 160 Standby message Transmitter Profibus PZD3_IN Word 1302 Mux input 1252 2 lt 163 Reference frequency reached Mux input 1252 3 lt 169 General warning Mux input 1252 4 lt 162 Error signal Systembus Further Further signal sources Profibus Systembus 704 RxPDO1 Word1 Profibus 754 OUT PZD3 Word DeMux Pa 1253 15 4 3 2 1 0 Demultiplexer Signal sources 910 Output DeMux Bit 0 Standby message 911 Output DeMux Bit 1 Reference frequency reached gt 912 Output DeMux Bit 2 General warni
514. y DS4 parameter values already set are maintained 797 Setup Status The individual steps of the auto set up routine can be monitored and checked via parameter SETUP Status 797 The setup routine via the communication interface continuously updates the status pa rameter which can be read out via the interface Message Meaning OE The parameter identification demands enable on digital input STOA and STO STOB aad idSaninice The rated motor values are checked by the parameter identification feature 30 43 Setup already active The setup routine via the operator panel is being carried out No Release No enable signal The parameter identification demands enable on digital input STOA and STOB Error during the auto set up routine Warning Phase Asym The parameter identification feature diagnosed an unbalance during the metry measurements in the three motor phases Setup not carried out The setup is not carried out until now If a warning message is output or an error occurs during Setup refer to chapter 6 2 5 Warnings dur ing commissioning 109 Set up via the Communication Interface 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions 7 Parameter descriptions This chapter contains the parameter descriptions Please note that some parameters are described more in detail in additional documentations These are the parameters of the communication interfac es and the PLC f
515. y P418 and Maximum Frequency P419 86 Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 After first commissioning Commissioning w Bonfiglioli Repetition frequency input A frequency signal at input IN2D X11 5 can be used as reference value Evaluation P496 20 RF Repetition frequency single evaluation One signal edge 21 RF Repetition frequency double evaluation Both signal edges P497 Divider for scaling P475 or P492 10 Repetition Frequency Input The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency P418 and Maximum Frequency P419 Pulse train input A pulse train signal at input IN2D X11 5 can be used for specification of the reference value The frequency of the pulse train signal on the input can be modified via a scal ing factor Factory setting P496 30 Pulse train ferea HZ P654 scaling frequency P419 50 P654 25000 P475 or P492 10 Repetition T frequency T P476 or P494 10 Repetition percentage 25000 fa HZ P654 The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency P418 and Maximum Frequency P419 87 After first commissioning 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Co Bonfiglioli Commissioning Starting behaviour V f P620 P623 P624 P780 P781 by P780 Factory setting if P30 110 IM sensor less control SLC V f characteristic The motor is magnetized flux formation P781 and if selected a s
516. y card MMC Chapter 7 10 11 and 12 8 Communication interface X21 Separate instructions on VABus or Mod bus Port for one of the optional communication modules see Separate instructions on the protocols previous chapter for list 3 5 Number of control terminals 4 digital inputs 1 input for external voltage supply DC 24 V 2 digital inputs for enable 1 reference voltage output DC 10 V 1 digital input output 1 voltage output DC 24 V 2 multifunction inputs digital analog input 1 relay output potential free 1 digital output Control terminals for system bus or protocol 1 multifunction output digital analog frequency CANopen 1 The products for CANopen communication comply with the specifications of the user organization CiA CAN in Automation 2 Install an interface adapter for connection of a PC This enables configuration and monitoring using the PC software VPlus Operating Instructions Agile 06 2013 26 Overview of components and connection terminals Mechanical Installation Bonfiglioli Vectron 4 Mechanical Installation The frequency inverters of degree of protection IP20 are designed as a standard for installation in electrical cabinets During installation both the installation and the safety instructions as well as the device specifications must be complied with 4 1 Safety may work on the devices During assembly make sure that no foreign par
517. y in a way i e via the frequency reference value that the actual val ue Modulation 223 80 90 Reference Modulation 750 e Now change the Flux Reference Value 717 from 100 to 90 Oscillograph the actuating variable Ig The course of the signal of the flux forming current Isa should reach the stationary value after overshooting without oscillation 237 Control functions 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile Lo B onfi gli oli Parameter descriptions e Change the parameters Amplification 741 and Integral Time 742 according to the applica tion requirements e Change the Flux Reference Value 717 back to 100 und repeat the flux reference step while you can analyze the changes with the oscillograph Repeat these steps if necessary If a quick transition into field weakening is necessary for the application the integral time should be reduced Increase the Amplification 741 in order to achieve a good dynamism of the controller An increased overshoot is necessary for a good control behavior in controlling of a load with low pass behavior e g an asynchronous motor 7 9 5 5 1 Limitation of field controller 743 Ref I sd Upper Limit 744 Ref I sd Lower Limit The output signal of the field controller the integrating and proportional components are limited via parameters Ref Isd Upper Limit 743 and Ref Isd Lower Limit 744 The guided commissioning set up in Configuration 30 410 set parameter Ref Isd Upper Limit 743 accordi
518. y limit of fmax 150 kHz may not be exceeded in the calculation of the parameter RF Division marks 556 150000 Hz Reference frequency value Smax Pulse train output A pulse train signal pulse sequence can be output as a master frequency If the multifunction output is to be used as a pulse train output parameter Operation Mode MFO1 X13 6 550 must be set to 30 Pulse Train PT MFO1F Operation mode MFO1 X13 6 550 10 Analog PWM MFO1A 30 Pulse Train PT MFO1F 557 PT Scaling Frequency pulse train Parameter PT Scaling Frequency 557 indicates which frequency the multifunction output outputs at 100 maximum frequency Thus the scaling also depends on the setting of parameter Maximum frequency 419 Description Min Max Fact sett PT Scaling Frequency 0 32000 25000 If parameter PT Scaling Frequency 557 is set to zero the frequency value at the multifunction out put will not be scaled The output value is limited to the value 2 x Maximum Frequency 419 Example Reference value 50 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 100 Hz PT Scaling Frequency 557 Output frequency Hz 0 50 1 0 5 10 5 100 50 1000 500 Example Reference value 25 Hz Maximum Frequency 419 50 Hz PT Scaling Frequency 557 Output frequency Hz 0 25 1000 500 185 Control inputs and outputs 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile BO B onfi glioli Parameter descriptions 7 6 4 Digita
519. y stop deceleration As soon as the drive is at a standstill the inverter is disabled after a after a hold ing time The holding time can be set via the parameter Holding time stop function 638 Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied as from standstill The drive is brought to a standstill at the emergency stop deceleration and remains permanently supplied with current Emergency stop and Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting hold sb is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied as from standstill Stopping behavior 4 Emergency stop and Switch off Stopping behavior 5 Direct current braking is activated immediately In this process the direct Stopping behavior 7 current set with parameter Braking current 631 is impressed for the Braking time 632 DC brake Comply with the notes in chapter 7 3 6 Direct current brake Only available in the configuration 110 V f control Comply with chapter 7 6 5 5 Release brake on addressing mechanical brakes When a synchronous motor is connected BONFIGLIOLI recommends setting Operation mode 630 22 637 Switch Off Threshold Stop Function The Switch Off Threshold Stop Function 637 defines the frequency as from which a stand still of the drive is recognized This percentage parameter value is relative to the set Maximum frequency 419 The switch
520. y the motor protection correctly for short mains failures or short shut downs of the application In settings 101 102 111 and 112 of Operation Mode 571 the same values should be set in all data sets 572 Frequency Limit The motor protection especially of self ventilated motors is improved by an adjustable frequency limit Percentage reference is the rated frequency No Description Min Max Fact sett o xX Frequency Limit 300 In calculation the tripping time the measured output current in operating points below the frequency limit is evaluated by a factor between 1 and 2 The determination of this factor is a function of the sta tor frequency The increased thermal load of self ventilated motors in the lower speed range is there fore considered The table shows in extracts factors for motor rated frequency 50Hz mM Frequengy limit 572 300 200 150 100 80 60 40 20 10 0 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 5 188 182 177 168 162 153 139 114 100 10 177 168 160 147 139 129 114 100 100 20 160 147 137 122 114 106 100 100 100 30 147 132 122 109 103 100 100 100 100 50 129 114 106 100 100 100 100 100 100 Stator frequency Hz 100 106 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
521. z 440 Operation mode actual value failure 1 active fixed frequency 1 441 Max I component 50 Hz 442 Maximum frequency 53 Hz 443 Minimum frequency 0 Hz 444 Amplification 1 445 Integral time 1000 ms 446 Derivative time 0 ms 447 1st Blocking frequency 0 Hz 449 Frequency Hysteresis 0 Hz 475 Reference frequency source 1 30 Technology Controller PID controller 476 Reference percentage source 1 2 Analog Value MFI2A 478 Actual percentage source 1 Analog Value MFI1A Fixed frequency 1 in case of actual 0 Hz 480 value failure 492 Reference frequency source 2 0 zero 493 Operation mode reference frequency source 1 reference 494 Reference percentage source 2 0 zero 495 Operation mode reference percentage 2 positive only source 606 Type V f characteristic 2 quadratic 618 Backlash 0 630 Operation mode P68 amp P69 1 0 Coast to Stop Coast to Stop P68 amp P69 0 stopping behavior 651 Operation mode auto start 0 Off 1550 Operation mode energy saving function Automatic 1552 Energy saving function on 163 Reference Frequency reached 68 Start Clockwise 71 IN1D 69 Start Anticlockwise 72 IN2D Operation mode OUT1D X13 5 digital 2 Run signal 531 output 532 Operation mode OUT2D X10 relay 103 Inv error signal Applications 101 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile QO Bo
522. z 999 99 Hz 5 00 Hz Example Frequency at ramp output 20 Hz current actual value of drive 15 Hz selected Maxi mum Leading 426 5 Hz The frequency at the ramp output is increased to 20 Hz only it is not increased further The differ ence leading between the frequency value at the ramp output and the current actual frequency of the drive is limited to 5 Hz in this way 430 Ramp Rise Time The load occurring in a linear acceleration of the drive is reduced by the adjustable modification speed S curve Via the S curve the drive can be accelerated and decelerated more uniformly and load peaks upon the start of the acceleration and deceleration can be avoided The non linear curve of the frequency indicates states the time range in which the frequency is to be guided to the set ramp Set ting the ramp rise time increases the acceleration and deceleration times The value set for the Ramp Rise Time 430 is effective for acceleration and deceleration clockwise and anticlockwise operation If the ramp time is set to 0 ms the S curve is deactivated No Description Min Max Fact sett Ramp Rise Time 0 ms 10000 ms Ramp Rise Time 430 Output frequency Hz Clockwise rotating field Acceleration t Acceleration S curve Anticlockwise rotating field Ramp Rise Time 430 Ramp rise time 430 0 ms 149 Reference Values 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile WO B onfi glioli Paramete
523. ze 1 3 0 18 kW to 2 2 kW 1 0 09 KW to 1 1 KW sssssssssssssrsrrrrnsrsssssrnnnnnrnenenrsnnna 28 4 2 2 Size 2 3 3 0 kW to 5 5 kW 1 1 5 KW to 2 2 KW sssssssssssssssssrsnrrrrnssrrrrnsnrrnrennrenns 29 4 2 3 Size 3 5 5 KW to 11 0 KW ecccisasscsisscesacenaisawsiesazenzs cea di caee tered xeanenteeb ad SAn AVERS 30 5 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 31 5 1 Safety a a E E E E 31 5 2 Electrical connections OVervieW ssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn na 32 5 3 EMC Information cscccccsseccsnsscnnseenneeecnnseeneeeeeneseeneeeeeneseenensseenessenaseenesseneeeeneeeeesesnes 32 5 4 Dimensioning of conductor CroSS SCCtiON 1 cececeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeneaeeeeeneaseesenoaaeeeenneaeenees 34 5 4 1 Typical CroSS S CtIONS ccseceeeeseeeee seen eens seen eens ses ee Eee ee DE Eee AEE e ESAS SSeS asa ee ee saan eee 35 5 5 Mains COMNe ction cccscccsssccsnsscneseeceesecnnseeneneeeneeeeneeeeeeeseeneeaseenssenaeeenseeeneeeeneaeeeneenes 36 5 6 Motor Connection ccssccssssccsesscccseeeeeseenneseneeeeennseeeeseeceeseeneeseensseneseeeasseneseeneaeessesnes 38 5 6 1 Length of motor cables without filter c ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaaaeeeeeeeeseeeaeaaaaes 39 5 6 2 Motor cable length with output filter du dt cceeeeceeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeesaaaeeeeeasaeeessasaaeeesees 40 5 6 3 Motor cable length with sinus filter ec cece
524. ze 2 Installation measure Agile 2 Without EMC input filter without line choke Class C3 Without EMC input filter with line choke 10 A Class C3 With footprint filter FS28364 10 44 Class C1 With footprint filter FS28364 10 44 and line choke 10 A upstream on Class C1 mains input side With booktype filter FTVO016A Class C1 With booktype filter FTV016A and line choke 10 A upstream on mains Class C1 input side 303 Input filter 06 2013 Operating Instructions Agile GS Bonfiglioli Options Interference suppression class Agi e size 3 AGL 402 19 5 5 kW AGL 402 21 7 5 kW Installation measure Agile 3 AGL402 19 5 5 kW AGL402 21 7 5 kW Without EMC input filter without line choke z Without EMC input filter with line choke 15 A or 25 A Class C3 With footprint filter FTV003B AGL Class C1 With footprint filter FTV003B AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on Class C1 mains input side With booktype filter FTVO16A Class C1 With booktype filter FTV016A and line choke 15 A upstream on mains Class C1 input side Interference suppression class Agi e size 3 AGL 402 22 9 2 kW Installation measure Agile 3 Without EMC input filter without line choke AGL402 22 9 2 kW Without EMC input filter with line choke 15 A or 25 A Class C3 With footprint filter FTV003B AGL Class C1 With footprint filter FTVOO3B AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on Class C1 mains input side With booktype filter FT

Cod. vec671 r3

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents